Contract number: SP-GG-161

Part B: Electrical Specifications

and Bill of Quantities

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
DINOSAUR EXHIBITION CENTRE ELECTRICAL, ACCES CONTROL AND FIRE
DETECTION SPECIFICATION
SECTION A - ELECTRICAL GENERAL WORKS SPECIFICATIONS

1. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

GENERAL

This document forms part of the Provisional Bills of Quantities for the new construction of the Dinosaur
Centre at the Golden Gate National Park.
The electrical drawings for each of the above mentioned new construction of the Dinosaur Centre at
the Golden Gate National Park are attached to the Specification Document and must be read in
conjunction with the Specification Document and the Bill of Quantities.
Any deviations from the drawings or equipment specified shall be listed together with alternatives offered in a
covering letter.
If no deviations are listed, it will be assumed that the Tenderer complies fully with all the relevant technical
parts of this portion of the document.

This work shall be carried out as a domestic sub-contract to the main contract. Any references in this part of
the document to “contractor” or “electrical contractor” shall be deemed to mean the main contractor including
his domestic electrical sub-contractor.
Notice must be taken that this contract is a fix priced contract.

2. SCOPE OF WORKS

This contract is for the fabrication, delivery on site, erection, testing, commissioning, maintenance for 12
months and insurance against lightning, flood and other damage as may be specified for the following work
in the works:
 200kVA Emergency Power Diesel-Generator set c/w a 500 litre bulk diesel tank.
 Main Low Voltage Distribution Board in the Plant Room
 Sub distribution boards.
 LV Cable supplies and installation
 Light fitting installation external and internal.
 Switches, socket outlets and isolators.
 Power skirting.
 Cable trays, wiring channels and wire mesh cable trays.
 Access Control systems.
 UPS systems.

 Fire detection system.

 Area lighting.
 Electrical supply for HVAC systems.

 Earthing systems and additional earthing as may be required by the Engineer.

 Core Drilling beneath existing road
 Testing of the works together with the Engineer.

1
 Danger signs and notices in terms of OHS Act.
 Limited maintenance for 12 months for the additional work

 Submission of 3 sets of “As Built" information, operational- and maintenance manuals for the
additional work.
These aspects should be seen only as a brief summary of the scope of the work and not as a complete
record. Quantities and volume of work shall also be read or obtained from the drawings and the rest of the
specification.
This General Requirements and Detail Specifications specifies the standard of workmanship and quality of
material for the installation, the scope of which is specified on the Drawings and listed in the Schedules and,
where applicable, in the Pricing Schedule.
Where supplemented later, Schedules, Bills of Quantities (where applicable) and Drawings with further
specific requirements applicable to specific types of equipment or installations, the latter specification shall
take precedence over this General Specification.
Upon receiving a set of documents, Bidders must make sure that all pages are included; in the correct
numerical order as per the CONTENTS and that typical drawings are attached. Design and construction
drawings shall be issued after the appointment of the Bidder. Should this not be the case it should
immediately be brought to the attention of the Engineer for rectification.
The Electrical Contractor shall be appointed in terms of the Main Contractor’s Conditions of Contract or
Sub-contract, as applicable.
This Contract covers the supply, delivery, off-loading, storage, installation, testing, commissioning, and
handing over in proper working order of the complete services installation as specified and in all the
constituent parts of this set of documents. All equipment provided by the Contractor shall be new.

3. CONSTRUCTION PROGRAMME

The electrical installation shall be executed in line with the main contract programme.
It is the responsibility of the contractor to place his orders for material and equipment timeously. The
contractor will be held responsible for any delays whatsoever.
The main contract programme shall indicate critical paths/dates, sequence of events, material ordering
times, main and/or other (sub) contractor’s work completion dates, etc.

4. NOTICES AND FEES

The successful Bidder for this Contract shall, immediately after they have been officially notified that their bid
has been accepted, and at any time thereafter as may be necessary, notify all the relevant authorities, pay
fees including inspection and re-inspection fees and take any other steps which may be required or
prescribed to execute the installation as specified.
The Contractor shall issue all notices and make the necessary arrangements with the Local Supply Authority
and also other necessary authorities or service providers as may be required with respect to the installation.
Copies of such correspondence with the relevant authorities shall be forwarded to the Engineer who shall at
all times be kept informed. Submission of copies to the Engineer to keep him informed does not relieve the
Contractor of his responsibilities in terms of the contract.
The Electrical Contractor will pay the connection fee payable to the Local Electricity Supply Authority for the
permanent electrical supply/connection for the installation and the Employer upon presentation of the receipt
will reimburse him if applicable.

2
5. CAMP ESTABLISHMENT, POWER SUPPLY AND OTHER SERVICES

The Contractor is to make his own arrangements concerning the supply of electrical power and all other
services. No direct payment will be made for the provision of electrical and other services. The cost thereof
is deemed to be included in the rates and amounts bidded for the various items of work for which these
services are required.
The requirements of the relevant regional project Engineer with regard to the site for the Contractor’s camp
and for accommodation for his labourers shall be specified in this clause. Alternatively it may be specified
that the Contractor himself shall provide a suitable site for his camp and for accommodating his labourers.

6. MANAGEMENT OF THE ENVIRONMENT

The Contractor will be responsible for construction according to an environmental management plan in terms
of Principal Contract Environmental Management Plan provided by the Main Contractor.
The Contractor must take the utmost care to minimise the impact of his establishment and other construction
activities on the environment and must adhere to the requirements as set out in the Principal Contract.
Where the Contractor fails to adhere to these requirements the specifications in the Principal Contract
provide the methodology and cost liability of remedy.

7. TRAFFIC

The Contractor is to comply with all relevant specifications pertaining to safety and accommodation to traffic
and pedestrians.

8. REQUIREMENTS OF THE OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT AND REGULATIONS

Contractor is to comply with the Occupational Health and Safety plan and requirements of the contract
document and the requirements of SanParks in accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act and
Regulations.

9. CHANGES TO SCOPE OF WORK

It is a condition of this contract that the employer reserves the right to limit the total expenditure on the Works
due to possible budget constraints. Should the bid sum exceed the budgeted amount, the scope of the
works may be reduced at any time before or during the contract period to ensure that the final contract
amount does not exceed the budgeted amount.

10. REGULATIONS

The installation shall be erected and tested in accordance with the following Acts and regulations that will be
regarded as standards to be adhered to:
a) The latest issue of SANS 10142-1: “Code of Practice for the Wiring of Premises-Part 1: Low
Voltage Installations”,
b) The Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1993 (Act 85 of 1993) as amended,
c) The Local Government Ordinance 1939 (Ordinance 17 of 1939) as amended and the municipal by-laws
and any special requirements of the local supply authority,
d) The Fire Brigade Services Act 1993, Act 99 of 1987 as amend,
e) The National Building Regulations and Building Standards Act 1977 (Act 103 of 1977) as emended,
f) Electrical Installation Regulations of 1992 promulgated under section 35 of the Machinery and
Occupational Safety Act of 1983 (Act No. 6 of 1983)
g) The Post Office Act 1958 (Act 44 of 1958) as amended,
3
h) The Electricity Act 1984 (Act 41 of 1984) as amended,
It shall be assumed that the Contractor is conversant with the above-mentioned requirements. Should any
requirement, by-law or regulation, which contradicts the requirements of this Document, apply or become
applicable during erection of the Installation, such requirement, by-law or regulation shall overrule this
Document and the Contractor shall immediately inform the Engineer of such a contradiction. Under no
circumstances shall the Contractor carry out any variations to the installation in terms of such contradictions
without obtaining the written permission to do so from the Engineer.
No claims for extras in respect of failure by the Contractor to comply with any of the above regulations will be
considered. Where conflict exists between any of the above regulations and the specifications, the said
conflict must be referred to the Engineer in writing for his ruling in writing.

11. SAFETY REGULATIONS

Both the “Factory, Machinery and Building Work Act (Act 22 of 1941) and the “Machinery and Occupational
Safety Act (Act 6 of 1983)” must, wherever they appear in the SANS 1200 standardised specifications, be
submitted by the “Occupational Health and Safety Act (Act 85 of 1993)”.
The Contractor shall apply suitable proven methods for construction so that his activities will not constitute a
hazard to the public or any adjacent property. All excavations shall be suitable safeguarded and barricaded
especially during night-time, weekends or holidays and any other day of inactivity by the Contractor. The
Contractor shall also ensure that excavations are shored or otherwise made safe. No additional payment will
be made to the Contractor for complying with these requirements.
The Contractor shall also comply with the Occupational Health and Safety specifications of the Main
Contractor.

12. ASPECTS THAT NEED SPECIAL ATTENTION

As the project progresses the Contractor must indicate on his drawings any deviation that has occurred. The
exact position of equipment must be shown on the Contractor’s “as built” drawings.
The completion certificates shall only be issued when the completed “as built” drawings from the Contractor
is received and approved by the Engineer.

13. TERMINOLOGY

Labels must indicate the functions of equipment and components in the distribution boxes and/or distribution
boards. The terminology on the identification labels must be in English.

14. LIAISON

The electrical contractor shall, in each case, provide the engineer, employer (principal contractor) with all
necessary information, dimensions, materials, etc., as called for in the specification, in good time.

It is essential that the electrical contractor work in close collaboration with the principal contractor to ensure
that where his services run in proximity with other services, there are no clashes.
Failure to comply with the above may mean that corrective measures will have to be taken to correctly
position the equipment. Any abortive work resulting will be entirely to the electrical contractor’s account.
Where the electrical contractor is to provide electrical supplies to control panels forming part of other contract
works, it is essential that the electrical contractor liaise fully with the particular contractor who must provide
the electrical contractor with all information necessary so as to ensure that the supply cable terminates in the
correct position and that the phase rotation complies with the equipment installed.
Failure to do so may result in the electrical contractor being held responsible for the cost of removing and
replacing not only his own but also the equipment of the main contractor and other contractors.
4
15. SUPERVISORY STAFF AND IDENTIFICATION

All work done on site shall at all times be under the direct and full time supervision of a contract manager
who shall be a qualified installation electrician who will sign the certificate of compliance.
Full particulars of the site organisation, complete with names of officials the Bidder proposes to allocate to
this project are to be submitted with this bid. For the duration of this contract the above detailed officials will
be permanently assigned to this project and may only be relieved of their Engineeries after prior agreement
by the Engineer or his representative/agent.
Whilst on the site all staff and labourers employed by the electrical contractor shall wear distinctively marked
clothing bearing the name of the electrical contractor or his identification logo.

16. SETTING OUT OF WORKS

The electrical contractor shall be responsible for marking out and setting out of all equipment and plant.
The position of items of electrical equipment and plant indicated on the drawings are to be taken as
approximate. The exact position for fixing shall be obtained by site measurements.
In case of doubt, decisions shall be obtained from the Engineer or his representative/agent.

17. ERECTION OF EQUIPMENT

The contractor shall be responsible for the erection and installation of all equipment supplied by him under
this contract.
In addition, the contractor shall be responsible for the care and maintenance of all electrical equipment after
erection is completed until the first delivery of the specific section of the works. He shall ensure that the
proper enclosure of all equipment is maintained at all times, that access doors and covers are opened only
when necessary to work on the equipment and replaced afterwards, that the paint finish on all items is
effectively protected and that all unused cable and conduit entries are effectively sealed.

18. CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE BY AN ACCREDITED PERSON

On completion of the electrical installation the contractor shall complete the Certificate of Compliance for the
electrical installation in the form of Annexure 1 as described in the Occupational Health and Safety Act no.
85 of 1993, as amended, and obtainable from the Electrical Contracting Board of South Africa. This form
must be handed to the Engineer or its representative in addition to 4 signed copies.
The Certificate of Compliance will be completed and signed by an accredited electrical contractor.
A separate Certificate of Compliance will be issued for each electrical installation and point of supply.

19. DELIVERY AND COMPLETION

All contract materials shall be ordered timeously and delivered to site at dates suited to the agreed
construction program.
The successful Bidder for the installation will be required to commence work immediately following
notification of bid acceptance, and shall thereafter at all times maintain the progress required by the agreed
completion program.

20. MAINTENANCE OF INSTALLATIONS

With effect from the date of the First Delivery Certificate the contractor shall at the contractor’s own expense
undertake the regular servicing of the installation during the 12 month Defects Liability Period and shall make
all adjustments necessary for the correct operation thereof.

5
If during the said period the installation is not in working order for any reason for which the contractor is
responsible, or if the installation develops defects, the contractor shall immediately, upon being notified
thereof, take steps to remedy the defects and make any necessary adjustments.
Should such stoppages however be so frequent as to become troublesome, or should the installation
otherwise prove unsatisfactory during the said period the contractor shall, if called upon by the Engineer, at
the contractor’s own expense replace the whole of the installation or such parts thereof as the Engineer may
deem necessary, with apparatus specified by the Engineer.
Luminaires will be tested upon the completion of the Defects Liability Period for compliance to the contract
specifications. If the test results indicate non-compliance the contractor shall, by instruction by the Engineer,
at the contractor’s own expense replace the whole of the installation or such parts thereof as the Engineer
may deem necessary, with apparatus specified by the Engineer.

21. MAINTENANCE OF ELECTRICAL SUPPLY

All interruptions of the electrical supply that may be necessary for the execution of the work will be subject to
prior arrangement between the Contractor, the Engineer and Eskom.

22. SUPPLY AUTHORITY

A PC amount is allowed in the Bill of Quantities for the connection and installation costs.
This provisional sum may be deleted in part or in whole, and shall only be expended upon written instruction
by the Engineer.
Permanent Electricity Supply
An electricity supply will be made available by Eskom at the voltage specified herein, and the Contractor
shall, to be included in the pricing, then deliver the installation in such a manner that it complies with
Eskom’s requirements and other applicable codes, standards and regulations regarding voltage, current,
fault level, phase rotation and frequency and with any other requirements which may be imposed by these
authorities and the specification.
The position of the new connection shall be determined on site with the approval of Eskom and Engineer.
Temporary Supply

Electricity for builder’s electrical supply, erection, testing and commissioning purposes shall be arranged by
the electrical contractor with Eskom to keep the existing power supply on site in tact as the builder’s supply
during the construction period.
Every precaution must be taken by the electrical contractor to ensure the safety of persons and property.
Special attention shall be paid to earthing and bonding.

23. SUPPLY VOLTAGE

The supply voltage shall be 400V from Eskom to a Standby Generator and 400V from the Standby
Generator to the main LV DB panel in the Plant Room.

24. BALANCING OF ELECTRICAL LOAD

The Contractor is required to balance the load as equally as possible over the multiphase supply.

25. SERVICE CONDITIONS

All plant shall be designed for the climatic conditions appertaining to the service.

6
26. ELECTRICAL/ELECTRONIC EQUIPMENT

All the equipment must be properly protected against damage, faulty functioning or interference by any
external factors such as static electricity, induced voltage, magnetizing forces, radio waves, etc., which may
occur in the building.
Equipment which is sensitive to interference and interference peaks in the electrical circuit; variations in
voltage and frequency such as normally occur in the electrical distribution network, and the municipal supply
to the building, which are inevitable, must be fitted with the necessary stabilizers, over and under-voltage
protection equipment, suppressers, etc.
Equipment must be so manufactured and installed (and provided with suppression), that it does not cause
any interference to other equipment or in any way affect the functioning thereof.

27. ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT & MATERIALS

All equipment and fittings supplied must be in accordance with the attached quality specification (of this
document), suitable for the relevant supply voltage and frequency and must be approved by the Engineer.
Materials and equipment used in this installation must be of the best quality of their respective types, must
meet the relative SANS or BS specifications and must be installed to the satisfaction of the electrical
Engineer or his representative.
The contractor will be informed in writing if any material or workmanship is not of the required quality. In
such a case the contractor must replace the material concerned or repair the installation to the satisfaction of
the Engineer or its representative.
If requested to do so, the contractor must provide samples of materials or equipment, for the approval by the
electrical Engineer, before it may be installed. The samples will be kept for comparison with materials and
equipment actually installed and will be returned after the contract has been satisfactorily completed.

28. SCHEDULE OF FITTINGS

In all instances where schedule of socket outlets, power points, luminaires, poles, masts, DB panels, kiosks,
transformers, and mini-substations are attached to or included on the drawings, these schedules are to be
regarded as forming part of the specification.
Except in the case of electrical installations supplied by a single-phase electricity supply at the point of
supply, an accredited person shall exercise general control over all electrical installation work being carried
out.

29. QUALITY OF MATERIALS

Only materials of highest quality shall be used and all materials shall be subject to the approval of the
engineer.

Wherever applicable, the material shall comply with the relevant South African National Standards,
specifications, or to IEC or British Standards Specifications, where no SANS Specifications exist, and shall
be approved, installed and commissioned in accordance with these Specifications and Codes and to the
satisfaction of the engineer.
Materials and equipment used in this Contract shall, where possible, be of South African manufacture and
shall comply with this Specification and relevant SANS, BS or IEC Specifications and Codes
Where a certain manufacturer's material or apparatus is mentioned in the drawings or specifications, such
materials or apparatus shall be provided as specified, excepting where an alternative to this condition is
allowed in the specifications, but the engineer shall have the final decision. Where a detailed specification
for material or apparatus is not provided, it shall be understood that all normal requirements for the use of
such material or equipment shall apply.
7
Should the Contractor base his bid price on any alternative and this alternative is rejected by the engineer,
any cost implication this may have shall be for the Contractor's account.

Bid prices may be based on alternatives to those items specified in this specification or where a written
addendum to this bid document specifying allowable alternatives is issued during the bid period by the
Engineer.
Alternatives for specified equipment will only be considered during the first 8 weeks from the date of the
letter of appointment of the Contractor, as issued by the Engineer. Only the Engineer shall have the right to
grant the contractor permission to change the equipment and / or material subsequent to the award of the
contract.
Should alternatives be offered by the Contractor, the following is required:
 A sample and technical pamphlet and data of the specified item

 A sample and technical pamphlet and data of the alternative or substitute offered
 Price implication per item for the alternative or substitute together with substantiating invoices or
quotations
 Price implication for the entire installation for the alternative or substitute. This price implication should
be itemised listing every item applicable separately and totalling them.
The Contractor shall submit samples of all materials or equipment for approval by the Engineer before
installation, unless prior approval to the contrary has been obtained in writing from the Engineer. Such
samples will be held for purposes of comparison with equipment and materials installed and will be released
on satisfactory completion of the Contract.

The Engineer may instruct the Contractor to supply and/or deliver and/or install any other make or
manufacture of article(s) than that/those specified and will issue a variation order where such a change has
cost implications.
Where certain products of a specified manufacturer are unobtainable, substitutions may be offered, but shall
only be supplied after written consent by the Engineer.
Where plastic materials are used in areas exposed to direct sunlight, they shall be treated for/protected
against the effects of Ultra Violet light.
Where materials and equipment are to be installed exposed to the elements or in corrosive or explosive
environments, the materials of the equipment and for holding down the equipment shall be selected taking
due note of these conditions.
The workmanship shall be of the highest grade and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All inferior work shall, on indication by the Engineer’s inspecting officers, be immediately removed and
rectified by and at the expense of the Contractor.

30. TESTS

General

The engineer may call for the inspection or testing of all or any goods forming the subject of the Contract.
The engineer reserves the right to attend or not to attend any of the inspections, tests or commissioning.
Whether, the engineer attends these or not, written reports and test results shall be submitted to the
engineer for approval.
The Contractor shall replace any portion of the installation, which does not meet with the requirements of the
Wiring Code, relevant SABS, SANS, BS standards or this Specification, or the local by-laws as may be found
by test or inspection. Such replacement shall be done at the contractor’s own cost.

8
All materials and workmanship shall be of the respective kinds described in the Contract and in accordance
with the Engineer's instructions and shall be subjected from time to time to such tests and by such persons
as the Engineer may direct at the place of manufacture or fabrication or on the site or at all or any of such
places.
The LV equipment, transformers, MCC’s and distribution boards, emergency power generating sets, etc.,
shall be tested in the factory by the manufacturer and the Contractor in the presence of the Engineer before
the equipment is shipped to site. The Engineer must be given a few days’ notice ahead of testing, to enable
him to attend the tests.
Except as otherwise provided in the Specification the Contractor shall supply such assistance, instruments,
machines, labour and materials as are normally required for examining, measuring and testing of any work
and the quality, mass or quantity of any materials used and shall supply samples of materials before
incorporation in the works for testing as may be selected and required by the Engineer.
All samples shall be supplied by the Contractor at his own cost if the supply thereof is clearly intended by or
provided for in the Specification but if not, then at the cost of the Employer.
The cost of making any test shall be borne by the Contractor if such test is clearly intended by or provided for
in the Specification and (in the case of a test under load or a test to ascertain whether the design of any
finished or partly finished work is appropriate for the purposes which it was intended to fulfil) if such is
particularised in the Specification in sufficient detail to enable the Contractor to price or allow for the same in
his Contract Price.
If any test is ordered by the Engineer which is either –
 not so intended by or provided for; or
 not so particularised; or
 though so intended by or provided for is ordered by the Engineer to be carried out by an independent
person or body at any other place than the site or the place of manufacture or fabrication of the
materials or equipment tested;
then the cost of such test shall be borne by the Contractor if the test shows the workmanship or materials not
to be in accordance with the provisions of the Contract or the Engineer's instructions, but otherwise by the
Employer.
The Contractor shall keep records of all the data of tests and shall submit this data to the Engineer upon
completion of all tests.
Such data shall include the results of:
 earth tests;
 insulation tests;
 continuity tests;
 pressure tests;
 impedance tests;
 performance or rating tests;
 impulse tests;
 temperature tests;
 voltage drop and load tests; and
 luminance tests, etc.

9
Tests carried out in the factory of the manufacturer or at a testing facility shall be done in accordance with
the prescribed standards for such tests.

The applicable standards for such tests shall be SANS, BSI, IEC, DIN, NEMA or such acceptable standard
as may be applicable to the product or equipment or assembly.
The Contractor shall further carry out any other special test as may be required by the Engineer in a manner
or in accordance with the standards as may be required by the Engineer. The Engineer will have the right to
obtain a quotation from the Contractor for any special tests which are required by him and to instruct the
Contractor to carry out such tests.
If equipment should fail a standard or prescribed standard test by a testing authority, the cost thereof shall be
for the account of the Contractor.
Tests and Inspections by Local Authorities

The entire installation shall be tested after completion in accordance with the Wiring Code and any
applicable by-laws of local authorities.
The Contractor shall assist the Inspectors of the local authorities during any tests carried out by them and
shall supply tools, instruments and consumables for testing purposes.
The Engineer reserves the right to be present at any tests and the Contractor shall inform the Engineer of all
tests to enable him to be present if he so desires.
The Engineer may perform similar tests at any time and the Contractor shall render all assistance and shall
provide all tools and instruments, which may be required for such tests.
The work specified in this document shall not be considered to have been completed until the installation
inspectors of the responsible authorities have issued a clearance certificate for the electrical installation.
Acceptance Tests
After completion, either in a part or as a whole the complete installations shall be subject to acceptance tests
by the Engineer. The Contractor shall assist the Engineer during any test carried out and must supply tools
and instruments for testing purposes.
Test and Commissioning Instruments, Labour and Consumables, etc.
All labour, power, fuel, dummy loads and all instruments and appliances that may be required for the tests
and commissioning shall be provided by the Contractor at the contractor’s own expense that forms part of
the total tendered amount.
Test instruments used to demonstrate capacities and characteristics specified or offered shall be tested for
accuracy by an approved laboratory or by the manufacturer and certificates showing degree of accuracy
shall be furnished to the engineer.

If gauges, thermometers, etc. which are to be left permanently installed are used for tests, they shall not be
installed until just prior to the tests to avoid possible changes in calibration.
Test and Commissioning Certificates and Records
The engineer reserves the right to attend or not to attend any of the inspections, tests or commissioning.
Whether, the Employer or engineer attends these or not, written reports and test results shall be submitted to
the engineer.
All certificates shall be in English.
All test and commissioning forms shall be completed in rough or final form during these operations.
All test certificates are to be countersigned by the Engineer as "witnessed" or "accepted" or "seen".
Four copies of test and commissioning certificates shall be handed over to the Engineer.

10
With Final Acceptance the Electrical Contractor shall accept in writing the responsibility for the total
installation as installed by him certifying the correctness of the installation in accordance with and on the
certificates of Compliance of electrical works. The contractor shall also be responsible to have the sections
required to be completed by the Engineer and the Owner completed by them as required.
Copies of the completed certificates shall be distributed as follows:
(i) Head Office of the owner - for retention in Main Planning File.
(ii) Regional Office of the owner - for retention in Regional Control file.
After completion of the works and before first delivery is taken, a full test (including a full load test) will be
carried out on the installation for a period of 30 days, 24 hour operation per day thereof, to determine the
satisfactory working thereof. During this period the installations will be inspected and the contractor shall
make good, to the satisfaction of the Engineer, any defects which may arise.

The contractor shall provide all instruments and equipment required for testing and any water, power and
fuel required for the commissioning and testing of the installations at completion.
Factory Tests and Inspections
The Contractor shall inform the Engineer as soon as any equipment or any part of an installation in the place
of manufacture or on site is ready for inspections or tests.
The Engineer shall be given sufficient notice in advance of inspections or tests and final dates and times of
such inspection will then be confirmed with the Contractor by the Engineer. The inspection or testing of
manufactured equipment in a factory by the Contractor or by any other test facility in the presence of the
Engineer must not be regarded as acceptance of responsibility by the Engineer for the correct performance
of such equipment on site.
The Contractor shall provide a clean and safe testing area in the place of manufacture of any equipment to
be tested and inspected by the Engineer. The area shall be open and accessible and tests or inspection will
not be carried out in cramped or dangerous areas. No tests or inspections will be carried out in areas where
overhead cranes or hoists are in operation.
All live equipment shall either be screened off or enclosed so that inspecting persons are not endangered
during such tests or inspections. Inspections or tests will not be carried out near paint areas, paint booths,
ovens, grinding or polishing areas or on equipment which are still under construction.
Tests will not be done by the Engineer in areas where a normal conversation cannot take place due to
background noise. Tests on equipment emitting exhaust gases or other dangerous gases shall not be
witnessed by the Engineer, if such gases are not expelled or exhausted away from the test area and out into
free outside air.
Test equipment, test leads, clean writing top space and all other facilities shall be provided for the Engineer
during such tests.
The Engineer reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out the re-testing of any equipment which
does not pass the first inspection or test.
The time and traveling cost of the Engineer for the purpose of any re-testing of equipment which did not pass
the first or a previous test will be for the account of the Contractor. Any delays in Contract time caused by
failures of inspections or tests will also be for the account of the Contractor
Site Tests and Inspections
The inspections of the Engineer of any part of an installation or Works on site do not exempt the Contractor
from his responsibilities in terms of the Contract. The Engineer will only accept the completed installation
work after having received all test results, commissioning results and certificates of compliance or test
certificates of the Supply Authority (if applicable) on completion of the whole of the Works.

11
The Contractor shall provide a clean and safe testing area on site of any equipment to be tested and
inspected by the Engineer.

The area shall be open and accessible and tests or inspection will not be carried out in cramped or
dangerous areas. No tests or inspections will be carried out in areas where overhead construction work is in
progress.
All live equipment shall either be screened off or enclosed so that inspecting persons are not endangered
during such tests or inspections.
Test equipment, test leads, clean writing top space and all other facilities shall be provided for Engineer
during such tests.
The Engineer reserves the right to instruct the Contractor to carry out the re-testing of any equipment which
does not pass the first inspection or test.

The time and travelling cost of the Engineer for the purpose of any re-testing of equipment which did not
pass the first or a previous test may be for the account of the Contractor.
Any delays in Contract time caused by failures of inspections or tests will also be for the account of the
Contractor
The Contractor shall carry out all tests and shall do all settings of electrical equipment to safeguard the
equipment of other Contractors, before site testing is carried out by the Engineer. Any abnormal condition,
beyond the control of the Contractor, which may come to the attention of the Contractor during any
preliminary or final tests or commissioning procedures, shall immediately be reported to the Engineer.
The Contractor shall not allow equipment of other contractors to stay connected to, or operate with electric
power from his installation if any equipment of other contractors do not operate normally or within the limits
laid down by the manufacturer of equipment for other contractors.

31. INSTALLATION TESTS

Tests as stipulated in the " Occupational Health and Safety Act no. 85 of 1993, as amended, and in the
"Code of Practice for the Wiring of Premises" SANS 10142 (as amended), must be done. These test report
forms must be filled in fully and correctly in ink, signed by the installation electrician and handed to the
Engineer or its representative.
Tests must be conducted on site after the whole installation is complete, unless written the Engineer to the
contrary grants permission. The tests must include a full-load test for an adequate period to ensure the
satisfactory working of the installation. If negative test results are obtained, faults must be rectified and tests
again done.
The contractor must supply all testing apparatus, correctly calibrated.

All tests shall be carried out in conjunction with and to the satisfaction of the Supply Authority and in the
presence of the Engineer or his representative. The contractor shall make all arrangements for testing and
inspection, the costs thereof being included in the Bid Price.
"Danger" notices shall be displayed at remote ends of cables under test.
The contractor shall ensure that the installation is completed in every respect and that there are no major
defects prior to notifying the Engineer (in writing) for a first delivery inspection. The Engineer will accept zero
minor defects during the final inspection. Should the number of defects be exceeded at the final inspection
then the Engineer will terminate that inspection and request that the contractor arrange an additional final
inspection.

12
32. LEVELLING AND PLUMBING

All equipment shall be carefully levelled and plumbed, checked with a spirit level. Should any equipment be
unsatisfactorily installed in this respect it shall be dismantled and reinstalled, the costs of making good to
damaged structures, plaster and paint will be for the account of the contractor.
It must be noted that boxes for imported accessories must be levelled and plumbed when installed, since the
inserts cannot be levelled independently of the boxes.

33. DETAILED OPERATIONAL AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

This manual shall contain the detailed descriptions of all switchgear and control equipment in motor control
panels, distribution boards, UPS equipment, emergency power diesel generator sets, battery chargers,
power factor correction equipment, light poles, luminaires, lightning protection, etc. i.e. all proprietary
assemblies, shall be provided to assist the user personnel of the Employer with advanced knowledge of the
equipment for short, medium and long term maintenance- and operations of the plant and the works.
The descriptions must be complete in all respects and the Contractor shall also ensure that these manuals
are prepared in such a manner that, in the opinion of the Engineer, a competent and qualified technician can
trace any fault, identify any defective component, replace it with the correct spare part and follow, without
difficulty, the exact function of every component.
To this end, care must be exercised to correlate the text with the circuit diagrams, to relate the diagrams one
with another and to provide a simple method of diagnosis and test to be used wherever breakdowns occur.
The manuals shall also include block diagrams giving the layout of equipment as well as a description of the
function and operation of every unit in the system.
Five copies of the manuals shall be neatly prepared, in typewritten and/or printed format, indexed, with
appropriate dividers between each section to facilitate ready reference. All documentation shall be
presented in the English language.

The description shall, as a minimum requirement, include:

1. Certificate of Compliance
2. All test results

3. “As-Built” Electrical Drawings

4. Operational and maintenance data and details of all assemblies or components of electrical equipment
and material installed. Copies of operational manuals of manufacturers can be inserted in these
descriptions. In the case of insufficient descriptions in manuals of manufacturers, the Contractor shall
provide additional descriptions to enable maintenance of the equipment. The descriptions shall
include:
a. Technical details of all equipment installed.
b. A complete description of the operation of all equipment.
c. A parts and spares list of every item of equipment together with a description of the item, the
name, address and telephone number of the original supplier or wholesaler of the equipment.
Brochures may be added as additional information but must not replace the data required.
5. Complete equipment schematics.
6. All manufacturers’ handbooks having reference to the equipment.
7. Installation test and alignment procedures.
8. All circuit diagrams.
9. All interconnection and inter cabling diagrams.

13
10. Complete trouble shooting procedures and any other information deemed necessary to permit rapid
and efficient maintenance of any part of the equipment by a qualified technician.

The Contract will not be regarded as completed and will not be accepted by the Engineer unless all
the requirements for testing, drawings, manuals and the certification has not been completed and all
data has been handed to the Engineer.

SECTION B - DETAIL ELECTRICAL AND ACCESS CONTROL SPECIFICATIONS

1. GENERAL

This Quality specification defines the Generals of materials and equipment, installation work and ancillary
work to be employed in the electrical installation contract or sub-contract. The Project Specification defines
the extent of work required.

2. REGULATIONS LAWS AND BY-LAWS

The supply and installation of the work shall be in agreement with the Conditions of the Contract with special
attention to the following in particular:
a) a)The latest issue of SANS 10142-1: “Code of Practice for the Wiring of Premises-Part 1: Low Voltage
Installations”,
b) The Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1993 (Act 85 of 1993) as amended,
c) The Local Government Ordinance 1939 (Ordinance 17 of 1939) as amended and the municipal by-laws
and any special requirements of the local supply authority,

d) The Fire Brigade Services Act 1993, Act 99 of 1987 as amend,

e) The National Building Regulations and Building Standards Act 1977 (Act 103 of 1977) as emended,
f) Electrical Installation Regulations of 1992 promulgated under section 35 of the Machinery and
Occupational Safety Act of 1983 (Act No. 6 of 1983)
g) The Post Office Act 1958 (Act 44 of 1958) as amended,
h) The Electricity Act 1984 (Act 41 of 1984) as amended,
i) Any special conditions specified in this specification.
It must be clearly understood that, where differences in the Generals occur as stated in (a), (b), (c), (d), (e)
and (f) or where additional requirements are required, the higher General requirements shall apply.
In the event of any contradiction between (a), (b), (c), (d), (e) and (f), then (f) shall be accepted above the
rest.
Where any required by-law or regulation, which applies or becomes applicable during the execution of the
electrical installation, is in conflict with the stipulation of the document, the former must have preference in all
cases. The contractor must immediately notify the Engineer of such discrepancies.
The contractor may not make any alterations to the installation before written sanction to do so is received
from the Engineer or its representative.

3. LABELS AND NOTICES

The Contractor shall arrange for the labelling of all equipment, instruments, meters, relays, cables, etc., as
indicated below.

14
Where identical items of equipment can be removed from their housings, e.g. HV circuit breaker carriages,
plug-in relays etc., both the fixed and withdrawal portion are to be labelled identically.

All labels shall be ivorine or other back engraved white on black labels of the sizes indicated. They are to be
located in purpose made holders or otherwise are to be screwed or riveted into position. “Dymo” tape or
similar labels will not be accepted nor will labels, which are glued in position only.
Labels on poles shall comprise an aluminium plate with the designated number. These labels shall be nailed
to the pole 1,5m above ground level. Nails shall be electro-galvanized clout nails.
Prior to any equipment being labelled, the Contractor shall request the Engineer to provide a complete
labelling schedule for all items of equipment. Under no circumstances is equipment to be labelled in
accordance with the bid drawings since any description thereon is for identification purposed during
construction only and is unlikely to apply to the completed Works.

The following list indicates the general labelling requirements but does not limit the extent of labelling
required, which shall encompass the full extent of the equipment supplied, or in the case of existing
equipment, any such which is affected by this Contract:
50mm high lettering:
 -Substation and mini sub designation;
 -Outdoor switch gear designation;
 -Transformer designation; and
 -Distribution kiosk and fused feeder panel designation.
20mm high lettering:
 -Main or sub-main board designation;
 -Control panel designation; and
 -Indoor switch gear designation.

5mm high lettering:-

 -Mini sub feeder breakers and isolators;
 -Distribution kiosk feeder breakers and isolators; and

 -General distribution switchgear.

This size shall be used to designate the conductor size and number of cores of each cable installed under
this Contract. In addition, all feeder cables shall be labelled at both ends indicating from where/to cables are
feeding.
All kiosks and mini-subs shall be provided with a label in both official languages reading “In case of leakage
or accidental contact, put off main switch immediately”.
All kiosks and mini-subs shall be provided with notices as required by the Machinery and Occupational
Safety Act. All doors to such locations shall be fitted with the appropriate notices.
Where more than one similar item of equipment is fed from the same board or control panel, the item itself
shall be labelled, this being fixed in a permanent position, i.e. not attached to motors, pumps, etc., but to
bases or adjacent thereto. The lettering shall be 50mm high.
Each distribution board shall additionally bear a label indicating the source and size of the feeder to it.
Labelling will be done with “Brother Tape”.
For example: MDB.A (Emerg):
Fed from Generator;

15
95mm² x 4 core cable + 70mm² BCEW.
Each feeder must be labelled at both ends with “Brother Tape” and a clear heat shrink to cover the tape.
This label must indicate the size of the cable and from/to where the cable is feeding.
For example: 95mm² x 4 core cable + 70mm² BCEW:
Fed from Generator to MDB
Fed from MDB to DB1
Light switches, socket outlets, multi outlets, pop out boxes and isolators must be labelled indicating from/ to
which DB and circuit it is feeding.
For example:
L1 DB1 CB1
P1 DB2 CB8

4. DANGER SIGNS AND NOTICES

Notices as stipulated in the latest amendment of the Occupational Health and Safety Act 85/1993 shall be
installed in the substation.

The notices shall be in English.

Notices shall be in accordance with SABS 872-1967 Industrial Safety Signs.
All notices shall be of the metal engraved type with a minimum metal thickness of 1 mm. The words shall be in
red lettering on a white background.
The lettering shall be embossed and the colouring shall not fade in sunlight.

The following notices shall be exhibited at all designated entrances to electrical panels:
(a) A notice prohibiting unauthorised persons from entering;
(b) A notice prohibiting any unauthorised persons from handling or interfering with electrical apparatus;
(c) A notice containing directions as to procedure in case of fire;
(d) A notice containing directions as to restoration of persons suffering from the effects of electric shock.
(e) A Skull and Crossed Bones danger notice shall be installed on each door.
(f) One nameplate shall be provided and mounted on each access door, with lettering at least 100 mm in
height

5. EARTHING AND BONDING

General
All earthing shall be carried out as specified further herein and shall comply with the requirements in SANS
10142-1: Part 1: Low Voltage Installations (as amended).
The electrical contractor is required to appoint a Specialist Earthing sub-contractor namely Pontins,
HHK or similar company to implement these specialist portions of the work and to perform a
Resistivity Test of the soil before installing the earthing system.

The attached earthing drawing is only a typical layout of the earthing system and should not be taken
as the final layout. The Specialist must provide a drawing of his proposal and must be forwarded to
the Enigineer for approval.

16
The entire installation shall be properly and effectively earthed and bonded as prescribed in the Wiring Code
and as specified, a maximum of 5 Ohm. The Contractor will be responsible for all earthing and bonding of
the installation. The earthing and bonding is to be carried out strictly as described in the SANS
specifications and to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
Self-tapping screws are not acceptable as a means of securing earth conductors.
The armouring on all cables coming into switchboards shall be bonded together and bonded onto the earth
bar. The armouring of cables shall not be considered as an effective earth conductor.
Any copper tapes or conductors used for bonding or earthing installed outside the building or in accessible
positions shall be run in galvanised conduits with bushes from 2 000mm above ground level down to
approximately 300mm below ground level. These conduits shall be securely fixed to the walls.
All earthing work must be executed before any painting commences.

All metal luminaires shall be earthed.

Iron, lead and zinc shall not be used in direct contact with copper earth bar or conductors.
The earth to all light and power points shall consist of correctly sized stranded copper conductors and shall
be drawn in with the conductors and terminate at the earth terminal of the equipment being supplied.
The armouring of cables shall not be considered as an effective earth conductor.
Jointing and "tee offs" of lengths of strip conductor shall be performed by means of brazing or by tinning
and bolting. An overlap of minimum three times the width of the conductor shall be allowed for longitudinal
joints. The bolts used shall not have a diameter greater than one-third the width of the copper strip. Brazed
joints shall be brazed on all accessible sides and be smoothly and neatly finished off. The "Cadweld"
method of jointing may be used on strip copper connections/tee offs. Tinning, riveting and soldering are also
permissible (copper rivets).
Stranded copper conductors shall be joined by means of tinning and then bolting with 2 line taps (of the
correct size) per joint or by means of specified clamps. An overlap of minimum 300mm shall be allowed.
Stranded copper shall not be joined by means of brazing.
The covering, including the insulation (if any) of an earth continuity conductor shall be green or taped green
at a termination.
Except where otherwise approved, conduit or flexible conduit or cable armouring shall not be used as an
earth continuity conductor.
Where lugs are used for terminating stranded earth conductors, the lugs shall be hexagonally crimped with
an approved type of crimping tool. The lug stud size shall correspond to the fixing bolt and the lug is to be so
positioned that the full contact area of the lug is utilised.
All bolts/screws used for earthing shall be high tensile steel, brass or cadmium plated mild steel bolts.
All earthing conductors, which are looped, shall be installed in such a manner that the earthing system shall
remain continuous, should a particular connection be disconnected.
Earthing continuity in conduits shall be maintained, i.e. expansion boxes, junction boxes, etc.
The continuity of the earth conductors should be tested and recorded. In no case should the resistance from
any point of the installation to the main substation or mini-sub exceed 0,09 ohms. In the event of this valued
being exceeded this must be brought to the Engineer's attention.
Where earth tails cross they must be brazed together.
Brazed joints to be oxy-acetylene brazed using 3mm dia. silver alloy brazing rods as supplied by African
Oxygen Ltd., or equivalent, no flux is required.

17
Where connection is made to painted steelwork the paint shall be removed over a minimum area to allow
good contact between surfaces. Surfaces shall be coated with petroleum jelly before bolting. After bolting
any scraped area not covered by the copper connection shall be made good by using the original type and
colours of paints.
Where connection is made to galvanised steelwork the surfaces shall be coated with petroleum jelly prior to
bolting.
Main Earth
The main earth shall consist of a series of earth electrodes interconnected by means of a 70mm2 bare
stranded hard-drawn copper conductor, or shall consist of a trench earth consisting of a 70mm2 bare
stranded hard-drawn copper conductor buried underground and connected to each earth bar of each
substation or main board as specified.

Connection between substation earth bar and earth electrode shall consist of 25mm x 3mm solid copper or
70mm2 bare stranded copper conductors.
Neutral points of each separate system shall be earthed. These neutrals shall be connected to the common
earth.
Generator, LV Kiosks, Distribution Boards
Common earth conductors may be used where various circuits are installed in the same wire way in
accordance with SANS 10142. In such instances the sizes of earth conductors shall be equivalent to
that of the largest current carrying conductor installed in the wire way, alternatively the size of the
conductor shall be as directed by the Engineer. Earth conductors for individual circuits branching
from the generator, kiosk or distribution panel shall be connected to the common earth conductor
with T-ferrules or soldered. The common earth shall not be broken.
Inspection and Testing
Inspection of earthing laid in trenches shall be requested by the Contractor (in writing) at the following
stages:
 Placing and compacting of lower bedding material in trenches;
 Pulling and jointing of earth conductor and driving of earth rods;
 Placing and compacting of upper bedding material; and
 Completion of backfilling, manholes and terminations.
Inspections of the complete job may be called for where interim inspection certificates cannot be produced,
by excavating at the Contractor's expense, at any position along the route and checking that the correct
procedure and dimensions have been adhered.

The Contractor may be called upon, at his own expense, to repeat resistance and/or continuity tests in the
presence of the Engineer, if the latter did not witness the initial measurements and to open portions of the
work where interim inspections were not held.
The resistance between the main earth system and the earth mass shall be measured by the Contractor in
the presence of the Engineer by the method specified or approved.
The earth and bonding continuity shall be tested in accordance with the Wiring Code.
Test results must be submitted to the Engineer in writing for written approval before the system is
permanently covered or handed over.

18
6. SLEEVES

Cable sleeves shall be provided where shown on the drawings and wherever necessitated by installation
conditions. Sleeves and bends shall be of the uPVC Kabelflex type sleeves.
Cable sleeves shall be of the 50mm, 75mm and 110mm diameter unless specifically noted otherwise; they
shall be of continuously smooth bore with no snags or hitches end route and shall encompass only easy
sweeping bends permitting the easy passage of the heaviest cable involved.
Cable sleeves entering a floor cable duct shall be swept gently to the level of the bottom of the trench so that
cables do not kink at entry to the trench. Cable sleeves brought to switchboards or distribution boards
having no associated floor cable ducts, or brought to rising cable ducts shall be swept up easily so that the
cable emerges vertically from the floor. In cases where the emerging cable is exposed to view, wooden
dams shall be fitted round the cable at the top of the sleeve, and the floor screeded completely round the
cable. The outer ends of cable sleeves entering buildings shall, after drawing in the cables, be water proofed
with cable compound of low melting point.
Sweeping bends shall be installed where sleeves enter distribution boards. Sharp sleeve bends are not
acceptable.
Cables attached to external walls must be placed in a recessed galvanized pipe from 300mm below ground
level into the meter box or into roof spaces complete with brass bushes at both ends.
The ends of all sleeves shall be sealed with a non-hardening watertight compound after the installation of
cables. All sleeves intended for future use shall likewise be sealed.
The Electrical Contractor shall ensure that all required sleeves are installed in the correct positions.

7. CONDUIT AND ACCESSORIES

The type of conduit and accessories required for the service, i.e. whether the conduit and accessories shall
be of the screwed type, plain-end type or of the non-metallic type and whether metallic conduit shall be black
enameled or galvanized, is specified in the drawings, but preferably metallic, galvanized conduit is used.
Unless other methods of installation are specified for certain circuits, the installation shall be in conduit
throughout. No open wiring in bridge spaces or elsewhere will be permitted.

The conduit and conduit accessories shall comply fully with the applicable SANS specifications as set out
below and the conduit shall bear the mark of approval of the South African National Standards.
a) Screwed metallic conduit and accessories: SANS 1065, parts 1 and 2.
b) Plain-end metallic conduit and accessories: SANS 1065, parts 1 and 2.
c) Non-metallic conduit and accessories: SANS 950
All conduit fittings except couplings shall be of the inspection type. Where cast metal conduit accessories
are used, these shall be of malleable iron. Zinc base fittings will not be allowed.
Bushes used for metallic conduit shall be brass and shall be provided in addition to locknuts at all points
where the conduit terminates at switchboards, switch-boxes, draw-boxes, etc.
Draw-boxes are to be provided in accordance with the “Wiring Code” and wherever necessary to facilitate
easy wiring.
For light and socket outlet circuits, the conduit used shall have an external diameter of 32mm, 25mm or
20mm. In all other instances the sizes of conduit shall be in accordance with the “Wiring Code” for the
specified number and size of conductors, unless otherwise directed above of this specification or indicated
on the drawings.
Only one manufactured type of conduit and conduit accessories will be permitted throughout the installation.

19
Running joints in screwed conduit are to be avoided as far as possible and all conduit systems shall be set or
bent to the required angles. The use of normal bends must be kept to a minimum with exception of larger
diameter conduits where the use of such bends is essential.
All metallic conduits shall be manufactured of mild steel with a minimum thickness of 1,2mm for plain-end
conduit and 1,6mm in respect of screwed conduit.
Under no circumstances will conduit having a wall thickness of less than 1,6mm be allowed in screeding laid
on top of concrete slabs.
Bending and setting of conduit must be done with special bending apparatus manufactured for the purpose
and which are obtainable from the manufacturers of the conduit systems. Damage to conduit resulting from
the use of incorrect bending apparatus or methods applied must on indication by the engineer’s inspection,
be completely removed and rectified and any wiring already drawn into such damaged conduits must be
completely renewed at the Contractor’s expense.
Conduit and conduit accessories used for flame-proof or explosion proof installations and for the suspension
of luminaires as well as all load bearing conduit shall in all instances be of the metallic screwed type.
Tenderers must ensure that general approval of the proposed conduit system to be used is obtained from
the local electricity supply authority prior to the submission of their tender. Under no circumstances will
consideration be given by the Engineer or engineer to any claim submitted by the Contractor, which may
result from a lack of knowledge in regard to the supply authority’s requirements.

8. SURFACE MOUNTED CONDUIT

Wherever possible, the conduit installation is to be concealed in the building work; however, where
unavoidable or otherwise specified in this specification or indicated on drawings, conduit installed on the
surface must be plumbed or levelled and only straight lengths shall be used.
The use of inspection bends is to be avoided and instead the conduit shall be set uniformly and inspection
coupling used where necessary.
No threads will be permitted to show when the conduit installation is complete, except where running
couplings have been employed.
Running couplings are only to be used where unavoidable, and shall be fitted with a sliced coupling as a
lock-nut.
Conduit is to be run on approved spaced saddles rigidly secured to the walls, bridget supports and deck and
ceiling.
Crossing of conduits is to be avoided; however, should it be necessary purpose-made metal boxes are to be
provided at the junction. The finish of the boxes and positioning shall be in keeping with the general layout.

Where several conduits are installed side by side, they shall be evenly spaced and grouped under one
purpose-made saddle.
Distribution boards, draw-boxes, industrial switches and socket outlets etc., shall be neatly surface mounted
onto the surface of the bridge structure.
Painting of surface conduit shall match the colour of the adjacent bridge plate finishes.
In building where structural operations are to be carried out, all surface conduit will be painted by the
structural contractor.
In all other instances the electrical contractor shall allow for painting of surface conduit (either metallic or
PVC where specified) with two coats of good quality enamel paint, and the colour shall match the
surrounding bridge finish.

20
Only approved plugging materials such as steel or aluminium inserts, fibre plugs, plastic plugs, etc., and
round-head anchor bolts appropriately sized shall be used for fixing saddles, switches, socket outlets, etc., to
walls, wood plugs and the plugging in joints in brick walls are not acceptable. Lugging and welding of
saddles and joints to the bridge structure surfaces may be required provided that they are not chemical
reactive with bridge material, hence only non-reactive material is to be used for securing the conduits to the
bridge deck, walls, etc...

9. CONDUIT IN CONCRETE SLABS AND SOFFITS

In order not to delay building operations the Contractor must ensure that all conduits and other electrical
equipment which are to be cast in the concrete soffits and slabs are installed in good time.
The Contractor shall have a representative in attendance at all times when the casting of concrete takes
place.
Draw-boxes, expansion joint boxes and round conduit boxes are to be provided where necessary. Sharp
bends of any nature will not be allowed in concrete slabs.
Draw and/or inspection boxes shall be grouped under one common cover plate and must preferable be
installed in accessible areas.
All boxes, etc., are to be securely fixed to the shuttering to prevent displacement when concrete is cast. The
conduit shall be supported and secured at regular intervals and installed as close as possible to the neutral
axis of concrete slabs and/or soffits.
Before any concrete slabs or soffits are cast, all conduit droppers to switchboards shall be neatly spaced and
rigidly fixed.
All conduits will be tested with a mandrel to ensure that no blockages have occurred. If there are blockages,
the blockages will be rectified at the contractor’s own expense.

10. FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS FOR CONNECTING UP OF MACHINES, ETC.

Flexible tubing connections shall be of galvanised steel construction, and in damp situations of the plastic
sheathed galvanised steel type. Other types may only be used subject to the prior approval of the Engineer.
Connectors for coupling onto the flexible tubing shall be of the gland or screw-in types, manufactured of
either brass or cadmium or zinc plated mild steel, and the connectors after having been fixed onto the tubing,
shall be durable and mechanically sound.
Aluminium and zinc alloy connectors will not be acceptable.

11. FEEDER CABLES AND CONNECTIONS

General
The Contractor shall ensure that all Certificate of Compliances are done prior to commissioning of the
connection.
LV Cable Work
The sizes and routes of high voltage and low voltage cables are indicated on the drawings and in these
documents.
Low voltage cables shall be either
1. Un-armoured cables: PVC-insulated/PVC-sheathed.
2. Armoured cables: PVC-insulated/PVC-bedded/armoured/black extruded PVC outer sheath.
3. Single core cables: PVC-insulated/unsheathed.

21
As indicated on the drawings with Copper or Aluminium conductors as indicated which shall comply with the
requirements of SANS 150, SANS 1507 and those of the Quality Specification in all respects.

The conductors shall be of high conductivity annealed stranded copper and the cores may be shaped or
circular.
LV low voltage cables insulation shall be general purpose PVC, 600/1000 Volt Grade.
The bedding of LV cables shall consist of a continuous impermeable sheath of PVC extruded to fit the core
or cores closely and in the case of multi-core cables, to fill the interstices between the cores.
Low voltage cables, cable terminations and cable joints shall comply with the requirements as specified.
Bidders must base their cost for trenching in earth. Payment for cable trenching having a greater volume
than that specified for the purpose will not be considered except where extra excavations are necessary to
by-pass obstacles such as water pipes, drains, large boulders etc. In all such instances the amount of the
extra excavations must be agreed upon on site between the Engineer or his representative/agent and the
Contractor.
Earth continuity conductors are to be run with all cables constituting part of the low tension distribution
system. Such continuity conductors are to be stranded bare copper of a cross-sectional area equal to at
least half that of one live conductors of the cable, but shall not be less than 4mm² or more than 70mm².
Cables shall be labelled, cable routes marked and terminated as per the requirements of the Quality
Specification (Labels and Notices).
The installation of cables in cable ladders/trays shall comply with the requirements of the Quality
Specification.

The electrical Contractor shall determine the present cable routes of all existing underground cables as and
when required for the contract work and shall allow for this requirement as part of his bid sum.
The dielectric shall consist of PVC suitable for MV, LV and Intermediate Voltage use. It shall be distinctly
coloured as detailed in Table I of SANS 150/1970 so as to identify the phase, neutral and earth conductors
with the phase conductors being coloured red, white or blue, the neutral conductor black and the earth
conductor green/yellow or green.
The whole of the dielectric shall be coloured - surface painting or a longitudinal coloured stripe is not
acceptable.
Danger Tape above Cable
For all cables, a coloured plastic-marking tape shall be installed 200mm above the cable. The tape shall be
yellow, with red skull and crossbones with the words "ELECTRIC CABLE ". These markings shall not be
more than 1m apart from centre to centre.
Schedule of Cables
The following sizes of cables for power- and control purposes are required for this contract:

EARTH
CABLE SIZE (mm²)
FROM TO CONDUCTOR
Copper
SIZE (mm²)

ESKOM Supply point at 2 x 150mm² x 3c

200kVA Generator 400V 120mm² BCEW
Glen Reenen Camp Aluminium PVC SWA PVC

2 x 150mm² x 3c 120mm² BCEW

200kVA Generator 400V Main LV DB-MDB
Aluminium PVC SWA PVC

22
 6mm² x 4c Cu PVC SWA
Main LV DB-MDB DB-1 6mm² BCEW
PVC

6mm² x 4c Cu PVC SWA

Main LV DB-MDB DB-2 6mm² BCEW
PVC

10mm² x 4c Cu PVC SWA

Main LV DB-MDB DB-L 10mm² BCEW
PVC

2 x 95mm² x 4c Cu PVC
Main LV DB-MDB DB-HVAC 120mm² BCEW
SWA PVC

6mm² x 3c Cu PVC SWA

Main LV DB-MDB Kiosk 6mm² BCEW
PVC

4mm² x 3c Cu PVC SWA

L1(All Bollards and PVC (Bollard) + 2 x 2.5mm²
Kiosk 2.5mm² BCEW
Footlights) 1000V PVC insulated
wiring

Kiosk L2(All Bollards and 4mm² x 3c Cu PVC SWA 2.5mm² BCEW

Footlights) PVC (Bollard) + 2 x 2.5mm²
1000V PVC insulated
wiring

Kiosk L3 (2 x Floodlights at 4mm² x 3c Cu PVC SWA 2.5mm² BCEW

Entrance) PVC

NOTE: THESE ARE THE MAJOR CIRCUITS AND DO NOT LIST ALL CIRCUITS AND ALL CABLE
ROUTES SHALL BE DETERMINED ON SITE WITH THE ENGINEER AND THEN MEASURED BEFORE
ANY CABLES ARE ORDERED.
Excavation
The Contractor shall be responsible for all trenching excavations unless specified to the contrary.

Low voltage cables shall be laid at a depth of 1000mm under final ground level.
Terminals
Terminal bodies and screws shall be of non-corrosive metal, enclosed in fire resistant, moulded plastic
insulating bodies. Terminal bodies or screws shall not project beyond the insulating material and shall afford
suitable protection against accidental contact by personnel and against short circuits and tracking.
The construction of the terminal block and mounting rail shall be such as to ensure a firm and positive
location of the terminal blocks. It shall be possible to add additional terminal blocks within the terminal
sequence without having to disconnect or dismantle the terminal strip. The terminal blocks shall be held in
position by means of standard end clamps.

It shall be possible to intermix terminals of various sizes, i.e. for different sizes of conductors, whilst utilizing
the same mounting rail. Where smaller terminal blocks occur adjacent to larger terminal blocks, suitable
shielding barriers shall be inserted to cover the terminals that might otherwise be exposed.
The terminal bodies and clamping screws shall be so constructed as to ensure that conductors are not
nicked or severed when the clamping screws are tightened. Screws shall not come in direct contact with the
conductors.
Terminals shall be sized and rated to match the conductors that are connected to them.

23
Each terminal block shall have provision for clip-in numbering or labelling strips to be installed, together with
protective, clear caps over the sheets.

All control wiring ends on all terminals and equipment shall be pin-lugged.
Neutrals shall not be cut, but shall be done on a loop-in basis on lugs.
Conduit and Conduit Accessories
It is a requirement of this contact that all conduit and accessories used shall be PVC as indicated on the
drawings.
It is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to see that boxes and conduits are installed correctly and to
install in all conduit steel draw wires.
Power Points
All power points shall be installed in positions as indicated on the layout drawings.
It is the responsibility of the Electrical Contractor to plug the conduit ends in all boxes to stop ingress of
rubbish and to clean the boxes before wires are drawn in.
Wiring of Circuits

All polyvinyl chloride (hereafter called P.V.C.) insulated copper conductors, for the wiring of circuits must
comply with the requirements of SANS 150.
Deviations from SABS 150 shall only be permitted when such deviations are allowed by the stipulations in
SANS 10142.
P.V.C. insulated conductors shall be of the general purpose 1000V grade.
Except if specified to the contrary, no more than one circuit of the same type shall be drawn into one conduit.
Circuit wiring shall be done with the loop-in method. The cutting off of conductor strands, joining of
conductors in draw boxes and cutting away of insulation material will not be allowed.
Wiring of conduits shall not commence until all boxes are clean and free of plaster and debris.
Wires shall be strained upon draw-in in conduits and enough slack shall be left for proper connections to
switches, socket outlets and light fittings.
All wired circuits shall be complete with earth wires.

The following wiring for circuits shall be used in this contract:

 Lighting: 2 x 2,5mm² PVC wires and 2,5mm² earth in 20mmØ conduits
 Switch-plug: 2 x 4mm² PVC wires and 2,5mm² earth in 20mmØ conduits or power skirting
 Aircon (s/phase): 2 x 4mm² PVC wires and 2,5mm² earth in 20mmØ conduits or power skirting
 Aircon (3 phase): 3 x 4mm² PVC wires and 2,5mm² earth in 20mmØ conduits or power skirting
 Isolators (s/phase): 2 x 4mm² PVC wires and 2,5mm² earth in 25mmØ conduits or power skirting
 Isolators (3 phase): 3 x 4/6/10mm² PVC wires and 4/6/10mm² earth in 25mmØ conduits or power
skirting

12. UNDERGROUND CABLE NETWORKS

Scope
This specification covers the laying and joining of cables for underground high-voltage and low voltage
systems.
Interpretation
24
Supporting Specification
The following specifications are part of this specification.

a) SANS 97 : Electrical cables with impregnated paper insulation;

b) SANS 1507 : Electrical cables and flexible cords with poly-vinyl chloride (PVC)
insulation;
c) SANS 61442 : Electric cables: Test methods for accessories for power cables with rated
voltages from 6 kV (Urn – 7.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Urn = 36 kV);
d) SANS 10198 : The choice, handling and installation of electrical power cables with a
rating not exceeding 33 kV;
e) SABS 60502-4 : Power cables with extruded insulation and their accessories for rated
voltages from 1 kV (Urn = 1.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Urn = 36 kV) - Part 4: Test
requirements on accessories for cables with rated voltages from 6 kV (Urn
= 7.2 kV) up to 30 kV (Urn = 36 kV);
f) NRS 012 : Cable terminations and live conductors within air insulated enclosures
(insulation co-ordination) for rated A.C. voltages of 7.2 and up to and
including 36 kV;
g) NRS 028 : Specification for crimped lugs and ferrules;
h) NRS 053 : Accessories for medium voltage power cables (3.8/6.6 kV to 19/33 kV);
i) NRS 075 : Specification for mechanical torque shears connectors;
j) SANS 9001 : Quality Systems: Requirements;
k) SANS 1200 C : The clean-up of the site;
l) SANS 1200 DA : Ground works (small jobs);
m) SANS 1200 DB : Ground works (pipe trenches);
n) SANS 1200 LB : Scatting (pipes);
o) SANS 1200 LC : Cable ducts;
p) SANS 1339 : Electrical cables with insulation of cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE)
Insulated Electric Cables;
q) SANS 1411-2 : Materials of insulated electric cables and flexible cords – Part 2: Polyvinyl
Chloride (PVC);
r) SANS 1411-7 : Materials of insulated electric cables and flexible cords – Part 7:
Polyethylene (PE);
Implementation
This specification includes clauses which is in general applicable to underground network systems for
electrical power supply. The interpretation of, and variations to this specification is explained in Section 2 of
the project specification.

Terminology
The terminology in the applicable supporting specifications, as given in 2.1 and the following terminology
applies to this specification.
Core
A single insulated conductor without any protective housing.

25
Screened cable
A cable in which every core is separately encased by a conducting layer to ensure that the conductor is
surrounded by a radial electric field when it is energised.
Belted cable
It is a multi-core cable where a part of the insulation covers each conductor and the rest of the insulation
covers the combined cores.
Pilot cable
A cable which is normally used for measuring (control) or safety or communication circuits or all three.
Phase sequence
The sequence in which the phase voltages of a multiphase system reach its maximum values.
High voltage (HV)
Voltages with RMS value higher than 1 000V.
Cable
A length of core (or a length of 2 or more cores, laid up) which, in total, can be provided with a mechanical
housing.
Low voltage (LV)
Voltages with RMS value of 1000 V or lower.

Mass impregnated non-draining cable (MIND)

A cable of which the surplus impregnated-agent was not removed during production because the cable is
non-migrating at the conductor’s working temperature.
Ambient temperature
The temperature of the air 400mm above ground level at the bottom of the ditch, where applicable.
Thermal resistivity
The resistance against the flow of heat in a dielectric (Unit: K.m/W).
Consumer distribution unit (CDU)
A switch-box for LV service connections connecting the network and one or more consumer supply points.
Abbreviations
The abbreviations in the applicable part of the specification given in 2.1 and the following abbreviations apply
to this specification.

Al : Aluminium
Cu : Copper
CNE : Combined neutral and earth

CDU : Consumer distribution unit (LV – distribution connecting box) (see def. in 2.3)
HV : High voltage (see definition in 2.3)
LV : Low voltage (see definition in 2.3)
MIND : Mass impregnated non-draining cable
PME : Protective multiple earthing
PI : Plasticity index
26
PILC : Paper insulated, lead covered
PVC : Poly-vinyl chloride

SWA : Steel Wire Armour

XPLE : Cross-linked polyethylene cables
Material
Graded Backfill material
Graded backfill material must be used to cover the cable(s) and to ensure good embedding. The material
must be earth with low clay content, with a maximum PI of 6 and a maximum resistivity of 1,2 K.m/W and
must be free of all plant materials, clots and stones with diameter bigger than 15mm, except in situations
where other limits are specified in the project specifications. Sea or river sand is not acceptable because of
its high thermal resistivity.
Grading
The Contractor may not waste excavated material that complies with 3.1 by removing it. The Contractor is
not compelled to use selective methods of excavation. He is allowed, (but not forced) to sift the excavated
material, treat or process the material in any other way to make it suitable to cover the cable(s) and to
prevent material that is suitable for fill material or main fill material to become buried or contaminated.
If suitable material for graded backfill material is not freely obtainable form excavations, the Contractor must
obtain material from other excavations on site or by opening quarries or by importing suitable material from
commercial or other approved sources.
Cable Route Markers
Cable route markers must be provided if required and according to the project specifications.
Cable Joints and Cable Terminations
Cable joints and cable terminations must be of an approved type, e.g. heat shrink or mechanical sealing
type. All cable ends must be insulated via heat shrink.
All high voltage cable joints must be done by an approved artisan. Paper insulated cable joints may be done
with heat shrink joints else will be encased by a cast-iron joint box, designed for this purpose. The fill
material must comply with BS 1858. XPLE cables must be jointed with heat shrink joints. The electrical
continuity, screening and armouring may in no way be negatively influenced by the joint.
All heat shrink terminations must be supplied as a unit, including all necessary parts. The termination must
be designed for the specific cable and application. Outdoor terminations must be designed to prevent arcing
under any pollution and weather conditions to which it may be subjected. The joints to be used must adhere
to the local supply authority specifications and requirements.

Cable glands shall be used according to the manufacturer’s recommendations. All cable glands shall be
manufactured from brass.
Cable shoes must be “Hex” crimped onto the cable ends with a purpose made tool. Cable shoes must be
encased with a heat shrink sleeve of which the colour corresponds with the phase of each cable core.
Protective Concrete Slab
Where protective concrete slabs are required in the project specifications, it must have the following nominal
measurements:
Length : 1m;
Width : 230mm; and
Depth : 50mm.
27
The slabs must be manufactured of 20 MPa concrete. Each slab must have one armament rod along the
length and 3 across the width. The rods must be manufactured using mild steel with a nominal diameter of
8mm. If not, the slabs must be manufactured as specified in the project specifications.
Plastic Warning Tape
Plastic warning tape must consist of a strip of polyethylene, at least 0,04mm thick and with a nominal width
of 150mm or 230mm (as specified in the project specifications). The warning tape must be totally
impregnated with pigment so that it corresponds with colour no B26 (light orange) of SANS 1091 in a
reasonable way. A black triangle and the flash symbol for electricity, which corresponds with sign WW7 of
SANS 1186 as well as the words “DANGER, GEVAAR, INGOZI” must be printed on the full length of the
tape with maximum intervals of 1 meter.
Construction Equipment

Compaction Equipment
Sufficient manual compaction equipment must be supplied for the compacting of the graded backfill material
around and above the cables, sleeves and in trenches.
Installations
General
Trench excavations must comply with the requirements of SANS 1200 LC and SANS 1200 DA. No cables
may be laid before the site is cleaned and the mass earthworks, which is done by others, is completed.
Every trench must be kept as straight as possible and must be dug to approved levels and measurements.
The bottom must have an even contour.
Trenches dug close to railway lines, walls, roads, drains, pipes, cables, structures and on similar places
where the danger of sagging exists, must be secured against such dangers and it must be done in such a
way as to prevent possible injuries to construction personnel and the public. All these excavations must be
done to the satisfaction of the Engineer and the public authorities concerned.
Bedding materials may not be laid until the trench has been approved by the Engineer. The Engineer might
expect proof from the Contractor that the minimum depth of bedding material is provided before giving
authority for the cables to be laid.
Protection of Structures
In cases where work has to be done in the vicinity of buildings, bridges, tanks or other structures, the
Contractor must take all the necessary precautions as required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act
(Act 85: 1993) and the Mines and Industries Act of 1956, (Act 27: 1956). These precautions shall include
shoring where necessary, to ensure the safety of structures which is subject to danger during installation.
Protection of Surface and Underground Services
The Contractor must take all the necessary precautions to protect all existing services (meaning services on
the site, which is shown on the drawings) and he will be held responsible for all damages to these services,
caused by his activities. All works and protection arrangements are subject to approval and it must only be
done after consulting the owner(s) of the various services. Should a service be damaged, the Contractor
must immediately inform the Engineer and the authorities concerned. The Contractor may not repair the
damaged service, unless he is instructed to do so.
In cases where no underground services are shown on the drawings or recorded, but the possible presence
thereof cannot be discarded, the Contractor must, in conjunction with the Engineer, establish if any such
services exist within the applicable site area. The Contractor must in good time complete such investigation
before construction may start on the area concerned. A report must be issued to the Engineer whom will
make the necessary arrangements for the protection, removal or relaying of the services prior to the
commencement of any construction work.
28
Upon the discovery an underground service previously not indicated on the drawings, this service will be
classified as ‘n known service and the Contractor will be held responsible for any damages thereof during all
further works. In cases where such service is damaged with the initial discovery, the Employer will cover the
costs of repairing the service, except if the Employer can prove that the Contractor did not take the
necessary precautions and that the damage could have been prevented. Should the authorities concerned
prefer to make the changes or arrangement for protection of services on their own expenses, the Contractor
must co-operate with such authorities, and give reasonable access, working area and time to complete the
necessary work. Permanent changes to or permanent relaying of services which is necessary to complete
the work and which is authorised, will be compensated for, there will be no compensation for work carried
out and not previously investigated by the Engineer and for which no written instructions were issued.
Conduct with Respect to Water on Site
The Contractor must give proper attention to water and remove it to ensure that the works are kept dry
enough so the work can be properly executed. For this purpose he must provide, use and keep in order,
pump equipment, water sand pens, pipes and other equipment that might be needed. He must also provide
fresh drains, trenches, coffer-dams and other temporary works that might be necessary to keep damages,
inconveniences and disturbances at a minimum.

Pollution
The Contractor must take all reasonable precautions to the satisfaction of the Engineer to keep dust
disturbance, pollution of streams and inconveniences or annoyances to the public (or others) because of the
execution of the work, at a minimum.

Safety
The Contractor must at all times provide proper and adequate precaution and safety arrangements on site.
Should the Contractor fail to comply with this requirement, the Engineer will take the necessary steps to
ensure that this requirement is met and any costs incurred will be for the Contractor’s account. Complying
with this requirement does not exonerate the Contractor of his responsibilities and the Engineeries in
accordance with the Occupational Health and Safety Act (Act 85: 1993) and mines and Industries Act of
1956, (Act 27: 1956). Symbolic safety signs must comply with the applicable requirements of SANS 1186.
Minimum Base Width of Trenches
The minimum base width of each trench must be wide enough for the cable spacing which is specified in the
project specifications. Each trench must be excavated in a way that half the specified width will be left on
both sides of the designated centre line of the cable or group of cables. The trench width must be adequate
for the proper compacting of the fill materials when backfilling is done. (In the case of trenches for cable
sleeves or –ducts, see sub clause 5.1.1 of SANS 1200 LC).
Cleaning of Route
The Contractor must clean an area wide enough to ensure that his inspection is not obstructed along the
cable trench as specified in SANS 1200 C. In cases where the cable trench falls within a servitude or
passage-way of specified width, the damage to the vegetation of the named servitude or passage-way must
be limited.
Backfilling
LV Cables
In trenches containing one or more low voltage cables, the approved fill material must be cautiously placed,
in layers of 100mm un-compacted depth, throughout the width of the trench and then compacted to a
minimum compacted depth of 150mm.
29
Compaction
In areas subjected to road traffic and any other such area which is specified in the project specifications the
trenches must be refilled in layers of maximum 150mm depth (after compaction) and in case of soil sticking
together (clay material) it must be compacted up to 93% of the modified AASHTO-density or in the case of
non-sticky soil (sandy material) up to 98% of the modified AASHTO-density.
Machine compaction will not be permitted directly above the cable(s) or sleeve(s) before a layer of 300mm
depth fill material has been placed on top of the cable(s) or sleeve(s). The machine compaction must be
conducted in such a way that the forces superimposed on the cable(s) or sleeve(s) does not exceed that
superimposed by ordinary pedestrians or light vehicle traffic when the cover is already 1 m deep. If road
traffic is involved, the cable(s) must be protected by a cable-way or –sleeve of at least 100mm in diameter,
through which the cable(s) can be drawn at any time. Cable-ways beneath subways must be cast in
concrete in a suitable way, if it is required by the project specifications.
Cables at Different Depths
In situations where cables are laid at different depths in a common trench, the same procedure for placing
and compaction of the approved fill material beneath and on top of the upper cable applies as for the lower
cable.
In situations where cables have to be laid on top of each other the high voltage cables must be laid under the
low voltage cables.
Conduct with Respect to Obstructions
In cases where obstructions are encountered during excavation that demands changes to the trench or a
special kind of trench, the Contractor must have the Engineer’s approval to implement such changes before
laying the cable(s).
Excavated Material
Stacking
The excavated material must be placed along the trench in such a way that it does not obstruct or damage
adjacent fences, trees, drains, gate openings and other properties and must be heaped up in such a way
that traffic is not obstructed. Should this not be possible, the material must be removed from site, with the
Engineer’s approval and brought back later to backfill the trench after the cable(s) has been laid.
Surplus material must be removed by the Contractor and on the contractor’s own expense.

Removal of Surplus Material

Surplus material excavated from trenches must be removed from the trenches side or the servitude to a
scheduled area within 0,5 km of the source, as nominated.
Admittance to Properties on Cable Routes
Unless otherwise specified in the project specifications, the Contractor must (on his own expense) provide
owners, inhabitant and their vehicles with reasonable access to their properties which may be situated
adjacent or near the cable route(s).
Jointing Chambers
Jointing chambers must be of approved size in order to make it possible for the cable jointer to work efficient
and expeditiously. Every chamber must be adequately covered to as far as possible to prevent dust and
moisture from penetrating and must be equipped with sufficient lighting, draining and ventilation for use
during cable jointing.

Transport of Cable Drums

30
Cable drums must be carefully transported to prevent damage to the cables and to prevent disturbing the
cables. Damaged cables will be rejected. Drums may not be off-loaded by simply allowing them to roll off
the back of the truck onto the ground. Drums may only be rolled in the direction as indicated by the arrow
painted on the drum by the manufacturer. (This will ensure that the correct tension is maintained and
prevent the cable from damage later). Every drum may only have one cable length on it. Proper attention
must be given to where the drums are to be off-loaded in order to prevent unnecessary moving thereof, e.g.
at joint locations.
Handling of Drums on Site
Note: It is recommended that a correctly designed spreader must be used to load and unload the drums
with a crane.
Every drum must be mounted on jacks or on a cable-drum trailer with a horizontal supporting beam of
suitable size and strength to handle the width and weight of the drum. The drum may not be allowed to
rotate freely when the cable is rolled off. (Free rotation causes the cable to twist and loosen the windings,
which can cause the inside armouring/insulation of the cable to be stretched). The cable must enter the
trench from the top of the reel. All cables ends including that left on the drum or in a trench must be sealed
to prevent the penetration of moisture into the cable. The free cable end on the drum must be fastened to
the side of the drum.

Rollers
Rollers must be used when each cable is layed and must be carefully placed in the trenches to make sure
the cable only lies on the rollers when it is pulled in.
Communication
The Contractor must ensure good communication between the operators at the pulling end and at the reel
end of the cable while laying the cable(s).
Pulling Cable
The cable may be pulled by hand or by a wrench, but the maximum tension in the cable as specified by the
manufacturer, may not be exceeded. A cable grip must be used to pull the cable, but if specified by the
project specification, a loop connected to the cable cores and sheathing must be used. A twist connection
must be used between the loop and the rope used to pull the cable. In cases where cables have to be
drawn around corners, well lubricated skid-plates or special corner rollers must be used. Skid-plates and
rollers must be firmly secured and must be inspected regularly throughout the cable laying process to ensure
that they work properly.
Ambient Temperature During Cable Laying
In accordance with the stipulations of 5.19.2, a cable may not be installed at an ambient temperature that:
a) In the case of paper insulated cables, is lower than 10°C; or
b) In the case of PVC-insulated cables, is lower than 0°C.
In situation where the ambient temperature is continuously at a low a temperature, the cable may be
installed, with the written approval of the Engineer. Special arrangements are made to keep the cable
temperature above the minimum temperature specified in 5.19.1 for at least 24 hours before installation.

Cable Bends
No cable bend may have a smaller radius than the minimum radius specified by the cable manufacturer.
This radius shall never be less than the radius prescribed by the relevant SANS specification.
Cables Laid in Sleeves, Cable Ways, etc.
Cables laid under roads or railway lines, must be laid through sleeves or cable-ways that are strong enough
to withstand the expected shock loads applied by traffic. The laying of cable-ways and sleeves must comply
31
with the applicable requirements of SANS 1200 LB and SANS 1200 LC. After the cable-ways and sleeves
had been laid, they must be cleaned thoroughly to remove roughness and sharp edges that can damage the
cable. The ends of spare sleeves and cable-ways must be properly sealed and if the project specification
requires a pull wire, this must be installed. The position of these sleeves and cable-ways must be identified
in the project specifications.
Spacing Between Cables and Other Services
The minimum spacing between electrical cables and other services must be in accordance with the project
specifications.
In case of trenches used for a number of electrical cables the minimum horizontal free space required to
prevent de-rating of the cables, are as follows:
a) In the case of cables with a conductor size of not more than 70mm2 : 150mm;

b) In the case of cables with a conductor size of at least 70mm2 : 250mm.

LV Cable Joints
No joints are `allowed in distribution cables, accept where it is specifically authorised. The low voltage cable
in a continuous cable run must be of one size, except where a change in cable size is necessary, in which
case the change must be approved by the Engineer.
Marking of Cables
An approved identification plate or label, on which the following information is given, must be attached to
every high voltage and low voltage cable in every substation, miniature substation and CDU:
a) The size of the conductors; and
b) The number of phases; and
c) The route (“from” or “to”); and
d) The system voltages.

Reinstatement
The reinstatement of areas over cable- and pipe trench excavations must be executed as specified in sub
clause 5.9 of SANS 1200 DB.
Marking and Recording of Cable Routes
If required by the Engineer the cable run must be marked in such a way that the underground position
thereof can be traced at any time.
In case of straight runs, the cable route markers may be placed at intervals not exceeding 50 m or as
specified by the Engineer.
The Contractor must measure and indicate on plan all the detail of the installed cable, the position of each
cable run, the depth of each cable, as well as all the joints and cable-ways which are installed. The name of
the cable jointer and the date on which the joint was made must be indicated on the plans and, if specified by
the project specifications, on the cables as well. Drawings of the cable routes “as built” must be supplied
immediately by the Contractor to the Engineer after the Contractor has finished the work covered by the
contract.
Tolerances
Degree of accuracy II applies to approved backfill material and the placing thereof.
Tests
Density of Bedding and Back Fill Material

32
The Engineer may demand a density test to determine the grade of density at the bottom layer of the trench
and of the approved back fill material.

If the density is lower than specified (see 5.10.3) the Engineer may demand the removal of the material,
replacing of the bottom layer or the back fill material with the same or other material, and the re-compaction,
on the Contractor’s own expense.
The Contractor is responsible for all tests done as a result of the removing and replacing of material.
Electrical Tests
Every part of the cable network between CDU’s and substations must be tested for electrical continuity and
for insulation resistance. Acceptance tests must consist of the following.
a) Phase identification test
A test must be done to determine if the connections between the end points are correct. All cables must be
phased out before connected to the switchgear.
b) Insulation resistance test (Low voltage cables)
The resistance of the insulation of every core to earth and to every other core must be determined. These
tests must be done with a 2 000V insulation resistance tester on paper and PVC insulated cables.

13. INSTALLATION OF CABLES

General
All cable sleeves manholes and cable markers are to be provided by the contractor unless otherwise
specified. Others will provide cable ducts in the floors of buildings unless otherwise specified.
Cable run indoors shall be supported on cable trays or cable rack, secured thereto by heavy the Engineery
plastic strapping. The cables shall be fixed at intervals not greater than those stipulated in SANS 10142 and
shall be spaced sufficiently to avoid de-rating in terms of SANS 10142 – 1. Cables shall be individually fixed
so that any one may be removed from a group without disturbing the others.
Cables installed in trenches shall be installed at a depth of 1000mm below final ground level for LV cables,
1200mm for Intermediate Voltage cables and 1200mm for MV cables. All cable depth measurements shall
be made to the top of the cable when laid directly in ground or to the top of the duct or sleeve where these
are provided.
The contractor may only deviate from the above depth provided prior authority in writing has been obtained
from the Engineer.
A yellow PVC cable warning tape with the wording "DANGER" shall be installed above all cables installed in
cable trenches.
Every run of cable shall be a single length without joints. Say that where a run exceeds the general drum
length of where the length of a run is increased after the cable is delivered on site, a through box will be
permitted. Such through boxes shall be so placed as to afford easy access for maintenance and repair;
when they are required in underground cable runs the contractor shall provide special cable markers to
locate them.
All cable tails shall be provided with either cable lugs or ferrules as may be appropriate. At each sealing end
straps-on cable markers shall be fixed, showing clearly and indelibly the number and size of cable cores and
the destination of the cable.
Cable routes

33
Cables shall follow the routes shown on the drawings; the routes shall only be varied with the written
permission of the Engineer. Where no routes are defined on the drawings the contractor may select routes
to his reasonable preference but shall obtain written approval of them before installing the cables.
The contractor shall, before trenching commences, familiarizes him with the routes and site conditions and
the procedure and order of doing the work shall be planned in conjunction with the general construction
program for other services and building requirements.
The contractor shall acquaint himself with the position of all the existing services such as storm water pipes,
water mains, sewer mains, gas pipes, telephone cables, etc. before any excavations are commenced. For
this purpose he shall approach the Engineer’s representative, the local municipal authority and any other
authority which may be involved, in writing.
The Engineer reserves the right to alter any cable route or portion thereof in advance of cable laying.
Payment in respect of any additional or wasted work involved shall be at the documented rates.
The removal of obstructions along the cable routes shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer.
Trenching
Trenching shall be programmed in advance and the approved program shall not be departed from except
with the consent of the Engineer.
The Contractor will be held responsible for damage to any existing services brought to his attention by the
relevant authorities and shall be responsible for the cost of repairs.
The Contractor shall take all the necessary precautions and provide the necessary barriers, warning signs
and/or lights to ensure that the public and/or employees on site are not endangered.

The Contractor shall ensure that the excavations will not endanger existing structures, roads, railways, other
site constructions or other property.
Trenches shall connect the points shown on the drawings in a straight line. The Engineer beforehand shall
approve any deviations due to obstructions or existing services.
Trenches shall be as straight as possible and shall be excavated to a depth of 1150mm x 450mm wide for
LV cables, to a depth of 1250mm x 450mm wide for Intermediate Voltage cables and to a depth of 1350mm
x 450mm wide for MV cables.
The bottom of the trench shall be of smooth contour, and shall have no sharp dips or rises, which may cause
tensile forces in the cable during back filling.
The excavated material shall be placed adjacent to each trench in such a manner as to prevent nuisance,
interference or damage to adjacent drains, gateways, trenches, water furrows, other works, properties or
traffic. Where this is not possible the excavated materials shall be removed from site and returned for back
filling on completion of cable lying.
Trenches across roads, access ways or footpaths shall not be left open. If cables cannot be laid immediately
the Contractor shall install temporary “bridges” or cover plates of sufficient strength to accommodate the
traffic concerned.
In the event of damage to other services or structures during trenching operations the Contractor shall
immediately notify the Engineer and institute repairs.
Prior to cable laying the trench shall be inspected thoroughly and all objects likely to cause damage to the
cables either during or after lying shall be removed.
Where ground conditions are likely to reduce maximum current carrying capacities of cables or where the
cables are likely to be subjected to chemical or other damage or electrolytic action, the Engineer shall be
notified before installing the cables. The Engineer will advise on the course of action to be taken.

34
Extreme care shall be taken not to disturb surveyor’s pegs. These pegs shall not be covered with excavated
material. If the surveyor’s pegs are disturbed, a person qualified to do so shall replace them.

Bedding
HV Cables: The bottom of the trench shall be filled across the full width with a 150mm layer of river sand.
After cable laying a further layer of 150mm river sand shall be provided to extend to 150mm above the
cables.
LV Cables: The bottom of the trench shall be boxed and filled with a 100mm layer of concrete and steel
pins installed every 2m to secure the cable to so as ensure minimum 150mm side cover. After cable laying a
further layer of concrete shall be provided to extend to 150mm above the cables. The concrete encasement
shall be 300mm x 450mm. The concrete encasement shall be enforced using bonding agent and steel mesh
(100x100mm) where cables would be susceptible to theft. Cables should be slack when encased and
should not be under tension. Should the Contractor have an alternative method of installation, the
Contractor is to submit a detailed method statement.
Backfilling
The Contractor shall not commence with the backfilling of trenches without prior notification to the Engineer
so that the cable installation may be inspected. Should the Contractor fail to give a timeous notification, the
trenches shall be re-opened at the Contractor’s cost. Such an inspection will not be unreasonably delayed.
For all cables, a coloured plastic-marking tape shall be installed 200mm above the cable. The tape shall be
yellow, with red skull and crossbones with the words “ELECTRIC CABLE”. These markings shall not be
more than 1m apart from centre to centre.

Back filling shall be undertaken with soil suitable to ensure settling without voids. The maximum allowable
diameter of stones present in the back fill material is 75mm.
The Contractor shall have allowed in his bid for the importation of suitable backfill material if required.
The backfill shall be compacted in layers of 150mm and sufficient allowance shall be made for final
settlement. The Contractor shall maintain the refilled trench at his expense for the duration of the contract.
Surplus material shall be removed from site and suitably disposed of.
On completion, the surface shall be made good to match the surrounding area.
In the case of roadways or paved areas the excavations shall be consolidated to the original density of the
surrounding material and the surface finish reinstated.

Blasting
No guarantee is given or implied that blasting will not be required.
Should blasting be necessary and approved by the Engineer, the Contractor shall obtain the necessary
authority from the relevant Government Departments and Local Authorities. The Contractor shall take full
responsibility and observe all conditions and regulations set forth by the above authorities.

14. ELECTRICAL LV SUPPLY CABLES

General
All low voltage underground cables shall be stranded copper-core, 600/1000 Volt grade, multi-cored, PVC
insulated, PVC covered, wire armoured and PVC encased (PVC/SWA/PVC).
All cables shall comply with SANS 150 and 1507 as amended, where applicable. Cables shall be of new
stock and must still be sealed when brought on site. If these conditions are not met it may lead to the cables
being removed from the site and their being replaced with the correct type all at the Contractor’s expense.
The Contractor must do all measuring on site himself in respect of lengths of cable, earth wires and ditches
required. The lengths given in the schedules are only allowed for bid purposes. Payments will only be made
35
for the lengths of cable actually installed and at the bidded tariffs. In their bids, Bidders must allow for cut-off
lengths of cables and bends.

The storage, transport, handling and lying of cables must conform to approved and acceptable practice and
must meet the requirements of SANS 10198 as amended. Cables which are cut and left open for a period of
time before being coupled must be sealed in the prescribed manner. When such cable ends are flooded by
water they must be subjected to the tests prescribed by the Engineer.
The Contractor shall have adequate suitable equipment and labour available to prevent damage to cables.
Before the cable is installed, the cable trenches must be carefully inspected and any objects, which may
damage the cable during or after installation, must be removed.
Sealing glands for PVC insulated cables
The sealing glands must consist of a sleeve in which a conical bush screws into one side and a nickel-brass
or galvanized steel lock nut is situated on the other side. The galvanizing must meet SANS 763 as amended
standards. The sleeve must have a hollow groove on the side on which the cable enters the sleeve to house
the top ring of the waterproofing mantle.
The waterproofing mantle must be manufactured from non-weathering neoprene or other synthetic rubber
and must be proof against water, oil and sunlight. These mantles must fit snugly over the sealing glands and
the cables.
Sealing glands must have a 150 screw thread and must be suitable for the specified cable sizes.
Cable joints
Cable joints are not permissible except where specifically approved. No joints will be allowed where the
specified length of cable appears on a drum.

15. CONDUCTORS

Cables used for wiring the installation must be 1000V grade PVC insulated cables for LV installations,
Contractor so confirm voltage grades for other voltages. Heat resistant cables must be heatproof PCP
insulated (e.g. B.I.C.C. or other approved type). Cables must not be old stock and must be delivered on site
with their seals unbroken. PVC insulated conductors must meet SANS 150 and 1507 as amended
standards and bear the SANS mark. Conductors for light circuits must be 1,5mm² and those for outlet socket
circuits 2,5mm², unless specified otherwise.
Because of the distortion of insulating materials at temperatures above 57°C, PVC cables must not be
directly attached to the terminal clamps of equipment such as stoves, geysers, built-in electrical heaters and
any other electrical apparatus or equipment (including light accessories) of which the temperature exceeds
57°C.

16. EQUIPMENT OF SWITCHBOARDS AND DISTRIBUTION KIOSKS

The fault-breaking capacity of each breaker shall be certified by IEC test to be not less than the prospective
fault levels marked on the wiring schedules. When used as main L.T. switches protecting transformers, they
shall be submitted to the Supply Authority for trip testing.
Moulded case circuit-breakers shall comply with IEC 157-1 or SANS 156: 1987 as amended shall be of fixed
or draw-out execution as set out in the Project Specification. It shall have fault-breaking capacities certified
by I.E.C. test to be equal to or greater than the prospective fault levels marked on the wiring schedules.
Wherever possible, circuit breakers shall bear the SANS mark.
Miniature circuit-breakers shall comply with SANS 156: 1987 as amended and shall bear the SANS mark.
The fault-breaking capacity of miniature circuit breakers shall be certified by SANS test to be not less than
the values set out in the wiring schedules.

36
Current-limiting circuit breakers, suitably certified, are acceptable in all cases.
In general circuit-breaker overload trip systems of the thermal or hydraulic-magnetic types are equally
acceptable. In cases where high ambient temperatures or widely varying extremes of ambient temperature
are expected hydraulic-magnetic devices shall be preferred: alternatively thermal devices with ambient
temperature compensation may be offered. Where circuit breakers have to sustain motor-starting currents
and the like, circuit breakers shall be hydraulic-magnetic with appropriate tripping characteristics. Where
described in the Project Specification as being for short-circuit protection only, the circuit breakers shall be
supplied without overload trip devices.
Switches shall comply with the requirements of SANS 152: 1987 as amended and shall be capable of safely
making onto fault currents of the magnitudes shown on the wiring schedules. Main switches of distribution
boards shall additionally comply with the requirements of SANS 152: 1987 applicable to switch-
disconnecters. The main switches shall be rated for uninterrupted the Engineery. Other switches shall be
rated for 8-hour the Engineery – the utilization category shall in all cases be AC22. All switches and switch-
disconnecters shall bear the SANS mark.
Contactors shall comply with SANS 1092: 1993 and shall be rated to perform not less than 1 000 000
operations at the current ratings and the Engineeries quoted on the wiring schedules. They shall be so fixed
as to ensure adequate coil ventilation. Contactors shall comply with the detailed requirements set out later in
this Specification.
The internal wiring of switchboards shall be done with colour-coded PVC-insulated stranded conductors and
shall include all phase, neutral, earth and control wires between equipment and to terminal blocks. Wiring
channels shall be made spacious enough to permit the easy passage of all circuit wiring with adequate
spacing between different circuits to promote ventilation. All the wires of each circuit or sub-circuit shall be
braided together with approved strapping and shall be so arranged as to permit any individual circuit to be
examined or renewed without disturbing any other circuits. Stranded conductors shall be terminated in
crimped lugs of ferrules; manual crimping shall be done with makers’ special tools which will not release until
the full crimping pressure has been achieved; the ends of conductors from 50mm² cross-sectional areas
upwards shall be crimped by hydraulic machine.
All labels shall be of plastic “sandwich board” material, the legends being engraved through the front plastic
layer to the contrasting inner layer.
The lettering of legends shall not be less than 6mm high in sans-serif capitals; white lettering on black
ground or black lettering on white ground shall be selected as necessary to ensure maximum legibility and
contrast with the switchboard finish. All labels shall be secured by at least two bolts or rivets per label and
shall be accurately level and central over their subjects.
Bus bars shall be of copper or aluminium and shall comply with SANS 1195: 1978. Copper bus bars shall be
tinned after fabrication; the current ratings shall be those assigned by the Copper Development Association.
Aluminium bus bars shall be of bright finish; the current ratings shall be those assigned by Alcan Aluminium
S.A. Ltd. Multiple bars shall be arranged with air gaps between the sections, equal to the section thickness.
Insulating busbar supports shall be provided at intervals related to the prospective short-circuit fault currents,
the following table being a guide for single-section bus bars:

Busbar Section kA at 400V for Insulating Spacing of

mm x mm 450mm 450mm 450mm 450mm

25 x 9,5 29 21 17 14

40 x 9,5 47 35 27 23

50 x 9,5 55 47 39 33

75 x 9,5 61 53 47 43

37
100 x 9,5 67 58 52 47

Cable sealing ends and glands shall be fixed to perforate metal gland plates or racks rigidly fixed in the
boards and so positioned that terminating the cables is made easy.

17. LV DISTRIBUTION PANELS

Before the commencement of manufacture, detailed drawings of the proposed panels and boards are to be
submitted to the Engineer for approval. Full schematic details of the layout and wiring of the boards are to
be provided with these drawings.
LV Distribution Panels, shall be manufactured from 3CR12 sheet metal, pickled and passivated and painted
by spray painting or powder coating to withstand the detrimental effects of UV radiation, abrasion, heavy rain
and prolonged exposure to moisture, for a period of at least 15 years without any visible sign of corrosion.
Sheet metal shall be of the rust resistant type 3CR12 with minimum thickness of 3,0mm. Welding materials
shall be of the same quality as the base metal.
After machining and before painting, all fat and grease shall be removed by using a suitable solvent.
All boards shall be completely vermin proofed. No holes other than those required for cable or conduit entry
shall be allowed. Should extra holes be required for temporary installations, these holes shall be suitably
blocked off on the removal of these temporary installations. Where doors or removable covers are situated
and are required to be dust proofed, they shall be dust proofed by means of a minimum of 10mm thick
non-perishable gasket, resistant to deterioration from heat, chemicals and moisture and capable of being
compressed to half its original thickness. Where doors are flush fitting, gaskets shall be glued to the fixed
flange. In the case of projecting doors, gaskets shall be glued to the door and not the associated framework.
Similarly suitable gaskets shall be used wherever push-buttons, indicator lights, isolator handles, etc. pass
through a door or panel. Switchgear shall be vermin proof both in the service and isolated positions.
Equipment shall be in accordance with the applicable SABS Specifications and Codes and with this
Specification. Selection of materials, finishes, equipment, etc. shall also be based on the conditions where
the boards and equipment are to be installed, e.g. corrosive, hot, wet, damp, dusty, etc. Boards, equipment
and materials which are exposed to sunlight and are susceptible to damage or accelerated deterioration due
to the UV, shall be protected:
 By means of a housing, covering or canopy from direct sunlight, or

 Shall be treated with a protective surface coating.

Doors shall open 180° and access to the mini-substation or kiosk from the back shall be possible through
doors. Doors shall also be adequately earthed.
The gland plate shall be manufactured of hot dipped, galvanised steel of 3mm minimum thickness. Sufficient
holes shall be pre-punched for the number and sizes of cables specified.
The boards shall be extendible and have an initial spare cubicle capacity of 20% for kiosks, 25% for LV
Distribution Panels or as specified on the drawings.
Sufficient removable panels shall be provided to afford access to all equipment for maintenance, service and
replacement purposes.

The back panels shall be of similar construction to the front panels.

The paint finish of all LV Distribution Panels on the interior and exterior and on the panels on which switch
gear is to be mounted shall be of a high quality and shall be suitable for exterior use. Paint shall be applied
to surfaces prepared in accordance with SANS 630 grade 1 paint. The total thickness of the dried paint shall
be a minimum of 0,1mm. Care must be taken that all the sides are properly covered with paint.
A solid copper bus bar shall be provided for each phase and neutral and shall be mounted on appropriately
coloured ceramic or similar insulators. The colours of insulators shall correspond with the phase colours that
38
are red, yellow, blue and black for the neutral. Bus bars shall be easily reachable. Except where otherwise
prescribed, the minimum dimensions of the Bus bars shall be 6mm x 25mm x 300mm long. A minimum
clearance space of 100mm shall be maintained between bus bars.
Connection to bus bars shall be by using lugs, cadmium plated high tensile steel bolts, washers and nuts.
A 6mm x 25mm x 330mm solid copper-earthed bus bar shall be installed with a minimum of ten, 8mm bolts,
complete with spring washers, brass washers and nuts. The bus bar shall be provided with internal thread
and the heads of the bolts shall be soldered in position at the back.
The gland plate shall be bonded to the earth bar through a 70mm² stranded copper conductor.
LV Distribution Panel earthing shall consist of 3 lengths 70mm² stranded copper conductors of 7m each,
installed in such a way to form 120° angles between the conductors (Crow foot). At the centre of the 120°
angle all wires shall be Exo-welded together with a 70mm² earth conductor to the main earth bar of the LV
Distribution Panel. All earth wires shall enter the LV Distribution Panel via the normal cable opening of the
LV Distribution Panel. Additional earthing is to be installed to achieve the required earthing level specified.
The LV cables shall rise into the unit from below through a plinth opening and shall be fitted to the gland
plate with suitable glands. The individual cores of the cables shall be equipped with lugs and connected to
the bus bars.
Services shall be connected to the three phases to provide a balanced load as far as possible.
All internal wiring to the boards shall be carried out in PVC insulated to SANS 150 having a minimum of 3
strands per conductor. All wiring shall be neatly bundled with nylon ties and shall be arranged in horizontal
and vertical directions only. All wiring shall be neatly grouped and laced. Wiring shall not be run at random
but shall follow board construction features as far as is possible.
Only wires of the same phase shall be grouped or bunched together.
No excessive bunching of wiring, which will impair the current carrying capacity, will be accepted.
All wiring is to be kept free and away from any exposed terminals or other un-insulated current carrying
parts.
No joints will be allowed in internal wiring, and all connections to busbars or earth bars shall be made with
tinned copper cable lugs soldered or crimped to the ends of the conductors and bolted to busbars by means
of cadmium-plated high tensile steel bolts and nuts provided with spring washers.
Connections to terminals shall suit the connectors used, but in any case terminal clamp screws shall not
bear directly on the conductor. Hexagonally crimped lugs or ferrules shall be used on all conductors
including and exceeding 2.5mm2.
Wiring of any one cubicle shall not run through other cubicles unless the wiring is run in conduit or ducting.
Wires shall be clearly marked at all termination points in accordance with the numbering of the wiring
diagram, by means of numbered ferrules, or other approved method.
When the board main switch is switched off, no live incoming or other wiring shall be accessible. The
incoming terminals must be screened. Where connections are taken from the incoming side of the main
switch, a screen marked ‘Isolate Feeder before removing Screen’ shall cover them. If any circuits are
energised from other sources, clear warning notices to that effect shall be fitted and such terminals shall be
clearly marked.
Removable links shall be provided in each contactor and control circuit for connecting future interlock
connections.
All meters and circuit breakers shall be labelled with engraved plastic labels at least 1mm thick with 12mm
letter size labels and shall be fitted to slide in frames.

39
All LV Distribution Panels shall be clearly marked to indicate the name and/or number of the LV Distribution
Panel and from where the LV Distribution Panel is fed and the size of the feeder cable.

Danger notices type WS7 to SANS 1186/1987 manufactured from plate aluminium, measuring approximately
150mm x 150mm, shall be fitted to each door in a central easily visible position.
All safety warning notices shall be in English. All boards shall be labelled in the sequence shown on the
drawings and as specified or approved. The Contractor shall obtain final information and approval before
labelling any board. Black letters on white background shall be used for all normal labels and red letters on
white or yellow background for danger notices. All labels used shall be engraved trafolite. The main
isolating switch or switches shall be clearly labelled in accordance with the regulations. Size and origin of
supply cables and busbars shall be clearly labelled on all boards. All grouped single, double and three pole
circuit breakers on distribution boards shall be properly labelled, indicating number of circuit controlled. All
equipment situated inside the board, e.g. contactors, relays, fused, timers and time switches shall be clearly
marked, indicating function, circuit controlled and fuse rating. The main designation label shall be fitted at
the top centre of the board and shall be in English. Individual labels are to be fitted to each compartment
door and corresponding fixed portion of rear panel (if accessible). All circuit labels shall be the same size for
boards or similar equipment supplied under this Contract. These labels shall be white/black/white
composition engraved trafolite labels secured by self-tapping screws or channelling.

Letter size: Main label - 20mm, other labels - 6mm.

The following labels shall be installed in English:
 NOTICE/LABEL warning to switch off in case of accidental contact, etc.
 NOTICES in all places as required by the Occupational Health and Safety Act of procedures
prescribed in case of fire and/or electric shock.
 NOTICES on doors together with warning sign prohibiting unauthorised entry.
Labels on power cables shall be attached with approved type plastic adjustable grip clips. The labels for
power cables shall be provided with holes for the clips to pass through for fastening. Each power cable label
shall be fastened with at least two clips. A legend card, covered by removable 2mm thick transparent acrylic
plastic ('PERSPEX') or equivalent panel, shall be installed on the inside of the door of the boards or cubicles
and circuits shall be designated on this board.
Brass bolts and nuts shall be used to mount all ancillaries.

Bidders may not present LV Distribution Panels manufactured from fibreglass instead of materials as
specified.
The Contractor shall arrange for an inspection of the LV Distribution Panels by the Engineer before delivery.
LV Distribution Panel housing Specification:
The enclosure shall be of 3CR12 with a minimum thickness of 3mm in accordance with the requirements of
NRS 004.
The 3CR12 shall be treated for corrosion as follows:
 Blasting profile of SA 2½ on all surfaces.
 Edge primer of zinc phosphate of between 20 and 25 micron thick.
The colour of the enclosure shall be to SANS 1091.
Reinforced doors must be mounted and recessed inward by no less than 3mm.
There shall be no external hinges or holes, hinges shall be robust and vandal proof.

Doors shall be fitted with an internal tamper proof locking arrangement system.

40
The tamper proof locking arrangement must be designed in order to allow remote opening and closing from
a control room as well as on site by an operator. Only one door on the MV side and one door on the LV side
of the enclosure shall be remotely opened all other doors shall be opened manually from the inside after the
opening of the remote controlled doors.
The tamper proof locking arrangement shall be a three-point locking system operated by an encoded remote
control and device. All mechanical parts are to be manufactured from stainless steel or other corrosion proof
material as the Employer may approve. The locking mechanism shall incorporate a rotating centre spindle
piece that when turned through 90º, will engage a tag onto a lip on the kiosk body and also two rods of at
least 8mm diameter into slots on a lip at the top and bottom of the kiosk. The locking mechanism shall de
designed to offer a very high degree of security without the use of padlocks. It shall not be possible to
remove the remote unless the locking mechanism is in the FULLY LOCKED position. The locking
mechanism shall have a spring activated latch that holds the mechanism when locked in that position until
operated remotely.
Nothing must obstruct the operator from operating the switchgear when doors are opened.
The enclosure shall be weather proof and safe to operate in any weather condition.

18. PHOTO- ELECTRIC SWITCHES

This unit must consist of a photocell, thermal starter and switch. The body of this unit must be manufactured
from strong material to protect it against tampering, and it must also have good anti-weathering features; it
must be capable of withstanding ultra-violet rays and long periods of exposure to the sun.
The unit must be a wall-mountable type and it must be fitted with a suitable mounting frame. The unit must
be mounted over a 60mm (diameter) round draw-box of which the lid must be fitted with a grommet to protect
conductors entering the draw-box. The unit must be installed in such a way that it is not activated by
ambient or any other artificial light source.
The unit must be pre-set in the factory so that it will switch on at an illumination level of approximately 54 Lux
and switch off again at 108 Lux. A time delay of at least 15 seconds must be provided for to prevent the
switch from being activated by lightning or other brief changes in the illumination level.

19. LUMINAIRES

Luminaires shall conform to SANS 10098-1 & -2 or IEC equivalent and shall bear the SANS 60598-2-3 and
SANS 60598-2-5 safety mark or equivalent International rating.
Lighting circuits are numbered on the drawings. The numbering of the circuits defines the circuitry and
control required.
The installation and mounting of luminaires shall conform to this specification.
All luminaires/lamps/LED modules shall bear the approved mark of any of the following:
 SANS;
 IEC;

 ANSI;
 CIE;
 IESNA.

PC Amount
A PC amount is allowed in the Bill of Quantities for the installation of the light fittings for tender purposes.

41
This provisional sum may be deleted in part or in whole, and shall only be expended upon written instruction
by the Engineer.

Once a successful tenderer have been approved and appointed, the name of the lighting suppliers shall be
forwarded to the successful tenderer to order the light fittings.

20. INSTALLATION OF LUMINAIRES

Install and connect all luminaires as specified and shown on the Construction Drawings.
All luminaires shall be complete with lamp / LED module, dimmable control gear, etc. as specified.

21. STANDBY GENERATOR

Scope of the Installation

The installation comprises the installation of a standby diesel generating set and all ancillary equipment
necessary to comply with the requirements of this specification.
PC Amount
A PC amount is allowed in the Bill of Quantities for the installation of the standby diesel generating for
tender purposes.
This provisional sum may be deleted in part or in whole, and shall only be expended upon written instruction
by the Engineer.
The Generator supplier is responsible for the supply, delivery and installation of the standby diesel
generating set complete with sound proof canopy, 500L diesel tank and change-over set.
The electrical contractor is responsible for the installation of the LV cables from the standby diesel
generating set to the main LV Distribution Board.

The Engineer have approved the standby diesel generating set to be installed and is to be ordered from the
following supplier who is fully aware of the standby diesel generating set that is required by the Engineer.

The standby diesel generating set supplier to be contacted is as follows:

DGTPower Systems
Tel. No. (051) 4334-610
Contact Person: Thys Ackerman

22. 5KVA UPS SYSTEM AND 15 MINUTE BACK-UP BATTERIES

A PC amount is allowed in the Bill of Quantities for the installation of the 5kVA UPS system complete with
15 minutes back-up batteries by a specialist UPS supplier for tender purposes.
This provisional sum may be deleted in part or in whole, and shall only be expended upon written instruction
by the Engineer.
The UPS supplier is responsible for the supply, delivery and installation of the entire UPS system complete
with the 15 minutes back-up batteries system complete with all internal wiring.
The electrical contractor is responsible for the installation of the LV cables from the main LV Distribution
Board to the UPS panel and from the UPS panel back to the main LV Distribution Board via the two isolators
provided, and the connection of the LV cables onto the incoming and outgoing circuit breakers in the main
LV Distribution Board.

42
The Engineer have approved the type of UPS system to be installed and the UPS system complete with 15
minutes back-up batteries are to be ordered from the following supplier who is fully aware of the UPS unit
that is required by the Engineer.
The UPS supplier to be contacted is as follows:
Mandla Tata Power Solutions
Tel. No. (012) 342-7065
Contact Person: Joey Burnard

23. ACCESS CONTROL

General

This specification covers the provision and installation of an Access Control System and cabling at the doors
as shown on the drawings.

The Access Control System shall be of the type as specified in the Bill of Quantities, Schedule 7.

Equipment Power Supply

The card reader controller and card reader power supply shall be fed from 230 V mains from the electrical
distribution board, installed by the electrical contractor.

The standby batteries for the card readers and controller power supplies shall be capable of supporting the
magna lock operation for at least 2 hours.

The magna lock shall have a retaining force of at least 300kg.

The emergency break glass unit (EBGU) shall be green and priced with a transparent lid and seal. The
EBGU shall be wired in such a way so that the power to the magna-lock is disconnected when the EBGU is
activated.

The door magnetic switches shall be similar or equal to Elock with a contact rating at 12VDC and shall be of
the recessed or surface type.

The door closer shall be similar or equal to Dorma.

The wiring shall run in PVC conduit, installed by the electrical contractor, and EGA trunking where required.
The EGA trunking shall have corner and T-pieces and end caps.

Operation and Maintenance Manuals

The manual shall be complete with a CONTENTS LIST and be bound in suitable hard cover binders with the
site name displayed on the outside.

Three sets of manuals shall be submitted at First Delivery or within two weeks thereafter.

The manuals shall contain the operating, technical and maintenance data of the fire detection and security
equipment installed.

Training of Staff

The contractor shall train the staff for at least one (1) hour.This training shall take place before first delivery.

Warranty Period

The contractor shall include in the tender price a "free" warranty period of 12 months. This shall include all
repairs/replacement of defective equipment.

43
A 24-hour repair service shall be available at all times, including public holidays.

24. MANHOLES

The electrical contractor is responsible for the built of a 1000 x 1000 x 1000mm manhole as indicated on the
Site Plan..

SECTION C - DETAIL SPECIFICATION FOR AN AUTOMATIC ADDRESSABLE

ANALOGUE FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

1. GENERAL

This specification covers the provision and installation of a Fire Detection System comprising of a Fire Panel,
Mimic Panel, break glass units, optical and heat detectors, loop sounders and cabling as shown on the
drawings at the Admin Building, Refuelling Area, Guard House, Staff Entrance Guard House and Training
Room.
The Fire Detection System shall be similar or equal to the Ziton ZP3 4 Loop Panel and shall integrate with
the existing Fire Detection System on the Campus.
If there is any discrepancy between drawings and specifications, the specifications shall be followed.
1.SUPPLEMENTARY SPECIFICATIONS AND DRAWINGS
When a specification or drawing is quoted, the latest issue of the specification or drawing shall be followed,
unless otherwise specified.

44
2. INSPECTION

The Engineer reserves the right to arrange for the inspection of all goods forming part of any contract or
order, at any stage before final acceptance and by means it may think fit and when such inspection is to be
carried out, the relevant contracts, orders and sub-orders shall be endorsed accordingly.
When inspection at the contractor’s works or warehouse is specified, the Engineer’s authorised inspector
and the Engineer shall have free access to the premises of the contractor at all times during working hours.
He shall be free to inspect work which is the subject of the contract or order, at any stage of manufacture
and may reject any goods which are found to be incomplete, defective or in any way not in conformity with
the terms of the contract or order and the contractor shall afford all reasonable facilities for such access and
inspection.
The contractor shall supply, without charge to the Engineer’s authorised inspector and the Engineer, all
tools, gauges, templates and other equipment which may be required for checking the accuracy of the work;
shall provide the labour necessary for inspecting the work in accordance with requirements specified in the
contract or order and shall render all reasonable assistance in carrying out this checking and inspecting.
The contractor shall prepare and supply, without charge to the Engineer, all test pieces, samples and
specimens; shall provide all labour and apparatus for carrying out tests and analysis in accordance with the
terms of the contract or order and render all reasonable assistance in making such tests and analyses.

3. CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE

The tenderer shall indicate, section by section, whether or not his quotation complies in every respect with
this specification.
If alternative quotations are submitted, all divergences from this specification shall be clearly stated.

4. SAMPLES

Technical literature consisting of circuit diagrams, a circuit description and a flow chart using high level
language shall be submitted for comparative evaluation, together with a sample of the system covered by
this specification if called for. The sample shall be forwarded to the Engineer for approval. The sample will
be regarded as being identical to the system for which this tender is submitted.
Failure to comply with the above will invalidate the tender.

5. GENERAL DESCRIPTION

The fire detection system shall comprise of a central control unit, connected by two wires to field devices,
including fire detection devices, alarm devices and control devices, located throughout the building area.
The control unit shall continuously monitor the analogue status of all sensing devices, and initiate action
when a fire or smoke condition is present.

The system shall be designed to provide an early warning utilising the most effective detection methods
appropriate to the protected areas. In addition, preference should be given to detectors and sensing
methods that are environmentally friendly and that do not contain hazardous substances. The following is
the order of preference for detection methods.
1 -Optical and Heat smoke sensors
The alarm management shall be field configurable from the control panel via a key pad to enable the system
to be tailored to suit the protected building, and to permit future changes. This configuration shall be
maintained under power failure conditions.
The system shall be modular in design and shall conform to the SANS 10139 code of practice.

45
The control unit shall have a front panel comprising of indicating LED’s, control keyboard, and LCD display,
as described in detail later.

Four levels of access into the system menu via the keypad are to be provided.
These are to be as follows:
Level 1:Operator(no access code required)
Level 2:Maintenance Technician(access code required)
Level 3:Commissioning(access code plus key)
Level 4:Access code changes(access code plus key)
Facilities for “locking-off” controls are to be provided.
The control unit shall have the following approvals:
Loss Prevention Certificate Board UK (LPCB)
Verband der Schaden Versicherer Germany (VDS)
The control unit shall also conform to the following standards.
Control UnitSABS EN54-2 (Draft 1996)
Smoke DetectorsSABS EN54-7 (1996)
Heat DetectorsSABS EN54-5 (1996)
MultisensorsIS07240-15 (Draft 1996)

Call pointsSABS EN54-11 (Draft 1996) or BS 5839-2

6. POLLING SYSTEM

The system is to incorporate a polling system which polls each detector individually and reads information in
analogue form. The idle value shall be continuously updated in order to compensate for ageing and
atmospheric conditions. The panel shall make decisions based upon the information obtained from each
detector. System polling time shall be less than two seconds for each complete scan of all devices attached.
Special quick scan algorithms shall be used in case of manual call point interrupts, smoke alarm interrupts
and control output updates.

Communication circuit
A 2-wire circuit is to be used for power and communication between the panel and the detectors.
System control
All communication shall be under the control of the control unit, which shall sequentially poll each device in
turn and authorise communication.
No device shall communicate with the control panel without authority.

The control unit must be able to read information from a device or send instructions to a device.
Device address
Each device on line must be uniquely identifiable by the control unit. This must be achieved by pre-setting
the address of each device.
Removal of a detector head from its base must extend a fault condition to the control unit.
Device identification

46
The identification of each type of address unit and each type of sensor (i.e. ionisation detector, heat detector,
sprinkler switch) must be transmitted to the panel on each polling scan.

Device status
The condition of each line device, including circuit, calibration and contamination, must be transmitted to the
panel on each polling scan.
Device sensitivity
Alarm sensitivity relative to each analogue line device is to be individually adjustable, device by device, by
the control panel.
Not less than four levels of adjustment are required for each device as follows:
Smoke Detectors(1)1,5%/m obs
 (2)2,5%/m obs
 (3)3,5%/m obs
 (4)5,0%/m obs
Heat Detectors(1)42° C

 (2)58° C
 (3)70° C
 (4)82° C

Alarm Verification
Every analogue detector must provide the facility for verifying the validity of an alarm signal over a 20 second
period, before initiating an alarm. This alarm verification function must be able to be enabled or disabled, on
a device by device basis, from the control panel.
Calibration
The system must check the calibration of each analogue line device and record changes caused by
environmental contamination.
When maximum calibration adjustment is reached the panel must indicate a “maintenance” signal.
This must be a dedicated signal and must be separate from the “pre-alarm” signal.

Display and indicators

All displays and indicators shall be LCD, or PLASMA display LED types.

The type, calibration, sensitivity and status of each device must be able to be displayed at the control panel.
Number of devices in alarm
There shall be no limit to the number of devices which may be in alarm simultaneously.
When a detector is in alarm an LED in its head or base shall be switched on.

7. SYSTEM WIRING

The system shall operate a single two-wire circuit, which shall be normally screened, to provide absolute
reliability at all times and in all environments.

47
The system shall meet the requirements of European Union Directive CE336/89 for the ability to perform
satisfactorily under conditions of electrical noise and transients, and shall comply fully with the requirements
of the following standards as required by SABS EN 54.
IEC 801-2 Electrostatic discharges
IEC 801-3 Radiated Electromagnetic interference
IEC 801-4 Voltage transients - Fast transient bursts
Wiring is to be suitable for return loop arrangement and/or single direction arrangement. Tee-off’s must be
permitted, with full monitoring.
Line protection and monitoring
The addressable line shall be monitored for short circuit or open circuit.
Processor monitoring
A hardware “watchdog” circuit must be provided on the central processor module. In the event of a
microprocessor failure the watchdog must cause a hardware reset of the microprocessor.
This reset action must continue until the processor has restarted. In the event that the processor will not
restart within 20 seconds, then the panel must give an audible and visual alarm indication.
A watchdog counter must allow the viewing of the number of times that the processor has been restarted by
the watchdog, for diagnostic purposes. This information must be stored in non-volatile memory, enabling it
to be viewed even if the panel has been powered-down. The counter must only be able to be reset by an
authorised engineer, under a level 3 access code.
The microprocessor must perform full diagnostic tests on all memory devices on start-up, as follows
RAM test(Running Data)
EPROM checksum verification(Programme Storage)
EPROM checksum verification(Site Configuration Storage)
Should any test fail an audible and visual fault indication must be given, and the
LCD display must indicate the nature of the fault.
The control unit shall perform periodic checksum tests, at intervals not exceeding 60 minutes, on the RAM,
EPROM, and EPROM memories, and give an audible, visual, and LCD text fault indication in the event of a
discrepancy.
It must be possible to view the original and current checksums for all memories on the panel LCD display, as
a maintenance (level 2) function
Line capacity
The capacity of the address line shall be at least 127 addressable devices.
These must be input devices, such as smoke detectors, or output devices, such as sounders or relays.
Device types
It shall be possible to connect the following detectors/devices to the control unit.
 Ionisation smoke detectors - analogue type
 Optical smoke detectors - analogue type
 Multi sensors - optical / thermal type

 Heat detectors - analogue type

48
 Manual “break-glass” units
 Addressable relays i.e. Output devices

 Interface units i.e. input devices

 Loop powered addressable sounders
 Addressable remote LED indicators
 Sounder circuit controllers.
 Gas Discharge Units.
Minimum requirements for the analogue/addressable (intelligent) fire detectors and associated
devices
Basic loop
The addressable “loop” shall be a two wire circuit starting and returning to the control panel. Separate
terminals shall however be provided for outgoing and return conductors as well as for wiring screens.
The loop devices shall each have a unique address. Each device may be addressed as often as is required.
There shall be no pre-set order for addressing the devices. The devices shall be addressed appropriate to
site conditions. This order will be determined during system design or commissioning.
Every design must be checked by the control panel every 2 seconds. In order to maintain system integrity
the panel shall not by pass any detector during a scan.
The control panel will have the facility of determining if more than one device has the same address on the
loop. A “double address” alarm shall be given if this occurs.
It shall be possible to fit isolators at a maximum spacing of one per 20 devices. The isolators shall protect
against short circuits on the loop by isolating that section of the loop where the short circuit occurred, thus
maintaining the integrity of the remainder of the system.
Fire condition LED indicators fitted to the devices and any remote indicators shall be remotely and separately
operated from the control panel.
All fire condition LED indicators shall be reset from the control without removing power from the loop.
The communication to and from each device shall be based on one of the following:

Pulse current modulation

Pulse position modulation
Pulse width modulation
Digital amplitude modulation
Manual call points shall each have their own unique address and the panel shall be capable of identifying
and responding to the operation of a call point within three seconds as required by BS 5839.
There shall be no electronics or electronic components in the mounting base of any field device.
The loop shall be capable of receiving information in addition to that from heat and smoke detectors e.g.
operation of sprinkler system. The source of this information shall be identified by its own unique address.
Any interface equipment used to achieve this requirement shall be from the standard product range of the
same manufacturer as the smoke and heat detectors provided for the loop.
Only the two loop wires shall power the detectors, address, and carry data to and from the field devices by
digitally encoded signals superimposed on the power voltage.

49
The control panel shall be able to identify what type of device is located at each address in order to protect
against accidental fitting of an inappropriate sensor.

The control panel shall be able to identify the absence of a field device.
Intrinsically safe detectors shall be installed in all battery rooms.
These devices must be approved by a certified test laboratory.
Ionisation smoke detectors (analogue/addressable)
Ionisation smoke detectors shall comply with SABS EN 54-7 standards (1996)
The ionisation smoke detectors shall be suitable for detecting invisible products of combustion as well as
visible smoke and be of the dual chamber dual source type to provide good stability in changing
environmental conditions.
The radioactive source shall be Americium 241 mounted in such a way that it is mechanically secure. The
device shall have been certified by the National Radiological Protection Board or a similar body.
The detectors shall be suitable for connecting to a two-wire 24 V central system and operate satisfactorily
within the supply voltage range of 17 V - 28 V DC.

An indicator LED shall be provided on the detector which illuminates when the detector has reached a pre-
set alarm level. The indicator shall be operated independently of the detector from the central control panel.
Provision shall be made for an output from the detector suitable for operating a remote indicator or other
device with a current limitation of 4mA. The output shall be operated independently of the smoke detector
from the central control panel.
The detector shall be capable of operating within the following environmental limits.
Temperature operating range -20°C to +60°C (no condensation)
Humidity operating range 0 % to 95 % RH. (excluding condensation)
Wind resistance up to 10 metres per second without false alarming.
RFI resistance to 10v/m over a signal range of 1MHz to 1000 MHz and 50 v/m over signal ranges 450 - 466
MHz and 890 - 960 MHz cellular telephone.
Separate mounting bases shall be required which enable ready removal of the detectors for maintenance.
The bases shall be fitted with stainless steel terminal springs and stainless steel terminal screws and
saddles.
The construction of the detector and bases shall be in white self-extinguishing polycarbonate plastic. Full
circuitry must be protected against moisture and fungus. Smoke entry points must be protected against dust
and insect ingress by corrosion resistant gauze. The detectors must be unobtrusive when installed.
The detector shall be capable of protecting an area up to 100 m² at a height of up to 12 m. The installation
and sitting of the detectors must conform to BS5839 part 1 1980 or SABS 0139 or similar Standards.
Data transmission to and from the control panel from the detector shall be via a communications module
which is factory fitted to the detector by the original detector manufacturer and forms a complete and integral
part of the detector.
The detector shall be supplied complete and fully tested and calibrated.
The unique address of the detector shall be set up by the installer.
There shall be a facility on the base for attaching a label indicating the address of that detector. A similar
facility shall be available on the detector. The detector and base labels shall be aligned when installed.

50
The build-up of dirt or similar contamination on the radioactive source will cause the output signal from the
detector to gradually change. The control panel shall be capable of monitoring this slow change in signal
and at a predetermined level indicate that the detector is in need of servicing.
The detector shall be capable of being remotely tested from the control panel by the transmission of a test
instruction signal to the addressed detector. This shall result in a healthy detector transmitting back an
analogue value in excess of the recommended fire alarm threshold. The control panel will recognise this as
a test signal and shall not raise an alarm against this signal.
Photoelectric (optical) smoke detectors (analogue/addressable)
The photoelectric (optical) smoke detectors shall be suitable for detecting visible smoke such as is produced
by slow smouldering fires including burning PVC.
Photoelectric optical smoke detectors shall comply with the SABS EN 54-7 standards (1996)

They shall be of the light scattering type using a pulsed internal LED light source and a photocell sensor.
The detectors shall be suitable for connecting to a two-wire 24 V central system and operate satisfactorily
within the supply voltage range of 17 V - 28 V DC.
An indicator LED shall be provided on the detector which illuminates when the detector has reached a pre-
set alarm level. The indicator shall be operated independently of the detector from the central control panel.
Provision shall be made for an output from the detector suitable for operation of a remote indicator or other
device with a current limitation of 4mA. The output shall be operated independently of the smoke detector
from the central control panel.
The detector shall be capable of operating within the following environmental limits.
Temperature operating range -20°C to +60°C
Humidity operating range 0 % to 95 % RH. (no condensation)
Wind - not affected.

RFI resistance to 10v/m over a signal range of 1MHz to 1000 MHz and 50 v/m over signal ranges 450 - 466
MHz and 890 - 960 MHz cellular telephone.
Separate mounting bases shall be required which enable ready removal of the detectors for maintenance.
The bases shall be fitted with stainless steel terminal springs and stainless steel screws and captive
clamping plates.
The construction of the detector and bases shall be in white self-extinguishing polycarbonate plastic. Full
circuitry must be protected against moisture and fungus. Smoke entry points must be protected against dust
and insect ingress by corrosion resistant gauze. The detectors must be unobtrusive when installed.
The detector shall be capable of protecting an area up to 100 m² at a height of up to 12 m. The installation
and siting of the detectors must conform to BS5839 Part 1 1980 or SABS 0139 or similar Standards.
Data transmission to and from the control panel from the detector shall be via a communications module
which is factory fitted to the detector by the original detector manufacturer and forms a complete and integral
part of the detector.
The detector shall be supplied complete and fully tested and calibrated.
The unique address of the detector shall be set by the installer.
There shall be a facility on the base for attaching a label indicating the address of that detector. A similar
facility shall be available on the detector. The detector and base labels shall be aligned when installed.

51
The build-up of dirt or similar contamination optical surfaces will cause the output signal from the detector to
gradually change. The control panel shall be capable of monitoring this slow change in signal and at a
predetermined level indicate that the detector is in need of servicing.
The detector shall be capable of being remotely tested from the control pane by the transmission of a 3-bit
code to the addressed detector. This shall result in a healthy detector transmitting back an analogue value in
excess of the recommended fire alarm threshold. The control panel will recognise this as signal and shall
not raise an alarm against this signal.
Heat detectors (analogue/addressable)
The heat detector shall be electronic in operation.
Heat detectors shall comply with SABS EN 54-5 standards (1996)
The device shall monitor ambient temperature by means of a NTC thermistor.

The detectors shall be suitable for connecting to a two-wire 24 V central system and operate satisfactorily
within the supply voltage range of 17 V - 28 V DC.
An indicator LED shall be provided on the detector which illuminates when the detector has reached a pre-
set alarm level. The indicator shall be operated independently of the detector from the central control panel.
Provision shall be made for an output from the detector suitable for operating a remote indicator or other
device with a current limitation of 4mA. The output shall be operated independently of the smoke detector
from the central panel.
The detector shall be capable of operating within the following environmental limits.
Temperature operating range -20°C to +60°C
Humidity operating range 0 % to 95 % RH. (excluding condensation)
Wind - not affected
RFI resistance to 10v/m over a signal range of 1MHz to 1000 MHz and 50 v/m over signal ranges 450 - 466
MHz and 890 - 960 MHz cellular telephone.
Separate mounting bases shall be required which enable removal of the detectors for maintenance. The
bases shall be fitted with stainless steel terminal springs and stainless steel terminal screws and captive
clamping plates.
The construction of the detector and bases shall be in white self-extinguishing polycarbonate plastic. Full
circuitry must be protected against moisture and fungus. The detectors must be unobtrusive when installed.
Each detector shall be suitable for protecting an area up to 50 m² at a height of up to 7,5 m. The installation
and siting of the detectors shall be carried out in accordance with BS5839 Part 1 1980 or SABS 0139.
Data transmissions to and from the control panel from the detector shall be via a communications module
which is factory fitted to the detector by the original detector manufacturer and forms a complete and integral
part of the detector.
The detector shall be supplied complete and fully tested and calibrated.
The unique address of the detector shall be set by the installer.
There shall be a facility on the base for attaching a label indicating the address of that detector. A similar
facility shall be available on the detector. The detector and base labels shall be aligned when installed.
The build-up of dirt or similar contamination will cause the output signal from the detector to gradually
change. The control panel shall be capable of monitoring this slow change in signal and at a predetermined
level indicate that the detector is in need of servicing.

52
The detector shall be capable of being remotely tested from the control panel by the transmission of a 3-bit
code to the addressed detector. This shall result in a healthy detector transmitting back an analogue value
equivalent to the recommended fire alarm threshold. The control panel will recognise this as a test signal
and shall not raise an alarm against this signal.
Multisensor detectors (analogue/addressable)
The multisensor detectors shall incorporate photoelectronic (optical) smoke sensors, and high sensitivity
thermal sensors, software interlocked to provide early warning from all types of smouldering fires including,
burning PVC.
Multisensors shall comply with ISO 7240-15 standards (draft 1996)
The smoke element shall be of the light scattering type using a pulsed internal LED light source and a
photocell sensor.

The thermal element shall utilise high sensitivity, high speed thermistors optimised to measure small
changes in temperature, and rate of change.
The elements shall measure both absolute smoke and thermal levels, but also rate of smoke and thermal
change.
The smoke and thermal elements must report independently to the control panel, and must be software
interlinked to enable intelligent high-level decision making.
The detectors shall be suitable for connecting to a two-wire 24V central system and operate satisfactorily
within the supply voltage range of 17V - 28 V DC.
An indicator LED shall be provided on the detector which illuminates when the detector has reached a pre-
set alarm level. The indicator shall be operated independently of the detector from the central control panel.
Provision shall be made for an output from the detector suitable for operation of a remote indicator LED. The
output shall be operated independently of the smoke detector from the central control panel.
The detector shall be capable of operating within the following environmental limits as per the VDS
requirements.
 a.Temperature operating range -20° C to +60° C
 b.Humidity operating range 0 % to 95 % RH (Without condensation)
 c.Wind - not affected
 d.RFI resistance to 10v/m over a signal range of 1MHz to 1000 MHz and 50 v/m over signal ranges
450 - 466 MHz and 890 - 960 MHz cellular telephone.
Separate mounting bases shall be required which enable ready removal of the detectors for maintenance.
The bases shall be fitted with corrosion resistant connector springs and terminal screws with captive
clamping plates.
The construction of the detector and bases shall be in white injection moulded plastic. Full circuitry must be
protected against moisture and fungus, and to achieve this the circuit board and components must be fully
coated with a protective conformal coating. Smoke entry points must be protected against insect ingress by
corrosion resistant mesh. The detectors must be unobtrusive when installed.
The detector shall be capable of protecting an area up to 100 m² at a height of up to 12 m. The installation
and siting of the detectors must conform to BS5839 Part 1 1980, or SABS 0139, or similar Standards.
Data transmission to and from the control panel from the detector shall be via an integrated communication
protocol which is factory fitted to the detector by the original detector manufacturer and forms a complete
and integral part of the detector.
The detector shall be supplied complete and fully tested and calibrated.
53
The unique address of the detector shall be set by the installer.
There shall be a facility on the base for attaching a label indicating the address of that detector. A similar
facility shall be available on the detector, enabling the fitting of a label indicating its address. When the
detector is fitted to its base, both the detector and base address labels shall be visible, and aligned adjacent
to each other.
The build-up of dirt or similar contamination on the optical surfaces will cause the output signal from the
detector to gradually change. The control panel shall be capable of monitoring this slow change in signal
and at a predetermined level indicate that the detector is in need of servicing.
The detector shall be capable of being remotely tested from the control panel by the transmission f a test
instruction to the addressed detector. This shall result in a healthy detector transmitting back smoke and
thermal analogue values in excess of the recommended fire alarm threshold. The control panel will
recognise this signal as a test result and shall not raise an alarm.
Manual call point
The call point shall be manufactured from self-extinguishing red polycarbonate plastic.
Manual call points shall comply with either BS5839 Part 2 or SABS EN54-11 (Draft)
The overall size of the call point shall not exceed 100 mm x 100 mm x 60 mm.
The call point shall be based upon a standard product manufactured by a reputable call point manufacturer.
It shall consist of an enclosure with a captive glass pane, and it shall incorporate an addressable
communications module. Breaking the pane shall initiate an alarm. The call point shall incorporate a plastic -
laminated safety glass which will not produce sharp edges when broken.

An externally visible red LED shall be incorporated to indicate when the device is in alarm.
The word “Fire” shall appear in black letters across the top of the call point.
The LED shall illuminate when the call point is activated. However, the illumination of the LED will be by
command from the control panel.
Device status
Each addressable device must be polled by the panel every two seconds or less.
The analogue status of each device must be read and stored in the panel on each scan.
The following information is to be recorded on each scan:
Device condition
Sensor type
Sensor status
Maintenance alarm thresholds
The alarm thresholds of each analogue detector shall vary individually in accordance with its idle status.
This includes alarm thresholds, rate algorithms, pre-alarm and maintenance thresholds.
When the threshold reaches its maximum limit, the panel must be able to indicate a “maintenance required”
signal for the particular detector. This shall be a separate pre-alarm / maintenance signal. The use of a
combined pre-alarm / maintenance signal is not acceptable.
Device monitoring
The panel shall monitor each device on every scan, and give a fault signal for any of the following conditions,
within 30 seconds.
Detector removed
54
Address unit removed
Incorrect device type

Faulty calibration or sensitivity

Alarm decision
All alarm decisions are to be taken by the control unit after checking the data from each device at least twice.
The control panel shall employ an algorithm in order to check that the automatic sensors do not give
spontaneous false readings.

8. SIGNALLING AND ANNUNCIATION

General
Signalling and annunciation shall be as specified in SABS EN54-2 standards (draft 1996)
Fire indication shall be by zone, displayed on LED indicators, and on the LCD text display.
Fault, maintenance, pre-alarm, and device/zone disabled signals shall be indicated visually by LCD text
display, and audibly, in the control unit.
The top portion of the LCD text display shall always show the first alarm received. The lower portion of the
LCD text display shall show the last alarm received. It must be possible to manually scroll through all alarms
on the lower portion of the screen, using “up” and “down” scroll buttons.
The display must show the total number of alarm events currently in the system.

Fire alarms shall take priority when displaying. However, it must be possible to view all events currently in
the system, including, fire alarms, fault alarms, pre-alarms, maintenance alarms, disabled devices, and other
events.
It shall be possible to view the devices, by address that initiated the alarm on the LCD text display, on
manual request. When viewing the device, a 40 character location message specific to each device shall be
displayed.
The visual indications must be arranged so that the different warnings are clearly distinguished. (i.e. amber
for fault, red for alarm).
The internal audible signal device may be the same for all alarms, but either tone variation or time switching
shall be used to differentiate.
Outputs shall be provided for audible alarms, control functions, remote mimics and connection for computers
and printers.
Zoning
The panel shall have a minimum of four zones. The zones must be fully fielded programmable to permit
detectors to be allocated to any zone.
Each zone shall be identified by a 40 character text label displaying on the LCD display. This shall be field
programmable.
It must be possible for any number of addressable devices from 0 - 126 to be connected to any zone.
The zoning must be manually configured on system start-up or on request by an authorised operator.
The panel must provide facilities for the operator to inspect the zoning configuration, and inhibit, or activate
devices. Facilities must be provided for identifying all active and inhibited addressed, and all connected
device types.
Panel indicators

55
All visual indicators shall be LED’s and no incandescent lamps are to be used.
The following LED’s must be provided:

Minimum 4 - Zone alarm LED’s

Minimum 4 - Zone fault LED’s
1 - Supply healthy LED
1 - Supply faulty LED
2 - Common alarm LED’s
1 - Pre-alarm LED or visual display
1 - Common fault LED
1 - Maintenance LED (or visual display)
1 - Processor running LED
1 - Battery supply fault LED
Panel displays
Zone Display Mode:
-Type of alarm
-2 Zones (first and last)
-Alarm count
-Total number of alarms
-40 Character zone location message for each zone
-Time and date

The LCD display must be able to simultaneously display a minimum of

-Loop number, zone number, detector address
-Alarm count
-Zone in alarm
-Detector in alarm
-Alarm type
-Active or accepted
-Time and date
The LCD display must be at least a 160 character display.
Panel controls
The panel is to incorporate a keyboard and push-button with the following functions:
Numeric keyboard
System reset button
Alarm accept button/silence alarm button
Alarm sound button
Lamp test button

56
Function buttons for maintenance and commissioning
Buttons for controlling the operation of the two alarm outputs.

Alarm outputs (Fire)

The panel must incorporate at least two monitored audible alarm outputs for the switching- on of bells or
electronic sounders.
These outputs must be continuously monitored for open and short circuit.
Each output must be rated at a minimum of 0,75 A at 24 V DC.
It shall be possible to independently disable either of the alarm bell outputs by means of a control push
button.
A test facility shall be provided in order to test each of the alarm bell outputs. When the test is initiated the
selected alarm bell will operate intermittently.
Both the alarm bells will have a delay facility which is selected by controls on the front panel. Manual call
points will override this delay.
Alarm contacts (Fire)

One voltage free change-over contact must be provided. This must operate on a “fire” condition, and is to
remain “on” until the system is reset.
The contacts are to be rated at 2 A at 24 V DC.
Alarm contacts (Fault)
One voltage-free change-over contact must be provided. This must release on a “fault” or “maintenance”
condition, and is to remain “off” until the system is reset.
The contacts are to be rated at 2 A at 24 V DC.
Remote panel outputs
An optional monitored serial port shall be provided for connecting to remote panels and computers
The remote units must have the following displays and controls:
Remote 160 character LCD text display which repeats all events being displayed on the panel display.
Remote “alarm accept” input i.e. silencer alarm
Remote “system reset” input
Sound Alarm
Optional printer

A Forty column printer shall be available as an option.

The printer shall provide a hard copy of the following:
Alarms
Faults
Maintenance
Panel operations
Time and date
Operation of the printer shall not inhibit, delay or affect the functioning of the detection polling system in any
way.

57
When supplied as an option, the printer must include all connecting cables, hardware, software and
instructions.

Communication between the control panel and field devices

The basic criteria for any system is that a unique address be transmitted, recognised by a single field device,
and the device status be returned to the control panel for processing.
The time taken to “poll” all devices and the integrity of the data received under worst case conditions, to re-
act upon a fire status, should not be greater than eight seconds.
The integrity of the data should be such that noise generated by other devices in the area of operation
cannot introduce false information that may result in the incorrect operation of the system. Noise immunity
shall be as specified in IEC 801 parts 1 - 5.
Electrical medium

Both power and communications for the field devices shall be carried by a single pair of conductors.
The term “outgoing” and “incoming” refer to the control panel.
Outgoing address/data format

Each device shall have a unique address. The address shall allow a minimum of 126-devices per line.
The communication protocol shall be transmitted automatically by the control panel once every 2 seconds,
and shall during that time communicate with all devices.
(a) Switch on/off LED
(b) Return device type
(c) Return device status
(d) Return device calibration
(e) Test field device
The address and data bit stream shall automatically be transmitted once by the control panel. The field
device shall reply on every transmission. The panel shall only accept messages if three consecutive replies
are identical.
Outgoing transmissions

The outgoing message shall be modulated onto the positive leg of the power carrier at a level of 20 V.
The message must be encoded in the form of a digital pulse count or digital amplitude modulation.
The binary data rate shall be less than 1 kHz.
Address (data reception [field devices])
The field devices shall be equipped with an appropriate compatible integrated circuit configured as a pulse
counter.
The address and data are passed to a decoding circuit and are compared with the on-board address. Each
message is to be acted upon and the panel is to verify all data at least two times.
Field data transmission
The field devices may be commanded to transmit to the control panel at least five analogue values. These
valves shall indicate at least the following:
Device type correct at given address.

Test of output status (High calibration).

58
Test of input status (Low calibration).
Analogue sensitivity output 1.

Analogue sensitivity output 2 (for multisensors)

Miscellaneous commands
The control panel may additionally send commands to the field devices to turn the alarm LED on or off and to
test the field device electronics.
The control panel may additionally send commands to the detectors to initiate a self - test, to test the field
device electronics.
The tests are to be arranged such that the simulation of smoke is to exercise the chambers exactly as
though real smoke was present in the chambers.
This feature is to be available for both ionisation and optical smoke detectors.
A special test procedure shall be available on the control panel to enable an operator to activate the field
device by introducing smoke or combustion gases. The panel will not generate the normal alarms but will
light the remote LED and then after a period of time, automatically reset the field device.

A special test procedure shall be available on the control panel to enable a maintenance technician to place
a zone into a “Walk Test Mode”. He may then activate the field devices in that zone by introducing smoke or
combustion gases.
The panel will not generate the normal alarms but will light the remote detector LED and then after a period
of time, automatically reset the field device. At the same time the panel will record all test alarms. Upon
completion of the test, the contractor shall ensure that the panel operate correctly, and replace any faulty
items that have failed.
If any alarms are received from a different zone to the one being tested, then the panel is to cancel the test,
and initiate a genuine fire alarm. Similarly, if two detectors in the zone-under-test simultaneously give an
alarm, then the panel is to cancel the test and initiate a genuine fire alarm.

9. ALARM MANAGEMENT

The annunciation and signalling outputs must be field programmable as described below.

Control outputs
Optional control outputs or relays shall be available.
A minimum of 4 optional relays shall be provided. The system shall however be able to support up to 32
relays. Each relay will be software programmable and will be allocated to loop, zone, line fault or
coincidence.
The option relays must be able to be allocated in a different grouping or the same grouping as the zones.
Each optional relay shall have a changeover voltage free contact rated at 2 A at 24 V DC.
Double-knock (coincidence) operation
It shall be possible to programme any of the control outputs or addressable relays to operate upon an alarm
from any two detectors in the programmed group.

Silencing operation

It shall be possible to programme any of the control outputs or addressable relays to operate in either
“silencing” mode or “non-silencing” mode.

59
In “silencing” mode the relay or outputs shall de-activate when the “alarm accept” button is pressed, or when
the “reset” button is pressed.

In “non-silencing” mode, the relay or output shall be de-activated only when the “reset” button is pressed.
Activation delay
It shall be possible to programme any of the control outputs or addressable relays to activate after a delay
period from receipt of the control signal.
This delay shall be 0 - 16 minutes, in one second increments.
Software control
All the above functions, shall be under software control, and programmed through the panels keyboard or by
means of a computer.
It must be possible as an option to programme the panel off line on a computer and download the
programme into the panel.
It must be possible to save the programme to disk for future reference.

10. SYSTEM MAINTENANCE

General
The system shall be, as far as possible, self-testing and maintenance free.
The control unit shall continually update the idle state of each detector, and indicate a “maintenance
required” signal in the event of a detector sensitivity being too high or too low.
Control unit test
The control unit shall have test facilities without interruption of the remainder of the system (short circuit test
excluded) for the following:
Field tests
Detector tests
The control unit shall allow for detector test and inspection by a single person.
The test alarm triggered on each detector by the inspection person shall be indicated on the detector by a
red LED and shall be automatically reset by the control unit. Alerting shall not take place.
Zones which are not switched to maintenance mode shall remain ready for normal alarm procedure.
The control panel shall keep statistics for each of the detectors and shall be displayed on demand.
The statistics must be:
Maximum value attained by the cursor as well as the date and time.
The minimum value attained by the cursor as well as the date and time.
The average idle value attained by the cursor as well as the date and time.

It shall be possible to put a detector in soak test mode. A detector in soak test mode will log its conditions in
the event buffer without raising fire alarms.

Alarm test
The control unit shall allow for the testing of all audible and visual alarm devices and control relays, to check
correct functioning of these devices.

60
Extinguishing system
The system shall be capable of addressing an extinguishing system on the loop and cater for the
extinguishing of areas by means of inert Clean Agent Alternative or any other gas extinguishing agent.
The extinguishing sequence shall be as follows:
Upon receipt of the first automatic fire alarm in an extinguishing area the following shall happen:
- The Extinguishing unit alarm buzzer will sound.
- The alarm output contact will be activated to warn the centrally situated
Authorities.
Upon receipt of the second automatic alarm from the extinguishing area the:
- Coincidence switching shall be initiated in this area.
- Fire release timer (adjustable up to one minute) shall be started.
- Self-closing doors if provided shall be closed.
- Monitored acoustic alarm shall sound.
After expiry of the pre-release timer the:
- Modular clean agent bottles in the affected area shall be discharged.
- The discharge circuit shall be monitored.
- Acoustic sounder shall remain activated until the system is reset.

Upon raising a manual alarm sequence paragraph 11.5.2 shall start directly.
Because of the integration of the extinguishing areas only one monitored acoustic system is required.
The activation of gas release in one area shall not prevent the release sequence in the other areas to take
place.
It must be possible to manually stop the release sequence from the extinguishing unit at any time prior to
discharge.
Acceptance tests
The acceptance tests as stipulated in the “Acceptance Procedure for Fire Detection Systems installed in
Equipment Buildings” shall be strictly adhered to.
Where the system is elsewhere installed (non-technical buildings), the onus shall be on the
consultant/contractor to stipulate the Acceptance Procedures. These procedures shall be subjected to
TFMC’s approval.

11. SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY

Exchange building installation

The system supply shall be provided from two independent sources, a 231V AC or a 52-54 V DC supply
from the exchange battery and an internal 24 V DC standby battery with charger within the control panel.

Office installation
The system supply shall be provided from two independent sources, mains 231 V AC and from an internal
24 V DC standby battery with charger within the control panel.

61
Power supply
The output of the power supply shall be capable of sustaining an alarm from all the connected alarm lines
simultaneously.
The power supply shall be an integral part of the control unit.
For equipment buildings it shall be possible to operate the system from the equipment power supply
available in the building.
In the event of a failure of the mains 231 V AC or equipment 52-54 V DC supply, there shall be an automatic
switch-over to the standby battery supply without an interruption of the load and without activating a fire
alarm.
The central control unit shall be protected against reverse polarity on the voltage supply side.
The unit shall be suitable for use with a positively earthed 24 V DC or 52 - 54 V DC power supply system.
The unit and detectors must be protected against earth faults on both legs of the addressable line.
Tests shall be done as follows:
1.Short Circuit Addressable Line (+) to earth (+ 54 V) for one minute.

2.Short Circuit Addressable Line (-) to earth (+ 54 V) for one minute.

3.Short Circuit Addressable Lines (+) and (-) simultaneously to earth (+ 54 V) for three minutes.
After removing the shorts the system is to be tested and must function normally.
Standby battery
The standby battery must be capable of supplying the system in idle condition for the stated period of eight
hours plus an hour in alarm condition after the stated period.
An alarm shall be activated when:
Failure of the recharging equipment to the battery occurs or
When a low battery voltage occurs.
The supply failure message must be activated when the battery has 20 percent of its normal capacity.
When the lowest voltage allowed by the manufacturer of the battery is reached, power to the unit and
external sensors must be switched off in order to:
Avoid malfunctioning of the control unit.
Prevent battery from over discharging.
Be able to reset the micro-processor properly when main supply returns.

Note:Power to the control unit and external sensors will be switched on automatically only when the voltage
is approximately 12 V.
There shall be lightning protection on the power supply side.
There shall be an indication that the power is on.

12. GUARANTEE

The tenderer shall guarantee that the equipment offered will give satisfactory service for a period of one
year, from the date of completion of installation to THE ENGINEER in the Republic of South Africa, and to
replace or repair with a minimum of delay and free of charge any components which may fail during this
period, fair wear and tear excepted.

62
13. WIRING

The system shall operate on a two-wire circuit in a loop or spur configuration per zone.
The wiring shall basically consist of a 0,8 mm² two core (twisted pair) fire retarded cable equal and similar to
screened type fire retardant cable.
The addressable line must be monitored for short circuit and open circuit.

14. TECHNICAL LITERATURE

The successful tenderer shall supply four handbooks, each consisting of full instructions, operating and
maintenance instructions in English and descriptions thereof as well as a full component list indicating, not
only component values but source/s of supply. Component placing diagrams together with full circuit
diagrams of all printed circuit boards used in the system shall also be supplied.
Complete software listings for the entire system shall also be submitted with the sample as stipulated in
paragraph 5.1.

15. AUDIBLE FIRE ALARM DEVICES

Audible alarm devices shall be installed above each fire panel. The power supply wiring shall form part of
this contract. The audible alarm device shall be protected against ingress to at least IP65.
Audible alarm devices shall conform to the following performance characteristics:
Housing - Red PVC
Voltage - 24V DC
Range - 80 dBA at 3,0m
Tone/sounder - Dual tone adjustable, Piezo electronic

16. INTERLOCKING OF FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

The existing fire detection systems shall be interlocked with the following:
-Air conditioning system.
-Intruder alarm system.
-Fire extinguishing system. (where applicable)
The fire detection system shall shut down the air conditioning system via a 12 or 24V DC signal from the fire
panel to a 12 or 24V DC relay installed in a suitable box adjacent to the air conditioning distribution board or
air conditioning control panel.
The interlocking system shall also contain a key switch to operate as a “test” function without shutting down
the air conditioning system.
The fire detection systems shall also be interfaced with the intruder alarm panel to raise alarms for both fault
and fire conditions at a remote security control room.
Interlinking wiring shall form an integral part of this contract. Connections of wiring in the fire panel shall form
part of this contract.
The contractor shall be responsible to check the existing complete interlocking as specified inclusive of all
testing.

63
17. “FRAMED” PASSIVE MIMIC PANEL

A framed paper passive colour mimic display shall be installed at the fire panel. The display shall be A3 size
and shall be installed between laminated plastic mounted behind clear perspex in an aluminium frame on the
wall. The display shall include for the following:
-Outline of building and internal areas /rooms. (A3 for each floor)
-Each detector element position and address.
-Exchange name.
-Contractors particulars.
The display will be computer generated by a recognised software package such as Coral Draw or a CAD
type package.

18. REMOTE UP AND DOWN LOAD FACILITIES

The Fire panel shall be equipped with an internal modem to facilitate up and down loading interrogation and
report functions of the fire panel.
Entry into the system shall be password protected and it shall not be possible to alter any site configured data
without operator interface at the fire panel.
The following shall be executable form the remote station:
 Emulate all actions possible at the fire panel as if the operator was standing at the panel.
 Up / Down load site configuration.
 Select and retrieve all or part of the event buffer
 Print out events as described in section 19.

Data shall be transmitted at 9600 bps between the fire panel and the interrogation centre. The modem shall be
supported by means of integral Lithium battery power, to ensure that the contents of the modem RAM memory
are retained during power disturbances or failures.
The modem shall be fully protected against the effects of lightning damage, inductive switching and/or
electrostatic discharges which could occur. The incoming and outgoing signal, feeder, monitor and power
cables shall be comprehensively protected.
The surge protection device shall be capable of safely dissipating 5kA (8/20 micro second). The current ratings
are for a typical transient pulse, where the peak current is reached 8 micro seconds and decays to 50% of the
peak value after a further 12 micro seconds.

The surge protection device shall afford protection at a level which is within 20% of the operating voltage of the
components to be protected.
The surge protection device shall be a 3-stage protection type.
The surge protection device shall be bonded to earth by means of a 2,5mm2 earthwire.

Details of the up and download set-up will be forwarded to the Contractor by THE ENGINEER site electrical
representative during the construction stage.

19. APPROVAL OF SYSTEM INFORMATION AND EQUIPMENT

All information and equipment relating to zoning, numbering of devices, cables or cable cores, terminal
numbers, plant schedules, point indexes, interlocking, flow sheets, restarting functions, logs, limits, grouping of
system components, manuals, etc. shall be subject to the approval of the Engineer. Approval shall normally
be given within 30 days from receipt of the relevant documentation. Equipment or drawings and numbers not

64
complying with the Specifications and subsequently causing delays shall not be regarded as a valid base for
claims.

The Contractor may only commence manufacture or installation work subject to approval drawings, etc. after
receipt of the approved documentation.

20. LABELLING AND NUMBERING

All equipment shall be labelled by means of a unique numbering system for ease of identification of the
subsystem it is connected to as well as its location. The Contractor shall submit a numbering system as well as
examples of the labels for approval by the Engineer. Silk screen printed labels shall be preferred.
All wiring and cabling shall be marked with PVC cable markers of proprietary manufacture. Each conductor
shall have a unique number and the same number shall appear at both ends of each conductor. Wiring
numbers shall appear on all as-built drawings.

21. SITE TESTS AND COMMISSIONING

The following minimum site tests shall be carried out by the Contractor and the results presented to the
Engineer.
-system operation during normal conditions
-system operation during power fail conditions
-simulation of fire conditions at each detector
-simulation of signals at each unit
-functional test of each and every input and output
-operation of all peripheral devices

-printed confirmation of each test

-function and integrity of surge protection equipment
The Contractor shall be responsible to supply all the tools, materials, labour, and all equipment which may be
required for testing.

22. AS BUILT DRAWINGS, OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS

General requirements

The Contractor shall prepare and provide comprehensive as built drawings, maintenance and operating
manuals of all the installations in accordance with the specifications as follows:
-“As built” drawings of the complete fire detection system indicating floor layouts and detector positions on
electronic format (Genesis, Auto Cad or Caddy format)
-The documentation shall be neatly compiled in three sets of A4 sized manuals, which shall contain all the
above information, reduced sized prints of the drawings and all other information which may be required in
terms of the standard specifications as well as other information necessary to enable the employer to maintain,
dismantle, re-assemble and adjust all parts of the works.
-A pro-forma operating and maintenance manual shall be submitted to the Engineer for approval at least 3
weeks before the anticipated handing over date. Last minute attempts will not be acceptable.
-The Contract will not be regarded as complete until all requirements in this regard have been met.
The manuals shall be detailed and shall be written to enable any supplier or maintenance organisation to
maintain all components. The manuals shall contain at least the following as a minimum requirement:

65
Source codes

A copy of the source file on magnetic medium shall be lodged with an attorney to ensure that the Engineer has
access to it in future should the supplier terminate his services. The cost of this arrangement shall be included
in the quoted sum.
Detailed fault finding procedures
Detailed fault finding procedures to be followed by maintenance personnel shall be listed. The procedures shall
be clear, unambiguous and shall be so written to cover all eventualities in the event of failure or malfunction of
any part of the system. The procedures shall also be so written, to enable maintenance personnel to perform
detailed and accurate fault finding to card level using basic instruments.
The procedures shall list all readings which can be expected from a healthy or a faulty system. Test positions
shall refer back to wire or terminal numbers as they appear on the wiring diagrams.
All special tool and test equipment which may be required shall also be listed.

23. REPAIR DURING THE 12 MONTHS DEFECTS LIABILITY PERIOD

The defects liability will be for a period of twelve months, calculated from the date of issue of the Certificate of
First Delivery. Payment of the balance of the retention money will be effected after the lapse of the defects
liability, provided the installation has in the opinion of the Engineer, and been in satisfactory working order
during this period.
The Contractor shall be responsible for the replacement of all faulty electronic equipment during the defects
liability period.
Faulty equipment shall be attended to immediately and shall be replaced or repaired within 3 days of being
instructed by the Engineer or the Engineer.
All repairs shall commence within 24 hours of written or verbal advice by the Engineer or the Engineer. Advice
by facsimile shall be considered to be in writing. Should the Contractor fail to commence repairs to the faulty
installation within 24 hours from the time of notification, the repair work shall be carried out by others and the
cost thereof shall be deducted from funds held in retention.
All repairs shall be carried out to the satisfaction of the Engineer.
All labour, material, transport and infrastructure costs incurred during the defects liability period shall be borne
by the Contractor. No claims for payment in this regard will be considered.

24. TRAINING AND EVALUATION

The training of Staff forms part of this contract. Training shall commence at the outset of installation of the
systems and continue during the commissioning period for each installation.
Comprehensive literature shall be supplied as part of the training course.

66
SECTION D - LIST OF ELECTRICAL DRAWINGS

DRAWING NUMBER DESCRIPTION

ELECTRICAL RETICULATION  
PQ407‐EE‐T‐SP‐0001‐01 
SITE PLAN 

ELECTRICAL RETICULATION 
PQ407‐EE‐T‐AC‐0001‐01  LOWER GROUND FLOOR PLAN 
AIR CONDITIONING POWER INSTALLATION  

ELECTRICAL RETICULATION 
PQ407‐EE‐T‐AC‐0002‐01  UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN 
AIR CONDITIONING POWER INSTALLATION  

ELECTRICAL RETICULATION 
PQ407‐EE‐T‐CT‐0001‐01  LOWER GROUND FLOOR PLAN 
CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION 

ELECTRICAL RETICULATION 
PQ407‐EE‐T‐CT‐0002‐01  UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN 
CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION 

ELECTRICAL RETICULATION 
PQ407‐EE‐T‐ELP‐0002‐01  UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN 
EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION INSTALLATION  

ELECTRICAL RETICULATION 
PQ407‐EE‐T‐FD‐0001‐01   LOWER GROUND FLOOR PLAN 
FIRE DETECTION & ACCESS CONTROL INSTALLATION 

ELECTRICAL RETICULATION 
PQ407‐EE‐T‐FD‐0002‐01   UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN 
FIRE DETECTION & ACCESS CONTROL INSTALLATION 

ELECTRICAL RETICULATION 
PQ407‐EE‐T‐LL‐0001‐01  LOWER GROUND FLOOR PLAN 
LIGHTING INSTALLATION 

"ELECTRICAL RETICULATION 
PQ407‐EE‐T‐LL‐0002‐01  UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN 
LIGHTING INSTALLATION" 

67
 ELECTRICAL RETICULATION 
PQ407‐EE‐T‐SPL‐0001‐01  LOWER GROUND FLOOR PLAN 
SMALL POWER INSTALLATION 

ELECTRICAL RETICULATION 
PQ407‐EE‐T‐SPL‐0002‐01  UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN 
SMALL POWER INSTALLATION 

PQ407‐EE‐T‐SLD‐0001‐01   SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR MAIN DB AND KIOSK 

PQ407‐EE‐T‐SLD‐0002‐01   SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR DB‐1, DB‐2 & DB‐LG  

68
Capacity of Tenderer
1. WORK CAPACITY: (The Tenderer is requested to furnish the following full particulars, attach additional pages if more space is required. Failure to furnish the particulars may
result in the Tender being disregarded.)
Skilled artisans employed Unskilled employees employed
Categories of artisans Number Categories of employees Number

Machinery Plant Workshops

2. QUALIFICATIONS AND EXPERIENCE OF PROPOSED SITE SUPERVISION TEAM FOR THE PROJECT

Tenderer to provide name(s), key qualifications and experience of site supervision team that will supervise the project on behalf of the Contractor.
3. PARTICULARS OF COMMITMENTS WHICH THE TENDERER HAS PREVIOUSLY COMPLETED AND PRESENTLY ENGAGED WITH:

3.1. Current projects:

Date of Scheduled
Reference / Contact Contract Contract
Project Place (town) commence- date of
Contact person Tel. No. amount period
ment completion

10

11
3.2. Previous projects:

Reference / Date of Scheduled Actual date

Place Contact Contract Contract
Project Contact commencem date of of
(town) Tel. No. amount period
person ent completion completion

10
SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 1 : PRELIMINARY AND GENERAL

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)

PRELIMINARY AND GENERAL

The Bill of Quantities must be read in conjunction with the

Specification Document and the Electrical Drawings.

1.1 FIXED CHARGE ITEMS

1.1.1 Contractual Requirements sum 1

1.1.2 Establish facilities on site sum 1

1.2 TIME RELATED ITEMS

1.2.1 Contractual requirements sum 1

1.3 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLIANCE sum 1

1.4 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING sum 1

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF BILL NO. 1 R

SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 2 : MV AND LV ELECTRICAL WORKS

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)
MV INSTALLATION

The Bill of Quantities must be read in conjunction with

the Specification Document and the Electrical
Drawings.

2.1 ESKOM INSTALLATION

a Bulk Contribution Fee PC 1 274 000.00
b Connection Fee PC 1 250 000.00

LV INSTALLATION
2.2 Excavations
The cost for excavations for cabling complete with back
filling and compaction:
- Pick soil m 300
- Soft rock m 100
- Hard rock m 100
Core drilling under road road sum 1

2.3 Connection of LV Cables between Main ESKOM LV

Panel and Generator
a The connection of te main feeder LV cables between the
sum 1
ESKOM main LV Panel and Generator Panel
b The connection of te main feeder LV cables between the
sum 1
Generator Panel and main LV Panel

2.4 LV Cables
Supply and installation of 600/1 000 V. grade PVC
PVC SWA PVC cable in trench, in sleeves or in ground c/w
cable terminations.
2 x 150mm² 3 core PVC SWA PVC Alu cable (Main
a m 700
supply from Eskom main LV Panel to Genset Panel)
2 x 150mm² 3 core PVC SWA PVC Alu cable (Main
b m 100
supply from Genset Panel to mian LV Panel)

2.5 Earthing
Supply and installation of bare copper earth wire
in trench, in sleeves or in ground complete with ends lugged.
120mm² (Main supply from Eskom main LV Panel to
m 350
a Genset Panel)
120mm² (Main supply from Genset Panel to mian LV
m 50
b Panel)

2.6 Supply and fitting of "Memocab" or "Critchley" cable labels

on both ends of every cable as specified sum 1

2.7 Signs to be mounted in positions as pointed out by the Engineer

on site as follows:
(a) Danger sign mounted on outside doors no 1
(b) Warning against unauthorised entry mounted on doors no 1
(c) Sign for treatment of electrical shock no 1
(d) Directions and procedures in case of fire no 1

2.8 Supply, delivery, installation of wall mounted "As Built"

drawings and diagrams of MCC and boards behind glass
in a metal frame surround on walls in positions as
indicated on site by the Engineer. ea 1

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF BILL

R
NO.2
SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 3 : BUILDINGS : SMALL POWER

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)

SMALL POWER DISTRIBUTION

The Bill of Quantities must be read in conjunction

with the Specification Document and the Electrical
Drawings.

3.1 Conduit (PVC)

Supply and install of PVC conduit per metre run
complete with accessories, couplings and sets
including for waste. Contractor to measure quantity
of conduit from drawings himself for tendering
purposes.
- 20mm m 800
- 25mm m 150
- 32mm m 50

3.2 Supply, fitting and connection of the following

sockets complete with box, cover plate and plug
top (where applicable)
CBI Stainless Steel 16 A 3-pin single phase flush
ea 28
mounted switched socket outlet
CBI Stainless Steel 2 x 16 A 3-pin single phase flush
ea 15
mounted switched socket outlet
Cabstrut access floor/conduit box system comprising
out of disposable concrete ingress prevention plate,
ea 12
conduit box, modular outlet plates, carper frame and
lid and 2 x 16A S.S.O.
16 A 3-pin single phase weatherproof surface
ea 2
mounted switched socket outlet in York box
Gewiss GW 70432 3 pole 16A surface flush mounted
ea 8
isolators
Gewiss GW 70435 3 pole 32A surface flush mounted
ea 26
isolators
Gewiss GW 70436 4 pole 32A surface flush mounted
ea 12
isolators
25mm Dia round galvanised wall box c/w lid ea 0
100 mm x 100 mm galvanised wall box ea 80
100 mm x 100 mm galvanised wall box c/w lid ea 30
Data socket RJ45 mounted in 100 x 100 box c/w lid in
ea 2
ceiling

3.3 Supply and installation of wiring

Supply and installation of PVC insulated, 600/1000V
grade, conductor including for wastage in conduit or
trunking: Contractor to measure quantity of
wiring from drawings himself for tendering
purposes.
Wire Size (mm²)
4 m 5 000
6 m 100
10 m 100
16 m Rate only
SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 3 : BUILDINGS : SMALL POWER

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)

3.4 Supply and installation of copper conductor in

conduit or trunking
Supply and installation of PVC insulated earth
conductor including for wastage in conduit or trunking:
Contractor to measure quantity of wiring from
drawings himself for tendering purposes.

Wire Size (mm²)

2,5 mm² m 5 000
6 mm² m 100
10 mm² m 100

3.5 Power skirting

The supply and installation of a two tier power skirting
(Powder coat finish), similair or equal to the cabstrut
Series 8 range. Colour = Amber Stone

3 m length complete with cover plate, ea 55

16 A 3-pin single phase switched socket outlet
ea 52
mounted on power skirting.
16A 3-pin single phase switched dedicated socket
ea 35
outlet mounted on power skirting. Colour = Red
Supply and install of a RJ45 data outlet point c/w lid in
ea 27
power skirting
End caps ea 34
Internal bends ea 5
Riser (3m length) ea 0 Rate only
External bends ea 18
Flat Elbow/T-Piece ea 0 Rate only

3.6 Distribution Boards

Supply, delivery and installation of the following new
distribution boards.
Main LV DBM ea 1
DB-1 ea 1
DB-2 ea 1
DB-K ea 1
800 x 600mm telephone DB ea 1

3.7 Fire Proofing

The supply and installation of fire proofing material
between each floor or opening in the DB shaft. sum 1

3.8 Draw Wire

Supply and install of draw wire per metre including for
sum 1
waste.

3.9 Manholes
Built the following manholes in the positions as shown
on the drawing
b 1000 x 1000 x 1000mm Brick manhole c/w Lid ea 1

3.10 Labelling
The supply and installation of all labels
sum 1

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF BILL

R
NO.3
SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 4 : LIGHTING INSTALLATION

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)

The Bill of Quantities must be read in conjunction with the

Specification Document and the Electrical Drawings.

4.1 Light fittings

4.1.1 A PC amount is allowed in the Bill of Quantities for the
installation of the light fittings for tender purposes. This
provisional sum may be deleted in part or in whole, and
shall only be expended upon written instruction by the
Engineer. Once a successful tenderer have been PC 1 R 800 000.00
approved and appointed, the name of the lighting
suppliers shall be forwarded to the successful tenderer to
order the light fittings.

4.1.2 The rate shall include the installation and connection only
of the following new light fittings.
Type A - 1200 x 600mm Recessed ea 56
Type B - Recessed downlighter ea 87
Type C - Recessed downlighter ea 18
Type D - Cove Lighting (striplight c/w splices, etc.) m 50
Type E - Spot light (on surface mounted track) ea 32
Type F - Spot light (on surface mounted track) ea 23
Type G - Wall mounted Bulkhead ea 7
Type H- Footlight (300mm AFFL) ea 27
Type I - Wall mounted Bulkhead ea 1
Type J - Open channel 2 tube fluorescent fitting ea 8
Type K - Ceiling mounted fitting ea 5
Type L - Flood light ea 2
Type M - Bollard light ea 9
Type O - Open channel 1 tube fluorescent fitting ea 1
Type EE - Emergency Exit fitting ea 6

4.1.3 Motion Detection Sensors ea 25

4.1.4 230V surface mounted track c/w splices, brackets, etc.

250
m

4.2 Conduit (PVC)

Supply and install of PVC conduit per metre run complete
with accessories, couplings and sets including for waste.
Contractor to measure quantity of conduit from
drawings himself for tendering purposes.

Conduit Size
20 mm m 1 000
25 mm m

4.3 Outlet boxes and accessories

Supply and installation of the conduit accessories:
(a) 20 mm round 4 – way box ea 100
(b) 50 x 100 galvanised wall box ea 10
(c) 100 x 100 mm galvanised wall box ea 10
(d) Cover plate for 20 mm or 25 mm round box ea 300
(e) Cover plate for 50 x 100 mm wall box ea 0 Rate only
(f) Cover plate for 100 x 100 mm wall box ea 10
(g) 6A Unswitched socket outlet c/w cover ea 200
SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 4 : LIGHTING INSTALLATION

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)

4.4 Photo Cell

Supply, delivery and installation of a Photo cell ea 1

4.5 Supply and installation of PVC insulated, MVGP grade,

conductor including for wastage in conduit or trunking.
Measurement to be taken from point to point.
Contractor to measure quantity of wiring from
drawings himself for tendering purposes.

Wire size (in conduit) (mm²)

2,5 m 5000
2.5 earth wire m 5000

4.6 Light Switches and Un-Switched Socket Outlets:

Supply, fitting and connection of the following complete
with cover plate an plug top (where applicable)
Item (Flush mounted)
16 A 1 lever 1 way ea 7
Dali MCU Rotary Dimmer ea 2
16 A 1 lever 1 way weatherproof ea 1
16 A 1 lever 2 way ea 2

4.7 AREA LIGHTING

4.7.1 A PC amount is allowed in the Bill of Quantities for the
installation of the light fittings for tender purposes. This
provisional sum may be deleted in part or in whole, and
shall only be expended upon written instruction by the
Engineer. Once a successful tenderer have been PC 2 R 120 000.00
approved and appointed, the name of the lighting
suppliers shall be forwarded to the successful tenderer to
order the light fittings. Type N

4.7.2 Installation of 8m mounting height steel pole ea 2

4.7.3 Concrete foundation c/w with soil and concrete cube tests
ea 2
4.7.4 Excavation of holes for pole ea 2

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF BILL NO. 4 R

SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 5 : LV CABLE INSTALLATION

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)

LV CABLE INSTALLATION

The Bill of Quantities must be read in conjunction with

the Specification Document and the Electrical Drawings.

5.1 Supply and installation of multicore 600/1000V grade

PVCSWAPVC cable per metre run including wastage
slack and installation. Lenths are estimated. Exact
lenths will be measured on site.

Cable No. of
Size (mm²) Cores
4 3 m 350
6 3 m 200
6 4 m 140
10 4 m 60
25 4 m 0 Rate Only
50 4 m 0 Rate Only
70 4 m 60
95 4 ea 100

5.2 Cable terminations

Supply and installation of multicore 600/1000V grade
PVCSWAPVC cable terminations. Cable termination to
include glands, shrouds, lugs, cable labels and connection
of cores.
Cable No. of
Size (mm²) Cores
4 3 ea 24
6 3 ea 24
6 4 ea 4
10 4 ea 2
25 4 ea 0 Rate Only
50 4 ea 0 Rate Only
70 4 ea 4
95 4 ea 4

5.3 Earthing
The supply and installation of the following bare copper
earth wire complete with terminations and lugs in the ground
or on a cable ladder:
4 m 350
6 m 340
10 m 60
25 m 0 Rate Only
50 m 0 Rate Only
70 m 60
95 m 50

5.4 Excavations
Laying of cable on 75mm sifted bedding, cover cables
with 75mm sifted bedding, backfilling in 150mm layers,
and stabilsing to original stability of cable trench. (
600mm wide x 1000mm deep )
Pickable soil m 200
Soft rock m 50
Hard rock m 50
SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 5 : LV CABLE INSTALLATION

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)

5.5 PVC Sleeves

The cost for the supply and installation of the following
heavy duty PVC Sleeves complete with joints and slow
bends:
110 mm Ø m 100
75 mm Ø m 50

5.6 Labels
The supply and installation of all labels as specified sum 1

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF BILL NO.

R
5
SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 6 : EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)

EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION

The Bill of Quantities must be read in conjunction with the

Specification Document and the Electrical Drawings.

6.1 Supply and installation of main earthing system

complete with all sundry materials and as follows :

a. 70 mm2 earth wire m 5 000

b. 70 mm2 earth wire ends lugged No 100
c. 70 mm2 earth wire ends clamped at earth rods No 25
d. 1,83 m. long earth electrodes No 30
e. Earth test points, incl. Copper to aluminium joints No 30
f. CADWELD conductor joints No 80
g. Bond earth wire to building reinforcement m 120
h. 500 x 50 x 3mm earthbar c/w accessories No 3
i. 300 x 50 x 3mm earthbar c/w accessories No 3

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF BILL NO. 6 R

SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 7 : FIRE DETECTION AND ACCESS CONTROL

Supply
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY and Install (R) TOTAL (R)
D li
FIRE DETECTION SYSTEM

The Bill of Quantities must be read in conjunction with the

Specification Document and the Electrical Drawings.

7.1 FIRE DETECTION

a. Supply and install Fire Control Panel No 1

7.2 Supply and install Passive mimic No 1

7.3 Supply and install Batteries No 2

7.4 Supply and install Optical Smoke Detectors No 44

7.5 Supply and install Heat Smoke Detectors No 2

7.6 Supply and install manual call points No 9

7.7 Supply and install Siren/Strobe light No 8

7.8 Labelling of complete Fire Detection system Sum 100%

7.9 Fire Retardant wiring m 1000

7.10 Supply and install 25mm dia PVC Conduit m 400

7.11 25mm 4 way round box complete with lid No 70

7.12 Test and Commission the complete Fire Detection installation Sum 1

ACCESS CONTROL

7.13 Keypad- Smart guard Black No 8

7.14 Maglock-SP600 lbs (272 KG) 12/24VDC Monitored with LED No 4

7.15 Bracket ZL for SP600 lbs Maglock No 4

7.16 Break glass No 4

7.17 PSU-3AMp Power Store 31,6VDC for 7AH Battery No 4

7.18 12V 7AH Batteries No 8

7.19 PH30 cable Sum 1

7.20 Door Closer No 4

7.21 PVC Trunking & Accessories Sum 1

7.22 Test and Commission the complete Fire Detection installation Sum 1

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF BILL NO. 7 R R -

SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 8 : WIRING CHANNELS

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)

WIRING CHANNELS

The Bill of Quantities must be read in conjunction with the

Specification Document and the Electrical Drawings.

Supply and install the following new galvanised wiring

8.1 channels, complete with splices, threaded rods, fasteners
including the supply and installation onto steel structure
a. P1000 41 x 41mm with Steel Cover ( 6m length) ea 10

b. P8000 76 x 76mm with Steel Cover ( 3m length) ea 60

c. Cross-Piece ea 2
d. T-Piece ea 7
e. Internal bend ea 6
f. external bend ea 0 Rate Only

g. P8300 76 x 63mm with Steel Cover ( 3m length) ea 115

h. Cross-Piece ea 11
i. T-Piece ea 13
j. Internal bend ea 3
k. external bend ea 0 Rate Only

l. P8100 76 x 25mm with Steel Cover ( 3m length) ea 67

m. Cross-Piece ea 0 Rate Only
n. T-Piece ea 7
o. Internal bend ea 3
p. external bend ea 1

Supply and install the following new galvanised Cabstrut

medium duty wire mesh cable tray, complete with splices,
8.2
threaded rods, fasteners including the supply and installation
onto steel structure
a. Medium duty wire mesh cable tray 300mm - 3m length ea 45
b. 300mm Dropper Radius 160 ea 2
c. 300mm 4-Way ea 0 Rate Only
d. 300mm Tee ea 5
e. 300mm External Bend ea 0 Rate Only
f. 300mm Horizontal Bend Radius 160 ea 5

Supply and install the following new galvanised Cabstrut

heavy duty cable tray, complete with splices, threaded rods,
8.3
fasteners including the supply and installation onto steel
structure
a. Perforated Heavy duty cable tray 300mm - 3m length ea 55
b. 300mm Horizontal Bend ea 0 Rate Only
c. 300mm 4-Way ea 0 Rate Only
d. 300mm Tee ea 0 Rate Only
e. 300mm Dropper ea 4
f. 300mm Internal Bend ea 10
g. FPA Flat plate cantilever arm (254 series) - 350 length ea 50

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF BILL NO. 8 R

SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 9 : PROVISIONAL SUMS

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)

SUMS STATED PROVISIONALLY BY THE

ENGINEER

The Bill of Quantities must be read in conjunction with the

Specification Document and the Electrical Drawings.

Provisional Sums

9.1 1kVA UPS PC 1 - 20 000.00

9.2 5kVA UPS PC 1 - 50 000.00

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF BILL NO. 9 R 70 000.00

SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF PRICES
SCHEDULE 10 : EMERGENCY GENERATOR

Supply and
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT QTY Install (R) TOTAL (R)
Deliver (R)

EMERGENCY GENERATOR

The Bill of Quantities must be read in conjunction with the

Specification Document and the Electrical Drawings.

10.1 GENERATOR
Supply and installation of a Standby Generator complete with
a. PC 1 R 450 000.00
AMF panel and 500L diesel tank

b. Overhead charges and profit on item 9.1a (max 5%) 1 R -

TOTAL CARRIED FORWARD TO SUMMARY OF BILL NO. 10 R

SANPARKS
GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTER
SCHEDULE OF SUMMARY
TOTAL BROUGHT
SCHEDULE NO. DESCRIPTION
FORWARD
1 Preliminary and General

2 MV & Main LV Electrical Works

3 Buildings : Small Power Installations

4 Buildings : Lighting Installations

5 LV Cable Installation

6 Earthing and Lightning Protection

7 Fire Detection

8 Wiring Channels

9 PC Sums : UPS Systems as required by SanParks

10 Generator

11
Sub-total
12 Contingencies (10% on Items 2-8)
TOTAL TENDER PRICE TO BE CARRIED FORWARD TO FINAL SUMMARY
Contract number: SP-GG-161

Part C: Mechanical Specifications

and Bill of Quantities

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
 GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

Tenderer’s Name:
Address:

Telephone No:
Fax No:
E-Mail:
Contact Name:
FINAL SUMMARY
Air Conditioning and ventilation tender price total including VAT(Part 3).
Domestic and fire water tender price total including VAT(Part 4).
Compressed Air tender price total including VAT(Part 5).
Total of tender price including VAT: (to be carried to official tender form Part A)

Consulting | Technology | Outsourcing Dihlase Consulting Engineers (Pty) Ltd

tel: +27 51 447 1636 | fax: +27 51 430 8316
Directors: BS Ngamlane, PJ Janse van Rensburg PostNet Suite 258, Private Bag X01, Brandhof,
Bloemfontein, 9324
17 First Street, Arboretum, Bloemfontein, 9301
www.eoh.co.za | www.dihlase.co.za
reg no: 2007/000416/07
 B3550 MA - i

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

CONTENTS

PART 1 TENDER REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT ....................................1-1

1 The scope of the works .......................................................................................................... 1-1
2 Schedule of documents making up a set of tender documents ............................................ 1-1
3 Alternative offers..................................................................................................................... 1-2
4 Alterations to tender documents ............................................................................................ 1-2
5 Qualification ............................................................................................................................ 1-2
PART 2 STANDARD MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION ...................................................................2-1
1 General requirements ............................................................................................................. 2-1
2 Standard specifications .......................................................................................................... 2-1
3 Visit to site .............................................................................................................................. 2-2
4 Material and workmanship ..................................................................................................... 2-2
5 Part of the specification .......................................................................................................... 2-2
6 Minimum requirement ............................................................................................................. 2-3
7 Proprietary materials .............................................................................................................. 2-3
8 Approval of equipment ........................................................................................................... 2-3
9 Reference specifications and standards ................................................................................ 2-3
10 Drawings ............................................................................................................................. 2-3
11 Construction and site issues ............................................................................................... 2-5
12 Inspections and testing ....................................................................................................... 2-6
13 Commissioning and handing over ...................................................................................... 2-8
14 Operating and maintenance manual .................................................................................. 2-9
15 Compliance with regulations ............................................................................................. 2-10
16 Design parameters ........................................................................................................... 2-11
17 Noise and vibration control ............................................................................................... 2-11
18 Coding, labelling and notices ............................................................................................ 2-12
19 Painting and marking ........................................................................................................ 2-13
PART 3 AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION INSTALLATION ..............................................3-1
PART 3.1 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - AIR CONDITIONING ......................... 3-1
1 Ductwork and duct testing ...................................................................................................... 3-1
2 Duct insulation ........................................................................................................................ 3-6
3 Sound attenuators, heaters and fire dampers ....................................................................... 3-8
4 Air terminal equipment ......................................................................................................... 3-10
 B3550 MA - ii
5 Packaged Air Handling Units ............................................................................................... 3-11
6 Fire dampers ........................................................................................................................ 3-15
7 Volume control dampers ...................................................................................................... 3-15
8 Fans ...................................................................................................................................... 3-16
9 Mid-wall split type room air conditioning units ...................................................................... 3-19
10 Variable refrigerant volume systems (VRV) ..................................................................... 3-21
11 Speed drives for pump and fan motors ............................................................................ 3-29
12 Electrical work in air conditioning projects ........................................................................ 3-34
PART 3.2 DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - AIR CONDITIONING ........................ 3-46
1 General ................................................................................................................................. 3-46
2 Drawings ............................................................................................................................... 3-46
3 Qualified Contractors ............................................................................................................ 3-46
4 Scope of work ....................................................................................................................... 3-46
5 Electrical ............................................................................................................................... 3-47
6 Midwall split type units .......................................................................................................... 3-48
7 Packaged air handling units ................................................................................................. 3-48
8 Variable refrigerant volume systems (VRV) Heat recovery type ......................................... 3-52
9 Smoke ventilation fans ......................................................................................................... 3-54
10 Ducted ventilation systems ............................................................................................... 3-56
11 Kitchen extraction canopy................................................................................................. 3-57
12 Dust extraction system ..................................................................................................... 3-58
13 Builder’s work .................................................................................................................... 3-60
14 Manuals and literature ...................................................................................................... 3-61
15 Painting and trunking ........................................................................................................ 3-61
16 Variations and omissions .................................................................................................. 3-61
17 Labelling ............................................................................................................................ 3-61
18 Engineering, commissioning and handing over ............................................................... 3-61
19 Guarantee and Maintenance ............................................................................................ 3-61
PART 3.3 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT OFFERED - AIR CONDITIONING .......................... 3-63
1 VRV Systems ....................................................................................................................... 3-63
2 Midwall Split Units ................................................................................................................ 3-64
3 Fans ...................................................................................................................................... 3-64
4 Grilles & louvres ................................................................................................................... 3-64
5 Supply Diffusers ................................................................................................................... 3-65
6 Extract AIr ............................................................................................................................. 3-65
7 Sound Attenuators ................................................................................................................ 3-65
8 Air handling units .................................................................................................................. 3-65
9 Fire dampers ........................................................................................................................ 3-66
10 kitchen Canopy ................................................................................................................. 3-66
11 Dust Collector unit ............................................................................................................ 3-66
12 Dust extraction arms ......................................................................................................... 3-66
 B3550 MA - iii
13 Qualification schedule/ Variations and Omissions ........................................................... 3-66
14 Declaration ........................................................................................................................ 3-67
PART 3.4 LIST OF DRAWINGS - AIR CONDITIONING.......................................................... 3-68
PART 3.5 BILLS OF QUANTITIES - AIR CONDITIONING ....................................................... 3-69
1 General notes ....................................................................................................................... 3-69
2 Summary….…………………………………………………………………………………………3-100
PART 4 DOMESTIC AND FIRE WATER INSTALATION ................................................................4-1
PART 4.1 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - DOMESTIC AND FIRE WATER
INSTALLATION ................................................................................................................................. 4-1
1 General ................................................................................................................................... 4-1
2 Installation of piping ................................................................................................................ 4-3
3 Testing of piping installations ................................................................................................. 4-3
4 Pipe sleeves ........................................................................................................................... 4-4
5 Pipe joints ............................................................................................................................... 4-4
6 Expansion and contraction ..................................................................................................... 4-4
7 Supports and hangers ............................................................................................................ 4-4
8 Insulation ................................................................................................................................ 4-5
9 Sheet metal cladding .............................................................................................................. 4-6
10 Copper piping...................................................................................................................... 4-6
11 Galvanised piping ............................................................................................................... 4-7
12 Fittings, etc. ......................................................................................................................... 4-8
13 Hot water circulating pumps ............................................................................................. 4-10
14 Industrial heat pumps ....................................................................................................... 4-10
15 Electrical work in domestic water projects ........................................................................ 4-11
16 Speed drives for pump and fan motors ............................................................................ 4-22
PART 4.2 DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - DOMESTIC AND FIRE WATER
INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................... 4-28
1 General ................................................................................................................................. 4-28
2 Drawings ............................................................................................................................... 4-28
3 Scope of work ....................................................................................................................... 4-28
4 General items relating to pipework ....................................................................................... 4-29
5 Domestic cold water installation ........................................................................................... 4-29
6 Fire protection ....................................................................................................................... 4-31
7 Underfloor heating system ................................................................................................... 4-33
8 Manuals and literature .......................................................................................................... 4-38
9 Painting and trunking ............................................................................................................ 4-38
10 Variations and omissions .................................................................................................. 4-38
11 Labelling ............................................................................................................................ 4-39
12 Engineering, commissioning and handing over ............................................................... 4-39
13 Guarantee and Maintenance ............................................................................................ 4-39
PART 4.3 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT OFFERED - DOMESTIC AND FIRE WATER
INSTALLATION ............................................................................................................................... 4-40
 B3550 MA - iv
1 Isolating Valves .................................................................................................................... 4-40
2 Safety Valves ........................................................................................................................ 4-40
3 Vacuum control Valves ......................................................................................................... 4-40
4 Pressure reducing Valves .................................................................................................... 4-40
5 Fittings .................................................................................................................................. 4-40
6 Expansion tank ..................................................................................................................... 4-41
7 Hot water storage vessel ...................................................................................................... 4-41
8 Under floor heating heat pump ............................................................................................. 4-41
9 Under Floor Heating Circulation Pump ................................................................................ 4-41
10 Qualification schedule/ Variations and Omissions ........................................................... 4-41
11 Declaration ........................................................................................................................ 4-42
PART 4.4 LIST OF DRAWINGS - DOMESTIC AND FIRE WATER INSTALLATION .............. 4-43
PART 4.5 BILLS OF QUANTITIES - DOMESTIC AND FIRE WATER INSTALLATION ......... 4-44
1 General notes ....................................................................................................................... 4-44
2 Summary….………………………………………………………………………………………….4-56
PART 5 COMPRESSED AIR INSTALLATION .................................................................................5-1
PART 5.1 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – COMPRESSED AIR INSTALLATION5-1
1 Qualified contractors .............................................................................................................. 5-1
2 Standard specification ............................................................................................................ 5-1
3 General requirements for Compressed Air installations ........................................................ 5-2
4 Pressure regulators ................................................................................................................ 5-7
5 Electrical services for inustrial gas installations ..................................................................... 5-7
6 Manuals and literature .......................................................................................................... 5-11
7 Approval of equipment and plant ......................................................................................... 5-12
PART 5.2 DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – COMPRESSED AIR INSTALLATION5-13
1 General ................................................................................................................................. 5-13
2 Drawings ............................................................................................................................... 5-13
3 Qualified contractors ............................................................................................................ 5-13
4 Scope of work ....................................................................................................................... 5-13
5 Compressed Air plant ........................................................................................................... 5-14
6 Compressed air piping ......................................................................................................... 5-16
7 Service points ....................................................................................................................... 5-16
8 Compressed air reticulation drain points .............................................................................. 5-16
9 Builder’s work ....................................................................................................................... 5-17
10 Manuals and literature ...................................................................................................... 5-17
11 Painting and trunking ........................................................................................................ 5-17
12 Variations and omissions .................................................................................................. 5-17
13 Labelling ............................................................................................................................ 5-17
14 Engineering, commissioning and handing over ............................................................... 5-17
15 Guarantee and Maintenance ............................................................................................ 5-18
PART 5.3 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT OFFERED ................................................................ 5-19
 B3550 MA - v
1 Compressor .......................................................................................................................... 5-19
2 Air Dryer ................................................................................................................................ 5-19
3 Moisture traps ...................................................................................................................... 5-19
4 Oil traps ............................................................................................................................... 5-19
5 Filter Regulators ................................................................................................................... 5-20
6 Cyclone Water Separator ..................................................................................................... 5-20
PART 5.4 LIST OF DRAWINGS ................................................................................................ 5-21
PART 5.5 BILLS OF QUANTITIES ............................................................................................ 5-22
1 General notes ....................................................................................................................... 5-22
2 Method of Measurement ...................................................................................................... 5-23
3 Summary….………………………………………………………………………………………….5-29
 B3550 MA - 1-1

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 1 TENDER REQUIREMENTS AND CONDITIONS OF CONTRACT

1 THE SCOPE OF THE WORKS

The scope of the installation described in detail in this document and drawings covers the
supply, delivery, off-loading, storage, installation, commissioning, testing, handing over
and free maintenance for the period stated in the tender document of all specified
equipment and materials for the installation.
The scope of work consists of three services:
1. Air Conditioning and Ventilation consisting of:
Part 2: Standard Mechanical Specification
Part 3.1: Standard Technical Specification - Air Conditioning
Part 3.2: Detailed Technical Specification - Air Conditioning
Part 3.3: Schedule of equipment - Air Conditioning
Part 3.4: List of drawings - Air Conditioning
Part 3.5: Bills of quantities - Air Conditioning

2. Domestic and Fire Water Services consisting of:

Part 2: Standard Mechanical Specification
Part 4.1: Standard Technical Specification - Domestic and Fire Water Services
Part 4.2: Detailed Technical Specification - Domestic and Fire Water Services
Part 4.3: Schedule of equipment - Domestic and Fire Water Services
Part 4.4: List of drawings - Domestic and Fire Water Services
Part 4.5: Bills of quantities - Domestic and Fire Water Services

3. Compressed Air Installation consisting of:

Part 2: Standard Mechanical Specification
Part 5.1: Standard Technical Specification- Compressed Air Installation
Part 5.2: Detailed Technical Specification- Compressed Air Installation
Part 5.3: Schedule of equipment- Compressed Air Installation
Part 5.4: List of drawings- Compressed Air Installation
Part 5.5: Bills of quantities- Compressed Air Installation

2 SCHEDULE OF DOCUMENTS MAKING UP A SET OF TENDER DOCUMENTS

The schedule of the documents making up a set of tender documents is given on pages
i to v of this volume.
The tenderer shall check that the set of documents issued to him is complete in all
respects and he shall apply to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer to have any errors of
ambiguities corrected before the submission of his tender.
The tenderer is to take note that all of the relevant clauses mentioned in clause 1 above
 B3550 MA - 1-2

apply to the bills of quantities in parts 3,4 and 5. The contractor must also ensure that
subcontractors price according to all the documents listed, as no price adjustments will
be tolerated for not being aware of the clauses and part mentioned in this and the
previous clause.

3 ALTERNATIVE OFFERS
If the tenderer wishes to submit an alternative offer he shall set out details of his
alternative proposal in separate qualifying documentation. Alternative tenders will not be
considered without a valid tender being offered first in accordance with all the
requirements set out in the tender documents.
All alternative offers shall be included in separate tender forms clearly stating the
manufactures
The specified products are the minimum requirements and any other product offered as
an alternative shall be the same quality and have the same capabilities or better than that
specified. The decision of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer will be final.

4 ALTERATIONS TO TENDER DOCUMENTS

All authorised alterations to the tender documents will be communicated to the tenderers
via the system of “Notice to Tenderers”

5 QUALIFICATION
If the tenderer wishes to submit other items in place of or wish to qualify any of the
provisions of any of the documents comprising this tender document, he shall set out
details of his amendments below. Tenderers are advised that preference could be given
to tenderers who will submit unqualified tenders
.
 B3550 MA - 2-1

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 2 STANDARD MECHANICAL SPECIFICATION

1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
This installation shall be suitable in all respects for operation under the atmospheric
conditions and electricity supply as outlined in the schedules. The onus is on the
tenderer to ascertain any other local conditions or peculiarities which might affect the
working of the plant, and no allowance in price or standards of materials or workmanship
will be made for any ignorance on the part of the tenderer in this respect.
All materials and workmanship supplied under this contract shall be of the highest quality.
The Consulting Mechanical Engineer shall have the right to reject and demand
satisfactory replacement at the Contractor's cost, or any part of it, which, is his opinion,
does not conform to the highest standards of material and workmanship. The installation
shall be required to run for long continuous periods, and it is essential that all installations
shall be capable of operating continuously and satisfactorily over such periods.

2 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS

2.1 GENERAL STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS, REGULATIONS AND CODES

The latest edition, including all amendments up to date of tender, of the following
specifications, publications and codes of practice shall be read in conjunction with this
specification and shall be deemed to form part thereof.
Where a specification or standard is not specifically referred to, it will be assumed that
the relevant SANS, ISO, BSS, DIN or equivalent American standard, listed in order of
preference will apply:

2.2 SANS AND OTHER SPECIFICATIONS AND CODES:

CKS 332 Specifications for industrial V-belts
SANS 10400 1990 The application of the building regulations
SANS 10142 2001 Code of practice for the wiring of premises
SANS 10140 2000 Identification colour marking
SANS 1044 Parts 1-4 1963 Welding
The measurement and rating of environmental
SANS 10103 1994 noise with respect to annoyance and speech
communications
Refrigeration systems including plants
SANS 10147 2002
associated with air conditioning systems.
SANS 10173 1980 The installation, testing and balancing of air
 B3550 MA - 2-2

conditioning duct work

SANS 1238 1979 Air conditioning duct work

SANS 1287 1980 Ventilation practices and ducting
Filters for use in air conditioning and general
SANS 1424 1987
ventilation
SANS 1530 Part 1 1991 Panels with two impervious facing sheets
2.3 OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY ACT
All regulations and statutory requirements as laid down in the latest edition of the
Occupational Health and Safety Act, 1993 (Act 85 of 1993) shall be adhered to.

2.4 MANUFACTURER’S SPECIFICATIONS, CODES OF PRACTICE AND

INSTALLATION INSTRUCTIONS
All equipment and materials shall be installed, serviced and repaired strictly in
accordance with the manufacturers’ specifications, instructions and codes of practice.

2.5 MUNICIPAL REGULATIONS, LAWS AND BY-LAWS

All municipal regulations, laws, by-laws and special requirements of the Local Authority
shall be adhered to unless otherwise specified.

3 VISIT TO SITE
Tenderers must acquaint themselves with local site conditions such as access area
available on site, type of ground, space available for onsite fabrication, storage, transport,
loading and unloading facilities, scaffolding, tackles and tools needed, as no claims by
the Contractor, which may arise from ignorance of the site conditions, will be considered.

4 MATERIAL AND WORKMANSHIP

The contract works shall be executed in accordance with the specified standards and
level of workmanship, to the satisfaction of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
All materials shall be of the quality specified and the Contractor shall, upon request of the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer, furnish him with proof to his satisfaction that the
materials are of the specified quality. In this regard, the Contractor shall submit
documentary evidence and details of the plant, equipment and diagrams to the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer prior to ordering the equipment.
All materials and equipment used for the installations shall be new and undamaged.
The Contractor shall, if requested by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer, provide
samples of material and equipment for approval. If judged necessary by the Engineer,
such samples, may only be returned after the completion of the installation, in order to
ensure that the quality of the installed product is the same as that of the approved
sample.

5 PART OF THE SPECIFICATION

The Standard Mechanical Specification covers the general technical requirements of the
mechanical installation. These specifications shall be read in conjunction with the
document in its entirety. If the conditions and/or specifications contained herein are at
variance with anything contained in the detail specification, the latter shall take
preference, otherwise these Standard Mechanical Specifications shall apply as if duly
included.
 B3550 MA - 2-3

6 MINIMUM REQUIREMENT
The conditions and/or specifications in this section shall be regarded as the absolute
minimum requirement. More stringent similar conditions and/or specifications stated in
the Detailed and Standard Technical Specification shall take preference to those in these
Standard Mechanical Specifications.

7 PROPRIETARY MATERIALS
The Tenderer’s attention is drawn to the Detailed Technical Specification and Bills of
Quantities generally which forms an integral part of the specification, specifically to the
following clauses:
Where the term “or other equal approved” is used in connection with proprietary materials
or articles, it is to be understood that approval shall be at the discretion of the Employer.
Where brand or trade names are referred to in the Detailed Technical Specification and
Bills of Quantities, these shall indicate the quality and type of material or fitting required
and no substitution of materials so specified will be permitted unless the authority of the
Employer has been obtained in writing before tender close.

8 APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall, prior to ordering or manufacturing of equipment and materials,
submit details of the intended materials and equipment for approval by the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer. These details shall include engineering data sheets, drawings and
any other documentation that the Engineer asks for to enable the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer to assess that equipment offered meets the requirement of the specification.
Once installation has commenced with the appropriate approvals for using any type and
make of article or equipment, the same type and make of article or equipment shall be
used throughout the project for that specific application unless otherwise specified.

9 REFERENCE SPECIFICATIONS AND STANDARDS

The latest revision of any Specification referred to in this specification, will be applicable.
Where a specification or standard is not specifically referred to, it will be assumed that
the relevant SANS, ISO, BSS, DIN or equivalent American standard, listed in order of
preference will apply.
The SI (“Le Systeme International d’ Unites”) – Metric System of Units will apply.

10 DRAWINGS

10.1 ENGINEER’S DRAWINGS

Unless otherwise specified, the Engineer’s Tender drawings are not manufacturing
drawings and the dimensions given are only sufficient for tendering purposes or to enable
the Contractor to complete manufacturing drawings. It is the responsibility of the
Contractor to verify all dimensions.
The Consulting Mechanical Engineer shall make available to, at the request of the
Contractor, any available record drawings of the present installation.

10.2 CONTRACTOR’S DRAWINGS

 B3550 MA - 2-4

10.2.1 GENERAL
The Contractor will be furnished, on request, with the Engineer’s drawings and a
complete set of “as built” drawings identified as available in this document.
The Contractor shall supply two (2) copies of each detail design drawing for approval.
The Contractor shall allow the Consulting Mechanical Engineer one (1) week for drawing
approval. After a marked-up copy with all the Engineer’s comments has been returned,
the Contractor shall update the original, which shall then be submitted to the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer for signature. This will ensure that all prints used for construction
will be certified as approved
Two (2) copies of the certified drawing shall be issued to the Engineer for distribution.
The Contractor will be required to produce the following detail design drawings:
Builder’s Work Drawings.
Mechanical Drawings
These are all Workshop and Equipment Layout Drawings required for the manufacture
and erection of the installations.
Instrumentation Drawings, such as:
Schematic Control Diagrams.
General Arrangement Drawing of Control Board
10.2.2 ELECTRICAL PANEL CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
10.2.3 WORKSHOP DRAWINGS:
Indicating the following shall be approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer before
manufacture commences:
Boards - General
Front, side and back elevations of the boards
Typical sections through the boards
Construction details
Dimensions and construction details of board
Colour of board sections
Placing of switchgear on boards
Detail and position of legend card holder
Details and position of schematic drawing holder
Wording, position, size and colours of name strips and notices
Assembly and holding down details of each board
Full schematic wiring diagrams showing terminal wire and component numbers and
circuit designations.
Busbars
Current rating
Fault current rating
Positions and spacings of busbars and access to busbars
Dimensions of busbars
Details, positions and spacing of supports
 B3550 MA - 2-5

Type of material of busbars and supports

Busbar identification

Switchgear
Minimum fault capacity of switchgear
Type and manufacture of switchgear used
Current and voltage transformer ratio and V A-ratings
Meters
Maximum capacity of meter in A, V. kWh, etc.
Type and manufacture of meter
Full scale of meter
Multiplication factor, if applicable.
All wiring diagrams and symbols used shall be in accordance with DIN or other equal
approved and nationally or internationally acceptable Standards. Unless otherwise
specified, cable routes shall be superimposed on the Mechanical Layout Drawings,
showing the runs and fixing details.
Any work done by the Contractor without an approved signed drawing, will be at the risk
of the Contractor.
The Contractor shall update all drawings (“record drawings”) once the installation has
been completed. One (1) set of paper prints and one (1) set in an acceptable electronic
format shall be supplied to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer as part of the O & M
Manual.

11 CONSTRUCTION AND SITE ISSUES

11.1 CONSTRUCTION, PLANT, ETC.

Tenderers shall include an amount for the supply of all scaffolding, ladders, trestles, dust
sheets and everything necessary for the proper performance of the contract, for clearing
and removal of all rubbish due to the work, for the protection of the work from damage
due to the building operations, other contracts and the weather. In existing buildings
Contractors shall in particular take adequate precautions to the satisfaction of the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer to prevent damage to existing apparatus during erection
operation.

11.2 MATERIAL, OFF-LOADING AND STORAGE

Tenderers must take due allowance in their tenders for the off-loading of materials and
the storage and safe custody thereof according to manufacturer’s specifications on or off
site until such can be accommodated or is required on site.

11.3 INSPECTION OF LOCALLY MANUFACTURED SUPPLIES

Where locally manufactured plant or materials are offered, the Employer reserves the
right to inspect such plant or goods during manufacture and to reject items that do not
conform to the owner’s requirements. Where a number of units are ordered by the owner
the Contractor shall notify the representative of the Employer when one unit has been
completed so that the representative of the Employer may inspect and approve it.

11.4 ORDERING MATERIALS

 B3550 MA - 2-6

The Contractor is warned to place all orders for materials or special articles as early as
possible as he will be held solely responsible for any delay in the delivery of such goods.

11.5 PACKING
The Contractor will be held responsible for packing all plant and other goods in such a
manner as to ensure freedom from any loss or damage in transit. Unless otherwise
specifically agreed upon, receptacles will not be returned or paid for and no additional
charges will be allowed for packing or packing materials.

11.6 SAMPLES FOR TEST

The Contractor shall furnish, without delay, such samples for testing, or other purposes,
as called for, or may be called for, by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer, who may
reject all materials or workmanship not corresponding with the approved sample.
Notwithstanding that samples and approved brands of materials, etc. are exhibited or
included in classified lists at the offices of the owner, the Consulting Mechanical Engineer
may retest any samples, brands of materials, etc. included in the contract and reject
articles and materials, etc. that do not strictly comply with the specification.

11.7 DAMAGE TO BUILDINGS AND THE MISUSE OF FACILITIES

Any damage done to the buildings, roads and landscaped areas by the Contractor, or his
workmen, shall be made good by the Contractor. Should the Contractor, or his
personnel, be granted leave by the Employer to utilise on-site facilities and such facilities
be misused or damaged, the facilities shall be cleaned and/or repaired to the satisfaction
of the Employer (It should be understood however, that the provision of facilities (toilets,
etc.) in terms of the Preliminary and General costs called for in the tender document, are
the responsibility of the Contractor). If the Contractor fails to attend to such damage, the
Employer will take care of remedial work required and shall deduct the cost of such work
from the contract monies due to the Contractor.

11.8 PROTECTION OF OWNER’S EQUIPMENT

The Contractor shall ensure that any computers or other valuable equipment of the owner
is sufficiently protected against work or dust by means of temporary coverings or sealed-
off partitions.

11.9 ARRANGEMENTS WITH SUPPLY AUTHORITIES

The Contractor shall apply for and complete all the formalities necessary for compliance
with any statutory requirements as necessary. He shall also make himself available for
all statutory authority inspections in order to complete all the formalities and tests.
Inspection fees shall be allowed for in the tender.

11.10 TAKING RESPONSIBILITY FOR THE INSTALLATION (FOR NORMAL

ELECTRICAL OR ELECTRICAL WITHIN MECHANICAL INSTALLATIONS)
With first delivery, the Contractor shall accept in writing the responsibility for the total
installation as installed by him by certifying the correctness of the installation in
accordance with and on the certificates of compliance of the work as per the
Specification.

12 INSPECTIONS AND TESTING

12.1 INSPECTIONS (PART III, SAACE – 1978)

 B3550 MA - 2-7

The Consulting Mechanical Engineer shall have general supervision and direction of the
Contract Works. Supervision shall comprise such periodic visits as the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer may consider necessary to inspect the Contract Works for
conformity with the Contract documentation and to provide clarification and further
information as necessary.
The Consulting Mechanical Engineer shall have the power at any time to inspect and
examine any part of the Contract Works or any materials intended for use in or on the
Contract Works, either on the site or at any factory, workshop or other place where such
parts or materials are being constructed or manufactured or at any place where such
parts or materials are lying or from where they are being obtained and the Contractor
shall give all such facilities as the Consulting Mechanical Engineer may reasonable
require to be given for such inspection and examination.
The Contractor shall not be liable for the cost of inspecting materials at the place of
manufacture, construction or storage nor be responsible for any travelling or
accommodation costs arising out of the execution of such inspection, etc.

12.2 TESTING
12.2.1 TEST EQUIPMENT
The Contractor shall supply all test equipment, test facilities and everything necessary, at
his cost, to perform tests. The following testing and commissioning equipment as
applicable shall be required:
Pitot tube and manometer.
Hot wire anemometer.
Crane type manometer for balancing valves.
Thermometer for insertion into pipe and duct pockets alongside temperature detectors.
Sling psychrometer.
Revolution counter suitable for measuring fan and motor shaft rotation.
Megger equipment.
Clamp on ammeter.
Voltmeter.
Power factor meter.
Ohmmeter suitable for continuity testing.
Neon type ON/OFF test lamp.
Maximum indicating ammeter suitable for measuring peak motor starting currents.
The Contractor shall record all measurements taken during testing and shall do the
necessary adjustments until the Consulting Mechanical Engineer is satisfied with the
results.
The Consulting Mechanical Engineer shall be notified one (1) week in advance of any
tests so that he may witness such tests.
Unless otherwise specified, the Contractor will be required to perform the following tests:
Electrical switchboards
Each board and its components shall be subjected at the Manufacturer's works to the
routine tests, called for in the appropriate SANS and BS Specifications and this
Specification.
The following tests shall be performed on all circuits:
 Full operational tests of opening and closing each circuit breaker and the
contactor from their respective protection relays and control devices inclusive of
sequence controls where required.
 B3550 MA - 2-8

 Pressure tests between phases and between phases and earth.

 Primary injection test of all protective relays.
 Secondary injection test of motor overload devices.
 Pressure test of all secondary wiring at 2kV for one minute.
 Polarity tests of current.
Ducting
Pressure test medium and high pressure ducting in terms of SANS 10173-2003: Code of
Practice for the Installation, Testing and Balancing of the Air Conditioning Ductwork.
Water piping
Pressure test of all piping at a test pressure of 1,5 times the maximum working pressure
at the lowest point in the system, but not less than 700 kPa. All instrumentation or other
equipment, which could be damaged during the pressure test, shall be removed from the
pipe system. The relevant system shall be filled with water and all high points shall be
vented at least 24 hours before the test. The duration of the pressure test shall be 24
hours, after which no water leaks shall be visible and no pressure drop shall occur after
corrections have been made for changes in ambient temperature during the test period.
Pressure tests shall be completed in sections, which adhere to the schedule as specified
in this specification, prior to insulating or covering piping.
If leaks are found, welded connections shall be cut out and rewelded and screwed joints
shall be dismantled, cleaned and reconnected. Rectified piping shall be retested.
Pressure vessels
Refer to the requirements set out in the Occupational Health and Safety Act of 1993.
Refrigerant piping
Factory charged systems shall first be pressure tested and thereafter be vacuum tested.
Field charged systems shall only be pressure tested.
Refrigerant pipes and equipment shall be tested under vacuum at a pressure of 0,68 kPa
absolute, maintained for a period of one hour with the vacuum pump uncoupled. Any
leaks under these conditions are not acceptable.
Refrigerant pipes and equipment shall be tested in terms of SANS 10147 – 2002: Code
of Practice for Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Installations. All connections shall be
inspected for leaks by means of a sensitive leak detector and soap bubble test.

13 COMMISSIONING AND HANDING OVER

13.1 PROCEDURE
13.1.1 PHYSICAL COMPLETION
After physical completion of the erection phase of the installations, the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer will issue a Snags List certifying that commissioning can proceed.
Items which would not influence the commissioning process could, at the discretion of the
Engineer, be attended to during commissioning stage.
13.1.2 COMMISSIONING STAGE
After commissioning the Consulting Mechanical Engineer will issue a second Snags List
(the Commissioning Snags List). Any outstanding work will be recorded on this list.
13.1.3 ENGINEER’S CERTIFICATE
After completion of all outstanding items and receipt of all manuals and drawings as
recorded on the Commissioning Snags List the Engineer will issue a First Delivery
Certificate. This certificate will accompany a certificate of acceptance by the Client’s
 B3550 MA - 2-9

representative.
The one year maintenance and guarantee period will commence on the date of the First
Delivery Certificate.
13.1.4 COMMISSIONING
The Commissioning of the entire installation shall be carried out timeously. The
workshop drawings, to be produced by the Contractor, are to be perused and approved,
in principal, by the Contractor’s Commissioning Engineer who is to confirm that the
installation as indicated can be commissioned.
The commissioning of the installation shall be in terms of the following codes, or any
other code approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer:
SANS 10173 – 2003: Code of Practice for the
1 Air Distribution Systems: Installation, Testing and Balancing of Air
Conditioning Ductwork.
CIBS: Commissioning Code: Series R:
2 Refrigeration Systems
Refrigeration Systems.
Commissioning Code: Series C: Automatic
3 Control System:
Controls.
Water Distribution CIBS: Commissioning Code: Series W: Water
4
Systems: Distribution Systems.

The Contractor shall submit the Commissioning program to the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer, at least four (4) weeks prior to the commencement of commissioning.
The power connections to the various installed equipment must be energized to facilitate
commissioning of the installation.
To enable this switch-on to take place the installation must be substantially complete.
The Contractor shall inform the Consulting Mechanical Engineer within (4) weeks of his
appointment, what time allocation has been allowed for commissioning purposes. This
must be reflected on the Critical Path Schedule to be submitted by the Contractor.
13.1.5 TRAINING AND MAINTENANCE
The Contractor shall provide a suitably qualified and trained person to train the
Employer’s staff in the correct operation and maintenance of the installation. The
Contractor shall allow for this person to be full time on site as called for in the
maintenance contract conditions.

14 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE MANUAL

The Contractor shall, at his cost, prepare and supply manuals for the successful
operation and maintenance of the installation.
Six weeks prior to the commencement of commissioning, the Contractor shall supply a
draft of the manual to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer for approval. Two weeks after
commissioning, the Contractor shall supply three (3) additional manuals, which have
been updated and included all commissioning data and “record” drawings.
These manuals shall contain the following information:
INDEX OF CONTENTS
SECTION 1: SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A comprehensive description of the installation.
 B3550 MA - 2-10

SECTION 2: OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS

2.1 Starting and stopping instructions.
2.2 Prestart checks.
2.3 Equipment running checks.
SECTION 3: MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT
The following information shall be provided in full for each item of equipment:
3.1 General information
Description, Make, Model Number, Name and Address of Supplier, Manufacturer,
3.2 Design information
Design Data Sheet containing all design and selection parameters, calculations,
selection curves, etc.
3.3 Settings and values recorded during commissioning.
3.4 Manufacturer’s Brochures and Pamphlets.
3.5 Maintenance Data and Schedules
The lapse of time between services and the description of the service required of
each part, lubrication requirements, etc.
3.6 Schedule of Spares.
SECTION 4: WORKSHOP AND CONSTRUCTION DRAWINGS
One hard copy of each drawing, as well as all drawings in the appropriate electronic
format.

15 COMPLIANCE WITH REGULATIONS

The entire installation shall be carried out in accordance with the latest revision and
amendments of the following:
The Code of Practice for the Wiring of Premises issued by the South African Bureau of
Standards, SANS 10142-1:2003.
The Occupational Health and Safety Act, Act 85 of 1993, including the Construction
Regulations of 2003.
The municipal by-laws and any special requirements of the supply authorities of the area
and district concerned.
The local fire-brigade regulations.
The applicable SANS specifications, or the BS specifications where no SANS
specifications exist.
No claims for extras in respect of failure by the mechanical Contractor to comply with any
of the above regulations will be considered.
Where conflict exists between any of the above regulations and the specification, the said
conflict must be referred to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer in writing for his ruling.
The Contractor shall be responsible for serving all notices and paying all fees due in
terms of the laws and regulations mentioned.
 B3550 MA - 2-11

16 DESIGN PARAMETERS
The following design parameters shall apply:

16.1 AMBIENT CONDITIONS

Altitude Approximately 1600 m above sea level
Barometric Pressure 85.8 kPa
Summer DB Temperature 33°C
Summer WB Temperature 20°C
Winter DB Temperature -7°C
Winter WB Temperature -2°C

16.2 INDOOR CONDITIONS

Summer Inside Temperature DB 22.5°C ± 1°C
Winter Inside Temperature WB 20.0°C ± 1°C

17 NOISE AND VIBRATION CONTROL

The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining noise and vibration transmission from
his equipment to the building structure and adjacent rooms within the limits suggested in
the SANS "Code of Practice for the Rating of Noise for Speech Communication and with
the respect to Annoyance, Code Number 10103 - 2004.
In order to attain the noise levels specified, the Contractor shall provide the necessary
spring type vibration mountings under all rotating equipment, flexible pump piping
connections, etc.
All noise and vibration control equipment must be clearly shown on the Contractor's
drawings which are to be submitted for approval.
Noise levels specified above may be amended in the supplementary specification if a
specific part of the contract works so requires. This shall not however relieve the
Contractor of the responsibility of meeting the requirements of the above clauses as far
as the remainder of the contract work is concerned.
The following table is an excerpt from the abovementioned SANS code.
Intruding noise
Type of indoor space
level dB(A), max
Hospital ward, theatre, church,cinema, concert hall, small
25 - 35
office,reading room, conference room,lecture room
Large office, business store,department store, meeting
35
room,small quiet restaurant
Large restaurant, secretarial office(with typewriter), gymnasium 45
Large typing halls 55
Workshop (according to intended use) 45 - 75
 B3550 MA - 2-12

Noise generating equipment such as fans, compressors, pumps, motors etc. shall be
selected to operate as close to the point of maximum efficiency as possible. It is the
responsibility of the Tenderer to check operating noise levels of the equipment before
tendering. Tenderers offering equipment with low noise ratings may receive preference.
Tenderers are advised to calculate sound levels on the system offered before tendering.
Where it is not possible to meet the specified sound levels due to the noise generated by
the equipment, or due to inadequacies in the building structure, or the design of the plant,
such deficiencies shall be stated in the tender together with the Tenderer's
recommendations and cost implications.
The Contractor shall submit noise estimating sheets for all systems as well the insertion
loss ratings of sound attenuators for approval before ordering. Failure to do so may
result in additional costs to the Contractor if noise levels in any area should exceed the
specified limits.
If the noise levels exceed the values specified above, the Contractor shall be responsible
to carry out all the necessary rectifications at his own expense.

18 CODING, LABELLING AND NOTICES

18.1 GENERAL
The Contractor shall supply and install all coding, labelling and notices as required under
this Clause.
The wording shall be in English.
To reduce the possibility of incorrect labels and/or notices, the Contractor shall submit a
schedule of labels and notices to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer for approval.
Costs to rectify inscriptions, resulting from the failure by the Contractor to obtain approval,
will be for his account.

18.2 CODING
18.2.1 GENERAL
Codes and numbers for wiring shall be CRITCHLEY IZ-type, or other equal approved,
Cable Marker interlocking endless expanding markers, as supplied by CABLE
ACCESSORIES (PTY) LTD. CRITCHLEY C-type, or other equal approved, Cable
Markers shall only be used with the approval of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer
where wires and piping have already been terminated.
Lettering shall be marked in black on a white background.
18.2.2 ELECTRICAL
Provide and install the following coding:
Numbering of both ends of power and control conductors in switchboards.
Numbering of both ends of field cables.
Numbering of both ends of individual field conductors within cables of control circuits
only, where such conductors are not uniquely identified by means of insulation colour
codes.

18.3 LABELLING
18.3.1 GENERAL
Labelling shall be CRITCHLEY UNILABEL, or other equal approved, Cable Marker, as
supplied by CABLE ACCESSORIES, or engraved “IVORENE” or “TRAFOLITE” labels.
Black letters on a white background shall be used.
 B3550 MA - 2-13

Labels shall be fixed with screws or acceptably glued to all equipment.

18.3.2 EQUIPMENT
All mechanical, electrical and instrumentation equipment shall be identified by means of
an equipment code.
Minimum height of letters: 10mm.
18.3.3 NOTICES
Supply and install all notices required in terms of Statutory Regulations.
In terms of the Occupational Health and Safety Act, Act of 1993, the following notices are
required:
(C.52) At the entrance to each plantroom, the following notice shall be provided:
Prohibiting unauthorized persons from entering.
Prohibiting unauthorized persons from handling or interfering with electrical apparatus.
Directions as to procedure in case of fire.
Directions as to restoration of persons suffering from the effects of electrical shock.
(C.73) Manufacturer’s Plate on Pressure Vessels:
Manufacturer’s name.
Country of Origin.
Maker’s Number.
Year of Construction.
Maximum permissible working pressure in Pascal.
Capacity in cubic metres
Name and Number of Code of Manufacture.

19 PAINTING AND MARKING

19.1.1 GENERAL
All steelwork, piping, lagging, etc. supplied under this contract shall be painted as
required under this clause:
Exposed portions of boilers, calorifiers, cylinders, etc. in the plant room shall be properly
cleaned, primed and painted two coats of heat resistant paint.
All other exposed metal parts such as pumps, belt guards, all piping, pipe lagging,
fittings, dampers, fans, coils, motors, pumps, packaged units, control panels, steelwork,
exposed ducts and lagging, expansion tanks, make-up tanks, cooling tower, unit shelters,
etc. shall be cleaned, primed, undercoated and finished in a high quality gloss paint of
approved colour.
All external equipment exposed to the weather must be cleaned, primed and painted with
two coats of epoxy paint.
The lagged surface of calorifier, headers and pipes shall be primed, undercoated and
finished in a high quality gross of approved colour. Unlagged steam piping shall be
painted with heat resistant paint.All plants shall be generally painted as indicated below:

Machinery, Structural steelwork etc

All exposed metal parts, Checker plates, Pipe supports
1 Black
Handrails, Base plates
 B3550 MA - 2-14

2 Body portions of machines Olive Green

All machinery external to the building (except piping and valves
3 Dove Grey
and fittings)
All moving parts which are visible when operating. In-side
4 Orange
surfaces of all machineguards, belt guards etc.
5 All handles, levers, handwheel centres adjustment knobs, etc. Yellow
All lagging on boilers, calorifiers, tanks, cylinders etc. (except
6 Aluminium
on piping and pump sets and ducting)
Electrical distribution boards (except where transparent covers
are used)
7 Light Grey
Control panels
Indicator panels

Water treatment plant(excepton piping).

8 Light Blue
Air Conditioning plant (except on piping).

Yellow and
All points which constitute a physical hazard, e.g. (stay-wires,
9 Black Cross
low pipes, access doorways, etc.).
Hatch
10 Drainage piping Black

19.1.2 PIPING, PUMPS, VALVES, FITTINGS ETC

The colour code for pipelines and machines is based on the following:
SANS, 10140-3 : Identification colour marking; Contents of Pipelines
BS 1710-1975 : Identification of pipelines
All unlagged black piping, holderbolts, supports anchors fittings, etc. shall be painted in
accordance with British Standard Specification No. BS 1710.
In enclosed horizontal or vertical ducts, surfaces, mezzanine spaces and basements
where pipelines are already painted or galvanised or are lagged, painting may be
restricted to 150 mm long lengths at a maximum spacing of 4 m, and at all branches,
tees, valves, and at the entry from such ducts, spaces, etc.
Except where otherwise specified all piping on surfaces shall be painted with a primer, an
undercoat and a finishing coat in an approved high quality gloss paint. to the colour
indicated in the schedule. This also applies to all holderbolts, supports, anchors, fittings
and valves. Where only 150 mm lengths of the pipe are painted the colour and
specification of the painting shall be in terms of this clause.
Pump sets, valves, fittings, etc. shall be painted the same basic colour as the pipelines,
except those of fire fighting services, which shall be painted red.
19.1.3 BANDS
The length of the band shall be same as the final pipe diameter, but not less than 100
mm. Where three strips are required per band, each strip shall be one third of the final
pipe diameter but not less than 35 mm. Where 150 mm lengths alone are colour painted,
the 50 mm band shall be centrally placed on the 150 mm length.
19.1.4 ARROWS
The direction of flow shall be indicated with a 25 x 100 mm long black arrow at intervals
of approximately 4 m and at valves and junctions. Flow lines shall be marked with an F
and return lines with an R at each arrow.
19.1.5 SERVICE OUTLETS
Where outlets require identification the colour identification shall take the form of
coloured centre pieces on handwheels or cocks, and/or other suitable approved marking
 B3550 MA - 2-15

on the neck of the outlet fittings as specified. The colour shall primarily be that of the
pipe colour and where banding is used, the colour shall be that of the band and stroke.
19.1.6 RADIATORS AND PIPES IN FINISHED AREAS
All radiators, pipes, fittings etc. in finished areas such as wards, offices, passages, etc.
shall be cleaned, primed, undercoated and finished in a high gloss paint to match the
existing finish.
19.1.7 IDENTIFICATION COLOURS
Basic Pipe Colour Banding Colour
Cold water supply (drinking water) Brilliant green Cornflower
Condenser water Brilliant green White
Boiler feed water Brilliant green Crimson / White
Crimson / Emerald
Boiler condensate lines Brilliant green
Green
Chilled water lines Brilliant green White / Emerald Green
Domestic hot water Brilliant green Crimson /Cornflower
Fire fighting mains Signal red
Central heating hot water Brilliant green White / Yellow
Steam Pastel grey
Gas (except air and medical gas) Light stone
Compressed air Artic blue
Ducts and conduits for electric
Light orange
services
Diesel Golden brown White
Acids and alkalis Jacaranda
19.1.8 IDENTIFICATION COLOUR CODES
Colour
Colour name
classification no.
Artic blue F28
Brilliant green D10
Cornflower F29
Crimson A03
Emerald green A14
Golden Brown B13
Jacaranda F18
Light stone C37
Light orange B26
Pastel grey G54
Signal red A11
19.1.9 COLOUR CODING FOR DUCTWORK
All ducting in plantrooms is to be colour coded according to the schedule below. If the
duct is internally lined, then the whole duct surface shall be painted in accordance with
the schedule blow. If the duct is externally lined with insulation, then the ducting must be
painted with a symbol to the relevant colours. The form of these symbols are to be as
follows:
In order to make the colour clearly visible it may be necessary to paint the symbol colour
onto a neutral colour background. This background colour is to be agreed upon by the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
The colour symbols are to be 150 mm wide band, running around the duct. The
background colour is to extend 300 mm on either side of the colour symbol strip.
 B3550 MA - 2-16

In the case of conditioned air where the colour symbol is both red and blue, one colour
strip is to be used (150 mm wide) but the two colours shall alternate each being 200 mm
long.
Duct/Air type Colour Colour No.
Ventilation Air Blue with Yellow
F11 and C61
Supply Band
Exhaust Air Brown B07
Reticulated air Grey G25
Outside air Green P14
Hot deck (on dual
Blue with Red Band F11 and A14
duct)
Cold deck (on dual Blue with Dark Blue
F11 and F02
duct) Band

The colours as defined as above are according to SANS 1017

 B3550 MA - 3-1

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 3 AIR CONDITIONING AND VENTILATION INSTALLATION

PART 3.1 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - AIR CONDITIONING

1 DUCTWORK AND DUCT TESTING

1.1 GENERAL
Unless otherwise specified or noted, ductwork casings and plenum chambers shall be
made of galvanised sheet metal.
All ductwork indicated on drawings is schematic. Therefore, changes in duct sizes
and/or location must be made where necessary to conform to space conditions without
additional cost to the owner. Dimensions given on drawings, including all acoustically
lined ducts shall be actual sheet metal sizes.
Galvanised and stainless steel ductwork shall not be fitted with any copper or copper
alloy parts unless the junctions between ductwork and such parts are so insulated that
electrolytic inter-action is prevented.
Air Conditioning Contractors shall ensure that maximum head room is obtained,
especially in plantrooms.

1.2 DUCTWORK CLASSIFICATION

All ductwork shall be manufactured and erected according to standards as set down by
the SANS Standard Specification for Air conditioning Ductwork SANS 1238.
This specification must be read in conjunction with the SANS standard and the section on
ductwork, fittings etc. that follows, act as a guide only.
Ducting is to be classified as follows:
When the air velocity is less than 10 m/sec the duct system total
Low Pressure:
static pressure is less than 500 Pa.
Medium When the air velocity is less than 10 m/sec and the duct system
Pressure: total static pressure is below 1,5 kPa.
When the air velocity is higher than 10 m/sec and the duct system
High Pressure:
total static pressure is between 2,5 kPa and 1,5 kPa.
 B3550 MA - 3-2

1.2.1 SCHEDULE OF SHEET METAL THICKNESS FOR RECTANGULAR DUCTS

Low pressure ducts
Longer Side of Duct Cross- Sheet Thickness(minimum)
Section (mm)
Steel (mm)
Up to 400 0,6
401 to 600 0,6
601 to 800 0,8
801 to1000 0,8
1001 to 1600 1,0
1601 to 2000 1,0

1.2.2 SCHEDULE OF SHEET METAL THICKNESS FOR CIRCULAR DUCTS

Low pressure ducts
Size (mm) Nominal Thickness
Steel (mm)
Up to 300 0,5
301 to 450 0,6
451 to 800 0,8
801 to1000 1,0
1001 to 1200 1,2

Low velocity ducts shall be strongly and rigidly constructed and joints shall be
mechanically tight as well as substantially air-tight. Sheet metal for slips and drive caps
shall be of the same material and thickness as the ducts. The ducts shall be cross-
broken between joints where necessary to give more rigidity to the ductwork.
All transverse joints, duct stiffening, beading, seams etc. must conform to the SANS
standard as laid down.

1.3 RADIUSED BENDS AND SPLITTERS

Radiused bends must be used wherever possible except in cases where the installation
space is so restricted that other types of bends must be used. The throat bending radius
for radiused bends shall be equal to or greater than 0,75 times the duct width.
Where this is not practical, the throat radius shall be at least 100 mm and splitters must
be used, the construction of which must comply with clause 5.5.2.2. of the SANS
standard. For any radiused bend that does not comply with the above, the same clause
shall apply.
Rectangular bends that have no throat radius but a full heel radius are to have splitters
fitted that comply with clause 5.5.2.2 of the SANS standard.
NB. Splitters shall extend along the whole radius of the bend.

1.4 SQUARE BENDS AND GUIDE VANES

 B3550 MA - 3-3

Each bend must have metallic guide vanes, the thickness, strength, and durability of
which shall be at least equal to those of the material of the bend.
For low pressure ductwork the guide vanes must be of the single-skin type with a
maximum spacing of 60 mm. They shall extend over the full 90° of the bend, and the
vane radius is to be equal to 2.5 times the spacing. For medium and high pressure
ductwork the guide vanes shall be of double-skin aerofoil type.

1.5 CONNECTION OF DUCTING

Air Conditioning Contractors shall use "MEZ" flanges for rectangular ducting, provided
they are installed in strict accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and that
they are completely air-tight. Between the flanges the Air Conditioning Contractor is to
apply an in-seal rubber gasket or any other equal approved seal.
MEZ type joining clamps shall be installed at 300mm centres .

1.6 ACCESS PANELS

The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply and install access panels at each of the
automatic pressure control dampers. Access panels shall be of the TROX type JZ or
other equal approved and shall be supplied in accordance with the sized indicated on the
drawings.
Each panel shall be internally insulated with 15mm sonic liner, which will be neatly
secured and finished off. Access panels shall be manufactured from 0,80mm
galvanized sheet metal and shall be cross braced for rigidity.
Each panel shall be equipped with locks and a purposely manufactured frame, which
will be connected to the supply air duct.
A rubber gasket shall be inserted to ensure an air tight seal between the panel and
duct.

1.7 TRANSFORMATIONS AND OFFSETS

When a taper is used in either a "diverging" or "contracting" air flow and the duct size is
either increased or decreased the sides are not to be pitched to a greater angle than
22.5°.
If a square offset is used (say to pass a beam) then the square elbows are to be fitted
with turning vanes as already mentioned.

1.8 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

Flexible connections shall be provided in all connections between fans and ducts or
casings where required to prevent excessive movement or vibration being transmitted
through the ducts and where specified elsewhere in this specification or where indicated
on a drawing.
All flexible duct connections shall be sized by the Air Conditioning Contractor to suit the
spigot sizes or outlet sizes of fans, air conditioning units etc. and the length of the
flexible joint shall not exceed 250 mm.
The material, when fitted, shall be free from folds and shall not be under tension.
Flexible connection material must comply with the SANS standard.
The Air Conditioning Contractor is to note however, that no flexible connection material
may be joined together with adhesive only, but must also be neatly stitched.
The flexible connections shall be earthed using 4mm2 earth wire complete with lugs.
 B3550 MA - 3-4

1.9 FLEXIBLE DUCTING

Flexible ducting shall be standard micro perforated Aludec or other equal approved
flexible ducting insulated externally with 25mm aluminium foil backed fibreglass
insulation of 16mm3/kg density.
The operating limits of this flexible ducting is to be:
Max. static pressure 300 mm W.G.
Max. velocity 20 m/s
Temperature range -30°C to 121°C

The ducting is to be Sonodec Type 25P flexible ducting or other equal approved
manufacturer. Whichever type of flexible duct is used, the Air Conditioning Contractor
shall ensure that no noise is generated from it and that it is non-combustible.

1.10 DUCT SUPPORTS

Duct hangers and supports must be in accordance with the following clauses:
Ducts must be fixed, supported or hung from surfaces in either of the following ways:
Band iron straphanger to support horizontal duct on wall - for small size ducts that have a
width less than the height. The band must be anchored into the wall at top and bottom
with any approved fastener.
Shelf type bracket to support horizontal duct on a wall - for ducts that have width greater
than height. The vertical angle leg must be anchored securely into the wall with any
approved fastener.
Supports for vertical ducts through floor or ceilings etc. shall be angle supports projecting
beyond the opening in the floor or ceiling etc. and shall be metal screwed into the ducts.
Band iron straphanger to support vertical duct to wall. (For small ducts). band must be
anchored into the wall with any approved fastener.
Angle brackets for supporting vertical ducts to wall. (For large ducts). The bracket must
be anchored securely to the wall with any approved fastener and metal screwed to the
duct.
All angle iron brackets used are to be neatly cut and the ends must be grinded smooth.
Holes in mild steel brackets for bolts are to be drilled and no holes cut with a cutting torch
will be permitted.
No ducts are to be hung from other services.
1.10.1 STRAP HANGERS
Straphangers must be metal screwed to the duct sides. The size of the straps and
spacing thereof will vary with the duct size, as shown below.
 B3550 MA - 3-5

1.10.2 HANGERS SIZES FOR RECTANGULAR DUCTS (FOR HORIZONTAL DUCTS)

Wider Side of Steel Strap Trapeze Shelf Max.
Duct(mm) Rod Hangers Angles Spacing
Low Press.
Dia.
Duct Work
(mm)
Up to 450 10 25 x 2000 25 x 25 x 3 3000
451 - 800 10 - 25 x 25 x 3 3000
801 - 1600 10 - 40 x 40 x 3 2500
1601 - 2000 10 - 50 x 50 x 3 2500
Up to 450 10 - 40 x 40 x 3 3000
Med. and 451 - 800 10 - 40 x 40 x 3 2500
High Press.
801 - 1600 10 - 50 x 50 x 5 2500
Duct Work
1601 - 2000 10 - 50 x 50 x 6 2000
All dimensions in millimeters.
1.10.3 HANGERS SIZES FOR ROUND DUCTS (FOR HORIZONTAL DUCTS)
Nominal Steel Steel Max. Spacing Medium and
Strap High
Diameter Rod Low Press. Ducts
Dimens Press. Ducts
ions
Rect. Spiral Rect. Spiral
Up to 200 10 25 x 3 2000 3000 1800 3000
201 - 450 10 25 x 3 2500 3500 2500 3500
451 - 800 10 25 x 3 2500 3500 2500 3500
801 - 1200 10 25 x 3 2500 3500 2500 3500

All dimensions in millimeters.

1.11 BRANCH DUCT AND OUTLET SPIGOT TAKE-OFFS

Air Conditioning Contractors are to make use of the clinch lock when securing branch
ducts or spigots or collars to main ducts.
As an alternative the branch duct, spigot or collar may be attached to the main duct by
means of a turned over flange plus a 1,6 mm galvanized sheet metal flange, sealed and
pop-riveted every 150 mm. No other method of fixing will be permitted unless approved
by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. These methods will be strictly adhered to.
Ceiling diffuser spigots are to be installed only when there is a false ceiling. When there
is no false ceiling the method indicated for branch ducts shall be used. Whatever
method is used, the Air Conditioning Contractor is to ensure that no fibreglass ends are
exposed to the air stream. If he needs to seal off the fibreglass, he shall use linen tape
and recommended duct sealer or "Foster Seal" or any other equal approved sealer.

1.12 DUCT TESTING (HIGH PRESSURE DUCTS ONLY)

Duct pressure test shall be carried out by the Air Conditioning Contractor and may be
witnessed at the discretion of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. Leakage at required
operating duct pressure and maximum design air quantity shall not exceed 5% of the
total airflow.
 B3550 MA - 3-6

Any faulty joints and seams shall be made good and again be subjected to the test.
Externally lagged ducts shall be tested before the application of lagging.
The tender shall include for the testing of all ductwork installed and for the provision of
the equipment necessary to perform the test. This equipment shall consist of a portable
test rig comprising a high-pressure low-volume blower fan coupled to a short length of
ducting and an air spreader.
The test rig shall be capable of establishing and maintaining a pressure equal to twice
the design operating pressure of the ductwork. The ductwork shall be subjected to a two-
hour continuous pressure test during which time a soap and water solution shall be
applied to all joints and seams to ascertain air tightness.

1.13 AIR FLOW BALANCE AND TEST

Air quantity measurements in main and branch ducts shall be performed by pitot tube,
traverse of the entire cross sectional area of the duct. Ducts having velocities of 5 or
more metres per second shall be measured by inclined manometers (draft gauge) or
magnehelic gauges. Openings in ducts for pitot tube insertion shall be sealed with snap-
in plugs after air balance is complete. Outlet and inlet air quantities shall be determined
by direct reading anemometers in accordance with outlet and inlet manufacturer's
recommendation.
Corrected total air quantities shall be obtained by adjustment of fan speeds. Branch duct
air quantities shall be adjusted by volume dampers where called for in the supplementary
specification. Dampers shall be permanently marked after air balancing has been
completed so that they can be returned to their correct position if disturbed at any time.
All dampers are to be clearly marked to indicate their open and closed positions.
Volume adjusters may be used to balance air quantities at outlets and inlets provided that
final adjustments do not produce sound levels in excess or heretofore specified limits, or
objectional drafts.
NB: Air quantity adjustments by outlets, deflectors, grids or air scoops will not be
permitted.
All flow systems shall be adjusted and balanced so that air quantities at outlets are as
specified and the distribution from supply outlets do not cause drafts and the airflow is
uniform over the face of each outlet.
Total diffuser volume for low pressure duct systems, measured by means of an
anemometer, shall be at least 95% of actual fan supply (measured by means of a duct
traverse taken with a pitot tube and water manometer).

2 DUCT INSULATION

2.1 GENERAL
Internal and external insulation shall comply with SANS 1238.
All portions of the ductwork that are intended to be insulated shall be completely lined
with the insulating material.
Duct insulation shall be applied on all ducting which transfer mechanically or electrically
cooled or heated air.
The type and application of duct insulation is specified in the Detailed Technical
Specification or on the tender drawings.

2.2 CUTTING AND JOINTING

All joints in insulating material shall be neatly butted and sealed and, except where
 B3550 MA - 3-7

portions of ductwork are not intended to be insulated, there shall be no interruptions or

gaps.
Rigid insulating material shall be cut and fitted to ensure tight, overlapped longitudinal
joints, the top pieces being supported by the sidepieces and the sidepieces by the bottom
pieces.
Transverse joints in insulating material shall be formed as follows:
Each transverse joint of insulating material at a duct joint shall have a metal nosing of not
less than one (1.0) mm thick.
Each transverse joint in insulating material other than at the joints referred to in (a) above
shall be covered with a sealing membrane.

2.3 INTERNAL DUCT INSULATION

Internal duct linings shall be 25mm thick sonic liner.
The insulating material shall initially be fixed to the ductwork by means of an approved
adhesive that is applied over the entire surface to which the insulation is to be fixed.
Special care shall be exercised to ensure that no open insulation is in contact with the air
stream. All open ends shall be neatly trimmed and sealed.
Mechanical fasteners shall be used in conjunction with the adhesive for fixing insulating
material, and the fastener spacings shall be suitable for rigid and flexible insulating
materials.
Each mechanical fastener shall have a head or a retaining washer of thickness at least
0,25 mm and surface contact area at least 500 mm 2. Heads and retaining washers of
mechanical fasteners shall have no sharp edges.
The length of fasteners shall be such that they compress the insulating material
sufficiently to hold if firmly in place. The thickness of the compressed material shall be at
least 85% of the original thickness.
Impact applied pins shall be of a type that is suitable only for application by means of
mechanical tools that are designed specifically for this purpose.
Insulating material that is torn or ruptured during applications shall be repaired in an
acceptable manner by means of a sealing membrane and adhesive. Where
considerable damage occurs, the internal liner shall be removed an a new liner shall be
installed.
The quality and the installation technique of the linings shall be inspected from time to
time by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer and where internal insulation is badly torn or
installed in his opinion, the Air Conditioning Contractor shall have to dismantle the
unaccepted ducting, re-insulate it and re-erect it at his own expense.

2.4 EXTERNAL HIGH DENSITY INSULATION

High-density insulation shall be fibreglass insulation panels with a density not less than
96 kg/m3.
Panels shall be cut and fitted so as to ensure tight and even joints.
Insulation shall be secured to the duct with an approved fireproof adhesive and pin-spots
or sheet metal strips spaced at not more than 450 centres. The pin-spots shall be
installed at max 450 mm centres in any direction.
Flanges on the ducting shall be covered with 13 mm half round high-density fibreglass
pipe insulation section.
The entire insulation system shall be covered with linen cloth applied with an approved
 B3550 MA - 3-8

adhesive.
The cloth shall be painted with at least 2 coats of “Forster Seal”, Decadex or any other
equal approved type sealer.

2.5 EXTERNAL LOW DENSITY INSULATION

Low-density insulation shall be aluminium foil faced fibreglass insulation of a density not
less than 36 kg/m3.
Insulation shall be secured to the ducts with an approved fireproof adhesive. The
insulation shall either be spirally wound onto the ducts, or alternatively shall be applied in
blanket form. The insulation shall further be strapped on using 12 mm wide nylon
strapping applied with the appropriate strapping and joining machine.
Joints and laps of cooling ducts shall be vapour sealed, using vapour-barrier
compound, impermeable tape, or strips of vapour-barrier material and adhesive. The
tape to be used shall be Arno Aluminium Foil Ducotape no. C 430 as supplied by Messrs
Europair or any other equal approved.

2.6 FLEXIBLE DUCTING

Where specified in the Detailed Technical Specification, flexible ducting is to be
externally insulated with 25 mm thick low-density foil/kraft fibreglass or any other equal
approved insulation.

3 SOUND ATTENUATORS, HEATERS AND FIRE DAMPERS

3.1 SOUND ATTENUATORS - RECTANGULAR

The Air Conditioning Contractor shall select, supply and install a silencer in each position
shown on the drawings. The silencers shall be factory supplied from an approved
manufacturer and shall be selected and installed so that sufficient sound attenuation is
obtained to maintain the noise level created by the air conditioning equipment in all
spaces in the building to below the specified standards.
Noise in plant rooms must not be transmitted to adjacent areas through any supply,
return or extract ductwork.
Pressure ratings of fans at the specified quantities are to be adjusted by the Air
Conditioning Contractor to take into account any difference between pressure drop
across sound attenuation equipment installed.
Except where otherwise stated in the Detailed Technical Specification, sound attenuators
in ductwork after supply air fans shall be designed for an insertion loss large enough to
limit the total sound pressure level of the noise at a distance of 1,5 meters directly in front
on the first air outlet in the duct system to the noise level specified.
Sound attenuators shall be manufactured by a reputable specialist manufacturer in
accordance with published specifications.
Sound attenuators in plant rooms shall be installed in or as close to the plant room wall
as possible to prevent break-in plant room noise into the duct after the sound attenuator.
Where this is not feasible due to space limitations, the duct section between the sound
attenuator and plant room wall shall be externally insulated and plastered with a suitable
hard setting compound at least 10 mm thick on all sides.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall submit noise estimating sheets for all systems as
well as the insertion loss ratings of sound attenuators for approval before ordering.
Failure to do so may result in additional costs to the Air Conditioning Contractor if noise
levels in any area should exceed the specified limits.
 B3550 MA - 3-9

Where sound attenuators and ducting penetrate through plantroom walls, the Air
Conditioning Contractor shall install high density insulating material (136 kg/m3) between
the silencer outer wall and the structure to ensure an air tight seal.
Sound attenuators used in kitchen extract canopy locations shall be internally lined with
MELENEX.

3.2 SOUND ATTENUATORS - CYLINDRICAL

3.2.1 GENERAL
Cylindrical attenuators shall be designed for the purpose of reducing airborne fan noise
from the inlet and/or discharge of axial flow fans. They shall also be suitable for
installation on the inlet of centrifugal fans or in sections of ducting remote from the fans.
Cylindrical attenuators shall comprise outer casings incorporating acoustic materials
retained between the casings and internal wire mesh cylinders. Perforated steel internal
cylinders are available as an option.
These internal cylinders shall have the same diameters as the nominal attenuator sizes,
i.e. the size of the fan or duct to which the attenuator is connected.
Cylindrical attenuators shall fit directly to the fans or ducts, by bolting to threaded
fasteners integral with the attenuator flanges. The positions of these fasteners shall
correspond to the flange drilling of the equivalent size of axial flow fan.
For improved performance, attenuators containing centrally mounted, cylindrical acoustic
pods shall be installed. The outer sections of the attenuators shall be identical to
attenuators without pods.
The incorporation of the central pod shall considerably improve the acoustic performance
of the attenuator. Cylindrical attenuators shall be selected for pressure loss not
exceeding 60 Pa.
Sound attenuators used in kitchen extract canopy location shall be internally lined with
MELENEX.
3.2.2 CONSTRUCTION
Casings
Casings shall be constructed from pre-galvanized steel sheet incorporating lock formed
seams. Standard casings shall be designed to withstand pressures up to 2500 Pa.
Flanges
Sizes up to and including 1000mm in diameter shall incorporate spun flanges,
manufactured from pre-galvanized steel sheet. Larger sizes shall have flanges rolled
from mild steel flat with tapped holes for attachment to the fan or duct. These flanges are
primed and enamel painted prior to assembly.
Acoustic Materials
The acoustic infill shall be a sound absorbing material consisting of glass fibre mineral
wool faced with rough woven glass cloth. The materials shall be a combination of
density, resilience and porosity that achieves optimum broadband acoustic performance.
The material shall satisfy the requirements of BS 476 : Part 7 : 1971, Class 1 spread of
flame.
Inner Cylinder
The casing inner cylinder which retains the acoustic materials shall be constructed from
pre-galvanized wire mesh with a thickness of 1,6mm.
Acoustic Pod
This pod shall comprise of a cylinder constructed from pre-galvanized wire mesh with a
 B3550 MA - 3-10

thickness of 1,6mm, to which shall be attached moulded fibreglass, or spun steel, fairings
at both ends, designed to minimise the resistance to airflow. The pod shall be filled
internally with acoustic material.

4 AIR TERMINAL EQUIPMENT

4.1 GENERAL
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply and install all supply air grilles, relief air
grilles, registers and ceiling diffusers in the position shown and of the capacities and
sizes shown on the drawings, or of capacities and sizes to suit the application. Care
must be taken to select diffusers for the correct throw. The type and finish of diffusers
must be approved by the Consulting Engineer.
All grilles, diffusers, etc., shall be manufactured of aluminium with a natural anodised
finish unless otherwise specified.

4.2 CEILING DIFFUSERS

The diffusers shall be of the constant volume Brian Rickard Model CCD, VSW or CSW
swirl diffusers, or other equal approved as stipulated in the Detail Specification, suitable
for placing in a 600 x 600 ceiling grid or plastered ceiling. Each diffuser shall incorporate
an adjustable disc for adjustment of air displacement rate and velocity adjustment. Each
diffuser shall have an epoxy powder coated finish, the colour of which shall be
determined at a later date. Where required, diffusers shall be equipped with
automatically adjustable discs for air volume control and electrical reheaters, which shall
be supplied as an integral part of the diffuser. The heaters shall be of the “incaloy” type
with a capacity of 3.2 W/cm2.
Units for variable air volume applications shall be supplied as either master, slave of
individual units. A master unit shall be supplied with an approved integral temperature
controller with concealed adjustment. A slave unit shall be identical to the master unit,
but shall not be supplied with a temperature controller or sensor. An individual diffuser
shall be identical to the master unit, but shall not be able to be synchronised with any
slave unit. The temperature controller shall be a proportional integral type and the
temperature sensor shall be an integral part of the master unit and shall be installed on
the centre plate of the diffuser, in such a way that the supply air from the diffuser will not
have an influence on the temperature that is measured by the sensor.
A standard 220 V 15 A plug point shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor within 1m
of each diffuser. Each diffuser shall be supplied with a plug connection and 1.5m PVC
electrical cable, by which the diffuser can be connected to the power point. Electrical
connections between the master unit and the slave units form part of this contract.
Wiring shall be done in multi-core PVC cable and be coupled with the use of special
electrical plug connections. The electrical cables shall be fixed to the concrete structure
with saddles.
4.2.1 CONNECTION OF CEILING DIFFUSERS
Each diffuser is to be connected to the duct system by way of round flexible ducting. The
flexible ducting is to be installed in terms of the manufacturer's recommendations and in
addition is to be secured to each spigot with a sheet metal strap poprivited onto the
spigot. The flexible ducting is to be fixed airtight to round spigots using galvanized
clamps and no flexible duct shall be longer than 1500mm.
The ducting shall be externally insulated with 25mm thick foil/Kraft fibreglass insulation.

4.3 EXHAUST AND RETURN AIR GRILLES AND REGISTERS

The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply and install all above-mentioned grilles and
 B3550 MA - 3-11

registers in the positions shown and of the capacities stated on the drawings. Where
sizes or capacities are not stated, grilles and registers shall be adequately sized by the
Air Conditioning Contractor.
All grilles and registers shall have fixed horizontal face bars set an angle of approximately
35°. The direction of the bars, up or down, shall be determined by the location of the
registers so that visibility into all installed registers is obstructed. These shall be of the
"TROX" type AR or other equal approved unless stated elsewhere in the supplementary
specification.
Each register shall be complete with a fixing flange arranged on all four sides of the
frame.
The flange shall project approximately 30 mm beyond the inner edges of the frame and
shall be drilled by the manufacturer at the centres and at each end to receive oval-
headed fixing screws for the attachment to wall or ceiling frame. The heads of the fixing
screws shall have similar colour finish to the registers. A sponge rubber sealing gasket
shall be secured by the register manufacturer to the periphery of the entire fixing flange.
The gasket shall have sufficient projection to ensure that airtight seal is formed after the
installation of the register.
Each extract register and grille shall have an adjustable opposed blade volume damper
located behind the face bars. Each damper shall be adjustable from the face of the
installed register by means of a removable key or similar device to eliminate possible
unauthorised interference with the damper setting. During the test period the Air
Conditioning Contractor shall adjust and set the dampers of all registers to obtain the
specified air extraction volume through each.
All low level registers and grilles shall be of particular robust construction.
Volume dampers of all registers must be provided with a matt black finish.

4.4 RELIEF GRILLES

The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply and install all return air and relief grilles as
specified. In the case of wall grilles a grille shall be mounted on both sides of the wall.
Wall relief or return air grilles shall be the type AGS as manufactured by "TROX" or any
other equal approved make. Door relief grilles shall be the telescopic type as
manufactured by "TROX", or any other approved make.

4.5 OUTSIDE AIR INTAKE AND EXHAUST LOUVRES

All air intake and exhaust louvres required for completion of the contract will be supplied
and installed by the contractor unless otherwise specified.
Data for the provision of openings etc., to be made by the Builder for the fitting of the
louvres shall be communicated to the Builder in good time.
These louvres shall include a blade section and vermin proof screen, and shall be
completely weatherproof. They shall be of the type AWG or AWK as manufactured by
Messrs "TROX" or other equal approved make, as specified in the detail specification.
Louvres shall be selected so that the maximum allowable air speed through it is 3 m/s or
unless otherwise specified.

5 PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS

5.1 AIR HANDLING UNIT DESCRIPTION

The units shall be of the Heat Pump International or other equal approved type.
 B3550 MA - 3-12

The unit shall be of the air-cooled single packaged roof top heat pump air conditioning
units. The unit shall be of the horizontal type with front, side or top discharge and rear,
side or top return. The units should be complete with a supply fan, coil and a flush-
mounted combination switchboard and control panel which should be integrated into the
front panel of the unit. The internal components of the unit should be electrically wired to
the switchboard and suitable provision should be made for the connection of site-
provided electrical services to the unit.
Units located outdoors shall be fully weatherproofed and suitable for outdoor installation if
so specified.

5.2 CONSTRUCTION
The unit shall be suitable for ducted air supply. The unit casing shall be made double
skinned powder coated galvanized sheet metal steel with 45mm polystyrene insulation. It
shall be rigid and completely weather proof.
5.2.1 COMPONENTS
(a) Compressor
Compressors shall be hermetic scroll units with 100% suction gas cooled motors. The
compressors shall be mounted on anti vibration mountings,
(b) Condenser
Condenser coils shall have copper tubes and aluminium fins.
(c) Evaporator
The evaporator coil shall have copper tubes and aluminium fins.
(d) Fan motors
Evaporator fans shall be centrifugal, double inlet , with wired mesh protection screen,
BCC variable speed fan with motor with an insulation class F. The speed of the fan
motor shall be adjustable either by an adjustable V-belt drive or a frequency inverter type
speed controller (Separate supply) complete with LOCK-STOP.
(e) Refrigerant Piping
Refrigerant piping shall be in copper piping and shall be installed in accordance with
clause 4.29.0 of the Air conditioning and Ventilation Installation: Issue XI, 1998.
(f) Hail Screens
The condenser coils shall be protected with approximately 25 x 12 x 1,6mm galvanized
wire mesh hail guards, as supplied by "Steeldale Mesh" or other equal approved. The
guards shall have sheet metal surrounds and shall be screwed to the casing around the
condenser coils with self-tapping screws.
(g) Hoisting
All hoisting onto the roof slabs/into plant rooms forms part of this contract. Sufficient
service space shall be provided upon installation of the unit for future maintenance
purposes.

5.3 REQUIREMENTS WITH RESPECT TO INSTALLATION OF EQUIPMENT

5.3.1 AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
As described above, the roof top units are to be installed on concrete plinths in the
positions shown on the drawing. It is a requirement that no vibration from the units be
transmitted to the structure. If the moving parts of the unit are free of vibration, the units
may be placed directly onto the concrete plinths. If however vibration is transmitted the
units will have to be installed on anti-vibration mountings. The onus is on the Air
 B3550 MA - 3-13

Conditioning Contractor to ensure that no vibration is transmitted onto the roof structure.
The unit shall also be installed on adequate 100 x 50 x 6mm mild steel Channel
frames approximately 1000mm high to gain height for the filters and drain traps. The
frames shall be painted matt black.
5.3.2 DUCT AND ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS
Equipment installed outside, on the roof slab, shall be done so on purpose made mild
steel frames, welded onto 3 mm thick mild steel base plates. These shall be mounted on
top of the waterproofing. Although the equipment, ducting, etc. shall be bolted to the mild
steel frames, the base plates shall be loose standing on the waterproofing/slab.

5.4 OPERATION AND CONTROLS

The unit shall be provided with an adjustable digital remote controller as supplied by the
manufacturer of the air conditioning unit. The Air Conditioning Contractor shall provide
connection between the A/C unit and the remote controller. The wiring is to be chased in
the wall using Ø25mm PVC conduit, which will terminate into the control board box (as
supplied by manufacturer) located at a position where the remote controller should be
located. The location of the controller is indicted on the drawing at 1500mm away from
floor level and shall be mounted flush against the wall. The remote controller shall have a
sensible thermostat to ensure accurate temperature control.
The control system shall incorporate the following:
 Digital read-out of all signals
 7 day timer
 Manual override
 Evaporator freeze-up protection
 Automatic summer/winter change – over
 Economy cycle with proportional control
5.4.1 ECONOMY CYCLE WITH PROPORTIONAL CONTROL
The economy cycle shall include the following:
 Return air temperature and enthalpy sensors.
 Fresh air outdoor temperature and enthalpy sensors
 Motorised dampers for fresh air ,return air and exhaust air
The economy cycle will be in operation when:
 The fresh air temperature is lower than the set point temperature.
 The fresh air temperature is below the set point temperature.
 The fresh air has an enthalpy which is at least 10 kJ/kg below the return enthalpy
5.5 DUCTING
5.5.1 GENERAL
The ductwork layouts, dimensions, insulation and installation shall be in accordance with
the Standard Specification. All the supply and return ducting shall be manufactured from
galvanized steel sheet metal and shall be externally or internally i insulated as specified
in the Detailed Technical Specification.
Ducting exposed to weather shall also be externally insulated with 40mm polystyrene
insulation covered with canvas and vapour proofed with “Decadex” or other approved
waterproof paint. The insulation shall be clad with 0,70mm galvanized sheet metal.
5.5.2 FLEXIBLE DUCT
Round flexible Ducting shall be “Kopex” ducting as manufactured by Messrs Europair
Africa (Pty) Ltd or other approved manufacturer. Whichever type of flexible duct the Air
Conditioning Contractor shall ensure that no noise is generated from it. The flexible duct
connecting the diffusers to the supply ductwork shall be externally insulted and installed
 B3550 MA - 3-14

with galvanized hose clamps.

All supply and return air ducting shall be connected to the unit with flexible duct
connection.

5.6 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

Flexible connections shall be provided in connections between fans and ducts or casings
were required to prevent excessive movement or vibration being transmitted through the
ducts and where specified elsewhere in this specification or where indicated on a
drawing.
All flexible duct connections shall be sized by the Air Conditioning Contractor to suit the
spigot sizes or outlet sizes of fans, air conditioning units etc. and the length of the flexible
joint shall not exceed 250mm. The material, when fitted, shall be free from folds and shall
not be under tension. The flexible duct shall be covered with galvanized sheet metal in
order to protect the flexible duct against weather exposure.
Flexible connection material must comply with the SANS standard.
The Air Conditioning Contractor is to note however, that no flexible connection material
may be joined together with adhesive only, but must also be neatly stitched.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall install a 4mm2 earth wire across the flexible duct,
complete with lugs.

5.7 DUCT SUPPORTS

All the ducting shall be supplied complete with supports.
The ducting shall be fixed, hung or supported from surfaces or trusses in either of the
ways indicated on the standard specification.

5.8 CEILING DIFFUSERS

These shall be as specified in the Detailed Technical Specification.
The diffusers shall be installed and located as shown on drawings. The diffuser shall be
connected to the supply air duct by an externally insulated flexible ducting.
The diffuser shall be suspended in the ceiling panels by supporting it on the ceiling tees.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall balance and adjust diffusers for the required air
quantities and shall submit a test report to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer before
Plant Handover.

5.9 SOUND ATTENUATORS

Sound attenuators shall be of TROX type or other equal approved, and shall be installed
in both supply and return air ducting. The positions of the attenuators are shown on the
drawing. These shall also be weather protected. Sizes are shown on the drawing.

5.10 FRESH AIR AND RETURN AIR DAMPER AND LOUVRE

A Trox AWG or other equal approved weather louvre and manually adjustable damper to
be installed on the fresh air intake. The louvre shall be complete with wire mesh screen
and Trox Washopleat type filters.

5.11 AIR FILTERS

Filters shall consist of a set of Trox Washopleat primary filters and a secondary set of
Trox bag filters, or other equal approved by Consulting Mechanical Engineer, installed in
side access filter housings. They primary filters shall be of the type with at least 88%
 B3550 MA - 3-15

arrestance. A hinged door for easy removal of the filters shall be installed on the side of
the holding frame. The filter panels shall butt against each other and shall be sealed to
prevent any air bypassing the filters.
The filters shall be installed in the unit, as an integral part of the unit. A filter manometer
on which the recommended filter change is marked shall be installed over the filter bank.
It shall be installed in easily accessible position and well protected from weather
elements.
One set of spare filters shall be provided for each plant and they shall be clearly marked
as to which plant they are designated.

5.12 CONDENSATE DRAINAGE

The unit shall be drained using a ø 32mm galvanized piping that shall be routed and
connected to nearest full bore. A union shall be installed at the unit. The Air Conditioning
Contractor shall install a 50mm drain trap.

5.13 TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

Upon completion of the installation the Air Conditioning Contractor shall test and
commission the installation. Test reports shall be neatly attached to an installation
manual and three copies of the manual submitted to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer
before handover to the client.

6 FIRE DAMPERS
Supply and install fire dampers in the ducting and elsewhere where shown on the
drawings.
Fire dampers shall be of the TROX Model FDF or other equal approved complete with
side access inspection panel. The leakage rate through a closed fire damper shall be not
exceeding 60 l/s at 250 Pa pressure differential. Each damper shall have a fire rating of
2 hours minimum.

7 VOLUME CONTROL DAMPERS

These dampers are to be installed where shown on the drawings. Dampers shall be
installed so that they can be adjusted at any time after the completion of the work.
Access panels must be provided wherever the adjusting mechanism is concealed by
suspended ceilings, furrings, etc. The onus is on the successful tenderer to provide
these access openings.
Volume control dampers are to be installed to the sizes and positions shown on the
drawings and/or as specified.
The dampers shall be of the multi-leaf type and shall consist of a formed channel section
frame containing linked aerofoil section blades. The unit must be operated by an external
lever which shall be fixed to a quadrant with a locking device.
The linkages shall be fitted with nylon bushes.
The frame and blades shall be manufactured from galvanised mild steel. Axles, levers
and rods shall be made from cadmium plated steel.
The dampers shall be of the Europair type DMP gear driven dampers or other equal
approved make.
The dampers are to be hand operated and are to be fitted with a lockable quadrant as
supplied by Messrs Europair or any other equal approved make, to be decided upon by
the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
 B3550 MA - 3-16

Quadrants shall be clearly marked in a neat and orderly fashion their "open" and "closed"
positions.

8 FANS

8.1 CENTRIFUGAL FANS

Fans shall be constructed of mild steel. The fan must be designed so that the impeller
can be removed from either side of the casing.
Fan shafts must be statically and dynamically balanced and must be manufactured from
best quality steel and be keywayed to be relevant British Standards.
The fan shall be equipped with grease lubricated ball or roller bearings.
Fans must be treated with a primer and two finishing coats of paint. Fans shall be
equipped with inlet screens.
Pulleys shall be mechanically fastened to the shaft with a suitable key and keyway.
The entire V-belt drive and keys and all other rotating shafts outside the fan casing shall
be protected with easily removable belt and shaft guards. Belt guards shall be
constructed so that the V-belts will be visible with the guard in position.
The fan and motor assemblies shall be mounted on steel bases which shall be
rectangular in shape. All structural parts of the base shall be manufactured from channel
iron of adequate size.
Built-in adjustable motor slide rails shall be supplied as an integral part of the base. Only
factory manufactured slide rails of the type as supplied by Messrs GEC, or other equal
approved supplier, will be permitted.
Exposed units shall be wrapped with low-density insulation shall be aluminium foil faced
fibreglass ‘FRK’ insulation of a density not less than 36 kg/m3.
The steel base on which the fan motor is mounted shall be mounted on a concrete plinth
of 100 mm thickness and adequate size and on spring type mountings.
The fan shall be driven with a V-belt drive and fan and motor shall be properly aligned
after installation. V-belt tension shall be adjustable.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall provide an access opening covered with a
moveable flap large enough for the use of a mechanical speed measurement device.
These shall be provided in line with both the fan and motor shafts.
The fan discharge shall be coupled to ducting etc., with flexible connection.
Centrifugal fans are to be the BCC type supplied by Messrs Howden Fans, or other
equal approved, unless stated otherwise in the Detailed Technical Specification.

8.2 AXIAL FLOW FANS

All axial flow fans shall be direct units. Impellers shall be aerofoil design which shall be
die-cast in aluminium silicon alloy materials, assembled with high tensile zinc plated steel
bolts and nuts. They shall also have non-overloading characteristics.
Complete units shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
External terminal boxes shall be provided on the casings of fans fitted with standard
totally protected enclosed motors. Where flameproof motors are fitted, electrical
connections shall be integral with the motors.
All casings shall incorporate access panels and external lubrications using nylon tubes
and grease nipples on the casings are to be fitted where applicable.
 B3550 MA - 3-17

All fans shall be selected to handle at least the quantity of air specified against the
relevant system static pressure.
Motors and starters shall be suitable for local and remote starting and for remote status
indication if specified.
Where fans are required to be mounted outdoors, they shall be appropriately encased in
weatherproof housings and shall be fitted with terminal boxes, etc., suitable for such
operation.
Axial flow fans shall be mounted on anti-vibration mountings and shall be connected with
flexible connections to ducts, units. etc. which shall be earthed with 4mm2 earth wire
complete with lugs.
Axial flow fans are to be of the "Majax" type as supplied by Messrs Howden Fans, or
other equal approved, unless stated otherwise in the Detailed Technical Specification
Where the fans are not installed in ducting or protecting chambers sturdy painted wire
guards must be fitted on both the inlet and outlet sides to prevent accidental access to
the fan.

8.3 PROPELLER FANS

The motors shall be of the totally enclosed squirrel cage induction type for 3-phase
connection or of the capacitor start type for single phase which must have a power factor
of not less than 0,85. Small fans up to 230 mm diameter may have shaded pole motors.
Motor bearings shall be silent running ball or roller bearings except for small fans which
bearings may be porous bronze. Sealed ball bearings with life lubrication may also be
used.
The motor supporting arms shall have resilient supports where connections to the ring or
diaphragm plate is made. Fans are to be supplied with neoprene vibration isolating
fixings.
The blades shall be robust and preferably of steel and painted. They shall be formed to
an aerodynamic shape to ensure quiet running.
Where fans are not installed in protective fan chambers, wire guards must be fitted to
prevent accidental access to the fan.
Louvre shutters or cowls or speed controls will be specified as and when required.
Reference must be made to the wiring diagrams when applicable, as in many instances,
propeller fans are used for extract purposes. They will be wired to and controlled by zone
air conditioning controls. In such cases an isolating switch must be placed adjacent to
each fan in order that maintenance can be undertaken in safety.
Attention must be paid to special requirements such as flame proof motors and starters
when specified in the Detailed Technical Specification or required by regulations or law.
When bearings require oiling, lubrication points must be readily accessible.
On darkroom fans and other types of enclosed fans it must be possible to easily
dismantle the units for maintenance and cleaning.
Propeller fans and mounting plates are to be of the "Maxair" type as supplied by Messrs
Howden Fans, or other equal approved , unless stated otherwise in the Detailed
Technical Specification.
Access to fans mounted in ducts shall be through adequately sized hinged sturdy access
doors secured with fitch fasteners or any other equal approved fasteners, other than
screws.

8.4 WINDOW AND WALL EXTRACT UNITS

 B3550 MA - 3-18

The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply and install in each position shown on the
drawings, a window or wall extract unit.
Each unit must be capable of handling the amount of air specified.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply and install a variable speed controller to the
unit if the unit delivers more than the amount of air specified at its normal operating
speed.
Each unit is to be equipped with a discharge louvre and an automatic shutter which will
shut if the fan is not running.
A 220 V single phase, power supply and isolator shall be supplied by others adjacent to
each fan, unless other-wise specified.
A hole for the accommodation of the fan through a wall or window shall be supplied by
others unless otherwise specified, the sleeve however shall be provided by the Air
Conditioning Contractor.
Extract units shall be of the "Xpelair" type or other equal approved type, unless stated
otherwise in the Detailed Technical Specification.
Extract units which are to be used for dark room ventilation shall be fitted with a lightproof
darkroom cowl.

8.5 INLINE DUCT FAN

8.6 RECTANGULAR TYPE

Inline duct fans shall be of the centrifugal, directly driven type by a 3-phase electrical
motor. The fan impeller shall be of the double inlet type with forward curved blades. Fan
efficiency shall be not less than 55%.
The fan and motor assembly shall be accommodated in a rectangular fan housing with
access doors for servicing of the internal parts. The housing shall be mounted on a
channel iron base on anti-vibration mountings. The fan shall be connected to the ducting
with a flexible duct connector.
The fan casing shall be equipped with flanged duct connectors.
The fan motor shall be suitable for control through a hand operated speed control unit.

8.7 CIRCULAR DUCT TYPE

These shall be of the Howden CDC or other equal approved type suitable for connection
to round or rectangular ducting with circular duct connectors. The fan shall be of the
centrifugal type driven direct with a 220 V electrical motor. The units shall be suitable for
speed control. Unit casings shall be manufactured from plastic or aluminium.
Where indicated on the drawings, a matching silencer from the same manufacturer as
the fan, shall be installed.

8.8 ROOF EXTRACT UNITS

All roof extract units are to be of the mixed flow aluminium impeller type as supplied by
Messrs Howden or any other equal approved.
The weather cap, unit body and weathering skirt are to be moulded in glass fibre
reinforced resin. The cap is to secured by stainless steel attachment screws facilitating
access for servicing.
Curb mounted units are to be fastened down by chromium plated screws through the side
of the skirt. Units mounted on sheet metal roofs shall be inclusive of a sheet metal
upstand, fixings and roof flashing to the ridge of the roof as per the details on the
 B3550 MA - 3-19

drawings.
Back draught shutters are to be installed on all units and are to be pivoted horizontally in
the cap unless stated otherwise. Vanes are to be opened by the fan draught and closed
by gravity. Shutters are to be moulded in black polypropylene.
Motors are to be of the totally enclosed, squirrel cage induction type for direct on line
starting, unless stated otherwise in the supplementary specification.
A 380 volt electrical supply point by way of bare ended cable for each fan shall be
provided by the Electrical Contractor, in the positions shown on the drawing, who shall
also provide a 20mm conduit from this point to the ceiling space.
This contract includes for the supply, delivery and installation of the following:
a) A fan starter complete with overload protection connected to the bare ended
cable.
b) Weatherproof isolator adjacent to the fan on the roof.
c) All interconnecting wiring for the successful operation of the fans.

9 MID-WALL SPLIT TYPE ROOM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

9.1 GENERAL
Mid-wall heat pump split type unit shall be supplied and installed in the position shown on
the drawing and shall be of the heat pump inverter type.
The Air Conditioning Contractor is to note that the indoor unit shall be mounted in terms
of the supplier’s recommendations.
The units offered will have the following safeties and functions:
Operation in cooling 10°C to 46°C db
Operation in heating -15°C to 20°C db
Auto fan speed Yes
Automatic defrost Yes
Air purifier filter Yes
Anti mould filter Yes
Auto restart Yes
Self-diagnosis Yes
Service function in wired remote No
Filter indicator Yes
Outside air thermistor Yes
Condenser thermistor Yes
Discharge thermistor Yes
Anti-frost thermistor Yes
Compressor over-current thermistor Yes
Compressor over-heat thermistor Yes
Return air thermistor Yes
Heat Recovery Yes

The indoor unit shall conform to the following specification:

The unit shall discharge the air horizontally.
 B3550 MA - 3-20

The unit shall be equipped with a direct coupled silent running centrifugal fan equipped
with a two or three speed motor. The switching and setting of the fan speed shall be
accomplished from a remote fan switch which is to be installed below the unit, 1500 mm
from floor level, in a position indicated by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
The unit shall be equipped with a condensate drain pan and the condensate must be
drained to each drain point indicated on the drawing through a minimum 20 mm uPVC
Class 6 pipe, i.e. to the gullies on the ground floor.
The temperature controls shall be accommodated in the remote fan switch housing and
shall consist of a temperature adjustment facility and temperature scale. The unit shall
be equipped with a time delay safety circuit which shall delay the restart of the
compressor for approximately 3 minutes even if the air conditioner is manually restarted
too quickly. The wiring to the remote controls from the unit shall be chased into the walls.
The outdoor unit shall conform to the following specification:
The unit shall be mounted against the outside walls at high level using standard
galvanized “O”-line brackets or unistrut, the bracket forms part of this contract or on a
50mm high concrete plinth on the roof slab, whichever is applicable. The plinth also
forms part of this contract.
The unit shall accommodate the refrigerant compressor, the condenser fan and air
cooled condenser coil. The compressor shall be installed on anti-vibration mountings as
provided by the manufacturer.
The condenser coil shall be protected against damage by a removable wire mesh screen.

9.2 PIPING
The system must be charged with R 410 A refrigerant.
The indoor and outdoor unit must be interconnected with copper refrigerant piping in
terms of the suppliers' recommendation. The tenderer is to note the distances between
the indoor and outdoor units and the relevant pipe sizes have been indicated on the
drawing. The return of oil to the compressor is to be ensured by the installation of traps
at regular intervals.
All piping through walls shall pass through sleeves which shall be properly sealed after
installation. Insulation through sleeves shall be continuous.
All surface mounted piping shall be installed in suitably sized rectangular P2000 or P8000
galvanised "Unistrut", complete with removable cover plate, securely fixed to the walls.
All exposed trunking shall be painted. The colour shall be finalised at a later date.
All piping and cabling above ceilings shall be installed on factory manufactured
galvanised steel cable tray or medium duty wire mesh cable tray, hung from the roof
trusses or slab.
All refrigerant, liquid and suction, shall be separately insulated with 15 mm thick armaflex
insulation.
Insulation exposed to weather conditions shall be covered with cloth and be painted with
"Foster seal".
Insulation exposed to weather conditions shall be covered with cloth and be painted with
"Foster seal".
All refrigerant piping shall be seamless cold drawn copper piping.
Oil traps shall be installed in the piping where condensers are installed above the indoor
units.
 B3550 MA - 3-21

9.3 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

A 230 V electrical weatherproof isolator shall be provided within one metre of the outdoor
unit in the position shown on the drawing. The electrical connection between the isolator
and the air conditioner as well as all interconnecting wiring between indoor and outdoor
unit forms part of this specification.
The onus lies with the Air Conditioning Contractor to ensure what location and detail of
the electrical power point that has been provided and to include in this tender price for
any adjustments, fittings etc., that may be additionally required.

9.4 OPERATION AND CONTROLS

The unit shall be provided with an adjustable remote controller as supplied by the
manufacturer of the air conditioning unit in order to control the room temperature. The
sensing element shall be located in the controller housing or in the air handling unit of the
air conditioner.
The system shall be equipped with automatic anti freeze-up protection to prevent icing up
of the condensing coil in winter.

9.5 DRAINS
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall install and connect uPVC Class 6 drain pipes to the
drip trays and extend them to the gullies to ground level. The first 3m shall be insulated
with 15 mm thick armaflex insulation.

10 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME SYSTEMS (VRV)

10.1 DESCRIPTION
Supply, deliver, install, commission, test and hand over variable refrigerant volume (VRV)
multi-split air conditioning plants of the “Daikin VRV VI” or other approved type. The
plants shall be of the heat pump system type.

10.2 VRV COMPRESSOR CONDENSING UNITS (OUTDOOR UNITS)

10.2.1 GENERAL
The compressor condensing units shall be of the Daikin RXYQ heat pump series type as
specified. Each unit shall be able to service as the lead unit, but normally the largest unit
shall be set as the primary lead unit. Each unit shall contain variable compressor drive
normal compressors and condenser sections.
The unit shall be a factory assembled unit housed in a sturdy weatherproof casing
constructed from rust-proofed mild steel panels coated with a baked enamel finish.
The compressor shall be equipped with inverter controller capable of changing the
rotating speed to follow variations in cooling and heating load.
The noise level of the outdoor unit shall not be more than 58 dB(A) at normal operation
measured horizontally 1m away and 1.5m above ground.
The unit shall be modular in design, where applicable.
10.2.2 COMPRESSORS
Compressors shall be of the hermetic scroll type equipped with inverter control capable of
changing the speed in accordance to the cooling or heating load requirements.
The inverter shall be of the IGBT (Insulated Gate Bipolar Transistor) type.
 B3550 MA - 3-22

The outdoor units shall have at least 20 steps of capacity control to meet load fluctuation
and ensure individual control for the indoor units.
The compressors shall be equipped with crankcase heaters.
Should the unit be equipped with more than one compressor then only one of the
compressors shall be fitted with an inverter motor.
10.2.3 HEAT EXCHANGER
The heat exchanger shall be constructed with copper tubes mechanically bonded to
aluminium fins to form a cross fin coil.
The aluminium fins shall be covered by anti-corrosion acrylic resin film.
10.2.4 REFRIGERANT CIRCUIT
The refrigerant circuit shall include an accumulator, E-bridge heat exchanger to control
the liquid level in the receiver, liquid and gas shut-off valves, solenoid valves, filter drier
and oil separator. The refrigerant shall be R410A.
All necessary safety devices shall be provided to ensure the safety operation of the
system.
10.2.5 SAFETY DEVICES
The following safety devices shall be part of the outdoor unit:
High pressure switch, fuse, crankcase heater, fusible plug, over current protection for the
inverter, thermal overload protection on the compressors and condensing fans, a timer to
prevent short-circuiting of the compressor and anti-freeze-up protection.
10.2.6 OIL RECOVERY SYSTEM
The unit shall be equipped with an oil recovery system to ensure stable operation and
maximum oil separation.
Oil equalising piping shall be installed between the condensing units to equalise oil levels
every six (6) minutes and so ensure equal refrigerant distribution.
10.2.7 INSTALLATION
The condensing units are to be installed on concrete plinths on the floor slabs in the
positions shown on the drawings. If the moving parts of the unit are free of vibration, the
units may be placed directly onto the concrete plinths on “Teco” rubber pads. If however,
vibration is transmitted, the units will have to be installed on anti-vibration mountings.
Condensing sections shall be placed and spaced to the manufacturers specification
ensuring that service space, air discharge and suction are as specified.
10.2.8 HAIL SCREENS
The condenser coils shall be protected with approximately 25 x 12 x 1,6mm galvanized
wire mesh hail guards, as supplied by "Steeldale Mesh" or other equal aproved as
indicated in the Detailed Technical Specification. The guards shall have sheet metal
surrounds and shall be screwed to the casing around the condenser coils with self-taping
screws.
10.2.9 HOISTING
All hoisting onto the roof slab forms part of this contract. Sufficient service space
shall be provided upon installation of the unit for future maintenance purposes.
10.2.10 CAPACITY
The cooling capacity of each outdoor unit shall meet the sum of the total cooling
capacities of the indoor units of a single zone or the nominal capacity stipulated below,
whichever is the highest. The outdoor units shall be selected at an utilisation level of not
less than 100%. The capacities shall be as indicated in the detailed air- conditioning
specification
 B3550 MA - 3-23

10.2.11 ELECTRICAL
A 400 Volt 3-phase bare ended cable shall be supplied at each outdoor unit by the
Electrical Contractor, unless specified otherwise in the Detail Specification.
A surface mounted weatherproof failure protection distribution switchboard shall
be provided by the Air Conditioning Contractor for each module of each outdoor
unit.
The failure protection/ distribution board shall consist of:
 1x Main 3-pole isolator
 1 x 3-pole circuit breaker per outdoor module of each unit
 1 x 3-pole CBI or other equal approved contactor per outdoor module of each
unit
 1 x 3 phase VoltShield AVS3P-0 or other equal approved protection module that
shall protect the outdoor unit modules against (on any or all phases):
o High voltage
o Low voltage
o Spikes/ surges
o Power-back surges
o Any two phases shorting together
The Air Conditioning Contractor is to note that although an isolator shall be
provided at the outdoor unit, the supply to each module shall not be looped.
Separate circuit breakers and contactors shall be provided for each module.
The connection of the cable to the switchboards and the inter-connecting wiring to the
outdoor units forms part of this contract.
A 230 Volt, 5 Amp electrical plug point shall also be supplied and installed within 1m of
each indoor unit by the Electrical Contractor. Connection between this point to the
indoor unit forms part of this contract. All other interconnecting control wiring between
the, condensing unit, etc. for the proper functioning and operation of these systems forms
part of this contract.
The Air Conditioning Contractor must liaise with other trades in this regard.

10.3 INDOOR UNITS

Indoor units shall either be of the wall mounted, ceiling mounted duct type, cassette or
underceiling type installed in the positions shown on the drawings and shall be hung
from mild steel brackets entering over the roof trusses.
Each unit shall have an electronic expansion device, which controls refrigerant flow rate
in response to load variations of the room.
The address of the indoor unit shall be set automatically in case of individual and group
control.

10.4 CASSETTE UNITS

The cassette unit(s) shall consist of an evaporator coil, mildew-proof polystyrene
condensate drip compartments, supply air fan, fan scroll, fan motor, controls and efficient
filter all mounted in an attractive compact casing with a hinged decorative bottom panel.
The unit shall be suspended through an opening in the ceiling from and including four (4)
correctly sized hanger rods securely bolted to the unit’s hanger brackets. Where
 B3550 MA - 3-24

specified, the unit shall be fitted with a condensate drain pump capable of raising the
condensate 550mm above the level of the drain connection.
The unit(s) shall be fitted with a single, silent running, diffuser type turbo fan. The fan
blades shall be of dynamically balanced aluminium or other non-ferrous metal
manufacture, mounted on a central shaft and driven by a continuously rated two-speed
electric motor, resiliently mounted on a suitable cradle. The fan motor is to be fitted with
self-aligning sealed bearings.
The fan motor shall be of the single phase, permanent split capacitor type with built-in re-
settable overload protection. The motor shall have multi speed windings and shall be
factory connected to a terminal box. All wiring is to be marked to correspond with labelled
terminals matching the motor wiring diagram.
The supply air louvres shall be of the auto-swing type with remote pre-set and automated
vertical airflow direction control.
Air shall be supplied from the bottom of the unit(s) and returned through a bottom
mounted hinged grille. The unit shall be adjustable for four-way, three-way and two-way
air discharge. Provision shall be made for one or two branch ducts to be connected to
the unit as standard accessories. Provision shall also be made for a fresh air duct to be
connected to the unit as a standard accessory.
The evaporator coil shall consist of a multi-pass coil of heavy gauge, solid drawn copper
tubing mechanically expanded into aluminium cooling fins. The coil shall be provided
with an automatic defrost thermostat to prevent excessive frosting.
The evaporator coil shall be completely sealed off to ensure that maximum supply air
flows over the coil.
The air filter shall be of the easily accessible and removable mould resistant resin net
type, washable with mild detergent. The filter media shall be arranged so that no air
bypasses the filter at the edges.
The unit shall be efficient and extremely quiet in operation and the noise level shall not
exceed 35 dB's on the "A" scale at a distance of three meters from the unit.
The units shall be self contained and set to deliver air that is filtered and cooled, or
filtered and heated as may be required. The units shall be suitable for a single phase,
220V, 50 Hz, AC power supply and shall have nominal capacities as shown in the Detail
Specification.
Heating shall be by reverse cycle only.

10.5 DUCTED UNITS

The ducted unit shall consist of an evaporator coil, corrosion resistant condensate drip
tray, supply air fan, fan scroll, fan motor, controls and efficient long life filter all mounted in
an attractive compact casing.
The unit shall be fixed to the roof rafters or slab with four (4) correctly sized suspension
bolts. An additional purpose made galvanised drip tray with drain piping to the outside of
the building shall be installed under the unit.
The unit shall be fitted with twin double inlet, silent running, centrifugal drum fans within
properly sized aluminium or steel fan scrolls. The fan blades shall be of dynamically
balanced aluminium or other non-ferrous metal manufacture, mounted on a common
shaft and driven by a continuously rated two-speed electric motor, resiliently mounted on
a suitable cradle. The fan motor is to be fitted with self-aligning sealed bearings.
The fan motor shall be of the single phase, permanent split capacitor type with built-in re-
settable overload protection. The motor shall have multi speed windings and shall be
factory connected to a terminal box. All wiring is to be marked to correspond with labeled
 B3550 MA - 3-25

terminals matching the motor wiring diagram.

Supply air shall be ducted to grilles provided as an integral part of the unit or to diffusers
through a custom made galvanised sheet metal plenum including 25mm thick sonic liner
as per the Standard Specification and spigots for flexible duct connections of the number
and sizes as indicated on the drawings.
Return air shall be ducted to the unit through grilles provided as an integral part of the
unit or through a similar plenum as described above, including return air grille and
removable filter medium secured behind a wire mesh screen in a hinged panel
accessible from the air-conditioned area.
The evaporator coil shall consist of a multi-pass coil of heavy gauge, solid drawn copper
tubing mechanically expanded into aluminium cooling fins. The coil shall be provided
with an automatic defrost thermostat to prevent excessive frosting.
The evaporator coil shall be completely sealed off to ensure that maximum supply air
flows over the coil.
The unit shall be efficient and extremely quiet in operation and the noise level shall not
exceed 35 dB's on the "A" scale at a distance of three meters from the unit. Exposed
units Shall be wrapped with low-density insulation shall be aluminium foil faced fibreglass
‘FRK’ insulation of a density not less than 36 kg/m3.
The units shall be self contained and set to deliver air that is filtered and cooled, or
filtered and heated as may be required. The units shall be suitable for a single phase,
220V, 50 Hz, AC power supply and shall have nominal capacities as shown in the Detail
Specification.
The above units are suitable for above ceiling, high static pressure installations where
supply air is to be ducted to the diffusers and return air back to the unit.
Heating shall be by reverse cycle only.

10.6 PIPING INSTALLATION

The pipe routes shown on the drawings are generally diagrammatic. The runs and
arrangements of piping shall be as indicated, subject to modifications as required to suit
conditions at the building, to avoid interference with work of other services and for proper
convenient and accessible location of all parts of the piping system. All required offsets,
fittings, valves, traps, drains, etc. may not be indicated but allowance must be made in
tenders for all such necessary items to be furnished.
Piping shall be installed as straight and direct as possible, neatly spaced and in general
forming right angles with, or parallel to walls or other piping.
The pipe sizes shall be installed by the Air Conditioning Contractor for the sizes of units
offered in accordance with the manufacturer’s specifications and the schematic pipe
layout indicated on the drawing. Any discrepancy between this specification and the
manufacturer’s specification is to be brought under the attention of the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer.
The piping network shall be connected using REFNET joints complete with the necessary
reducers with the matching insulation as supplied by “Daikin” or other approved.
Suction discharged and liquid pipes are to be insulated separately and not grouped
together as for a single line. “Armaflex” or other approved pipe insulation as per 10.7
shall be used.
All piping shall be run so to avoid passing through ductwork, recessed light fixtures or
interference with electric light outlets.
Where piping protrudes through building structures, pipe sleeves are to be installed, as
 B3550 MA - 3-26

part of the contract, to ensure easy removal thereof. No pipes may be built or plastered
directly into the structure.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall be responsible for the drilling of the holes and
making good on the outside of the building to the plaster and paint.
Pipe sleeves must be of similar material as the pipe and must be large enough to allow
enough free space for movement.
Where specified and where the opening between the sleeve and pipe is large and
unsightly, blank cover plates must be installed.
Sleeves through outside walls, slabs and piping through roofs and windows must be
sealed off watertight.
All sleeves must be installed neatly and made watertight. The opening between the pipe
and sleeve must be sealed off by means of silicon rubber or any other approved product.
Where piping is installed through ceilings, approved blank cover plates must be used to
ensure a neat finish.
10.6.1 DRAIN PIPING
Provision shall be made for the drainage of condensate to the outside by means of
insulated plastic uPVC class 6 piping with diameter as specified by the air conditioning
equipment manufacturers. The Air Conditioning Contractor shall install and connect
uPVC Class 6 drain pipes to the drip trays and extend them to the gullies to ground level.
The first 3m shall be insulated with 15 mm thick armaflex insulation.
Piping shall run above ceilings and vertical down in the positions indicated on the
drawings. All piping shall terminate at ground level where it shall be routed to the nearest
drain point.
Drain piping shall be installed without any loops in the piping where condensate can
accumulate. The pipes shall have a uniform slope of 1 in a 100 from the unit to the
outside and shall be tested in the presence of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
All drain piping in ceiling voids shall be insulated. Drain piping on external walls shall be
un-insulated and painted to match the colour of the walls.
10.6.2 REFRIGERANT PIPING
All piping and fittings shall be of the best quality seamless, dehydrated, de-oxidised
refrigeration class copper tubing, suitably sized for the unit installed and in accordance
with SANS 460 as amended.
All refrigerant piping shall be “Maksal” Type RL hard drawn refrigeration copper tubing
in accordance with ASTM B280-88 and to be of the high pressure type suitable for the
gas and pressures of the system.
Only jointing by means of capillary fittings will be allowed except in cases where
equipment needs to be removed from the piping system for regular maintenance or
replacement. In such cases joints between the equipment and piping shall be with DZR
brass compression fittings.
Capillary type fittings shall comply with SANS 1067 - Part 2 or any of the related ISO
2016, DIN 2856 and BSS 864 - Part 2 specifications.
Soldering flux shall be used to remove residual traces of oxides, to promote wetting and
to protect the surface to be soldered from oxidation during heating.
The flux shall be applied to clean surfaces and only enough should be used to lightly coat
the areas to be joined and should be applied as soon as possible after cleaning.
Only the following solders shall be allowed to be used on capillary joints:-
 B3550 MA - 3-27

Composition Specification
97/3 (97% tin and 3% copper) SANS 24 – DIN 1707
96/4 (96% tin and 4% silver) SANS 24 – DIN 1707
75/25 (75% tin and 25% zinc) SANS 24 – DIN 1707

Resin core and acid core solder shall not be used at all.
No welding of refrigeration systems will be allowed unless the pipe system is
continuously filled and under pressure using nitrous gas.
All soldered joints, on factory supplied equipment, shall be carefully checked before
commissioning and remade if found damaged in transit.
Refrigerant piping shall be arranged so that normal inspection and servicing of the
compressor and other equipment is not hindered. Locations where copper tubing will be
exposed to mechanical damage shall be avoided.
A refrigerant charging connection shall be provided in the liquid line. Before charging the
system with refrigerant the circuit shall be leak tested and dehydrated.
All pipes, vessels, etc. operating below ambient dew point shall be insulated and a
vapour barrier provided.
An isolating valve shall be installed in both the liquid and gas lines where connected to
the evaporator unit. Valves shall be of the bronze body, ball type.
When completed, the installation shall maintain a complete vapour barrier and any signs
of sweating or dripping shall cause the installation to be rejected.
All piping shall be rigidly supported, both vertically and horizontally.
Inside the building (ceiling voids) piping shall be installed on “Cabstrut” or other approved
medium-duty galvanised welded wire mesh cable tray wide enough to accommodate both
refrigerant pipes and the drain piping. The mesh pitch shall not exceed 100x50mm with
longitudinal side-wall wires spaced at intervals of not more than 25mm.
Outside the building piping shall be installed on “Cabstrut PW100” or other approved
heavy-duty welded galvanised cable ladder wide enough to accommodate both
refrigerant pipes and the drain piping, including galvanised sheet metal covers painted to
colour match the walls. Rung spacing shall be at 300mm intervals.
All wire mesh cable trays shall be supported on “Unistrut P2000” or other approved
41x41x1.5mm galvanised channels including galvanised hold down saddles, bolts, nuts,
washers and screws. The channel shall be supported from 8mm diameter hanger rods
including washers and nuts. Channels to be spaced at intervals not exceeding 1500mm.
Cable trays are to be installed to a fall of 1 in 100.
All cable ladders shall be supported on “Unistrut P1000” or other approved 41x41x2.5mm
galvanised channels including galvanised hold down cup, bolts, nuts, washers and
screws. The channel shall be “Rawl” bolted directly to external walls or slabs. Channels
to be spaced at intervals not exceeding 1500mm. Cable ladders to be installed to a fall of
1 in 100.
All piping shall be secured to cable trays and ladders with “Cabstrut K-series” or other
approved adjustable type galvanised cross rung clamps only. Care shall be taken not to
pinch, compress or damage the pipe insulation when securing piping to cable trays and
ladders. Any damaged insulation shall be completely removed and replaced to the
satisfaction of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
 B3550 MA - 3-28

Strappings and cable ties will not be permitted.

Hangers and supports where piping penetrates through walls shall be designed to
prevent transmission of vibration to the building.
Supports must be installed near to joints and fittings. Pipe clamps shall be installed at
the following centre to centre distances:
Nominal Pipe Size Centre to Centre Spacing
Copper Horizontal Pipe Vertical Pipe
12 mm 1.0 m 1.2 m
15 mm 1.2 m 1.5 m
22 mm 1.5 m 1.8 m
28 mm 1.9 m 2.1 m
35 mm 2.1 m 2.4 m
42 mm 2.4 m 2.7 m
54 mm 2.4 m 3.0 m
66 mm 2.4 m 3.0 m
76 mm 2.5 m 3.0 m

Extra support must be supplied at T-offs, valves and other heavy fittings.

10.7 PIPE INSULATION (SANS 1445 & SANS 1508 AS APPLICABLE)

The copper piping installed inside the building shall all be insulated with “Armaflex” or
other approved insulation. Vapour barrier integrity will be critical to prevent dripping. No
zip type insulation will be allowed. Liquid and gas lines shall be insulated separately.
The insulation material shall meet the following minimum requirements:
Temperature range -80°C + 120°C
Thermal conductivity 0,038 W/m K at 0°C
Thickness 15 mm
Density 35kg/m3
Odour Properties Neutral
Cellular Structure Totally closed
Fire Properties Self-extinguishing

The insulation shall be applied to form a continuous and homogenous vapour barrier over
bends, supports, etc. All joints and seams shall be glued. Non-drip tape shall not be
used for assembling seams and joints.
All fittings and valves shall be wrapped with black non-drip tape.
When completed, the installation shall ensure a complete vapour barrier and any signs of
sweating or dripping shall cause the installation to be rejected.
Insulation shall be lagged and waterproofed where exposed to exterior conditions.

10.8 PRESSURE TESTING ON PIPING

All new copper refrigerant piping shall be hydraulically pressure tested to 1,5 times the
 B3550 MA - 3-29

working pressure or 2700 kPa, whichever is the largest. The test shall be carried out in
the presence of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
All piping shall be subjected to the test pressure for a period of one (1) hour during which
time the system shall retain the pressure with no leaks or losses.

10.9 CONTROLS
10.9.1 INDIVIDUAL CONTROL UNIT
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply and install a “Daikin BRC” or other approved
wireless remote controller for each indoor unit or room as shown, and in the positions
indicated on the drawings.
The controller shall perform the following functions:
a. Start/Stop.
b. Temperature setting.
c. Airflow setting.
The controller shall display the following:
Operation display.
Filter sign.
Temperature setting display.
Timer display.
Airflow display.
Abnormal operation display.
The controller cradle shall be mounted to the wall according to the manufacturer’s
specification and the controller shall be neatly fastened to the cradle with double sided
tape.
10.9.2 CENTRALISED CONTROL UNIT
If required in the detailed air- conditioning specification the Air Conditioning Contractor
shall supply, install and commission a “Daikin Intelligent Touch” or other approved
centralised controller where specified and indicated on the drawings.
The unit shall control up to 128 indoor units. Functions shall include scheduling of
operations to distribute electricity proportionally, auto heat/cool change over, temperature
limitation, unified on/off control, yearly schedule and a 300 actions history.
10.9.3 SCHEDULE TIMER
If required in the detailed air- conditioning specification, the Air Conditioning Contractor
shall supply, install and commission a “Daikin” or other approved schedule timer.
The unit shall control up to 128 indoor units. On/off times shall be set by units of day,
hour and minutes.

11 SPEED DRIVES FOR PUMP AND FAN MOTORS

11.1 GENERAL
The controller shall be of the type suitable for controlling the speed of 3 phase, 380V-
525V induction motors.
The controller shall be capable of operating continuously at nominated full load rating
with expected variations of +/- 10% in the supply voltage and +/- 2% in the supply
frequency.
 B3550 MA - 3-30

The controller shall be capable of operating continuous operation at full load in an

ambient temperature of 40ºC. Care shall be taken during installation to ensure that the
controller is protected from direct sunlight and weather.
Where the controllers are separately wall mounted the enclosure protection rating shall
comply to the following guidelines:
In clean areas where no dust and moisture are present the rating shall be minimum IP20.

11.2 IN AREAS WHERE MOISTURE OR HARSH ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ARE

PRESENT THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROTECTED TO IP54 RATING.
Controllers shall have metal enclosures to prevent the radiated radio frequency
interference noise (RFI) from affecting the operation of other equipment. The metal
enclosures must be earthed with a low impedance connection to the main earthing
system.
The controller shall be manufactured to quality assurance and manufacturing standards
according to ISO 9001.

11.3 PERFORMANCE
The controllers shall be specifically designed for constant torque operation; but shall also
incorporate a choice of output waveforms designed to control quadratic loads to give the
controller flexibility over a wide application area. The tenderer shall state the kVA output
power of the controller in both constant and quadratic torque loads.
In constant torque mode the controller shall be capable of supplying starting torques of
up to 150%-160% of the motors rated torque.
In quadratic torque mode the output voltage from the controller shall be formed in
accordance with the quadratic load torque output of the centrifugal fan or pump. A
choice of programmable starting torques up to 110% shall be provided to accelerate the
motor to its pre-set speed.
The controller shall be of the type utilizing advanced digital PWM technology. Preference
shall be given to systems where the output waveform is sinusoidal at all frequencies,
such that the motor power is fully utilized at the motors rated speed, and no motor de-
rating is necessary.
Suppliers that can show a test of the motors temperature rise on controller operation,
where the motor is operated at full load and speed, shall be seen to be suitable proof.
The test shall be based on a class B temperature rise on class F winding insulation.
If derating is applicable the tenderer shall supply curves showing the necessary derating
of the motor, using class B temperature rise, should be given at rated speed and load to
ensure that no overheating occurs.
The controller shall automatically correct the output voltage during main’s variations of +/-
10% to prevent loss of torque and speed variations occurring during motor operation.
To prevent over-magnetization of the motor at low speeds and light loads the controller
shall incorporate automatic flux control of the motor. A single fixed voltage boost that
cuts out a predetermined frequency will not be considered as automatic control of the
flux.
The controller shall automatically adjust the output frequency and voltage to maintain a
stable motor speed of +/- 0.5% of the motor’s rated speed. The accuracy shall be
maintained over a speed and loading range of 10% to 100% without the use of a closed
feedback loop.
Where the controller is specified to control overhauling loads it shall be fitted with a
dynamic brake option. A separate external braking resistor shall be supplied according to
 B3550 MA - 3-31

the duty cycle required.

For hoisting loads where there is danger that load can fall under dynamic braking control
due to failure of the controller, whatever the reason, the controller shall incorporate the
necessary inbuilt safety functions and relay output to ensure an overriding holding
mechanical brake is released. On starting the holding brake must only be released by
the relay in the controller when the motor is fully magnetized.
The controller shall incorporate automatic tuning and setting of the main motor
parameters. The tuning shall be based on measurements of the motors inductance and
resistance. The tuning must be done at standstill in order not to affect the application
before the controller is tuned.
The automatic tuning shall stop and register an alarm condition if the automatic tuning
detects an out of balance in the motor windings, or cannot set the correct parameters for
the motor.

11.4 RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE

Tenderers are reminded that the plant contains equipment sensitive to RFI interference
(such as PLC's or Computers). Full compliance to the standards is requested. The
controller should be well protected and immune to electrical disturbance in order to
ensure high reliability
The controllers shall comply with the EMC immunity standards:
 EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-4-2): Electrostatic discharges (ESD)
Simulation of electrostatic discharge from human beings.
 EN 61000-4-3 (IEC 1000-4-3): Incoming electromagnetic field radiation,
amplitude modulation.
Simulation of the effects of radar and radio communication equipment as well as
mobile communications equipment.
 EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) Burst transients.
Simulation of transients brought about by switching with a contactor, relays or
similar devices.
 EN 61000-4-5 (IEC 1000-4-5) Surge transients.
Simulation of transients brought about e.g. by lightning that strikes near
installations.
 ENV 50140: Incoming electromagnetic field, pulse modulated.
Simulation of the impact from GSM telephones.
 ENV 50141: Cable-borne HF.
Simulation of the effect of radio transmission equipment connected to supply
cables.
 VDE 0160 class W2 test pulse: Mains transients.Simulation of high-energy
transients brought about by main fuse breakage, switching of power
factor correction capacitors, etc.
The controllers shall comply with the EMC emission standards:
 EN 55011 Class A1: Cable born from (150Khz-30Mhz). Radiated (30Mhz-
1Ghz.)The controller must comply to EN 55011 Class A with 150 m of
screened/armoured cable.
The controllers shall be fitted with metal enclosures (to form a Faraday Cage) to limit the
radiated RFI noise from the controller. The enclosures shall be earthed to the main earth
grid with a low impedance connection .

11.5 SEPARATE RFI FILTERS

Where RFI filters are supplied from a separate supply source, documentation showing
the test results of the RFI and controller combination and its compliance to EN55011
 B3550 MA - 3-32

shall be supplied as evidence of conformity including the maximum length of cable.

The separate RFI filters shall be mounted in metal enclosures to the same protection
rating as the controller, and located as close to the mains connection terminals of the
controller as possible.
Ferrite cores mounted on the input cables will not be considered as RFI compliance.

11.6 HARMONICS AND POWER FACTOR

Tenderers are reminded that the plant contains a high portion of harmonic producing
loads. The information requested in this section of the specification is important for the
evaluation of the total plants harmonic distortion limits.
Mains Harmonic currents generated by the controller must be limited by external mains
reactors or reactors in the d.c. bus of the controller. Preference shall be given to
controllers that include reactors in the d.c. bus circuit.
Controllers that do not include a reactor mounted in the d.c. bus shall be supplied with
external three phase reactors connected on the mains side of the controller. The
reactors shall be fitted to each phase and shall have a minimum impedance of 5%. The
reactors shall be mounted in steel enclosures to a rating equivalent to the controller.
When external three phase reactors are supplied Tenderers shall include the amount of
voltage drop that will occur over the reactors at full load, and advise how the controller
will respond to the lower voltage.
When both external input reactors for harmonic reduction and output reactors are fitted
the tenderer shall sate the amount of expected derating which will occur on the motor
when running at rated speed and load.
Tenderers shall include a spectrum of harmonic generating currents in the 1 st-25th
harmonic range, and shall state both the cos 1 and the power factor of the controller at
100% load.
Calculation of the power factor must be based on the ratio of the fundamental current,
and its displacement from the voltage, to the total RMS current which includes all
harmonic currents up to and including the 25 th.
Cos 1 will not be accepted as power factor as it only applies to power factor in loads
which draw a sinusoidal current.
In order to eliminate any system resonance occurring within the motor’s operating
frequency range, the controller shall be provided with several bypass frequency
adjustments. The bandwidth shall be adjusted as a percentage of the recorded by-pass
frequencies. If high efficiency motors is used the controller must have a built in anti
resonance algorithm in order not to cause resonance in the system.
The controller shall be fitted with output motor reactance coils on drives exceeding 55 kW
c/t at 380V and 75kW v/t at 525V. The coils shall limit the rise time and prevent peak
voltages from occurring. The controller should follow the IEC 34 recommendation for rise
time and peak voltage. Preference shall be given to controllers that integrate the motor
reactance coils internally into the design of the unit or have a solution to reduced peak
voltage.
The controller shall be suitable for control of high inertia loads and be able to catch a
rotating motor under any operating condition without tripping. Whether through large
supply interruptions, or by the action of switching on and off the motor isolating switch
when the motor is running.
The function shall also ensure that a motor on a high inertia load already prerotating,
even in the reverse direction, can be switched onto, braked to zero speed by d.c. injection
 B3550 MA - 3-33

braking incorporated in the controller, and then accelerated to the preset speed in the
correct direction.
The controller shall incorporate a PID regulator to enable closed loop control of the
process. The regulator shall operate in conjunction with the ramp adjustments to allow
smooth acceleration into regulation. Remote monitoring of the feed back signal via a 0/4
- 20mA signal from the controller is required.
To prevent condensation build up in the stator the controller shall incorporate a pre-heat
function. When the motor is stopped it shall receive a low d.c. voltage from the controller.
Controllers shall be capable of allowing cable runs of up to 300 metres cables. If the
controller cannot allow this cable length, the tenderer shall state the maximum cable
length allowed, and the motor coil reactance value intended to be used to increase the
cable length. The tenderer shall state clearly the voltage drop and additional motor
derating that will occur when motor reactors are fitted.
The controller shall be suitably protected to allow for switching to take place on the output
via, a contactor or isolating switch without damage to the inverter transistors.

11.7 CONTROL AND MONITORING

All analogue and digital control inputs and outputs shall be galvanically isolated from
each other and from the mains supply and shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage
of 2.5 kV dc for 1 sec. For safety reasons, only controllers that have galvanic isolation as
an integral part of the controller will be accepted.
The controller shall respond to speed commands from 0-10 V dc, 2-10 V dc 1-5 V dc and
0/4-20 mA control signals, and their respective inverted signals.
For maximum noise immunity on the digital inputs the sink current shall be minimum 10
mA and 24 V for each input. The internal power supply for the supply to the digital inputs
shall have a minimum capacity of 200mA at 24V.
The controller shall have an alpha-numeric display and shall provide comprehensive
information on the controller and the motor’s condition. The following is considered as
minimum requirements:
 Reference % of control signal
 Frequency Hz
 Display of feedback signal
 Current A
 Torque %
 Power kW
 Energy kWh
 Output voltage V
 d.c. voltage V
 Motor thermal reserve %
 Inverter thermal reserve %
The tenderer shall state clearly which displays are available, in particular whether the
controller can display energy kWh and torque, and what alternative methods can be used
if the controller cannot display these parameters.
Two programmable analogue outputs shall be provided for monitoring. A choice of 0-20
mA and 4-20 mA shall be provided. The programmable options shall include as a
minimum Hz, Amps, and Torque.
Two programmable relays shall be provided for remote monitoring of the controller. The
programmable options shall include as a minimum ready, run, and alarm. The contacts
shall have a minimum rating of 250 V, 2A ac.
 B3550 MA - 3-34

The run relay function shall initiate a run signal only when the frequency output from the
controller is greater than 0.5 Hz.
The controller shall incorporate the following totalisers:
 Hour run meter
 Kilowatt Hours
The controller shall display all faults in clear English text. The following is considered as
minimum requirements:
 Inverter fault
 Over voltage/Under voltage
 Over current
 Ground Fault
 Over Temperature
 Overload
 Motor Trip
The tenderer shall state whether the controller can provide clear English text or if the
faults are distinguishable only through a code system.
The controller shall preferably be fitted with a RS485 serial port, and be supplied with
suitable software utilizing a windows environment to display all monitoring, fault, alarm
and status signals. The software shall allow parameter changes to be made to the
controllers settings by uploading the data from the controller, changing the parameters,
and then downloading the data to the controller again. Storage of each controllers
operating and set-up parameters shall be able to be stored on diskette.

12 ELECTRICAL WORK IN AIR CONDITIONING PROJECTS

12.1 POWER SUPPLY

A three phase, 50 hertz electrical supply will be provided by others at the points shown on
the drawings. The supply will terminate in a bare ended cable. This tender shall include
for all other cabling, conduits, cable racks, trays, switchgear, panels, distribution boards,
etc., necessary for the satisfactory operation of every part of the installation as well as for
the connection of the supply cable into this panel. Three-pin socket outlets will be
provided for 220 volt equipment where necessary.

12.2 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

12.2.1 GENERAL
This specification provides for the design, manufacture, delivery, installation, testing and
commissioning of low and medium-voltage distribution boards for voltages up to 660V AC
and 500V DC.
Low voltage distribution boards, switchboards and control panels shall be provided and
installed as indicated on the drawings and as specified in the specification and
schedules.
As it is not intended to penalise a Sub-Contractor on account of distribution boards
offered, it is essential that the costs of all distribution boards be indicated in the
Schedules in order to facilitate the determination of costs of alternatives.
The Sub-Contractor shall note the dimensions of the rooms or openings in which the
panels will be mounted and also the dimensions of the access routes and doors. Panels
shall be so constructed that they may be taken through the doors after doors have been
placed in position.
The Sub-Contractor shall level, fix all distribution boards to the satisfaction of the
 B3550 MA - 3-35

Consulting Mecahnical Engineer.

The Sub-Contractor shall note sizes and positions of cable trenches and vertical shafts
and shall include in his tender all supporting steel work to straddle trenches and vertical
shafts to support distribution boards securely.
12.2.2 STANDARDS AND PROTECTION
Equipment shall be in accordance with the applicable SANS specifications and Codes
and with this Specification.
Selection of materials, finishes, equipment, etc shall also be based on the conditions
where the boards and equipment are to the installed, e.g. corrosive, hot, wet, damp,
dusty, etc.
Boards, equipment and materials which are exposed to sunlight shall be coated with a
UV resistant surface finish.
12.2.3 CONSTRUCTION AND FINISHES
General
The type of board (i.e. flush, surface, floorstanding) and position is described in detail in
the drawings and/or in the Schedules of Particulars.
Boards shall be constructed as indicated on the relevant general arrangement drawings,
if applicable.
All boards shall be installed at the specified height, with the top edge of the tray not
exceeding 2000mm above finished floor level.
Lifting eyes shall be provided on large boards and shall be manufactured in modular
sections so that they may be easily transported and then assembled in position on site.
Cables and conduit entry to be as indicated on drawings or as required by their locations.
Glanding and terminating cubicles and busbar chambers are to have screwed or bolted
covers. Quick release covers will not be acceptable.
The gauge of the metal shall be suitable for the size of board and construction employed.
Suitable bracing shall be employed to ensure adequate stiffness of panels, etc.
Barriers running the full height and depth of each board shall be provided between
adjacent panels.
Gland Plates for Cables
A suitable gland plate shall be provided in the cable glanding compartment of each tier of
the board.
Gland plates shall be bolted down in sections not wider than 600mm and have a
minimum thickness of 3mm. Any gland plate shall be removable without interfering with
the adjoining gland plates.
Gland plates shall be a minimum of 400mm from cable terminals.
Where cable gland plates are drilled or punched on site for cable entry, the gland plates
shall be straightened if deformed during these operations.
Gland plates must be positioned to suit cable entry and termination.
A cabling through or duct shall be provided from the glanding compartment to each
cubicle or piece of equipment to allow for the running of the cables, both power and
control.
All wiring, connections, instruments and other equipment shall be mounted inside the
board and not on the outside, unless otherwise specified. Wood or artificial wood
products shall not be used inside switchboards as mounting for terminals or partitions.
 B3550 MA - 3-36

Sidanyo, Delaron, or equal not less than 6mm thick, or other materials as prescribed or
approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer shall be used.
Space for 30% future expansion on MCCB's and CFS units and 50% future expansion on
contactors, time switches and isolators shall be allowed on all boards in addition to any
spare accommodation indicated on the diagrams unless otherwise specified.
Free-standing Boards
Free-standing boards shall be of the free-standing pedestal type with or without doors as
specified and shall be so designed as to enable the boards to be extended without undue
difficulty.
Boards shall comply with BS 5486 : 1977 (Factory Built Assemblies of Low Voltage
Switchgear).
The boards shall be constructed of minimum 1,6mm sheet steel suitably stiffened and
reinforced by a 2mm sheet metal framework and shall be complete with all equipment,
internal wiring and labelling.
Flush and Surface-mounted Boards
Both flush and surface-mounted boards shall consist of an architrave frame which shall
carry the chassis for equipment, panel and door and a bonding tray onto which the
architrave frame shall be secured.
Bonding trays for flush-mounted boards shall be designed to be built into the wall, shall
have expanded metal spot-welded to the rear and sufficient metal straps on the sides and
shall be strong enough to carry the weight of the wall above it.
The tray shall be galvanised.
Weatherproof Construction
Weatherproof construction shall be effected by double-turn construction of the
architraves with flanged doors and bolt-on panels.
Extendibility
The boards shall be extendible and have an initial spare cubicle capacity of 10% or as
specified on the drawings.
Standby Power Section
The section of a board accommodating circuits on a standby supply shall be
mechanically and electrically separated from the normal section.
All panels associated with the standby section shall be clearly labelled and identified, and
shall be painted as specified on the drawings.
Sufficient removable panels shall be provided to afford access to all equipment for
maintenance, service and replacement purposes.
The back panels where specified shall be of similar construction to the front panels.
Clearances
Sufficient space shall be left inside panels for incoming and outgoing cable connections
and for interconnections and control wiring, taking into account the sizes and quantities of
cables and wires involved.
Equipment on boards may be installed butting. Undue cramping of equipment and wiring
shall, however, not be permitted and the following minimum clearances must be
maintained:
Clearance of not less than 75mm between sides, top and bottom of architrave and any
equipment mounted on the chassis.
 B3550 MA - 3-37

Clearance of not less than 75mm between rows of equipment (measured between
terminals).
Doors
Doors shall be provided as required and prescribed. Where doors of sheet steel finished
in the colour specified are required, they shall be manufactured of the same gauge
material as the remainder of the panels.
Doors shall be suitably braced to ensure stiffness and shall have smooth, flat finish.
Door hinges shall be heavy-duty and shall be constructed to permit easy removal of
doors. Piano hinges are not acceptable.
Where hinges are used they shall preferably be concealed. If a surface mounted hinge is
used it shall be chromium plated. Provision shall be made for adjustment of hinges to
facilitate lining up of distorted doors.
Locks shall be Yale type and shall have master key facilities for the entire installation and
separate key facilities for each board. Two individual keys shall be provided with each
board and four master keys shall be provided for the entire installation.
Doors shall be fitted with approved handles and spring-loaded catches without locks
where specified.
Doors shall be fitted with approved handles and square key locks where specified.
Removable panels
Panels of sheet steel, finished in the colour specified, shall be suitably finished, with
machine-punched slots to allow for flush mounting of equipment.
Dust and Vermin Proofing
All boards shall be completely vermin proofed.
No holes other than those required for cable or conduit entry shall be allowed. Should
extra holes be required for temporary installations, these holes shall be suitably blocked
off on the removal of these temporary installations.
Where doors or removable covers are situated and are required to be dustproofed, they
shall be dustproofed by means of a minimum 10mm thick non-perishable gasket,
resistant to deterioration from heat, chemicals and moisture and capable of being
compressed to half its original thickness.
Where doors are flush fitting, gaskets shall be glued to the fixed flange.
In the case of projecting doors, gaskets shall be glued to the door and not the associated
framework.
Similarly suitable gaskets shall be used wherever push-buttons, indicator lights, isolator
handles, etc. pass through a door or panel.
Switchgear shall be verminproof both in the service and isolated positions.
Ventilation
Boards fitted with heat generating equipment shall be arranged to prevent heat building
up to a temperature which could damage any of the equipment or cabling on the board.
Painting and Protection
The interior of all board and panel cases shall be finished in any one of the following
finishes as specified or as approved.
Labelling
All statutory safety warning notices shall be in English.
 B3550 MA - 3-38

All boards shall be labelled as shown on the drawings and approved.

Black letters on white background shall be used for all normal labels and red letters on
white or yellow background for danger notices.
The main isolating switch or switches shall be clearly labelled in accordance with the
regulations.
Size and origin of supply cables and busbars shall be clearly labelled on all boards.
All grouped single, double and three pole circuit breakers on distribution boards shall be
properly labelled, indicating number of circuit controlled.
All equipment situated inside the board, e.g. contactors, relays, fuses, timers and time
switches shall be clearly marked, indicating function, circuit controlled and fuse rating.
The board designation label shall be fitted at the top centre of the board. Individual labels
are to be fitted to each compartment door and corresponding fixed portion of rear panel
(if accessible).
All circuit labels shall be the same size for boards or similar equipment supplied under
this Contract.
Labels shall be white/black/white composition engraved traffolite secured by self-tapping
screws or channelling.
Letter size: Main label - 20 mm, other labels - 6 mm.
Labels on power cables shall be attached with approved type plastic adjustable clips.
The labels for power cables shall be provided with holes for the clips to pass through for
fastening. Each power cable label shall be fastened with at least two clips.
A legend card, covered by removable 2mm thick transparent acrylic plastic ("PERSPEX")
or equivalent panel, shall be installed on the inside of the door of the boards or cubicles
and circuits shall be designated on this card.
Accessories
Any special door keys (in duplicate), special tools, slinging eye bolts and foundation bolts,
shall be supplied with each board.
Installation and Erection
The boards shall be properly fixed to the floors or supporting steelwork.
The Sub-Contractor shall note sizes and positions of cable trenches and vertical shafts
and shall include in his tender all supporting steelwork to straddle trenches and vertical
shafts to support boards securely.
Steelwork supporting the switchgear shall be installed and positioned as indicated on the
relevant drawings or as approved. The steelwork shall be painted as specified before the
gear is installed. No gear shall be installed until the steelwork has been formally
inspected and approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
The prices for the erection of distribution boards shall include the making off and
terminating of all cables and wires unless these are separately indicated for pricing.
The boards shall be properly earthed to the substation and/or building earthing system.
When aluminium core cables are used, suitable tinned copper or aluminium lugs with
Densal paste shall be used for the terminations.
The Sub-Contractor will be required to balance the load as equally as possible across
multiphase supplies. Balancing of loads across the three phases must be finally
approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer after commissioning.
 B3550 MA - 3-39

The costs for the supply and delivery of the erection tools, materials, equipment and
consumables shall form part of the price for the erection of the boards.
All board finishes shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer before final handover.
12.2.4 ELECTRICAL MOTOR CONTROL AND SWITCHGEAR PANEL
A motor control and switchgear board shall be supplied and installed in each plantroom at
the position indicated.
Each board shall be fitted with the following:-
 A Main circuit breaker.
 A set of copper busbars of adequate size, if the peak current on the board
exceeds 50 amperes per phase.
 Individual motors shall be supplied through a circuit breaker and suitable D.O.L.,
automatic Star-Delta, or slip ring starter.
 All other equipment shall be supplied through a circuit breaker.
In the case where the rupturing capacity of a circuit breaker is lower than the rupturing
capacity of the electric feed system at the specific point, the circuit breaker shall be
protected by H.R.C. fuses of adequate size.
All starters shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts, which shall be brought to an easily
accessible terminal block for the purpose of remote control (if specified). An ammeter
with suitable scale shall be fitted to each motor above 7,5 kW output on at least one
phase, and shall be installed in the panel next to the relevant switchgear.
Switchgear panels and boards shall be factory pre-wired so that the only "on site"
connections to be made will be the main connection, the supply to each motor, and the
control system connections to the terminal block.
All switchgear and distribution boards shall be of the metal clad surface type, with a
framework, which is electrically continuous and properly bonded to earth.
The boards shall be equipped with hinged steel doors adequately braced each with a
flush lock and two keys.
All boards shall be treated with two layers of rust inhibiting paint.
Switches, push-buttons, and indication lamps and gauges shall be so installed that they
remain fastened to the doors when doors are opened.
All boards, which are to be mounted outdoors, shall be weather proof and guaranteed by
the manufacturers for such outdoor operation.
The layout of each board as well as the wiring diagrams and details of the switchgear
provided shall be approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer before any
manufacture is commenced.
All wiring in distribution boards shall be labelled to ease the later tracing of circuits, these
shall correspond to drawing labelling.

12.3 WIRING OF PANELS AND BOARDS

12.3.1 GENERAL
All internal wiring to the boards shall be carried out in PVC insulated to SANS 1507
having a minimum of 7 strands per conductor, 660/1000 volt graded and colour coded to
BS 158.
All terminals used shall be in accordance with the relevant clause of this specification.
 B3550 MA - 3-40

All wiring shall be neatly grouped and laced. Wiring shall not be run at random but shall
follow board construction features as far as is possible.
Only wires of the same phase shall be grouped or bunched together.
No excessive bunching of wiring, which will impair the current carrying capacity will be
accepted.
All wiring is to be kept free and away from any exposed terminals or other uninsulated
current carrying parts.
No joints will be allowed in internal wiring, and all connections to busbars or earth bars
shall be made with tinned copper cable lugs soldered or crimped to the ends of the
conductors and bolted to busbars by means of cadmium-plated high tensile steel bolts
and nuts provided with spring washers.
Connections to terminals shall suit the connectors used, but in any case terminal clamp
screws shall not bear directly on the conductor.
Crimp lugs or ferrules shall be used on all conductors exceeding 10mm 2.
Wiring of any one cubicle shall not run through other cubicles unless the wiring is run in
conduit or ducting.
Wires shall be clearly marked at all termination points in accordance with the numbering
of the wiring diagram, by means of numbered ferrules, or other equal approved method.
When the board main switch is switched off, no live incoming or other wiring shall be
accessible. The incoming terminals must be screened. Where connections are taken
from the incoming side of the main switch, they shall be covered by a screen marked
"isolate Feeder before Removing Screen". If any circuits are energised from other
sources, clear warning notices to that effect shall be fined and such terminals shall be
clearly marked.
Control circuit wiring shall be run in PVC trunking where feasible and elsewhere in a
strapped harness with sufficient slack at panel doors. PVC trunking with slotted sides
shall be used.
Where control circuits are interlocked for sequence control the interlocking circuits shall
be made through auxiliary contacts on the circuit isolator to prevent live feed back in
panels that are isolated.
12.3.2 BUSBARS
Busbars shall be installed in all boards and may be installed either horizontally or
vertically and in main boards shall be run in a separate compartment, isolated from the
rest of the board.
All terminations onto busbars and interconnections shall be bolted with cadmium-plated
high tensile bolts, washers, spring washers and nuts.
Spacing of busbars shall be calculated in accordance with SANS 1195, but shall not be
less than 50mm.
Busbars shall be mounted on substantial porcelain or other equal approved insulators.
Bare conductors must be so spaced that with all clamps, lugs and lead-offs in position,
the spacing between any conductor and earth shall not be less than 40mm.
Connections to the busbars must be effected by means of the correct clamps or lugs with
soldered connections or with connections crimped with the correct equipment.
Busbars shall each be identified by means of 100mm long painted (or other equal
approved) phase colouring bands spaced not more than 300mm apart.
The following colours shall be used:
 B3550 MA - 3-41

Number of Phase Colour Neutral Earth Colour Special

Phases Colour Purpose
Colour
1 Red Black Green/Yellow Orange
2 Red and White Black Green/Yellow Orange
3 Red, White andBlue Black Green/Yellow Orange

Where busbars are mounted horizontally the longer dimension shall be in the vertical
plane. The busbars shall be designed to withstand the mechanical and thermal stresses
of any possible short-circuit that could occur at that point in the system.
Rating of busbars shall not exceed 1.55m A/mm2 for copper and 1,0A/mm2 for aluminium.
A solid copper earth bar with sufficient ways for all the earth conductors and 50% spare
space shall be provided in an easily accessible position near the cable gland tray.
Where small leads are connected directly onto the busbars. such as voltmeters, fuses,
etc, they shall be provided with a 20 ampere fuse mounted at the busbar and a 2 ampere
fuse at the item of equipment.
Busbar chambers and droppers shall be segregated from each other. Also busbars shall
be completely screened from any other compartment by removable bolted covers.
Furthermore, the busbar supports shall divide the busbar chamber into discrete sections.
All busbar contact surfaces shall be tinned.
All bracing and other insulating material shall be non-hydroscopic.
Droppers from the busbars to the terminals of fuses or isolators must be of adequate
section for the maximum rating of the isolator irrespective of the circuit rating. Colour
coding will be as for main busbars. All droppers shall be fully insulated.
12.3.3 LAMP TEST CIRCUITS
A lamp test circuit shall be provided for each board if specified.
12.3.4 ALARM CIRCUITS
Wiring to the numbered terminal strip shall be provided if indicated on the drawings or if
specified for remote alarm and indication functions .
12.3.5 EARTHING
All boards shall be fitted with earth bars.
Free-standing boards shall be fitted with a continuous full length earth busbar.
All sections of the board and all equipment on it shall be earthed.
Hinged doors having electrical equipment mounted on them shall be earthed to the board
by means of a flexible earth strap.

12.3.6 TERMINALS
Terminal assemblies shall consist of a metal mounting rail onto which terminal modules
are fixed.
For cables up to and including 10mm 2, clamp type terminals may be provided, but the
type where the clamp screws bear directly on the conductor will not be accepted.
For conductors exceeding 10mm 2, terminal modules suitable for crimping lugs or ferrules
shall be used.
Terminal modules shall have rigid insulating barriers between poles to provide an
 B3550 MA - 3-42

adequate creepage path for use at 440V between adjacent poles for 380V application.
The terminals of the modules shall be large enough to accommodate the cable sizes
specified.
All terminals shall be clearly marked in accordance with the working drawings and wiring
diagrams and as approved.
Additional spare terminals shall also be provided as specified or indicated on the
drawings for the purpose of looping additional remote circuits, with a minimum of 20%.
12.3.7 LIGHTING ARRESTERS
Lighting arresters shall bear the SANS mark and shall be earthed directly onto the main
earth bar with a copper strapping.

12.4 SITE WIRING

12.4.1 GENERAL
The wiring of the plant shall be carried out by the Contractor in surface work in the
plantrooms and concealed work in all finished spaces. Wiring shall be done by means of
solid drawn or lap-welded screwed tubing and PVC insulated copper conductors, or in
multicore PVC/SWA/PVC cable. The main runs of conduit or cable shall preferably be
carried out at high level (if possible in false ceiling spaces). Distribution shall be vertically
down to the required points. All electric conduit and conduit fittings must be thoroughly
inspected for defects before installation, and all sharp edges and burrs removed. Bushes
and locknuts are to be used where conduit enters switch boxes.
The proposed location of tubing and cables shall be approved by the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer before commencement of work.
Conduit to be installed under plaster finish shall be installed in good time so as not to
delay the Building Contractor or cause finished plaster to be chased.
All electrical cables shall be fastened to cable racks or shall be laid in cable ducts.
Cables carried in racks shall as far as possible be laid parallel and shall be
neatlyinstalled. Descents shall be firmly secured with provision for the swinging of
flexible tubing or cables where attached to moving machines and electrical motors.
Sizes of conduit, conductors and cables shall be at least equal to those laid down in the
relevant tables of the Code of Practice.
Flexible conduit and cables shall be provided wherever it is necessary to avoid
transmission of vibration. No joints in cables or wires will be permitted in a conduit. The
ends of cables shall be properly made off. Terminal lugs shall be used wherever special
clamp-washers or sleeve terminals are not provided on equipment. Conductor strands
may not be cut away or reduced in size, and care must be taken to select switchgear,
etc., with terminals of adequate size for looping, etc., where necessary.
No open wiring will be permitted at any point in the system, with the exception of the
copper bus-bars in the switchgear boards. These shall be taped up with PVC tape with
the relevant phase colours.
12.4.2 WIRING IN CONDUIT
No joints shall be allowed and all looping must be done through approved connectors at
fitting points.
The live phase shall be connected at the switching point. All wiring in conduit shall
conform to the requirements of table 4 of SANS 10142-1 as amended. Not more than
one circuit shall be accommodated in one circuit unless special permission is obtained
from the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. Before any wires are drawn into the conduit, a
swab is to be drawn through to clear any water, dirt etc.
 B3550 MA - 3-43

12.4.3 PVA INSULATED CABLES

LT cables with PVC insulation must conform to the requirements of SANS 1507 as
amended, and must be laid according to the requirements of paragraph 1.16 of this
Section B of this specification.
12.4.4 SOLID CONDUIT
All conduit shall be of heavy gauge steel, screwed and conform to SANS 1065-2 as
amended. No conduit shall be less than 20 mm in diameter.
All joints shall be screwed and all outlets fitted with rustproof iron boxes. Conduit must be
either screwed and lock-nutted on both sides and bushed on the inside of the box or
board to which it is attached.
The whole conduit system shall be electrically and mechanically continuous over all joints
by means of screwed couplings, well bonded and efficiently earthed by means of earthing
terminals and earth continuity conductors. The Contractor must keep in touch with the
builder and install all conduit so as not to delay his work and to ensure the closest co-
operation. Every effort must be made to avoid running conduit in "U"-form, but where this
is unavoidable, provision should be made, if possible, to drain the conduit.
All chasing of brickwork, etc., for conduit shall be carried out under this contract.
12.4.5 FUSES
Where circuits are scheduled to be fed through fuses, these shall be mounted directly on
the panel. All rewireable fuses shall be of the porcelain bridge type, of approved
manufacture, connected through bushed insulated holes in the panel. An I.C. fuseboard
unit may be used instead of separate fuses. Connections shall be made through the
back of the panel so that no surface wiring results. Tinned copper fuse wire shall be
fitted to suit the loading indicated in the schedules, where rewireable fuses are used, and
cartridge fuses shall be fitted with the appropriate cartridges.
12.4.6 EARTHING
The whole installation shall be efficiently earthed to the satisfaction of the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer, the Inspector of Factories, the Supply Authority, and strictly in
accordance with the Code of Practice for the Wiring of premises. Any points proposed as
earthing points by the Contractor shall first be approved by the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer before connection.
12.4.7 BOXES
Where boxes are used in concrete or masonry, approved removable cover plates shall
be supplied. For 100 mm x 100 mm boxes, standard blank metal switch-type cover
plates may used, but for larger boxes, removable cover plates of metal or other equal
approved material must be supplied with bevelled edges and must be neatly painted.
Cover plates shall be large enough to overlap and cover any gaps between the draw box
and the masonry or concrete, and must be finished off to match the surroundings so as
not to mar the architectural appearance of the building.
12.4.8 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS
The Contractor shall supply and install all cable trays or ladders as specified or as
required by the cable routes including the necessary supports, clamps, hangers, fixing
materials, bends, angles, junctions, reducers, T-pieces, etc.
Metal cable trays shall be manufactured from perforated rolled steel. Only the following
metal cable tray types may be used:
Less than 250mm wide 1,6mm minimum thickness with 12mm minimum return.
250mm and Wider equivalent to trays supplied by “PERFORATION AND CONDIDURE”,
or other equal approved, manufactured from 2mm thick steel with folded over returns and
a minimum up stand of 50mm.
 B3550 MA - 3-44

250mm and Wider 2,4mm minimum thickness with 76mm minimum return as alternative
to (b) above.
The return of trays shall not be perforated and the top of the return shall be smooth. The
same cable tray type shall be used in long parallel tray runs.
Metal cable ladders shall consist of a 76mm high side rail of 2mm minimum thickness.
Cross pieces consisting of P3300 “SANKEYSTRUT”, or other equal approved, channel
sections shall be spaced at maximum intervals of 250mm. Where cables of 10mm 2 or
cross pieces shall be 125mm. Cables shall be clamped in position by means of purpose
made cable clamps that fit into the cross pieces. Cross pieces consisting of slotted metal
rails which accommodate plastic or metal cable binding bands, may be used in vertical
cable runs against walls, etc. where the prior approval of the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer has been obtained. These cross pieces are not acceptable in horizontal cable
runs.
Rigid unplasticised PVC trays are acceptable. Only the following tray types may be used:
Less than 50mm 3,0mm minimum wide and 40mm minimum return.
250mm and wider 4,0mm minimum thickness and 60mm minimum return.
Metal cable trays and ladders shall be finished as follows:
In coastal areas (for all applications): Hot-dipped galvanised to SANS 121 or epoxy
powder coating.
False ceiling voids: Electro-galvanised or epoxy powder coating.
Vertical building ducts : Hot-dipped galvanised to SANS 121 .
Plant Rooms, Substations, service tunnels or basements : Electro-galvanised or epoxy
powder coating.
Damp areas, exposed to weather : Hot-dipped galvanised to SANS 121 or epoxy powder
coating.
Undercover industrial applications : Hot-dipped galvanised to SANS 121 or epoxy powder
coating.
The abovementioned finishes shall apply unless specified to the contrary. Hot-dipped
galvanised or electro-galvanised trays and ladders shall be cold galvanised at all joints,
sections that have been cut and at places where the galvanising has been damaged.
Powder coated trays and ladders shall likewise be touched up at joints, cuts and
damaged portions using spray canisters recommended by the manufacturer of the trays
and ladders.
Trays shall be supported at the following maximum intervals:
1,6mm thick metal trays with 12mm return 1,22m maximum spacing
Metal trays with folded over return and
1,22m spacing
50mm up stand
2,4mm thick metal trays and 75mm return 1,5m spacing
Metal cable ladders 1,5m spacing
3,0mm thick PVC trays with 40mm return 1,0m max. spacing
4,0mm thick PVC trays with 60mm return 1,5m max. spacing

In addition, trays and ladders shall be supported at each bend, off-set and T-junction.
Joints shall be smooth without projections or rough edges that may damage the cables.
 B3550 MA - 3-45

The Specialist Controls Contractor will be required to cover joints with rubber cement or
other hardening rubberised or plastic compounds if in the opinion of the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer, joints may damage cables. Joints shall as far as possible be
arranged to fall on supports. Where joints do not coincide with supports, joints shall in
the case of trays with single returns be made by means of wrap-around splices of the
same thickness as the tray ends shall butt tightly at the centre of the splice and the splice
shall be bolted to each cable tray by means of at least 8 round head bolts, nuts and
washers. Splices shall have the same finish as the rest of the tray. Where joints which
do not coincide with supports occur in trays with folded over returns, tight fitting metal
guide pieces, at least 450mm long, shall be inserted in the folded returns to provide the
necessary support to the two cable tray ends. Splices as described above shall be
provided if trays sag.
Trays shall be bolted to supports by at least two round head bolts per support. Bolts shall
be securely tightened to avoid cables being damaged during installation.
The supports for cable trays and ladders shall in all cases be securely fixed to the
structure by means of heavy duty, expansion type anchor bolts. It is the responsibility of
the Specialist Controls Contractor to ensure that adequate fixing is provided since cable
trays and ladders that work loose shall be rectified at his expense.
Horizontal and vertical bends, T-junctions and cross connections, shall be supplied by the
Specialist Controls Contractor. The dimensions of these connections shall correspond to
the dimensions of the linear sections of which they are connected.
The radius of all bends shall be 1000mm minimum. The inside dimensions of all
horizontal angles or connections shall be large enough to ensure that the allowable
bending radius of the cables is not exceeded. Sharp angles shall have 45° cornices.
Cables shall be installed adjacent and parallel to teach other on the trays with spacings
as determined by the current ratings. Horizontal trays and ladders shall in general be
installed 450mm below slabs, ceilings, etc. to facilitate access during installation.
All metal trays and ladders shall be bonded to the earth bar of the switchboard to which
the cables are connected. Additional bare copper stranded conductors or copper tape
shall be bolted to the tray or ladder where the electrical continuity cannot be guaranteed.
 B3550 MA - 3-46

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 3.2 DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - AIR CONDITIONING

1 GENERAL
This section of the specification forms part of, and is to be read in conjunction with all
other parts of this specification and the relevant drawing: i.e. Part 1, 2 and 3 of Part C as
well as Part A.
Where conditions in this tender are at variance with those in proceeding sections
then those below shall be taken as relevant and binding.
The tenderer is to note that this contract forms part of the main building contract.
The JBCC Series 2000 Principal Building Agreement (July 2007, Edition 5) shall be
applicable to this contract, a copy of which is available on the JBCC website,
(www.jbcc.co.za). Refer to the Master Procurement Document PART A.

2 DRAWINGS
The following drawing numbers form part of this air conditioning and ventilation
specification:
3550 ML/1 – 5
A complete schedule is given in PART 3.4 of this specification.

3 QUALIFIED CONTRACTORS
Only a suitably qualified and experienced Air Conditioning Contractor shall be allowed to
be the Air Conditioning Contractor responsible for the supply and installation of the work
described in this document.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall have to submit proof of skills and knowledge of the
type of systems as specified by way of his previous experience record and references
from employers of previous contracts.

4 SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work for this contract covers for the supply, delivery, installation,
commissioning, testing and handing over of the following:
a. Upper- and lower ground offices and laboratories and auditorium
 A new 61,5 kW Daikin, or other equal approved, VRV Heat recovery system with
cassettes and hideaway indoor units, piping, ducting brackets, hangers and
electrical work.
 Various exhaust air systems complete with in-line fans, axial fans, ducting, grilles,
brackets, hangers and electrical work. Hygizone systems shall be connected to
the exhaust ducting to all urinals and water closets.
 B3550 MA - 3-47

 A Dust extraction system complete with fan set, dust collector, piping, brackets,
hangers, ducting , compressed air and electrical work and two flexible arms, one
in each laboratory.
 Split units including piping, brackets, hangers and electrical work in the server
and control rooms.
 A kitchen extract canopy and make –up air consisting of extract hood, fans
ducting brackets, hangers and electrical work in the kitchen.
b. Exhibition Areas
 New packaged ducted air conditioning systems consisting of a inverter driven
direct expansion constant volume air handling units, ducting, grilles , brackets,
hangers and electrical work. The units shall be equipped with economy cycle.
 Various fire rated (300°C @ 2 hours) smoke fans will be installed in the exhibition
area providing a total smoke extraction rate of 18m 3/s for the area . The fans will
switch on upon receiving an fire signal form the fire detection system as specified
by the Electrical Engineer.

5 ELECTRICAL

5.1 AIR HANDLING UNITS, VRV AND MIDWALL OUTDOOR UNITS

One 380/400V bare ended cable complete with neutral and earth will be provided, by the
Electrical Contractor, in the plantroom for the all of the air conditioning equipment in the
Plantroom, ie: AHU 1, AHU 2, AHU 2, VRV unit L1 and the 4 Midwall split units (M1).
A surface mounted weatherproof failure protection distribution switchboard, with a main
circuit breaker and busbars capable of 110kW, 400V, 3-phase will be supplied in the
plantroom under the air conditioning contract for the above equipment. The
connection of the failure protection distribution switchboard to the bare ended cable,
including circuit breakers, bus bars etc. necessary for the successful operation of all
plants as intended, shall form part of the air conditioning contract.
The connection from the phase failure switchboard to the each of the above mentioned
air conditioning units, including contactors, isolators, as well as all interconnecting wiring
between unit and remote controller shall be provided and installed by the Air Conditioning
Contractor.The failure protection/ distribution board shall consist of:
 1x Main 3-pole isolator.
 1 x 3-pole circuit breaker per outdoor module of each VRV unit.
 1 x 3-pole circuit breaker per each air handling unit.
 1 x 3-pole CBI or other equal approved contactor per outdoor module of each air
handling unit and VRV module.
 1 x Single-pole circuit breaker per outdoor module of each split outdoor unit.
 1 x Single -pole CBI or other equal approved contactor per outdoor module of
each split outdoor unit.
 1 x 3 phase VoltShield AVS3P-0 or other equal approved protection module that
shall protect the all of the equipment against (on any or all phases):
o High voltage
o Low voltage
o Spikes/ surges
o Power-back surges
o Any two phases shorting together
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall submit workshop and wiring diagrams of the
switchboard for approval by the Mechanical Consulting Engineer prior to the
 B3550 MA - 3-48

manufacturing/ordering thereof.
The onus lies with the Air Conditioning Contractor to ensure that the electrical power
point provided complies with the requirements of the air conditioner manufacturer. The
Air Conditioning Contractor shall liaise with the Consulting Mechanical Engineer as to the
final position of the isolator.

5.2 OTHER POWERPOINTS

All other power points not defined above shall be provided as listed in this Detailed
Technical Specification below and as indicated on the drawings.

6 MIDWALL SPLIT TYPE UNITS

6.1 GENERAL
Four (4) new inverter mid wall split air conditioners shall be supplied and installed in the
positions shown on the drawings. The units and installation shall comply with the
Standard Air Conditioning Specification (clause 9 , Part 3.1) and shall have the following
minimum requirements.

Nominal Cooling Nominal Heating

Unit Make Model Capacity (kW) Capacity (kW)
M1 DAIKIN FTXB50C / RXB50C 5.6 5.6
6.2 DRAINS
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall install and connect uPVC Class 6 drain pipes to the
drip trays and extend them to the gullies to ground level. The first 3m shall be insulated
with armaflex.
Piping shall run above ceilings and vertically down in the positions indicated on the
drawings. All piping shall terminate at upper ground or level where it shall be routed to the
nearest drain point.
Drain piping shall be installed without any loops in the piping where condensate can
accumulate. The pipes shall have a uniform slope of 1 in a 100 from the unit to the
outside and shall be tested in the presence of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
All drain piping in ceiling voids shall be insulated. Drain piping on external walls shall
be un-insulated and painted to match the colour of the walls.

6.3 ELECTRICAL
The outdoor units shall be fed from the main DB as per clause 5 above. The Air
Conditioning Contractor shall install a 230V isolator adjacent to each outdoor unit . A
20 mm conduit between the box and the Switchboard as listed in clause 5 above shall be
provided by the Air Conditioning Contractor.
The installation of the thermostat at this point, and all interconnecting wiring between the
thermostat and unit as well as the interconnection between the indoor unit, outdoor unit
and isolator forms part of this contract.

7 PACKAGED AIR HANDLING UNITS

7.1 GENERAL
This unit shall be in terms of the Standard Air Conditioning Specification (clause 5 , Part
3.1). The air-handling units shall be of the heat pump, constant air volume, horizontal
 B3550 MA - 3-49

type with front discharge and return. The units should be complete with a supply fan,
cooling and heating coil, humidifier, primary and secondary filters. The unit shall be of
the Heat Pump International heat pump type units or other equal approved and shall be
capable of being accommodated in the confined plantroom. The units shall be supplied
and installed on the roof top slab in the positions shown on the drawing on a 100mm high
concrete plinth with a 100mm high lip channel frame.
The unit shall also be installed on adequate 100 x 50 x 6 mm mild steel channel
frames approximately 1000mm high to gain height for the filters and drain traps and
return air duct. The frames shall be painted matt black.
The units shall be mounted and connected in terms of the supplier’s recommendations.
If a non-standard size indoor fan motor is required to meet the external system
resistance, the Air Conditioning Contractor shall include for this in his tender price.

7.2 SCHEDULE OF MINIMUM REQUIREMENTS

AHU 1
Model RTP-40 Lights & Doorlocks Yes
Reference Rooftop packaged unit Economy Cycle Yes
Total Cooling / Sensible kW 45,44 / 38,09 304 Stainless Steel Drip Tray Yes
cooling
Supply Air Volume l/s 3500 Fresh air damper Yes
Fresh air l/s 550 Fresh air louvre Yes
Heating Reverse Cycle 53.89 Weatherproof Yes
Supply Ext. Static Pa 250 Hydrophilic Coil Fins Yes
Supply Total Static Pa 716 Galvanised Coil Frame Yes
Ambient (Summer) °C 35°C DB/ 22°C WB Pumpdown by Controller Yes
Ambient (Winter) °C 10°C DB/ 7°C WB Compressor Service Valves Yes
On coil °C DB / °C 24°C DB/17°C WB Low Ambient Control Yes
°C WB
Off coil °C DB / °C WB °C 13,2°C DB/12,9°C WB HP / LP Safeties Yes
Refrigerant R 410a Switchboard Yes
Primary pleated Filter No. off 4 Main Isolator Yes
Secondary bag Filter No. off 4 Temperature Controls Yes
Filter size mm 600x600 PCo Controls Yes
Magnehelic gauges No. off 2 Run & Fault Indication by Yes
Controller
Condenser Ext. Static Pa 250 Lead Lag By Controller Yes
Condenser Total Static Pa 432 Voltage Monitor Yes
Condenser Fan Type HDA 800-9-4P Electronic Expansion valves Yes
No of condenser fans 2 Condensor Fans Variable Yes
Speed Controller
Condenser Volume l/s 6070 Evaporator Fan Variable Yes
Speed Controller
Compressors make Copeland Scroll Lock stop on supply air fan Yes
Compressors model ZP83 Protection mesh on supply Yes
air fan inlet
Compressors No. off 2
Suction Accumulators No. off 2
Liquid Receivers - No. off 2
Reverse Cycle
Reverse Cycle Valve No. off 2
Compressor Gauges No. off 4
Circuit Breakers / 1
Fuses
Starters & Overloads No. off 2
Voltmeter + Ammeter + No. off 1
Selector
 B3550 MA - 3-50

AHU 2
Model RTP-30 Lights & Door locks Yes
Reference Rooftop packaged Economy Cycle Yes
unit
Total Cooling / kW 64,65 / 54,32 304 Stainless Steel Drip Yes
Sensible cooling Tray
Supply Air Volume l/s 5000 Fresh air damper Yes
Heating Reverse kW 76,68 Fresh air louvre Yes
Cycle
Fresh air l/s 780 Weatherproof Yes
Supply Ext. Static Pa 250 Hydrophilic Coil Fins Yes
Supply Total Static Pa 715 Galvanised Coil Frame Yes
Ambient (Summer) °C 35°C DB/ 22°C WB Pumpdown by Controller Yes
Ambient (Winter) °C 10°C DB/ 7°C WB Compressor Service Yes
Valves
On coil °C DB / °C 24°C DB/17°C WB Low Ambient Control Yes
°C WB
Off coil °C DB / °C WB °C 13,2°C DB/12,9°C HP / LP Safeties Yes
WB
Refrigerant R 410a Switchboard Yes
Primary pleated Filter No. off 6 Main Isolator Yes
Secondary bag Filter No. off 6 Temperature Controls Yes
Filter size mm 600x600 PCo Controls Yes
Magnehelic gauges No. off 2 Run & Fault Indication by Yes
Controller
Condenser Ext. Static Pa 250 Lead Lag By Controller Yes
Condenser Total Pa 432 Voltage Monitor Yes
Static
Condenser Fan Type HDA 800-9-4P Electronic Expansion Yes
valves
No of condenser fans 2 Condenser Fans Variable Yes
Speed Controller
Condenser Volume l/s 9440 Evaporator Fan Variable Yes
Speed Controller
Compressors make Copeland Scroll Lock stop on supply air Yes
fan
Compressors model ZP120 Protection mesh on Yes
supply air fan inlet
Compressors No. off 2
Suction Accumulators No. off 2
Liquid Receivers - No. off 2
Reverse Cycle
Reverse Cycle Valve No. off 2
Compressor Gauges No. off 4
Circuit Breakers / 1
Fuses
Starters & Overloads No. off 2
Voltmeter + Ammeter No. off 1
+ Selector
 B3550 MA - 3-51

AHU 3
Model RTP-50 Lights & Doorlocks Yes
Reference Rooftop packaged Economy Cycle Yes
unit
Total Cooling / kW 50,14 / 44,08 304 Stainless Steel Drip Yes
Sensible cooling Tray
Supply Air Volume l/s 4200 Fresh air damper Yes
Heating Reverse kW 59,32 Fresh air louvre Yes
Cycle
Fresh air l/s 650 Weatherproof Yes
Supply Ext. Static Pa 250 Hydrophilic Coil Fins Yes
Supply Total Static Pa 764 Galvanised Coil Frame Yes
Ambient (Summer) °C 35°C DB/ 22°C WB Pumpdown by Controller Yes
Ambient (Winter) °C 10°C DB/ 7°C WB Compressor Service Yes
Valves
On coil °C DB / °C 24°C DB/17°C WB Low Ambient Control Yes
°C WB
Off coil °C DB / °C WB °C 13,6°C DB/13,23°C HP / LP Safeties Yes
WB
Refrigerant R 410a Switchboard Yes
Primary pleated Filter No. off 4 Main Isolator Yes
Secondary bag Filter No. off 4 Temperature Controls Yes
Filter size mm 600x600 PCo Controls Yes
Magnehelic gauges No. off 2 Run & Fault Indication by Yes
Controller
Condensor Ext. Static Pa 250 Lead Lag By Controller Yes
Condensor Total Pa 432 Voltage Monitor Yes
Static
Condensor Fan Type HDA 800-9-4P Electronic Expansion Yes
valves
No of condenser fans 2 Condensor Fans Variable Yes
Speed Controller
Condensor Volume l/s 9010 Evaporator Fan Variable Yes
Speed Controller
Compressors make Copeland Scroll Lock stop on supply air Yes
fan
Compressors model ZP90 Protection mesh on Yes
supply air fan inlet
Compressors No. off 2
Suction Accumulators No. off 2
Liquid Receivers - No. off 2
Reverse Cycle
Reverse Cycle Valve No. off 2
Compressor Gauges No. off 4
Circuit Breakers / 1
Fuses
Starters & Overloads No. off 2
Voltmeter + Ampmeter No. off 1
+ Selecter
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall submit workshop drawings and specifications of the
air handling unit for approval by the Mechanical Consulting Engineer prior to the
manufacturing/ordering thereof.

7.3 PRIMARY AND SECONDARY FILTERS

The filters to be installed shall be washable primary filters and secondary bag filters in
terms the Standard Air Conditioning Specification (clause 5.11, Part 3.1). The. A
manometer shall be installed across each filter section. A set of spare filters shall also be
handed over to the client at takeover.
 B3550 MA - 3-52

7.4 DUCTING
Internally insulated rectangular ducting, and externally insulated spiral is to be installed as
indicated on the drawings. The positions indicated are diagrammatic and the final
positions shall suit the structures.
The Air Conditioning Contractor is to note that all ducting in the exhibition areas
will be exposed. The Air Conditioning Contractor to ensure that ductwork is free from
dents, scratch marks and ink marker writing. The contactor must also ensure neat
smooth finishes on the ducting and supports. All exposed ducting shall be wrapped with
SABS approve Durafoil secured with sheetmetal straps at regular intervals.
All internal insulation shall be with with 25mm sonic liner in terms of the Standard
Technical Air Conditioning Specification (clause 5.11, Part 3.1).

7.5 DIFFUSERS
Diffusers shall be installed where and as indicated on the drawings. The diffusers shall
be of the RAV-2 thermally actuated type as supplied messrs. Krantz air or other equal
approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. Each shall have an adjustable radial
outlet with core tube for air distribution from great heights and high-quality indoor air flow
with high-induction radial air jets, discharge direction adjustable from horizontal to vertical
(downwards),consisting of:
Outlet element with slanting exit, radial vanes – vane underside flush with outlet face –,
and core tube with jet straightener and adjustable damper for adjustment of discharge
direction, with circular face, as well as with top spigot for outlet connection to ducts.
The discharge direction shall be be adjusted via a self-acting thermostatic control unit.
Connection to the duct system either directly to a circular duct, using rivets or screws or
an optional crossbar, or via a low-height connection box with lateral connection spigot
and bottom sleeve, inner crossbar for outlet fastening, and bores for suspension;
connection box optionally fitted with acoustic lining and volume flow damper adjustable
from room (up to DN 500) or at connection spigot (for DN 630 and DN 710).
Material:
Radial outlet made of sheet metal and shall be powder coated to a RAL colour that will be
specified at a later stage. The cost is to be included in the tender price.

7.6 ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION

The electrical connection of these units to the switchboard as listed in clause 5 above
shall be provided by the Air Conditioning Contractor.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall submit workshop and wiring diagrams of the
switchboard for approval by the Mechanical Consulting Engineer prior to the
manufacturing/ordering thereof.
The onus lies with the Air Conditioning Contractor to ensure that the electrical power
point provided complies with the requirements of the air conditioner manufacturer. The
Air Conditioning Contractor shall liaise with the Consulting Engineer as to the final
position of the isolator.

8 VARIABLE REFRIGERANT VOLUME SYSTEMS (VRV) HEAT RECOVERY

TYPE

8.1 GENERAL
Each VRV system shall be of the “DAIKIN” heat recovery type or other equal approved.
 B3550 MA - 3-53

Details of each individual unit to be submitted to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer for
approval prior to ordering thereof.

8.2 ELECTRICAL

8.3 OUTDOOR UNITS

The electrical connection of these units to the switchboard as listed in clause 5 above
shall be provided by the Air Conditioning Contractor.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall submit workshop and wiring diagrams of the
switchboard for approval by the Mechanical Consulting Engineer prior to the
manufacturing/ordering thereof.
The onus lies with the Air Conditioning Contractor to ensure that the electrical power
point provided complies with the requirements of the air conditioner manufacturer. The
Air Conditioning Contractor shall liaise with the Consulting Engineer as to the final
position of the isolator.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall submit workshop and wiring diagrams of the
switchboard for approval by the Mechanical Consulting Engineer prior to the
manufacturing/ordering thereof.

8.4 INDOOR UNITS

A 230 Volt, 5 Amp electrical plug point shall also be supplied and installed within 1m of
each indoor unit by the Electrical Contractor. Connection between this point to the indoor
unit forms part of this contract. All other interconnecting control wiring between the,
condensing unit, controllers etc. for the proper functioning and operation of these
systems forms part of this contract.
The Air Conditioning Contractor must liaise with other trades in this regard.

8.5 REMOTE CONTROLLERS

Remote controllers shall be of the DAIKIN BRC wired type, or other equal approved by
the Consulting Mechanical Engineer, as specified in the Standard Technical Specification

8.6 CENTRALISED CONTROLLER

The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply, install and commission a “DAIKIN ITOUCH”
centralised controller. Position to be finalized on site.

8.7 SCHEDULE OF MINIMUM PLANT REQUIREMENTS

NB: All kW Ratings Nominal.

8.8 OUTDOOR UNITS

Total Cooling Total Heating
No. Model Type
(kW) (kW)
L1 REYQ 22T 61.5 61.5 Heat recovery

The outdoor units are to be installed in a closed plant room and the condenser exhaust
air is to be ducted to the outside as is shown on the drawings.
 B3550 MA - 3-54

8.9 INDOOR UNITS

The successful tenderer shall submit equipment schedules for approval by the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer prior to order thereof.
Plant L1: (REYQ 22T Outdoor Unit)
Unit Total Cooling Heating
Type Model No.
No. (kW) (kW)
L1/01 Cassette VRV FXZQ-25A 2,8 3,2
L1/02 Cassette VRV FXZQ-25A 2,8 3,2
L1/03 Hideaway VRV FXMQ-50P7 5 6,3
L1/04 Cassette VRV FXZQ-25A 2,8 3,2
L1/05 Cassette VRV FXZQ-25A 2,8 3,2
L1/06 Cassette VRV FXZQ-25A 2,8 3,2
L1/07 Cassette VRV FXZQ-25A 2,8 3,2
L1/08 Cassette VRV FXZQ-32A 3,6 4,0
L1/09 Cassette VRV FXZQ-32A 3,6 4,0
L1/10 Hideaway VRV FXMQ-100P7 11,2 12,5
L1/11 Hideaway VRV FXMQ-100P7 11,2 12,5
L1/12 Hideaway VRV FXMQ-80P7 9 10,0
L1/13 Cassette VRV FXZQ-15A 1,7 1,9
L1/14 Cassette VRV FXZQ-15A 1,7 1,9
L1/15 Cassette VRV FXZQ-15A 1,7 1,9
L1/16 Cassette VRV FXZQ-15A 1,7 1,9
L1/17 Cassette VRV FXZQ-15A 1,7 1,9
L1/18 Cassette VRV FXZQ-15A 1,7 1,9
L1/19 Hideaway VRV FXMQ-80P7 9 10,0
The load capacities are for nominal conditions.

8.10 INSTALLATION OF UNITS

8.10.1 GENERAL
The outdoor units are to be installed on 100mm high concrete plinth with a 100mm high
lip channel frame that shall be provided by the builder. The indoor units shall be installed
according to the manufacturer’s specifications.
8.10.2 HOISTING
The hoisting of units into the Plantroom, designated for the air conditioning outdoor units
forms part of this contract.
8.10.3 DRIP TRAYS
Galvanised sheet metal drip trays with drain pipes, piped to fullbores are to be installed
between the outdoor units ant the stands.

9 SMOKE VENTILATION FANS

The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply and install smoke extract fans in the
positions shown on the drawing.
The fans shall be capable of extracting the following air quantities :
 B3550 MA - 3-55

SPL External
Fan Model No Air
Static
No. Type Quantity
Pressure
Ø 630 mm axial flow fan, fire rated <78
W3 5500 L/s 250Pa
300°C @ 2 hours dBA
Motors and to be certified in accordance with BS EN 12101-3:2002, and carry the CE
Mark of Approval

9.1 SMOKE DAMPER ACTUATORS

Each fan outlet shall be connected with a motorised fire damper. Each actuator motor
shall have a fire rating of 2 hours minimum.
(a) Damper motors shall be of the two position type.
(b) Motors shall have a 100 mm stroke with 6 0 second stroke timing from the fully
opened to the fully closed position.
The actuator shall comply with the following standards:
EN 12101-8:2011 Smoke and heat control systems - Part 8: Smoke control dampers
EN 1366-10:2011 Fire resistance tests on service installations - Part 10: Smoke
control dampers

9.2 ELECTRICAL CONTROL AND SWITCHGEAR PANEL

A 400 Volt bare ended cable shall be supplied by others in the positions shown on the
drawings. The Air Conditioning Contractor shall install a suitable electrical control panel
complete for each fan with main isolator, contactor, relay, overload and circuit breakers
for the proper functioning of the fans.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply and install an electrical control and
switchgear panel in the position indicated on the drawings. Each panel shall consist of a
main isolator with 3-phase circuit breakers and DOL starters for each fan installed.
Each motor shall be protected with overload protection.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall interlock each smoke fan and smoke damper with
the 220V fire signal on the switchboard. When a fire signal is received the fan shall start
regardless of the on/off switch position and the fire damper shall open.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall also install or isolator at each fan.

9.3 ELECTRICAL WIRING

The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply, install and connect fire resistant electrical
cabling between the fans and the electrical control and switchgear panel. All wiring shall
be installed on suitable cable trays neatly installed and secured to the building structure.
The cables shall be equipped with a flame retarded outer sheath. The wiring and
insulation shall withstand an ambient temperature of 300°C for a minimum period of
2hour.
The electrical wiring to the actuators shall be done in a 3-core cable in a PVC conduit. All
actuators shall be powered through a 24 V transformer and shall be connected in parallel.
All connections and inter-connecting wiring forms part of this contract and is to be
included in the tender price.
 B3550 MA - 3-56

10 DUCTED VENTILATION SYSTEMS

10.1 GENERAL
Various ducted exhaust and ventilation are to be installed. The general specification for
all items is covered in this clause and the Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply and
install the relevant items as shown on the drawings and as is necessary for the proper
installation and operation of the system.

10.2 FRESH AIR SUPPLY

As shown on the drawings, fresh air shall be introduced into systems by way of internally
insulated ducting as shown on the drawings.
Fresh air ducting shall be connected to the return air ducting of the hideaway units where
applicable, with lockable quadrant Europair DMP dampers, or other equal approved.

10.3 DUCTING
All exhaust ducting shall be manufactured from galvanized sheetmetal in terms of the
Standard Technical Specification and shall be uninsulated.

10.4 FANS
Inline fans shall be of the inline circular or rectangular duct type. The fans shall be of the
centrifugal type driven direct with a 220V electrical motor unless stated otherwise. Where
indicated on the drawings, matching sound attenuators from the same manufacturer
as the fan shall be installed. Each fan shall also be fitted with a speed controller
located adjacent to the fan in the roof space.
A 220/400 Volt electrical supply point shall be provided adjacent to each fan as
applicable. The installation of the speed controller at this point as well as all the
necessary interconnecting wiring for the proper operation as well as a fan starters
complete with overload and isolators, forms part of this contract..

The fans shall be capable of extracting the following air quantities:

System Area
Fan Air
Model No Type resistanc
No. Quantity
e (Total)
Upper
AMS TD 4000/355 or Circular
W1 470 L/s 200Pa ground
other equal approved in-line
Toilets
Axial Upper
AMS RSC 560 or
W2 flow roof 600L/s 250Pa ground
other equal approved
fan Toilets
Axial Kitchen
AMS RSC 560 or
W4 flow roof 650L/s 250Pa extract
other equal approved
fan fans
Axial Kitchen
AMS AP 560 or other
W5 flow in- 650L/s 250Pa supply fans
equal approved
line fan
AMS Silent 300 with Laboratory
Wall
W6 EDM wall kit or other 75L/s 50Pa store room
extract
equal approved
Toilet and store room ventilation fans shall be interlocked with bathroom occupancy
 B3550 MA - 3-57

censor and shall run on a rundown timer. Kitchen Supply and extract fans shall be
interlocked. An on/off switch will be installed 1500mm AFFL for the kitchen fans.

10.5 EXTRACT GRILLES

The extract grilles shall be as shown on the relevant drawings and installed according to
the manufacturers specifications and connected by way of spigots to the ducting.

10.6 GRILLES AND LOUVRES

All extract grilles shall be of the Trox disc valve, Trox ‘AR’ or ‘AE’ type complete with
plenum box according to the sizes shown on the drawings or any other equal approved
make. The grilles shall be connected to the main duct by way of galvanized sheetmetal
spigot and flexible duct.
Weather louvres shall be of the Trox AWK type complete with bird screen.
All louvres shall be natural anodised aluminium and shall be epoxy powder coated. The
final colour shall be confirmed with the Architect prior to ordering.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall be responsible for the balancing and setting of all
dampers so that the specified air quantities are obtained at each grille.

10.7 HYGIZONE
The builder’s plumber will provide a hygizone spigot at ceiling level above each urinal and
water closet. The Air Conditioning Contractor must provide an opening for each spigot
and connect the spigot to the duct with four rivets as provided by the builders plumber.
The Air Conditioning Contractor is to liaise with other trades in this regard.

11 KITCHEN EXTRACTION CANOPY

11.1 GENERAL
A 2000 x 1350mm Island type extract canopy manufactured from Grade 304 stainless
steel is to be supplied and installed over the island/against the wall in the kitchen. Halton
Capture Jet type modules as supplied by Messrs. AMMS or other equal approved by the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer. The final size of the canopy shall be confirmed at a
later date.
Air shall be drawn through the canopy filters and galvanized uninsulated ducting and
sound attenuators by an axial flow type exhaust fan.
The canopy is to be made in such a way that it can be assembled in position, if the
access through the doorways is not possible.

11.2 FANS (W2)

The exhaust fans shall be of the axial flow vertical jet roof type or any other equal
approved, capable of extracting 650 l/s against a system resistance of 250 Pa as is
specified in clause 10.4 above.

11.3 FILTERS
The canopy shall be equipped with all removable filters supported in purpose made
housing frame. The housing frame shall be installed air tight against the plenum and
shall be made from stainless steel. Removable drip trays shall also be supplied and
installed.

11.4 SOUND ATTENUATORS

 B3550 MA - 3-58

Spund atenuators shall be internally lined with Melenex.

11.5 DUCTING AND FIRE DAMPERS

The exhaust ducting shall be fitted with stainless steel fire dampers with fusible links on
the canopy connection as is specified in the Standard Air Conditioning Specification

11.6 ELECTRICAL WORK

A 230/400 V weather proof isolator shall be provided at each fan by the Electrical
Contractor. The following works forms part of this contract:
 Connection of the fans to the weather proof isolator.
 Supply and installation of a suitable starter complete with overload protection and
all interconnecting wiring. A 100x100 box and conduit will be supplied by the
Electrical Contractor.
 The canopy shall be supplied with lights suitable for the application.

11.7 WATERPROOFING
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall provide and install flashing around the ducting as
per the detailed drawings. No water may penetrate the building at the duct entry.

11.8 NOTE
The Air Conditioning Contractor is to note that the kitchen canopy installation is subject to
change and clarification on all aspects of it is to be obtained before any equipment is
ordered or manufactured.

12 DUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM

12.1 CENTRAL DUST COLLECTOR

The dust collector unit will be of the Donaldson DFO 2-4 or other equal approved type,
by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer,and shall be complete with the following:
- Filter unit with electronic controller for the reverse jet cleaning system
- Fan set
- Wired remote controller positioned in the laboratories and not in the plant room.
Dust at the unit it will be filtered by means of cartridge filters and the collected dust will be
reverse pulse cleaned off the cartridges and settle in a bin located below the unit. The
unit shall be equipped with a suitable fan set for the application:
Flow rate (Am3/h) 2630 m3/h
Temperature (°C) < 60 °C
Relative humidity (%) < 60 %
Nature of dust Silica
Dust load (g/m³) < 20 g/m³
Application Lab dust extraction
Emission (mg/m³) < 20 mg/m³
Filter model DF0 2-4 K11
Application Dust extraction
Filter fabric Ultraweb ™
Number of filter elements 4
Filter area per element 17.65 m²
 B3550 MA - 3-59

Total filter area 70.6 m²

Filter cleaning system Reverse jet compressed air
Cleaning control Automatic
Required cleaning air pressure 6 bar
Compressed air consumption 15 Nm3/h
Air cleaning interval 15 s
Maximum operating pressure range mm WG ± 500 mm WG
Pulse controller (1 x 230 V 50 Hz, 24V DC) Free Pulse
Seal frame material Mild Steel
Gasket temperature resistance (max) 60 °C
Hopper Included
Supports structure Included
Dust discharge bin Included
Fan Set Included
Fan Make Donaldson
Model K11
Type Backward curved blade
Fan motor power 7.5 kW, 2 Pole
Fan motor make WEG, IE1

All exposed mild steel part shall be protected using the protection level below:
 C5-I: Heavy Industrial or Marine (Very High)
 Surface Preparation is done in accordance with ISO SANS 8501-1:2007.
 Corrosion Protection is done in accordance with ISO SANS 12944-5:2007.
The unit shall be installed as per the layout drawing provided by the suppliers
recommendations and specifications and approved by the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer.

12.2 FLEXIBLE DUST COLLECTOR ARMS

The dust will be extracted by means of a flexible arm that can be positioned in the most
effective area in the lab where dust is generated. The arms shall be of the Donaldson ex
arm overhead/ bench type, Dia 6”, length 6.5 ft, other equal approved and shall have a
nominal airflow of 370 l/s each. The arms be installed to the suppliers recommendations
and specifications.

12.3 DUCTING
The round ducting shall be manufactured from galvanized sheetmetal in terms of the
Standard Technical Specification and shall not be of the spiral type. The round ducting
shall be uninsulated and shall be installed to the supplier’s recommendations and
specifications.

12.4 COMPRESSED AIR

The Compressed Air Contractor will supply a diameter 22mm copper class 3 compressed
7 Bar compressed air line with shut off valve within 1m away from the dust collector unit.
The dust collector installer will connect the dust collector manifold to this point. All
compressed air piping and fittings. All compressed air piping and fittings shall be copper
 B3550 MA - 3-60

Class 3 – Heavy wall pipes (half-hard) to SANS 0460 as amended. Ends of the tubes
shall be protected with red caps to prevent the ingress of foreign matter during storage
and transportation. Pipe fittings must comply with the SANS 1067-2 : 2000. Capillary
fittings must be used in all instances except where compression fittings have to be used
to remove items.
The connection shall include the following as well as any other items as may be specified
by the manufacturer for the complete functioning of the plant as intended:
a. Air supply piping to manifold
b. Regulator
c. Abled type air filter
d. Safety exhaust valve
e. Automatic condensate valve
f. Pressure reducing valve
12.5 ELECTRICAL WORK
A 400 Volt 3-phase bare ended cable shall be supplied at the dust collector unit by the
Electrical Contractor.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall install a suitable electrical control panel switch
board complete for each fan with main isolator, contactor, relay, overload and circuit
breakers for the proper functioning of the fans.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall supply and install an electrical control and
switchgear panel in the position indicated on the drawings. Each panel shall consist of a
main isolator with 3-phase circuit breakers and DOL starters for each fan installed.
Each motor shall be protected with overload protection.
The onus lies with the Air Conditioning Contractor to ensure that the electrical power
point provided complies with the requirements of the dust extract collector manufacturer.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall liaise with the Consulting Mechanical Engineer as
to the final position of the isolator.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall submit workshop and wiring diagrams of the
switchboard for approval by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer prior to the
manufacturing/ordering thereof.
All other interconnecting control wiring between the unit, controllers etc. for the proper
functioning and operation of these systems forms part of this contract.
The Air Conditioning Contractor must liaise with other trades in this regard

13 BUILDER’S WORK
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall make provision in his tender for builders' work
which shall include the following:
Drilling of holes for the purpose of refrigerant pipe trunking installation.
All holes through walls for refrigerant pipes, cables etc. are to be sealed off and made
vermin proof.
Cutting of holes for louvres for exhaust fans.
Duct holes through walls
Plinths
Flashings
Hardwood frames or sleeves for ducting through walls shall be installed as applicable.
Sleeves must installed wherever piping passes through walls.
 B3550 MA - 3-61

14 MANUALS AND LITERATURE

The Air Conditioning Contractor is responsible for the provision of three (3) sets of
manuals to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. Each manual shall be comprehensive
and shall include full details of all the equipment installed with the relative wiring
diagrams, duct layout and commissioning data. The manuals shall be in terms of the
Standard Mechanical Specification (clause 14, Part 2).

15 PAINTING AND TRUNKING

All painting necessary for the proper and neat completion of this installation forms part of
this contract as per clause 19 of Part 2. All mild steel used that is not hot dipped
galvanized shall be cleaned and primed with red oxide paint before being given two coats
of black enamel paint unless stated otherwise.
All exposed wiring and piping shall run in neat and clean trunking of appropriate size. The
trunking shall be neatly painted to colour match the wall/ ceiling/ roof to which it is
mounted.
Exposed ducting to be cleaned, free from dents, scratch and ink markings. All hangers
and supports shall be neatly installed and edge shall have smooth finishes.

16 VARIATIONS AND OMISSIONS

Tenderers shall list any deviations between their tender submitted and the specification.
If nothing is listed, this tender shall be regarded to meet the specification in all respects.
All deviations must be accompanied by a full set of technical literature.

17 LABELLING
All labelling shall be as specified in the Standard Mechanical Specification, clause 19 of
Part 2.

18 ENGINEERING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDING OVER

The Air Conditioning Contractor shall be responsible for the complete engineering of the
proposed installation, which shall amongst others include the following:
Selection of components, taking into account prevailing site conditions, space availability,
etc.
Determining routes for wiring.
Any other related engineering matters.
The Air Conditioning Contractor shall also be responsible for the final commissioning of
the systems, which shall include the adjustment of all control components, to meet the
requirements of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. Full details of parameters will be
provided during the execution of the contract. Demonstration of the control and
interlocking functions to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer prior to handover, shall be
the responsibility of the Air Conditioning Contractor.
Handover of the contract can only be accomplished after full completion.

19 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE

This contract shall include a 12 month guarantee on all plants and equipment, valid for 12
months from the date of practical completion.
This contract includes for regular maintenance of all plants and equipment for a 12
 B3550 MA - 3-62

month period from the date of practical completion. This shall include cleaning and
servicing and a 3 monthly log book is to be completed and signed by the client, of all work
carried out.
 B3550 MA - 3-63

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 3.3 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT OFFERED - AIR CONDITIONING

NB: Details of all relevant data must be filled in by tenderer. Failure to do so will invalidate
the tender
Further details on material and equipment must be submitted by means of a covering
letter, brochures, specifications, etc.
All such brochures, etc. must be noted in a covering letter.
NB: Details of each individual unit to be submitted to the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer for approval prior to ordering thereof.

1 VRV SYSTEMS
Manufacturer
Supplier
1.1 OUTDOOR UNITS
Total Cooling Total Heating
No. Model Type
(kW) (kW)
L1
1.2 INDOOR UNITS
Unit Total Cooling Heating
Type Model No.
No. (kW) (kW)
L1/01
L1/02
L1/03
L1/04
L1/05
L1/06
L1/07
L1/08
L1/09
L1/10
L1/11
L1/12
L1/13
L1/14
L1/15
 B3550 MA - 3-64

Unit Total Cooling Heating

Type Model No.
No. (kW) (kW)
L1/16
L1/17
L1/18
L1/19

2 MIDWALL SPLIT UNITS

M1
Manufacturer
Supplier
Model
Nominal Cooling Capacity (kW)
Nominal Heating Capacity (kW)
Air Flow Rate (l/s)
Model No

3 FANS
W1 W2 W3
Manufacturer
Supplier
Type
Duty (l/s @ Pa)
System pressure
Model No.
Electrical power
requirements

W4 W5 W6
Manufacturer
Supplier
Type
Duty (l/s @ Pa)
System pressure
Model No.
Electrical power
requirements

4 GRILLES & LOUVRES

G1 G2 G3 G4
Manufacturer
Supplier
Type
Finish
Colour
Model No

G5 G6 G7 G8
Manufacturer
Supplier
Type
 B3550 MA - 3-65

Finish
Colour
Model No

G9 G10 G11 G12

Manufacturer
Supplier
Type
Finish
Colour
Model No

5 SUPPLY DIFFUSERS
D1 D2 D3 Disc valves
Manufacturer
Supplier
Type
Model No.
Colour

6 EXTRACT AIR
Disc valves
Manufacturer
Supplier
Type
Model No.
Colour

7 SOUND ATTENUATORS
Manufacturer S1 S2 S3 S4
Supplier
Model No
Dimensions

8 AIR HANDLING UNITS

AHU 1 AHU 2 AHU 3
Manufacturer
Supplier
Model
Nominal Cooling Capacity (kW)
Nominal Heating Capacity (kW)
Electrical heating Capacity (kW)
Air Flow Rate (l/s)
Controls
Electrical power requirements
Dimensions
 B3550 MA - 3-66

9 FIRE DAMPERS
Manufacturer
Supplier
Model No

10 KITCHEN CANOPY
Manufacturer
Supplier
Model no

11 DUST COLLECTOR UNIT

Manufacturer
Supplier
Model no

12 DUST EXTRACTION ARMS

Manufacturer
Supplier
Model No

13 QUALIFICATION SCHEDULE/ VARIATIONS AND OMISSIONS

The Tenderer should record any deviations or qualifications he may wish to make to
the tender documents in this Returnable Schedule. Alternatively, a tender may state
such deviations and qualifications in a covering letter to his tender and reference such
letter in this schedule.
Page Clause or Proposal
Item
 B3550 MA - 3-67

14 DECLARATION
I herewith declare that all the equipment above shall be designed, manufactured and
delivered in accordance with the specification.
I further declare that equipment which does not meet the requirements of the
specification has been listed in a separate letter, which accompanies this tender and that
the way in which the equipment differs from the specified equipment, has been clearly
defined.
NAME OF FIRM:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
TENDERER’S SIGNATURE:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
NAME (in Block letters):
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
ADDRESS:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
TELEPHONE NUMBER:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
 B3550 MA - 3-68

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 3.4 LIST OF DRAWINGS - AIR CONDITIONING

DRAWING NUMBER DESCRIPTION

B 3550 ML /01 Upper Ground Floor: HVAC Installation

B 3550 ML /02 Lower Ground Floor: HVAC Installation

B 3550 ML /03 Upper Ground Floor: Refrigerant and Drain Piping Installation

B 3550 ML /04 Lower Ground Floor: Air Conditioning Installation

B 3550 ML /05 Plantroom detail: HVAC Installation

The tenderer is to note that the scale of 1:100 indicated on the drawings are for a A0
paper dimensions.
 B3550 MA - 3-69

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 3.5 BILLS OF QUANTITIES - AIR CONDITIONING

1 GENERAL NOTES
1. These bills of quantities contain pages numbered consecutively in each bill as indicated
in the Master Index. Before the tenderer submits his tender, he should check the
number of pages, and if any are found missing or duplicated or the figures or writing
indistinct, or the bills of quantities contain any obvious errors, he should apply to the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer at once and have same rectified, as no liability
whatsoever will be admitted by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer in respect of errors
in tender due to the foregoing.
2. The bills of quantities form part of and must be read in conjunction with the specifications
and drawings which contain the full description of the work to be done and material and
equipment to be used.
3. The priced bills as well as all the completed schedules and any other relevant
information must be submitted with the tender.
4. The total tender sum in the tender form shall constitute the contract price of the
successful tenderer. Tenderers are advised to check their item extensions and total
additions, as no claim for arithmetical errors will be considered.
5. No alteration, erasure or addition is to be made in the text of the bills of quantities.
Should any alteration, erasure of addition be made, it will not be recognised but the
original wording of the bills of quantities will be adhered to.
6. The priced bills of quantities of the successful tenderer will be checked and the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer reserves the right to call for reasonable adjustments to
any individual price and to rectify any discrepancy whilst the total tender price, as
submitted, remains unaltered.
The responsibility for the accuracy of the quantities written into the bills remains with the
party who prepared the bills. The tenderer shall be relieved of responsibility of measuring
quantities at the tender stage, and the tender sum submitted shall be in respect of the
quantities set out in the bills, although he will be required to make his assessment of
items such as fixings, etc. from details stated in the bills and shall include in the item
prices for such small installation materials as are required for the complete installation in
accordance with the specification.
8. The rates contained in this document shall apply irrespective of the final quantities of the
different classes and kinds of work actually executed.
9. The Contractor and the Employer or his Agent may agree that the total of any bill or bills,
including any variations by way of additions thereto or deductions therefrom, represents
a fair and accurate quantification of the items set out in the bills and the parties may
 B3550 MA - 3-70

agree final payment on that basis. In the event of any dispute as to the quantities, then
the disputed item or items shall be adjusted where necessary.
10. The quantities in these bills of quantities are not to be used for ordering purposes.
Quantities set out in this document are to be regarded as provisional only.
The work, when completed, shall be remeasured and the final contract sum calculated,
using the tendered tariffs and the finally measured quantities.
11. Variations in the scope and extent of the work included in the bills shall be allowed to
meet the Employer's requirements.
The rules governing the extent and valuation of variations shall be those provided for in
the conditions of contract.
12. Unless separate rates for the supply and for the installation of any item is specifically
called for, the supply and installation costs of any item shall be fully included in the unit
price.
The description of each item shall, unless otherwise stated herein, be held to include
making, conveying and delivering, unloading, storing, unpacking, hoisting, setting, fitting
and fixing in position, cutting and waste, patterns, models and templets, plant, temporary
works, return of packings, establishment charges, profit and all other obligations arising
out of the conditions of contract.
13. The quantities and rates included for dayworks shall form part of the tender price, but
tenderers shall note that this item must be regarded as indicative and will only be
payable to the Contractor if and when covered by a Variation Order.
14. Tenderers shall price the Preliminaries under any or all of three groups, viz:
(a) a fixed amount
(b) an amount varied in proportion to the final contract value as compared to the
tender price
(c) an amount varied in proportion to the final contract period as compared to the
originally specified contract period.
The allocation of prices to the three categories listed above must be realistic and the
Contractor may be required to justify the allocation of the prices. Attention is particularly
drawn to the right reserved in terms of Clause 6 above.
15. All provisional sums shall be expended as directed by the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer and any balance remaining shall be deducted from the amount of the contract
sum.
16. Provision is made on the final summary for the applicable Value Added Tax to be added.
In these bills, the word “supply” shall be deemed to include the acquiring of equipment
and materials from suppliers and workshops and the delivery, off-loading and safe
storage of the equipment on site.
18. In this bills the word “install” shall be deemed to include the unpacking, hoisting, placing
and fixing, suspending or building in an approved position, cutting, connection,
commissioning, testing and handing over of plant, equipment and materials.
19. Method of Measurement
19.1 Ductwork has been measured along centre lines and include for the length of any fittings.
Fittings to ductwork has been measured as "extra over" ductwork. Accordingly, the rate
allowed for the fittings should only include the additional labour to manufacture and erect
such fittings. The size of the fitting shall always be the maximum circumference.
 B3550 MA - 3-71

The rate for ducting shall include all necessary jointing materials such as driveslips,
angle section flanges, gaskets, nuts, bolts, duct sealer, etc. and shall allow for offcuts
and wastage.
The price for duct supports shall form part of the tariff and shall include fixing to concrete
slabs, roof trusses, etc.

All bends are 90° bends unless otherwise stated.

19.2 The price for internal and external duct insulation shall form part of the tariff for ducting.
19.3 Piping shall be measured in metres, stating the internal or external diameter in
accordance with accepted trade usage. The rate for piping shall include cutting, jointing
and running joints. The lengths of pipes shall be measured over/through all fittings, but
not over valves, pumps and inline instruments such as strainers, site glasses, etc.
Pipe fittings shall be measured “in number” as “extra over” piping. Pipe fittings such as
bushes, elbows, bends, junctions, etc. to pipes not exceeding 50mm diameter shall be
given in one item for each diameter of pipe. Pipe fittings to pipes exceeding 50mm
diameter shall be given separately for each diameter of pipe and each type of fitting.
Unions, valves, flanges, etc. shall be given separately for all diameters of pipe. Purpose-
made fittings are to include for lining up of fittings. Welded joints, including joints to
fittings, shall be measured separately and shall allow for all cutting, preparation of ends
and welding.
The rate for flanges shall include for flange weld, flange screw, gasketing and bolts.
Pipe supports and brackets shall be measured separately in number on main piping
systems with diameter above 80mm only.
19.4 Pipe insulation shall be measured in metres stating the diameter of the pipe. Pipe fittings
shall be measured in number as “extra over” pipe insulation, all as described under 19.3.
piping above.
PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -72 Bill No. 1

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

BILL NO. 1
PRELIMINARY ITEMS

Allow for all preliminary and general items for this

project, but excluding items priced elsewhere in
these Bills (These amounts will be paid pro rata to
the rest of the amounts claimed by the contractor,
relative to the tender amount)

1. CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS
Tenderers to allow for compliance with all the conditions
Item Sum
of contract (Refer to main contract)

2 SUPPLEMENTARY PREAMBLES
Tenderers must study the drawings and the Mechanical
Specification (Part C of the main contract) for full
description of items before pricing this bill. Of Particular
mention is the following parts:
Part 1 of part C: Tender Requirements and condition of
Item Sum
contract
Part 2 of part C: Standard Mechanical Specification Item Sum
Part 3.1 of part C: Standard Air Conditioning
Item Sum
Specification
Part 3.2 of part C: Air Conditioning Detailed
Item Sum
Specification
Part 3.3 of part C: Schedule of Equipment Offered Item Sum
Part 3.4 of part C: List of Drawings Item Sum
Part 3.5 of part C: Bills of Quantitites Item Sum
SAN Parks works specifications Part A Item Sum

3 JOINT TRADES
Tenderers to allow for all costs which may be required in
order to co-ordinate and liaise with the other Trade Item Sum
Contractors, especially with the electrical contractor

4 SUPERVISOR
Tenderers to allow for a full time working supervisor
during the duration of the contract, who shall have the
Item Sum
delegated authority to receive instructions and make
decisions regarding this contract

5 SITE ESTABLISHMENT
Tenderers to allow for all costs which may be required in
order to place the necessary facilities on site for safe
Item Sum
storage and orderly management purposes for the
duration of the contract

6 REMOVAL OF WASTE
Tenderers to allow for all costs associated with cleaning
the site of all rubbish and waste caused by this contract Item Sum

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -74 Bill No. 2

Item Description Unit Qty Tarrif Amount

BILL NO. 2
VRV AIR CONDITIONING INSTALLATION

For the complete supply, delivery, installation,

testing, commissioning and handing over of the
following in terms of the air-conditioning
specification

1. OUTDOOR UNITS

1.1 For the supply and delivery to site of the following

VRV Heat recovery outdoor units:
Type L1(61,5kW) DAIKIN VRV REYQ 22T No 1

1.2 For the complete installation, including all piping,

hangers, brackets and electrical connection
electrical connectionsof the following VRF Heat
recovery outdoor units:
Type L1(61,5kW) DAIKIN VRV REYQ 22T No 1

1.3 Allow for the complete rigging and hoisting of the

following:
Type L1 (61,5kW) DAIKIN VRV REYQ 22T No 1

1.4 Supply and install 300 high Mild steel support

frame, etched primed as specified, including all
fasteners and fixtures for the following:
Type L1 (61,5kW) DAIKIN VRV REYQ 22T No 1

1.5 For the supply and installation of failure protection

switchboard systems as specified for the following.
As per clause 5 Part 3.2 No 1

1.6 For the supply and installation of driptrays under

condensors with drain pipes to nearest gulley.
Type L1(61,5kW) DAIKIN VRV REYQ 22T No 1

1.7 For the supply and installation of wired mesh

pr0tection screensfor the following
Type L1(61,5kW) DAIKIN VRV REYQ 22T No 1

2. INDOOR UNITS

2.1 For the supply and delivery to site of the following

VRF indoor units:

Cassette (1,7 kW) Daikin No 5

Cassette (2,8 kW) Daikin No 7
Cassette (3,6 kW) Daikin No 2
Hide away (5k W) Daikin No 1
Hide away (9 kW)Daikin No 2
Hide away (11,2 kW) Daikin No 2

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -75 Bill No. 2

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

2.2 For the complete installation, including all piping,

hangers, brackets and electrical connection
electrical connections balancing testing and
commissioning of the following VRF Heat recovery
indoor units:

Cassette (1,7 kW) Daikin No 5

Cassette (2,8 kW) Daikin No 7
Cassette (3,6 kW) Daikin No 2
Hide away (5k W) Daikin No 1
Hide away (9 kW)Daikin No 2
Hide away (11,2 kW) Daikin No 2

3. REFRIGERANT PIPING

3.1 For the supply, delivery to site, installation and

connection of the following insulated refrigeration
piping, measured in sets of 2 or 3 (gas/ liquid pipe
size or liquid/ suction/dischargepie sizes as
aplicable), including supports and sockets:
installed on cable trays

Upper Ground level

Type 1 Ø 12,7mm / Ø 6,4mm m 45
Type 2 Ø 15,9mm / Ø 9,5mm m 10
Type 5 Ø 15,9mm / Ø 9,5mm m 10
Type 6 Ø 22,2mm / Ø 9,5mm m 10
Type 11 Ø 6,4mm / Ø 12,7mm / Ø 9,5mm m 45
Type 12 Ø 9,5mm / Ø 15,9mm / Ø 12,7mm m 35
Type 13 Ø 9,5mm / Ø22.2mm / 15,9mm m 25
Type 15 Ø 15,9mm / Ø34.9mm / 28,6mm m 45
Type 16 Ø 19,1mm / Ø34.9mm / 28,6mm m 45

Lower Ground level

Type 1 Ø 12,7mm / Ø 6,4mm m 35
Type 2 Ø 15,9mm / Ø 9,5mm m 15
Type 11 Ø 6,4mm / Ø 12,7mm / Ø 9,5mm m 35
Type 12 Ø 9,5mm / Ø 15,9mm / Ø 12,7mm m 40
Type 13 Ø 9,5mm / Ø22.2mm / 15,9mm m 25

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -76 Bill No. 2

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

3.2 For the supply, delivery to site installation and

connection of the following insulated pipe bends,
measured in sets of 2 or 3 (liquid pipe size/gas
pipe size):

3.2.1 Upper Ground level

Type 1 Ø 12,7mm / Ø 6,4mm No 15
Type 2 Ø 15,9mm / Ø 9,5mm No 5
Type 5 Ø 15,9mm / Ø 9,5mm No 5
Type 6 Ø 22,2mm / Ø 9,5mm No 5
Type 11 Ø 6,4mm / Ø 12,7mm / Ø 9,5mm No 15
Type 12 Ø 9,5mm / Ø 15,9mm / Ø 12,7mm No 10
Type 13 Ø 9,5mm / Ø22.2mm / 15,9mm No 10
Type 15 Ø 15,9mm / Ø34.9mm / 28,6mm No 15
Type 16 Ø 19,1mm / Ø34.9mm / 28,6mm No 15

3.2.2 Lower Ground level

Type 1 Ø 12,7mm / Ø 6,4mm No 15
Type 2 Ø 15,9mm / Ø 9,5mm No 5
Type 11 Ø 6,4mm / Ø 12,7mm / Ø 9,5mm No 10
Type 12 Ø 9,5mm / Ø 15,9mm / Ø 12,7mm No 15
Type 13 Ø 9,5mm / Ø22.2mm / 15,9mm No 10

3.3 Branch Selector Boxes

BS-1 No 14
BS-2 No 2
BS-3 No 1

3.4 Refnet Joints

Type A No 1
Type B No 1
Type F No 11
Type G No 2
Type H No 2
Type J No 1
Condensor connection No 1

4. DRAIN PIPING

4.1 For the supply, delivery to site, installation

following uPVC class 6 condensate drain piping,
installed on galvanized wired mesh light duty cable
tray including all tees and elbows:

Cassette (1,7 kW) Daikin No 25

Cassette (2,8 kW) Daikin No 35
Cassette (3,6 kW) Daikin No 10
Hide away (5k W) Daikin No 5
Hide away (9 kW)Daikin No 10
Hide away (11,2 kW) Daikin No 10
Ø50mm m 100

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -77 Bill No. 2

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

4.2 For the supply, delivery to site, installation and

connection of the following equipment for
condensate drains:

Connection to drain socket with 'p-traps' No 19

3m Lengths of Insulation for each unit No 19
Connection to drains with 'p-traps' No 4

5 TRUNKING:

5.1 For the supply, delivery to site and complete

installation of galvanized wired mesh light duty
cable trays according to the specification,
including hangers and brackets:
Cable Trays m 200
Bends No 60
Tees No 20
5.2 For the supply, delivery to site and complete
installation of galvanized sheet metal
trunking,etched and primed for painting. including
hangers and brackets:
Trunking m 30
Bend No 25
Tees No 10

6 For the Supply, Delivery to Site and Complete

Installation and Connection of all Control Wiring m 1500
installed on light duty cable trays:

7 For the Supply, Delivery to Site, Installation and all

inter connections of the following Remote
Controllers

Daikin wired remote controller No 17

Daikin I-touch central controller No 1

8 For the Complete Pressure Testing, Purging and

Charging with refrigerant of the following VRV
Systems:
Type L1(61,5kW) DAIKIN VRV REYQ 22T No 1

9 For the complete balancing, testing and

commissioning the following VRF Heat recovery
systems:
Type L1(61,5kW) DAIKIN VRV REYQ 22T No 1

TOTAL FOR BILL NO. 2 VRV Air conditioning installation (Carried forward to Summary) R
PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -78 Bill No. 3

Item Description Unit Qty Tarriff Amount

BILL NO. 3
AIR CONDITIONING DUCTING

DUCTWORK FOR HIDEAWAY SYSTEMS

For the complete supply, delivery, installation,

testing, commissioning and handing over of the
following in terms of the air-conditioning
specification
1 For the supply, delivery to site, complete
installation, commissionig and balancing of the
following ducting, internally lined with 25mm sonic
liner, complete with all brackets, mountings
connections and fastners.

1.1 Lower Ground L1/12

1.1.1 Supply air duct
Supply air duct connections to units including duct
length, transformation and flexible duct connection No 1
(± 400x300 to 600x400)

400 x 300 mm
Duct m 5
Transformation to 300x300 mm No 1

300 x 300 mm
Duct m 10
Shoe No 2
Bends No 2
Stop ends No 3

Ø250
Duct m 5
Spigots No 5
Flexible ducting; in 1.5m lengths including clamps and
sealer No 5
Type D2 CCD Rickard difuser No 5

1.1.2 Return Air Duct

700 x 400 mm
Ducting m 5
Stop ends No 2
Return air duct connection to hideaway unit, including
flexible duct connection and spigot
No 1
Type G9 -1200x600 hinged return air grille with
washable panel filter, plenum box, spigot and
connection to duct No 1

Fresh Air Duct

200 x 300 mm
Duct m 5
Damper No 1
Type G8 200x300 Trox AWK weather louvre No 1
Connection to return air duct No 1
Amount carried forward R
PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -79 Bill No. 3

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

1.2 Lower Ground L1/19

1.2.1 Supply air duct

Supply air duct connections to units including duct
length, transformation and flexible duct connection No 1
(± 400x300 to 600x400)

400 x 300 mm
Duct m 5
Transformation to 300x300mm No 1

300 x 300 mm
Duct m 10
Shoe No 1
Bends No 1
Stop ends No 2

Ø250 mm
Duct m 5
Spigots No 3
Flexible ducting; in 1.5m lengths including clamps and
sealer No 3
Type D2 CCD Rickard difuser No 3

1.2.3 Return Air Duct

700 x 400 mm
Return air duct connection to hideaway unit, including
flexible duct connection and spigot No 1
Type G9 -1200x600 hinged return air grille with
washable panel filter, plenum box, spigot and
connection to duct No 1

Fresh Air Duct

200 x 300 mm
Duct m 5
Damper No 1
Type G8 200x300 Trox AWK weather louvre No 1
Connection to return air duct No 1

1.3 Auditorium L1/10

1.3.1 Supply air duct

Supply air duct connections to units including duct
length, transformation and flexible duct connection No 1
(± 400x300 to ±700x400)

300 x 300 mm
Duct m 10
Stop end No 1
Offset No 1

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -80 Bill No. 3

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

Ø300 mm
Duct m 6
Spigots No 3
Flexible ducting; in 1.5m lengths including clamps and
sealer No 3
Type D3 - Brian Rickard CCD diffuser No 3

1.3.2 Return Air Duct

700 x 400
Return air duct connection to hideaway unit, including
flexible duct connection and spigot No 1
Type G9 -1200x600 hinged return air grille with
washable panel filter, plenum box, spigot and
connection to duct No 1
1.4 Auditorium L1/11

1.4.1 Supply air duct

Supply air duct connections to units including duct
length, transformation and flexible duct connection No 1
(± 400x300 to ±700x400)

300 x 300 mm
Duct m 10
Stop end No 1
Offset No 1

Ø300 mm
Duct m 6
Spigots No 3
Flexible ducting; in 1.5m lengths including clamps and
sealer No 3
Type D3 - Brian Rickard CCD diffuser No 3

1.4.2 Return Air Duct

700 x 400
Return air duct connection to hideaway unit, including
flexible duct connection and spigot No 1
Type G9 -1200x600 hinged return air grille with
washable panel filter, plenum box, spigot and
connection to duct No 1

1.5 Auditorium Fresh Air duct

300 x 300 mm
Duct m 20
Stop end No 2
Transformation to 400x 300 opening complete with
wired mesh bird screen waterproofing and 50mm drain
outlet to nearest drain point No 2

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -81 Bill No. 3

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

250 x 250 mm
Duct m 10
Shoes No 3
Flexible ducting; in 1.5m lengths including clamps and
sealer No 3
Spigot No 3

1.6 Fresh air unit L1/03

1.6.1 Supply air duct

Supply air duct connections to units including duct
length, transformation and flexible duct connection No 1
(± 400x300 to ±700x400)

700 X 400
Duct m 5
Stop end No 1

500 x 400
Duct m 10
Stop ends No 1
Shoe No 2
Transformation to 300x300mm No 1

300 x 300
Duct m 20
Stop ends No 1

250x250
Duct m 10
Shoe No 2
Stop end No 2

Ø250
Duct m 40
Spigots No 10
Flexible ducting; in 1.5m lengths including clamps and
sealer No 10
Type D2 - Brian Rickard CCD diffuser No 10

1.6.2 Fresh Air duct

1200x400
Duct m 1
Offset No 1
Type F2 1200x400 slide out panel filter in plenumbox
with side access hatch with fitch type closing
mechanism. No 1
Type G11 1200x400 Trox AWK weather louvre No 1
Filter manometer installed below ceiling for type F2 No 1

TOTAL FOR BILL NO. 3 Air conditioning installation (Carried forward to Summary)
PART C: B 3550 MA 3-82 Bill No. 4

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

BILL NO. 4
PACKAGED SYSTEMS

1 PACKAGED UNITS
For the complete supply, delivery,
installation, testing, commissioning
and handing over of the following in
terms of the air-conditioning
specification:

Air handling unit

1.1 For the supply and delivery of the

following direct expansion type,
horizontal, packaged air handling
unit as per clause 7 of the detailed
technical specification.
AHU 1 (40kW, 3500 l/s) No 1
AHU 2 (60kW, 5000 l/s) No 1
AHU 3 (50kW, 4200 l/s) No 1

1.2.1 For the connection and installation

of the following direct expansion
type, horizontal, packaged air
handling unit as per clause 7 of the
detailed technical specification.
AHU 1 (40kW, 3500 l/s) No 1
AHU 2 (60kW, 5000 l/s) No 1
AHU 3 (50kW, 4200 l/s) No 1

1.2.2 For the complete balancing and

commissioning of the 100% fresh air
system
AHU 1 (40kW, 3500 l/s) No 1
AHU 2 (60kW, 5000 l/s) No 1
AHU 3 (50kW, 4200 l/s) No 1

1.3 Controllers for the following handling

units, including cables, installation
and electrical connections

AHU 1 (40kW, 3500 l/s) No 1

AHU 2 (60kW, 5000 l/s) No 1
AHU 3 (50kW, 4200 l/s) No 1

1.4.1 1000mm high mildsteel angled iron

frames for the mounting of AHU's,
including cross braces, gusset plates No 3
floor plates and rubber painted to
specification
1.4.2 1000mm high mildsteel angled iron
and recta grid bridge over return air
duct step ladders either side and No 1
Hand rail, painted and prime to
specification.
Amount carried forward R
PART C: B 3550 MA 3-83 Bill No. 4

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

1.5 For the supply and installation of
failure protection switchboard
systems, including all electrical
connections, as per clause 5 of part
3.2 for the following:
AHU 1 (40kW, 3500 l/s) No 1
AHU 2 (60kW, 5000 l/s) No 1
AHU 3 (50kW, 4200 l/s) No 1

1.6 Filters
AHU 1 (40kW, 3500 l/s)
Spare set- Washable pleated filters No 3
Spare set - Bag filters complete No 3
Filter manometers No 1
AHU 2 (60kW, 5000 l/s)
Spare set-- Washable pleated filters No 3
Spare set-- Bag filters complete No 3
Filter manometers No 1
AHU 3 (50kW, 4200 l/s)
Spare set-- Washable pleated filters No 3
Spare set-- Bag filters complete No 3
Filter manometers No 1

1.7 Supply, delivery and installation of

mild steel galvanised drain piping
including 'P-trap', union and 50mm
drain trap
AHU 1 (40kW, 3500 l/s) m 20
AHU 2 (60kW, 5000 l/s) m 15
AHU 3 (50kW, 4200 l/s) m 15

2 DUCTWORK FOR PACKAGED UNITS

SUPPLY AIR
For the supply, delivery to site,
complete installation, commissioning
and balancing of the following
ducting externally wrapped with
durafoil as per specification complete
with all brackets, mountings
connections and fasteners. All
ducting to be internally lined with
25mm sonic liner unless stated
otherwise

2.1 AHU 1
2.1.1 500x500 mm
Duct m 5
Supply air duct connections to unit
including duct length, transformation and
No 1
flexible duct connection (± 400x1800
to ±1000x1000)
Bend No 1
Offset No 1
Transform to 1350x900 No 1
Amount carried forward R
PART C: B 3550 MA 3-84 Bill No. 4

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

2.1.2 1350x900 mm
Duct m 8
Square bend with Guide Vanes No 1
Type S1 - 1350x900x1500mm Sound
No 1
Attenuator
Flexible connection No 1
Transform to Ø900mm No 1
Fire damper No 1

2.1.3 Ø900 mm externally insulated only

Duct m 30
Bend No 1
Stopend No 1

2.1.4 900x400
Duct m 30
Shoe No 1
Stopend No 1

2.1.5 Ø315 externally insulated only

Duct m 40
Stop ends No 7
Bends No 9
Offset No 1
Spigots No 7
Type D1 Krantz RAV 2 diffuser complete
with thermal actuator, powdercoated,
colour to be specified at later stage No 7
Flexible ducting; in 1.5m lengths
including galvanised clamps and sealer No 7

2.2 AHU 2

2.2.1 715x715 mm
Duct m 15
Supply air duct connections to unit
including duct length, transformation and
No 1
flexible duct connection (± 400x1800
to ±1000x1000)
Bend No 2
Offset No 1
Transform to 1350x1200 No 1

2.2.3 1350x1200 mm
Type S2 - 1350x1200x1500mm Sound
No 1
Attenuator
Flexible connection No 1
Transform to 1000x1000mm No 1
Fire damper No 1

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3-85 Bill No. 4

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

2.2.4 1000x1000 mm
Duct m 75
Bend No 1
Stop End No 1

2.2.5 Ø650 mm externally insulated only

Duct m 10
Spigot No 1
Transform to Ø600mm No 1

2.2.6 Ø600 mm externally insulated only

Duct m 15
Spigot No 1
Bend No 1
Offset No 1
Transform to Ø500mm No 1

2.2.7 Ø500 mm externally insulated only

Duct m 35
Spigot No 2
Offset No 1
Transform to Ø315mm No 2

2.2.8 Ø315 mm externally insulated only

Duct m 80
Stop ends No 10
Bends No 10
Offset No 5
Spigots No 10
Type D1 Krantz RAV 2 diffuser complete
with thermal actuator, powdercoated,
colour to be specified at later stage No 10
Flexible ducting; in 1.5m lengths
including galvanised clamps and sealer No 10

2.3 AHU 3

2.3.1 570x570 mm
Duct m 15
Supply air duct connections to unit
including duct length, transformation and
No 1
flexible duct connection (± 400x1800
to ±1000x1000)
Bend No 2
Offset No 1
Transform to 1350x900 No 1

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3-86 Bill No. 4

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

2.3.2 1350x900 mm
Duct m 5
Square bend with Guide Vanes No 1
Type S1 - 1350x900x1500mm Sound
No 1
Attenuator
Flexible connection No 1
Transform to Ø650mm No 1
Fire damper No 1

2.3.3 Ø650 mm externally insulated only

Duct m 25
Spigot No 1
Transform to Ø600mm No 1

2.3.3 Ø600 mm externally insulated only

Duct m 20
Offset No 2
Transform to Ø500mm No 2

2.3.4 Ø500 mm externally insulated only

Duct m 20
Transform to Ø315mm No 2

2.3.5 Ø315 mm externally insulated only

Duct m 45
Stop ends No 10
Bends No 9
Offset No 1
Spigots No 9
Type D1 Krantz RAV 2 diffuser complete
with thermal actuator, powdercoated,
colour to be specified at later stage No 9
Flexible ducting; in 1.5m lengths
including galvanised clamps and sealer No 9

2.4 Plantroom Fresh Air

2.4.1 2100x1500mm
Duct m 5
Type G1 Weather louvre 1000x1200mm No 4
Type S3 Sound Attenuator No 1
Transform to 1200x1200 mm No 1
Transform to 1200x4000 mm No 2
Plenumbox and frame for 4-off Type G1 No 1

2.4.2 1200x1200mm
Duct m 5
Transform to 800x800 mm No 1
Offset No 1

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3-87 Bill No. 4

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

2.4.3 800x800 mm
Duct m 10
Bend No 1
Stop end
Offset No 1

2.4.4 400 x 500 mm

Duct m 10
Bend No 3
Motorised Opposed blade damper No 3
Shoe No 3
Flexible Connection to unit No 3
Transformation No 3
2.5 Plantroom 1 Return Air

2.5.1 1500x800 mm
Duct m 20
Bend No 3
Shoe No 1
Stop end No 1
Type S1 1350 x 900 x 1500 Sound
No 1
Attenuator
Type G2 TROX AWK 1500x1000 mm No 4
4000x4000x300 Plenumbox with sonic
liner and frame for 4-off Type G2 No 1
Accoustic louvres

2.5.2 600 x 600 mm

Duct m 10
Bend No 3
Motorised Opposed blade damper No 3
Shoe No 3
Connection to unit No 3

2.6 Plantroom Condenser Air

2.6.1 AHU 1
2.6.1.1 1000x900
Duct m 8
Bend No 1
Flexible connection No 1
Transform to 1500x900mm No 1

2.6.1.1 1500x900
Duct m 1
Bend No 1
Flexible connection No 1
Type S4 1500x900x1500 Sound
No 1
Attenuator
Transform to 1500x1500mm weather
No 1
louvre
Type G3 1500x750 Weather louvre No 2
Plenumbox and frame for 2-off Type G3 No 1
Amount carried forward R
PART C: B 3550 MA 3-88 Bill No. 4

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

2.6.2 AHU 2

2.6.2.1 2100x900
Duct m 10
Bend No 1
Flexible connection No 1
Transform to 2100x1200mm No 1

2.6.2.2 2100x1200
Duct m 1
Transform to 2100x700mm No 1
Type S5 2100x1200x1500 Sound
No 1
Attenuator

2.6.2.3 2100x700
Duct m 5
Tranforming bend with guide vanes to
No 1
2000x700mm

2.6.2.4 2000x700
Duct m 2
Transform to 2000x1500mm weather
No 1
louvre

2.6.2.5 2000x1500
Duct m 2
Type G4 1000x750 Weather louvre No 4
Plenumbox and frame for 4-off Type G4 No 1

2.6.3 AHU 3

2.6.3.1 2100x900
Duct m 15
Bend No 1
Flexible connection No 1
Transform to 2100x1200mm No 1

2.6.3.2 2100x1200
Duct m 1
Transform to 2100x700mm No 1
Type S5 2100x1200x1500 Sound
No 1
Attenuator

2.6.3.3 2100x700
Duct m 8
Tranforming bend with guide vanes to
No 1
2000x700mm

2.6.3.4 2000x700
Duct m 2
Transform to 2000x1500mm weather
No 1
louvre

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3-89 Bill No. 4

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

2.6.3.5 2000x1500
Duct m 2
Type G4 1000x750 Weather louvre No 4
Plenumbox and frame for 4-off Type G4 No 1

TOTAL FOR BILL NO. 4 Fresh air (Carry to Summary) R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -90 Bill No.5

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

BILL NO. 5
VENTILATION SYSTEMS

1 VENTILATION FANS
For the complete supply, delivery,
installation, testing, commissioning
and handing over of the following in
terms of the air-conditioning
specification

1.1 VENTILATION FANS

Ventilation fan, complete with
hanging brackets, mounting feet and
anti-vibration mountings and
electrical connections flexible duct
connections and earth wires

Type W1 Inline duct fan(470 l/s @ 200

Pa) No 1
Type W2 Axial Flow Roof Fan (600l/s
@250 Pa) No 1
Type W4 Axial Flow Roof Fan (650l/s
@250 Pa) No 1
Type W5 Axial Flow In lIne fan (600l/s
@250 Pa) No 1
Type W6 315 Wall Extract Fan No 1

1.2 Sound attenuators for the following

Type W1 Inline duct fan(470 l/s @ 200

Pa) No 2
Type W2 Axial Flow Roof Fan (600l/s
@250 Pa) No 1
Type W4 Axial Flow Roof Fan (650l/s
@250 Pa)Lined with Melenex No 1
Type W5 Axial Flow In lIne fan (600l/s
@250 Pa) No 2
Type W6 315 Wall Extract Fan No 1

1.3 Occupancy sensors

Type W1 Inline duct fan(470 l/s @ 150
Pa) No 2
Type W2 Axial Flow Roof Fan (600l/s
@250 Pa) No 1

1.4 Channel iron supports for Roof Fans

in service shaft as per detail
including footplates, gusset plates
and crossbracing, primed etched and
painted to specification

Type W2 Axial Flow Roof Fan (600l/s

@250 Pa) No 1
Type W4 Axial Flow Roof Fan (650l/s
@250 Pa) No 1
Amount carried forward R
PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -91 Bill No.5

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

1.5 Flashing (Approximately 2000x1000

with 2-off 700x700 openings
including all fastners habger
supports, waterproofing and 50mm
drain outlet to nearest drain point

Type W2 Axial Flow Roof Fan (600l/s

@250 Pa) No 1
Type W4 Axial Flow Roof Fan (650l/s
@250 Pa) No 1

2 DUCTWORK FOR VENTILATION SYSTEMS

For the complete supply, delivery
installation, including hangers and
brackets of the following uninsulated
ducting

2.1 System W1 Ground floor

2.1.1 300x300 mm
Duct m 12
Stop end No 1
Offset No 1
Bend No 1
Transform to W5 fan(± ø500) No 2
Transform to G5(± 600 x600) No 1
Type G5 600x600mm Weatherlouvre No 1

2.1.2 250x250 mm
Duct m 20
Stop end No 3
Shoe No 3
Bend No 2

2.1.3 ø 200 mm
Duct m 20
Spigots No 10
Flexible ducting; in 1.5m lengths
including clamps and sealer No 10
Disc valves No 10

2.1.4 Hygizone
±ø75 openings in duct m 10
Connection to hygizone spigots (4 off
rivets) No 10

2.2 System W2 Lower Ground floor

2.2.1 700x700 mm
Duct m 3
Transform to 600 x300 No 1

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -92 Bill No.5

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

2.2.3 600 x 300 mm

Duct m 15
Transform to 600 x300 No 1
Type S4 600x300x1500 Sound
Attenuator No 1
Bend No 3

2.2.4 300 x 300 mm

Duct m 25
Stop end No 2
Shoe No 2

ø 200 mm
2.2.5 Duct m 11
Spigots No 11
Flexible ducting; in 1.5m lengths
including clamps and sealer No 11
Disc valves No 11

2.2.6 Hygizone
±ø75 openings in duct m 10
Connection to hygizone spigots (4 off
rivets) No 10

3 Supply and install the following smoke

extract fans in terms of clause 9 of the
Detailed Technical Specification

3.1 Type W3: Ø 630mm axial flow fan, fire

rated 300°C @ 2 hours, Mounted from
soffit on channel sections complete with
anti vibration mountings to suppliers
specification (5500 L/s @ 300Pa)
Complete with inlet finger guard
No 3

3.2 Ø 630mm motorised fire damper

mounted in galvanised sheetmetal duct,
connected with flexible collar to exhaust
fan W3. Price to include for fire damper
and duct No 3

3.3 Supply and install electrical control

panel cabling and wiring complete in
terms of the specification No 3

3.4 All interconnecting fire rated cabling and

connections between the control panel
and fans including weatherproof
isolation for W3 fans No 3

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -94 Bill No. 6

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

BILL NO. 6
AIR CONDITIONING SPLIT UNITS

1. SPLIT TYPE AIR CONDITIONING UNITS

1.1 For the supply and delivery to site of the following

split units as specified, including all brackets,
hangers and mountings
Type M1: 5.6 kW Daikin heat pump inverter type air
No 4
conditioning unit

1.2 For the complete installation of the following units,

including supports, fasteners and electrical
connections
Type M1: 5.6 kW Daikin heat pump inverter type air
No 4
conditioning unit

1.3 For the complete supply, delivery to site,

installation, testing and commissioning of the
following wired temperature controllers, including
cradles and mountings.
Type M1: 5.6 kW Daikin heat pump inverter type air
No 4
conditioning unit

1.4 For the supply and delivery to site and installation

of the following refrigerant piping, measured in
pairs of liquid and suction lines, including hangers,
supports, insulation, trunking etc. as specified

Type M1: 5.6 kW Daikin heat pump inverter type air

m 80
conditioning unit

1.5 For the supply, delivery to site installation and

connection of the following insulated pipe bends,
measured in pairs:
Type M1: 5.6 kW Daikin heat pump inverter type air
No 20
conditioning unit

1.6 For the evacuation of refrigerant lines and charging

with refrigerant for the following systems:

Type M1: 5.6 kW Daikin heat pump inverter type air

No 4
conditioning unit

1.7 For the complete supply, delivery to site,

installation, connection and testing of the following
upvc class 6 condensate drain piping, including all
fittings, couplings, bends and tees for the
following units:
Type M1: 5.6 kW Daikin heat pump inverter type air
m 80
conditioning unit

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -96 Bill No. 7

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

BILL NO. 7
DUST EXTRACTION SYSTEM

1 For the complete supply, delivery, installation,

testing, commissioning and handing over of the
following in terms of the air-conditioning
specification
Dust Collector: DonaldsonDownflo Oval DFO 2-4 K11
including Filter unit with electronic controller for the
reverse jet cleaning system and fan set No 1
Flexible Arms 6”, 6.5 ft No 2

2 For the complete installation of the following units,

including supports, fasteners and electrical
connections
Dust Collector: DonaldsonDownflo Oval DFO 2-4 K11 No 1
Flexible Arms 6”, 6.5 ft No 2

3 For the hoisting and rigging of the following units:

Dust Collector: DonaldsonDownflo Oval DFO 2-4 K11 No 1

4 For the complete balancing, testing and

commissioning of the following units:
Dust Collector: DonaldsonDownflo Oval DFO 2-4 K11 No 1
Flexible Arms 6”, 6.5 ft No 2

5 For the connection of the Compressed air piping to

the unit
Dust Collector: DonaldsonDownflo Oval DFO 2-4 K11 No 1

6 Starter panel and controls / switches of other electrical

parts and components No 1

7 Compressed Air Connection

Supply and delivery to site of the following plant

and equipment in terms of clause 12.4, of the
detailed air conditioning specifictaion. All
compressed air piping and fittings. All compressed
air piping and fittings shall be copper class 3 heavy
wall pipes (half-hard) to SANS 0460 as amended.

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -97 Bill No. 7

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward

7.1
For the complete supply, delivery, installation,
testing, commissioning and handing over of the
following:inclusive of cutting, jointing, clamping,
brackets, soldering and painting
Regulator as per manufacturers specification No 1
Abled type air filter as per manufacturers specification
No 1
Safety exhaust valve as per manufacturers
specification No 1
Automatic condensate valve as per manufacturers
specification No 1
PressureReducing valve as per manufacturers
specification No 1
Connection to Compressed air line No 1
Pressure gauges with sockets etc. No 1

7.2 Pipe

22mm dia. pipe m 10

7.3 Extra over for Copper Fittings

22mm dia. couplings No 5

22mm dia. tee pieces No 2
22mm dia. bends No 5
22mm dia. reducers No 2

7.4 Isolating Valves

22mm dia. shut-off valves No 2

7.5 Tests

Pressure testing on all piped gasses Item 1

Gas continuity test on all gasses Item 1

8 Ductwork for Extract Systems

For the complete supply, delivery installation,
including hangers and brackets of the following
uninsulated ducting According to the suppliers
reccomendation

8.1 ø +/-300 mm
Duct m 15
Connection to dust collector No 1
Bend No 2
Stop end No 1
Transorm No 1

Amount carried forward R

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount
PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -98 Bill No. 7

Amount brought forward

8.2 ø +/-200 mm
Duct m 20
High velocity takeoff Spigots No 2
Bends No 4
Connection to flexible arm No 2

8.3 Make up air

Type G10 Trox AWK weather louvre 600x600mm No 1
Type G12 Traox AE Egg crate grille 1200x600mm No 2

TOTAL FOR BILL NO. 7 General (Carry to Summary) R

PART C: B 3550 MA 3 -99 Bill No. 8

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

BILL NO. 8
GENERAL

1. Preparation of workshop drawings Item 2

2 Preparation and issue of O and M Manuals No 3
3 Allowance for 12 month guarantee period Item 1
4 Allowance for 12 month maintenance and service
period Item 1
5 Allow for training in the operation of all plants Item 1
6 For the coding and labeling of plants Item 1
7 Commissioning and testing Item 1

8 Builder's Work
8.1 Concrete plinths, each 100mm high (approx. sizes) with
mild steel frame and waterproofing
AHU (±3500 x2000) No 3

8.2 For the complete manufacturing, supply, delivery and

installation of 50 x 50 x 6 mild steel channel iron
support frame for AHU (±3500 x2000x1000) No 3

8.3 1000x300mm openings in walls for louvres with 25mm

thick hardwood frame - Full wall thickness No 9

8.4 Rectifying and seal of 1000x300mm openings No 9

8.5 500x300mm openings in walls for louvres with 25mm

thick hardwood frame - Full wall thickness No 9

8.6 Rectifying and seal of 1000x300mm openings No 9

8.7 400x300mm openings in walls for louvres with 25mm

thick hardwood frame - Full wall thickness No 3

8.8 Rectifying and seal of 1000x300mm openings No 3

8.9 Ø 100mm galvanised sleeve in wall for pipes No 40

8.10 Water proofing of refrigerant pipe openings Ø 100mm

after installation No 20

8.11 1000x1000mm openings in plantroom wall for ducting

with 25mm thick hardwood frame No 1

8.12 Rectifying, water proofing and sealing of

1000x1000mm openings - Full wall thickness No 1

8.13 Building in of fire dampers +/-1000x500 No 1

8.14 Building in of fire dampers +/-1000x1000 No 1

TOTAL FOR BILL NO. 8 General (Carry to Summary) R

 B3550 MA - 4-1

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 4 DOMESTIC AND FIRE WATER INSTALATION

PART 4.1 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - DOMESTIC AND FIRE

WATER INSTALLATION

1 GENERAL
The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of work to be done. The runs
and arrangements of piping shall be as indicated, subject to modifications as required to
suit conditions at the building, to avoid interference with work of other services and for
proper convenient and accessible location of all parts of the piping system.
Piping shall be installed as straight and direct as possible, neatly spaced and in
general forming right angles with, or parallel to walls or other piping.
Piping shall be installed so that there is a clearance of at least 25 mm between the
finished coverings of piping and adjoining structures. Piping shall be hung at or in the
ceilings from the construction above and as close as possible to the soffit of slabs,
beams etc. maintaining maximum head room at all times.
All piping shall be run so to avoid passing through ductwork, recessed light fixtures or
interference with electric light outlets.
Sleeves shall be provided by the Domestic an Fire Water Contractor where piping
passes through partitions, slabs, etc. Sleeves shall be flush with each side of the surface
penetrated. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves.
All piping shall be reamed after cutting. Connections with valves necessary for complete
drainage of the piping system shall be provided at all low in the piping systems.
During construction all open ends of pipes shall be temporarily closed with sheet
metal caps to prevent debris from entering the system.
To facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement, unions (screwed or flanged as
required) shall be furnished for all apparatus requiring disconnection for repairs.
Shut off valves shall be installed where indicated and at the inlet and outlet of individual
items of equipment to permit removal, without interfering with the rest of the system.
Piping shall be arranged for maximum accessibility for maintenance and repair and
valves shall be located for easy access and operation.
Cold water connection points will be supplied by the Civil Contractor in the positions
shown on the drawings. The connecting of the pipe (sizes on drawings) thereon for the
buffer tank system supply to the building forms part of this section of the project.
Piping layouts and circuits shall be laid out as shown on the drawings, including
schematic drawings issued with the service.
Welding to galvanized piping or fittings will not be permitted.
Where welding for whatever purpose is unavoidable the complete section shall be hot dip
galvanized after manufacture.
 B3550 MA - 4-2

Cold galvanizing will not be accepted.

Full radius bends and sweep fittings must be used wherever possible. Elbows may only
be used under exceptional conditions and only with written permission of the Client.
Where it is necessary to reduce pipes in size, reducing sockets only shall be used and
not bushes.
In horizontal runs of piping, where there is only a slight fall eccentric fittings are to be
used.
Pressure relief valves shall be of Spirax or approved manufacture and shall be installed
in the positions indicated on the drawings.
Pressure relief valve drains shall be taken to a suitable safe discharge point.
Where pipes pass through walls etc., sleeve pipes must be provided by the Domestic
an Fire Water Contractor. Sleeve pipes should be made in such a manner that they will
not foul against any piping due to the natural expansions and contraction of the piping.
All pipelines must be provided with 15mm drain cocks at all low points in the system so
that the pipework can be drained of liquid without dismantling.
Sufficient drain points must be provided to drain the system completely.
Provision must be made by tenderers in their price to have one in every twenty welded
joints cut-out for inspection and testing and for making good afterwards.
Should any of the test welds prove unsatisfactory the Domestic an Fire Water Contractor
will be called upon to have all welds on the installation X-rayed and examined, at his own
expense, by an approved Inspection Authority.
The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor will then be required to submit written test and
inspection reports by the Inspection Authority before the installation will be considered for
acceptance.
Horizontal pipes shall be installed with a slope of at least 1 in 250 to allow venting of air
to the expansion tank wherever possible. Air pockets shall be avoided. High points shall
be provided with automatic air vent valves or air bottles. Air vents or bottles shall be
designed for at least 1,5 times the working pressure of the system.
Piping in plant rooms shall be so arranged that normal inspection and servicing of
equipment is not obstructed.
All pipes must be neatly fitted and shall be run in such a manner as to prevent the
formation of air locks. On long untapped return lines and on the highest points, supply
automatic air relief as per detail drawing.
On all circuits, screwed unions or flanged joints are to be provided to allow for the easy
dismantling of pipes. Unions or flanges must be provide at all Tee-offs and adjacent to
all valves. Pipes up to 50mm nominal size may use unions but pipes larger than
50mm must be flanged. On straight or continuous runs of pipe, unions or flanges shall
be provided at intervals not exceeding 20 metres.
Pipes which are not dimensioned on drawings shall be sized as follows:-
a. The velocity shall not exceed 3m/s.
b. The friction rate shall not exceed 140 kPa per 100m length.
The pressure drop through all circuits shall be approximately the same. If this cannot be
achieved by pipe sizing alone due to excessive resultant velocities, throttling or balancing
type valves shall be provided where required.
Pipe supports and the positions of anchors shall be such as to allow for movement due to
pipe expansion and contraction or expansion joints in the building structure as applicable.
 B3550 MA - 4-3

Expansion joints, where required, shall be of the bellows type manufactured from
stainless steel or may be of the Viking Johnson pipe coupling or equal where moderate
expansion movements are to be accommodated. Expansion joints shall be rated at not
less than 1,5 times the maximum working pressure in the system. Expansion joints in hot
water piping shall be suitable for water temperatures up to 120°C.

2 INSTALLATION OF PIPING
Pipe routes indicated on the drawings are only an indication of the approximate positions.
The final routes shall be determined on site. Routes shall take in account all structures,
roof trusses, walkways, entrances and other services. The hot water piping shall be
routed to run as close as possible to wash basins, showers, etc.
Piping must follow the profile of the structure as close as possible, approximately 20 -
30mm away from walls, beams and slabs and shall either be installed parallel or
perpendicular. Sufficient free area for the installation of cladding and for maintenance
purposes must be allowed.
Stop cocks must be supplied and installed for the isolation of sections of the installation
as shown.
Water piping must be installed with an incline of 1 in 250.
Pipe fitting and connections must not fall within the elements of the building structure.
Cut pipe ends must be smoothed before connections and during installation. All open
ends must be plugged or sealed off to prevent dirt from entering the pipes.

3 TESTING OF PIPING INSTALLATIONS

Testing of the installation is to be carried out by the Domestic an Fire Water Contractor at
his own expense in the presence of the Consultant. The following actions shall be
carried out:
Apart from other tests that may be required to prove proper system operation, the
following tests shall be done:
After the flushing and cleaning of the pipelines,
All pipes to be filled with water.
It shall be the Domestic an Fire Water Contractor's responsibility to ensure that all piping
is internally absolutely clean before being put into commission.
Drain system.
Clean strainers.
Fill system again removing all air and pressure test to 700 kPa or 1.5 times the operating
pressure, whichever is the highest. This pressure is to be maintained for at least 24
hours. All gauges and other equipment with pressure limits are to be disconnected for
protection.
Check pump performance by closing discharge valve and reading pressure on gauge.
Then open valve and read pressure again. Two points are not obtained on pump curve.
Once satisfactory, proceed to set individual control valves by using a manometer.
Any leaks apparent during the test shall be made good and the test repeated until no
further leaks exist.
Items not capable of withstanding this test pressure shall be isolated from the pipe
system.
 B3550 MA - 4-4

4 PIPE SLEEVES
Where piping protrudes through building structures, pipe sleeves are to be installed, as
part of the contract, to ensure easy removal thereof, without changing the structure.
The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall be responsible for the drilling of holes for
the passage of piping through walls and slabs.
Pipe sleeves must be of similar material as the pipe and must be large enough to allow
enough free space for movement.
Where specified and where the play around the pipe is unsightly blank cover plates must
be installed.
Sleeves through outside walls, slabs and piping through roofs and windows must be
sealed off watertight.
All sleeves must be installed neatly and made watertight. The opening between the pipe
and sleeve must be sealed off by means of silicon rubber or any other approved product.
Where piping is installed through ceilings approved blank coverplates must be used to
ensure a neat finish.
Hot and cold water piping to basins, showers, baths, etc. shall be chased and plastered
into the walls.

5 PIPE JOINTS
All joints must be done in accordance with a prescribed practice for the different types of
piping.
Copper piping must be joined with capillary soldered fittings. Conical type screw
connections can only be used and must be installed at removable components up to a
pipe size of 80mm diameter. On larger, piping flanges must be used. Solder must have
a melting point of no less than 500°C and shall comply to SANS 24 (SABS 24-1987), and
must be lead free.

6 EXPANSION AND CONTRACTION

The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall ensure that sufficient free movement is
allowed for expansion and contraction of piping and no stresses shall be carried over to
the equipment.
The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor must take note that the indicated expansion
bends as shown on the drawings are only diagrammatical and the Domestic an Fire
Water Contractor must ensure that all piping installed are without any stress by ensuring
the correct placing of all clamps, tie-downs, supports, etc.

7 SUPPORTS AND HANGERS

Piping must be sufficiently supported horizontally and vertically to the structure. Supports
must be designed so that the free movement by expansion and contraction is allowed.
Pipe hangers shall be of the Müpro or Hilti MP-H1 type, complete with rubber inlays. The
change shall be complete with fixed nut suitable to accommodate an 6 or 8mm handibolt.
Supports must be installed near to joints and fittings and to the following centre-to-centre
distances
Nominal Pipe Size Centre to Centre Spacing
Copper Horizontal Pipe Vertical Pipe
12mm 1,0m 1,2m
 B3550 MA - 4-5

15mm 1,2m 1,5m

22mm 1,5m 1,8m
28mm 1,9m 2,1m
35mm 2,1m 2,4m
42mm 2,4m 2,7m
54mm 2,4m 3,0m

Extra supports must be supplied at T-offs, valves and other heavy fittings and where
indicated on the drawings.
Supports must consist of the following:
Hangers, pipe clamps, roller, clamps etc.
In roof areas hangers and supports fixed to roof trusses shall be used.
Piping on roofs and walkways must be supported on mild steel frames, free from the roof.
Hangers and supports must be adjustable so that piping can be neatly lined up to even
inclines as specified.
Piping installed through metal cladding must be sealed off with an approved silicon, non-
hardening sealing agent which shall be heat-, ultra violet and weather resistant.

8 INSULATION
All hot water and cold water piping installed outside and in roof areas shall be insulated
with an approved insulation.
The insulation material shall be of the snap-on preformed glass fibre or other approved
isolation material with a density of at least 96 kg/m³. The thickness shall be as follows:
Nominal Pipe Size
Service Up to 80mm Above 80mm
Cold Water 15mm 15mm
Hot Water 25mm 38mm

Preformed sections must be covered with canvas glued over the total length with an
overlap and must be tied down with 15mm galvanized or aluminium strips every 500mm.
Where possible damage may occur as a result of movement on rollers etc., the cladding
may be neatly cut back in such a way that insulation may be applied without removing or
damaging the insulation material.
Equipment and piping must be pressure tested before any insulation shall be installed.
Bends and fittings shall be insulated as follows:
Fittings shall be wrapped with 20mm diameter glass fibre rope, then with galvanized
chicken wire and then plastered with an approved asbestos free insulation material to the
thickness of the surrounding cladding. The plaster must then be treated with an
approved weather and ultraviolet resistant mastic sealant and then with a double layer
glass fibre gauze which shall extend to 30mm over the sheet metal cladding. Finally the
glass fibre shall be covered from sheet metal cladding to sheet metal cladding with a
watertight mastic sealant.
Before the insulation material is applied the piping must be heated and kept at the
elevated temperature until the work is done and the insulation material has bonded and is
totally dry.
 B3550 MA - 4-6

Other equipment is to be insulated as follows:

Insulation must be applied on a basis layer of porcelain clay or any other approved
binding substance in layers of 15mm thick.
The layers must be left rough until dry before the next layer is applied. Large surfaces
must then be covered with 25mm galvanized chicken wire. Piping must be bound with a
20mm spiral of 0,9mm binding wire before the application of the final hand wound layer.
The hot water cylinders shall be insulated with 50mm blanket type fibre glass insulation
with a minimum density of 96kg/m³. The insulation shall be strapped to the cylinder with
sheet metal bands and shall be covered with 0,5mm thick galvanised sheet metal that
shall be held in position by overlapping joints and fastened with self-tapping screws. The
top of the cylinder shall be insulated as specified for other equipment. The insulation on
all hot water vessels shall be covered with sheet metal cladding on the sides, top and
bottom.

9 SHEET METAL CLADDING

All piping on the outside of the building and in plantrooms shall be covered with sheet
metal cladding.
Galvanized sheet metal covering 0,5mm thick must be tightly strapped around pipes at
500mm centres with 15mm wide galvanised bands. On conial and other shapes, self
tapping screws, spaced at 200mm intervals, must be used for a solid and neat finish.
The cladding must overlap on the side of the pipe, with the top overlapping the bottom
edge of the sheet metal. This is to ensure that water does not leak through the opening
where the sheetmetal overlaps with itself,
All seams in the sheet metal must be sealed with a non-hardening, UV resistant silicon
sealer to prevent the ingress of water.

10 COPPER PIPING
All piping shall be the best quality copper pipe of approved make, free from any defects.
The sizes shall be indicated on the main drawings and no pipe of a smaller size than
15mm shall be used.
All piping shall comply with SANS 460-1985 as amended, either half hard Class 0, 1 or 2
piping as specified in the Detailed Technical Specification.
All piping shall be suitable for a working pressure of not less than 1300kPa.
In general, Class 2 piping shall be used inside buildings while only Class 3 piping shall
be used for underground services.
All fittings shall be of the best quality and shall be correctly matched to the size of piping
to which they are connected.
Capillary type copper bends, elbows, tees, reducers, etc. are preferred wherever
possible. These must be silver soldered using hard solders complying with SANS 24-
1994 as amended. The use of soft tin-lead is not permissible.
Where it is necessary to provide dismantled connections in the pipework use may be
made of brass "Flarex or "Conex" type fittings.
Brass fittings must be made from a grade of brass or gun metal which will not be subject
to dezincification.
Full radius bend and sweep fittings must be used wherever possible. Elbows may only be
used under exceptional conditions and only with the express permission of the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer.
 B3550 MA - 4-7

Where it is necessary to reduce pipes in size, reducing sockets and fittings only shall be
used and not bushes.
In horizontal runs of piping, where there is only a slight fall, eccentric reducing fittings are
to be used to prevent air locks.
Where pipes are to be chased and built into walls, the piping shall be tightly
wrapped with two layers of stout brown paper around the entire pipe and tied with
wire prior to building in.
Where practical copper pipes, particularly in sizes up to 15mm shall be bent or set
around corners or obstacles. Where pipes are bent or set proper bending springs or pipe
bends shall be used. No flattening of pipes at bends or sets will be permitted.
On all circuits, screwed "Flarex" or "Conex' unions, flanged joints are to be provided to
allow for easy dismantling of pipes. Unions or flanges must be provided at all major
tee offs and adjacent to all valves.
Pipes up to 50mm in diamenter may use unions but pipes above 50mm in diameter
must be flanged. On straight or continuous runs of pipes, unions or flanges shall be
provided at intervals not exceeding 20 meters.

11 GALVANISED PIPING
All water piping shall on open piping systems only be galvanised medium quality
and be in accordance with SANS 62 and be galvanised inside and outside according to
SANS 763. Screw threads on galvanised water pipes shall be cut before galvanising and
no welding will be allowed on galvanised pipe.
All water piping used on closed water systems shall be high quality black steel piping in
accordance with SANS 62.
Water pipes sizes up to 40 mm shall be screwed, over 40 mm shall be flanged on every
12 m length of pipe.
Note: All bolts on flanges must be accompanied by washers on both sides of the flange.
All flanges shall be in accordance with SANS 1123 or BS 4504 Part 1 (one) and shall be
plain faced and welded to the pipes. Flanged joints shall be made with thin metallic
corrugated joint rings and jointing paste. Welding sockets shall be used for all welded
pipe connections.
All vents, manual or automatic shall be piped to a common collection point and shall
enter into a sheet-metal funnel. The funnel shall then be piped with a galvanised pipe to
the nearest drain. In the case of manual air vents a shut off valve shall be installed in the
pipe leading to the funnel at a height of not more than 1800 mm from the floor.
Bellows-type expansion joints, together with the necessary pipe guides and clamps, shall
be supplied and installed where it is considered that the normal pipe direction changes
will not be sufficiently flexible to take up the expansion and contraction of the pipe.
The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall ensure that the pipe-supports will permit
movement as may be necessary to take up expansion.
Pipe hangers shall be complete with rubber inlays. The change shall be complete with
fixed nut suitable to accommodate an 6 or 8mm handibolt.
Pipe hangers, supports and brackets shall be installed at the following maximum centres:
Galvanised piping
Maximum Distance Between Supports
Supports
Up to 62mm 3m
 B3550 MA - 4-8

63mm to 87mm 3,5m

88mm to 150mm 4,0m
151mm to 300mm 4,8m
Above 300mm 6,0m

Pipe insulation shall run full size through hangers and supports and shall be replaced
with a suitable hard insulation material such as wood, where clamped in hangers or
supports. This hard insulation material is to be approved by the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer before installation.
Pipe anchors shall be lined with the insertion rubber or felt and shall be clamped solid to
the pipe, the anchor and pipe shall be insulated together.
Particular care shall be exercised during and after installation to ensure that no stress is
imposed on any equipment or joints.
Pipes which are not dimensioned on drawings shall be sized as follows:
The velocity shall not exceed 3 m/s.
The friction rate shall not exceed 140 kPa per 100 m length.
The pressure drop through all circuits shall be approximately the same. If this cannot be
achieved by pipe sizing alone due to excessive resultant velocities, throttling valves shall
be provided where required.

12 FITTINGS, ETC.

12.1 VALVES

12.2 BALL VALVES

Ball valves shall be of the “Cobra 1090-15” type or other equal approved. It shall have
chrome plated balls, seated on “Teflon” seats. The castings must be of even thickness
clean and free of scale, blowholes and defects with the top and inside work face
machined. All wearable components must be manufactured of a corrosive free material
and must be replaceable.

12.3 BALLCOCKS
Ballcocks with sizes 15 and 20mm diameter shall comply to SANS 1056-3 (SABS 1056
Part 3 – 1985) Class 20 and shall be of the “Cobra Watertech 1075-15” and “1075-20”
respectively.

12.4 VALVE CONNECTIONS

All valves and equipment on copper piping must be mechanically joined to the piping for
easy removal.

12.5 BALANCING VALVES

Approved control valves shall be installed on the return piping to control water flow at T-
offs connections. The control valve must consist out of a T-piece with a long thread round
nose plug and bolt, with which water flow shall be effectively controlled.

12.6 CHECK VALVES

Check valves shall be of the swing or lift type with seats of neoprene, gunmetal or
stainless steel, discs of bronze or stainless steel and bronze or cast iron bodies. Valves
with metal to metal contact shall be provided with replaceable O-rings.
 B3550 MA - 4-9

12.7 BALANCING VALVES

Balancing valves shall be fitted where necessary whether specified or not and shall be
manufactured from cast iron and bronze with stainless steel moving parts.
Balancing valves up to 65 mm diameter shall have screwed connections. Larger valves
shall have flanged connections. All valves shall be supplied with pressure tappings for
pressure drop measurements.
The functions of the balancing valves is for balancing the water flow and for use as shut-
off valves. Balancing valves shall be of the type STA-T valves as manufactured by
TOUR-ARGENTURER of Sweden or any other approved type for sizes up to 65 mm
diameter. Type STH and STHT shall be used for the larger sizes.
Note: South African manufactured valves of similar quality shall be preferable if
available.

12.8 ISOLATING VALVES

These shall be the full way ball cocks manufactured from brass and equipped with a
plastic coated mild steel lever handle with screwed connections to SANS 1056 Part 3 and
tested to 2000 kPa. These shall be installed in such a way as to isolate sanitary fittings
from the main supply pipes without stopping the circulation through the main lines.
Position of valves are as indicated on the layout and detail drawings.

12.9 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

These shall be of the fully adjustable single stem industrial type with a maximum
reduction ratio of 4:1. The body and internal parts shall be made from non-corrosive
materials such as cast brass or stainless steel.
Each valve shall be equipped with a replaceable strainer cartridge.
The maximum expected working pressure is 400 kPa and the valves must reduce the
pressure to a constant 400 kPa.

12.10 SAFETY VALVES

These shall be manufactured from cast brass with rustproof steel strip, fully adjustable.
The valve shall be tested during commissioning and thereafter sealed and locked.

12.11 EXPANSION TANKS

Expansion tanks shall be constructed of galvanised sheet iron and the box and sides
shall be supported with angle iron ribs or approved equivalent. Expansion tanks shall be
equipped with the following:
A supply water pipe with isolating valve, a ball valve, a proper cover with air vent, an
overflow and drain pipe with isolating valve. The overflow shall be piped to the nearest
manhole or full bore.

12.12 PRESSURE GAUGES AND THERMOMETERS

Pressure gauges shall be of the "Bourdon" type to BS 1780 with at least a 100mm dial
and calibrated in kPa with the maximum range not exceeding 1,5 times the system
working pressure. Forged brass or gunmetal gauge cocks must be fitted with each
pressure gauge.
Thermometers shall be of the replaceable glass type with bronze casings, fitted into
pockets for removal without draining the system. The thermometers shall be calibrated in
°C and the scale length shall be at least 170mm. Pockets shall be of brass, filled with oil
and shall be installed vertically.
 B3550 MA - 4-10

On pipes smaller than 50mm diameter, pipe sizes must be increased locally to install the
sockets.

12.13 AIR VENTS

Manual air vents shall be provided generally to vent all systems during filling and normal
operation. Automatic air vents shall be used at all points in the systems, where air will
accumulate continuously.
All vents, manual or automatic shall be piped to a common collection point, and shall
enter into a tundish. The tundish shall then be piped with a galvanised pipe to the nearest
drain. In the case of manual air vents a shut - off valve shall be installed in the pipe
leading to the tundish at a height of not more than 1800 mm from the floor.

13 HOT WATER CIRCULATING PUMPS

The circulating pumps shall be of the Grundfos UPS or other equal approved. Each
pump shall circulate hot water at a rate specified in the Detailed Technical
Specification.
The pumps shall be suitable for operation on a 230 V, 50 Hz AC power supply.
The internal components of the pump shall be manufactured out of non-toxic, rust free
material which shall be capable to handle hot water up to a temperature of 100°C at a
static pressure of 500 kPa.
The pump shaft and neckring shall be made from stainless steel.
Pump seals shall be ethylene-propylene O-rings.
The pumps shall be fitted with shut-off valves and an union on the suction and supply
sides of it. Non-return valves shall be installed only on the supply side.

14 INDUSTRIAL HEAT PUMPS

The heat pumps shall be of the Alliance ALLW type as supplied by Messrs. Fourways or
other equal approved type. The heat pump must be supplied with all the necessary
valves, drains, safety valves and air vents, etc as is specified by the manufacturer.
The system must be charged with R 410 refrigerant.
The housing shall be stainless steel.
The units shall be mounted on 50mm high concrete plinths on the concrete slab shown
on the drawings, or unistrut type wall brackets whichever is applicable. The bracket or
concrete plinth forms part of this contract.
The unit shall be installed on anti-vibration mountings as required by the manufacturer.
The condenser coils shall be protected with approximately 25 x 12 x 1.6mm galvanized
wire mesh hail guards, as supplied by “Steeldale Mesh”. The guards shall have sheet
metal surrounds and shall be screwed to the casing around the condenser coils with self-
tapping screws.
A 220 V power supply shall be provided by the Electrical Contractor within one metre
from the heat pump in the positions indicated on the drawings. The connection to the
power supply, the connection from the heat pump to the geyser and isolator at the
geyser shall form part of this contract.
 B3550 MA - 4-11

15 ELECTRICAL WORK IN DOMESTIC WATER PROJECTS

15.1 POWER SUPPLY

A three phase, 50 hertz electrical supply will be provided by others at the points shown on
the drawings. The supply will terminate in a bare ended cable. This tender shall include
for all other cabling, conduits, cable racks, trays, switchgear, panels, distribution boards,
etc., necessary for the satisfactory operation of every part of the installation as well as for
the connection of the supply cable into this panel. Three-pin socket outlets will be
provided for 220 volt equipment where necessary.

15.2 LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION BOARDS

15.3 GENERAL
This specification provides for the design, manufacture, delivery, installation, testing and
commissioning of low and medium-voltage distribution boards for voltages up to 660V AC
and 500V DC.
Low voltage distribution boards, switchboards and control panels shall be provided and
installed as indicated on the drawings and as specified in the specification and
schedules.
As it is not intended to penalise a Sub-Contractor on account of distribution boards
offered, it is essential that the costs of all distribution boards be indicated in the
Schedules in order to facilitate the determination of costs of alternatives.
The Sub-Contractor shall note the dimensions of the rooms or openings in which the
panels will be mounted and also the dimensions of the access routes and doors. Panels
shall be so constructed that they may be taken through the doors after doors have been
placed in position.
The Sub-Contractor shall level, fix all distribution boards to the satisfaction of the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
The Sub-Contractor shall note sizes and positions of cable trenches and vertical shafts
and shall include in his tender all supporting steel work to straddle trenches and vertical
shafts to support distribution boards securely.

15.4 STANDARDS AND PROTECTION

Equipment shall be in accordance with the applicable SANS specifications and Codes
and with this Specification.
Selection of materials, finishes, equipment, etc shall also be based on the conditions
where the boards and equipment are to the installed, e.g. corrosive, hot, wet, damp,
dusty, etc.
Boards, equipment and materials which are exposed to sunlight shall be coated with a
UV resistant surface finish.

15.5 CONSTRUCTION AND FINISHES

General
The type of board (i.e. flush, surface, floorstanding) and position is described in detail in
the drawings and/or in the Schedules of Particulars.
Boards shall be constructed as indicated on the relevant general arrangement drawings,
if applicable.
All boards shall be installed at the specified height, with the top edge of the tray not
exceeding 2000mm above finished floor level.
 B3550 MA - 4-12

Lifting eyes shall be provided on large boards and shall be manufactured in modular
sections so that they may be easily transported and then assembled in position on site.
Cables and conduit entry to be as indicated on drawings or as required by their locations.
Glanding and terminating cubicles and busbar chambers are to have screwed or bolted
covers. Quick release covers will not be acceptable.
The gauge of the metal shall be suitable for the size of board and construction employed.
Suitable bracing shall be employed to ensure adequate stiffness of panels, etc.
Barriers running the full height and depth of each board shall be provided between
adjacent panels.
Gland Plates for Cables
A suitable gland plate shall be provided in the cable glanding compartment of each tier of
the board.
Gland plates shall be bolted down in sections not wider than 600mm and have a
minimum thickness of 3mm. Any gland plate shall be removable without interfering with
the adjoining gland plates.
Gland plates shall be a minimum of 400mm from cable terminals.
Where cable gland plates are drilled or punched on site for cable entry, the gland plates
shall be straightened if deformed during these operations.
Gland plates must be positioned to suit cable entry and termination.
A cabling through or duct shall be provided from the glanding compartment to each
cubicle or piece of equipment to allow for the running of the cables, both power and
control.
All wiring, connections, instruments and other equipment shall be mounted inside the
board and not on the outside, unless otherwise specified. Wood or artificial wood
products shall not be used inside switchboards as mounting for terminals or partitions.
Sidanyo, Delaron, or equal not less than 6mm thick, or other materials as prescribed or
approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer shall be used.
Space for 30% future expansion on MCCB's and CFS units and 50% future expansion on
contactors, time switches and isolators shall be allowed on all boards in addition to any
spare accommodation indicated on the diagrams unless otherwise specified.
Free-standing Boards
Free-standing boards shall be of the free-standing pedestal type with or without doors as
specified and shall be so designed as to enable the boards to be extended without undue
difficulty.
Boards shall comply with BS 5486 : 1977 (Factory Built Assemblies of Low Voltage
Switchgear).
The boards shall be constructed of minimum 1,6mm sheet steel suitably stiffened and
reinforced by a 2mm sheet metal framework and shall be complete with all equipment,
internal wiring and labelling.
Flush and Surface-mounted Boards
Both flush and surface-mounted boards shall consist of an architrave frame which shall
carry the chassis for equipment, panel and door and a bonding tray onto which the
architrave frame shall be secured.
Bonding trays for flush-mounted boards shall be designed to be built into the wall, shall
have expanded metal spot-welded to the rear and sufficient metal straps on the sides and
shall be strong enough to carry the weight of the wall above it.
 B3550 MA - 4-13

The tray shall be galvanised.

Weatherproof Construction
Weatherproof construction shall be effected by double-turn construction of the
architraves with flanged doors and bolt-on panels.
Extendibility
The boards shall be extendible and have an initial spare cubicle capacity of 10% or as
specified on the drawings.

Standby Power Section

The section of a board accommodating circuits on a standby supply shall be
mechanically and electrically separated from the normal section.
All panels associated with the standby section shall be clearly labelled and identified, and
shall be painted as specified on the drawings.
Sufficient removable panels shall be provided to afford access to all equipment for
maintenance, service and replacement purposes.
The back panels where specified shall be of similar construction to the front panels.
Clearances
Sufficient space shall be left inside panels for incoming and outgoing cable connections
and for interconnections and control wiring, taking into account the sizes and quantities of
cables and wires involved.
Equipment on boards may be installed butting. Undue cramping of equipment and wiring
shall, however, not be permitted and the following minimum clearances must be
maintained:
Clearance of not less than 75mm between sides, top and bottom of architrave and any
equipment mounted on the chassis.
Clearance of not less than 75mm between rows of equipment (measured between
terminals).
Doors
Doors shall be provided as required and prescribed. Where doors of sheet steel finished
in the colour specified are required, they shall be manufactured of the same gauge
material as the remainder of the panels.
Doors shall be suitably braced to ensure stiffness and shall have smooth, flat finish.
Door hinges shall be heavy-duty and shall be constructed to permit easy removal of
doors. Piano hinges are not acceptable.
Where hinges are used they shall preferably be concealed. If a surface mounted hinge is
used it shall be chromium plated. Provision shall be made for adjustment of hinges to
facilitate lining up of distorted doors.
Locks shall be Yale type and shall have master key facilities for the entire installation and
separate key facilities for each board. Two individual keys shall be provided with each
board and four master keys shall be provided for the entire installation.
Doors shall be fitted with approved handles and spring-loaded catches without locks
where specified.
Doors shall be fitted with approved handles and square key locks where specified.
Removable panels
 B3550 MA - 4-14

Panels of sheet steel, finished in the colour specified, shall be suitably finished, with
machine-punched slots to allow for flush mounting of equipment.
Dust and Vermin Proofing
All boards shall be completely vermin proofed.
No holes other than those required for cable or conduit entry shall be allowed. Should
extra holes be required for temporary installations, these holes shall be suitably blocked
off on the removal of these temporary installations.
Where doors or removable covers are situated and are required to be dustproofed, they
shall be dustproofed by means of a minimum 10mm thick non-perishable gasket,
resistant to deterioration from heat, chemicals and moisture and capable of being
compressed to half its original thickness.
Where doors are flush fitting, gaskets shall be glued to the fixed flange.
In the case of projecting doors, gaskets shall be glued to the door and not the associated
framework.
Similarly suitable gaskets shall be used wherever push-buttons, indicator lights, isolator
handles, etc. pass through a door or panel.
Switchgear shall be verminproof both in the service and isolated positions.
Ventilation
Boards fitted with heat generating equipment shall be arranged to prevent heat building
up to a temperature which could damage any of the equipment or cabling on the board.
Painting and Protection
The interior of all board and panel cases shall be finished in any one of the following
finishes as specified or as approved.
Labelling
All statutory safety warning notices shall be in English.
All boards shall be labelled as shown on the drawings and approved.
Black letters on white background shall be used for all normal labels and red letters on
white or yellow background for danger notices.
The main isolating switch or switches shall be clearly labelled in accordance with the
regulations.
Size and origin of supply cables and busbars shall be clearly labelled on all boards.
All grouped single, double and three pole circuit breakers on distribution boards shall be
properly labelled, indicating number of circuit controlled.
All equipment situated inside the board, e.g. contactors, relays, fuses, timers and time
switches shall be clearly marked, indicating function, circuit controlled and fuse rating.
The board designation label shall be fitted at the top centre of the board. Individual labels
are to be fitted to each compartment door and corresponding fixed portion of rear panel
(if accessible).
All circuit labels shall be the same size for boards or similar equipment supplied under
this Contract.
Labels shall be white/black/white composition engraved traffolite secured by self-tapping
screws or channelling.
Letter size: Main label - 20 mm, other labels - 6 mm.
 B3550 MA - 4-15

Labels on power cables shall be attached with approved type plastic adjustable clips.
The labels for power cables shall be provided with holes for the clips to pass through for
fastening. Each power cable label shall be fastened with at least two clips.
A legend card, covered by removable 2mm thick transparent acrylic plastic ("PERSPEX")
or equivalent panel, shall be installed on the inside of the door of the boards or cubicles
and circuits shall be designated on this card.
Accessories
Any special door keys (in duplicate), special tools, slinging eye bolts and foundation bolts,
shall be supplied with each board.
Installation and Erection
The boards shall be properly fixed to the floors or supporting steelwork.
The Sub-Contractor shall note sizes and positions of cable trenches and vertical shafts
and shall include in his tender all supporting steelwork to straddle trenches and vertical
shafts to support boards securely.
Steelwork supporting the switchgear shall be installed and positioned as indicated on the
relevant drawings or as approved. The steelwork shall be painted as specified before the
gear is installed. No gear shall be installed until the steelwork has been formally
inspected and approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
The prices for the erection of distribution boards shall include the making off and
terminating of all cables and wires unless these are separately indicated for pricing.
The boards shall be properly earthed to the substation and/or building earthing system.
When aluminium core cables are used, suitable tinned copper or aluminium lugs with
Densal paste shall be used for the terminations.
The Sub-Contractor will be required to balance the load as equally as possible across
multiphase supplies. Balancing of loads across the three phases must be finally
approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer after commissioning.
The costs for the supply and delivery of the erection tools, materials, equipment and
consumables shall form part of the price for the erection of the boards.
All board finishes shall be made good to the satisfaction of the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer before final handover.

15.6 ELECTRICAL MOTOR CONTROL AND SWITCHGEAR PANEL

A motor control and switchgear board shall be supplied and installed in each plantroom at
the position indicated.
Each board shall be fitted with the following:-
A Main circuit breaker.
A set of copper busbars of adequate size, if the peak current on the board exceeds 50
amperes per phase.
Individual motors shall be supplied through a circuit breaker and suitable D.O.L.,
automatic Star-Delta, or slip ring starter.
All other equipment shall be supplied through a circuit breaker.
In the case where the rupturing capacity of a circuit breaker is lower than the rupturing
capacity of the electric feed system at the specific point, the circuit breaker shall be
protected by H.R.C. fuses of adequate size.
All starters shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts, which shall be brought to an easily
 B3550 MA - 4-16

accessible terminal block for the purpose of remote control (if specified). An ammeter
with suitable scale shall be fitted to each motor above 7,5 kW output on at least one
phase, and shall be installed in the panel next to the relevant switchgear.
Switchgear panels and boards shall be factory pre-wired so that the only "on site"
connections to be made will be the main connection, the supply to each motor, and the
control system connections to the terminal block.
All switchgear and distribution boards shall be of the metal clad surface type, with a
framework, which is electrically continuous and properly bonded to earth.
The boards shall be equipped with hinged steel doors adequately braced each with a
flush lock and two keys.
All boards shall be treated with two layers of rust inhibiting paint.
Switches, push-buttons, and indication lamps and gauges shall be so installed that they
remain fastened to the doors when doors are opened.
All boards, which are to be mounted outdoors, shall be weather proof and guaranteed by
the manufacturers for such outdoor operation.
The layout of each board as well as the wiring diagrams and details of the switchgear
provided shall be approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer before any
manufacture is commenced.
All wiring in distribution boards shall be labelled to ease the later tracing of circuits, these
shall correspond to drawing labelling.
Wiring of panels and boards

15.7 GENERAL
All internal wiring to the boards shall be carried out in PVC insulated to SANS 1507
having a minimum of 7 strands per conductor, 660/1000 volt graded and colour coded to
BS 158.
All terminals used shall be in accordance with the relevant clause of this specification.
All wiring shall be neatly grouped and laced. Wiring shall not be run at random but shall
follow board construction features as far as is possible.
Only wires of the same phase shall be grouped or bunched together.
No excessive bunching of wiring, which will impair the current carrying capacity will be
accepted.
All wiring is to be kept free and away from any exposed terminals or other uninsulated
current carrying parts.
No joints will be allowed in internal wiring, and all connections to busbars or earth bars
shall be made with tinned copper cable lugs soldered or crimped to the ends of the
conductors and bolted to busbars by means of cadmium-plated high tensile steel bolts
and nuts provided with spring washers.
Connections to terminals shall suit the connectors used, but in any case terminal clamp
screws shall not bear directly on the conductor.
Crimp lugs or ferrules shall be used on all conductors exceeding 10mm 2.
Wiring of any one cubicle shall not run through other cubicles unless the wiring is run in
conduit or ducting.
Wires shall be clearly marked at all termination points in accordance with the numbering
of the wiring diagram, by means of numbered ferrules, or other approved method.
 B3550 MA - 4-17

When the board main switch is switched off, no live incoming or other wiring shall be
accessible. The incoming terminals must be screened. Where connections are taken
from the incoming side of the main switch, they shall be covered by a screen marked
"isolate Feeder before Removing Screen". If any circuits are energised from other
sources, clear warning notices to that effect shall be fined and such terminals shall be
clearly marked.
Control circuit wiring shall be run in PVC trunking where feasible and elsewhere in a
strapped harness with sufficient slack at panel doors. PVC trunking with slotted sides
shall be used.
Where control circuits are interlocked for sequence control the interlocking circuits shall
be made through auxiliary contacts on the circuit isolator to prevent live feed back in
panels that are isolated.

15.8 BUSBARS
Busbars shall be installed in all boards and may be installed either horizontally or
vertically and in main boards shall be run in a separate compartment, isolated from the
rest of the board.
All terminations onto busbars and interconnections shall be bolted with cadmium-plated
high tensile bolts, washers, spring washers and nuts.
Spacing of busbars shall be calculated in accordance with SANS 1195, but shall not be
less than 50mm.
Busbars shall be mounted on substantial porcelain or other approved insulators. Bare
conductors must be so spaced that with all clamps, lugs and lead-offs in position, the
spacing between any conductor and earth shall not be less than 40mm.
Connections to the busbars must be effected by means of the correct clamps or lugs with
soldered connections or with connections crimped with the correct equipment.
Busbars shall each be identified by means of 100mm long painted (or other approved)
phase colouring bands spaced not more than 300mm apart.
The following colours shall be used:

Number Phase Colour Neutral Earth Special

of Colour Colour Purpose
Phases Colour
1 Red Black Green/Yellow Orange
2 Red and White Black Green/Yellow Orange
3 Red, White and Black Green/Yellow Orange
Blue

Where busbars are mounted horizontally the longer dimension shall be in the vertical
plane. The busbars shall be designed to withstand the mechanical and thermal stresses
of any possible short-circuit that could occur at that point in the system.
Rating of busbars shall not exceed 1.55m A/mm2 for copper and 1,0A/mm2 for aluminium.
A solid copper earth bar with sufficient ways for all the earth conductors and 50% spare
space shall be provided in an easily accessible position near the cable gland tray.
Where small leads are connected directly onto the busbars. such as voltmeters, fuses,
 B3550 MA - 4-18

etc, they shall be provided with a 20 ampere fuse mounted at the busbar and a 2 ampere
fuse at the item of equipment.
Busbar chambers and droppers shall be segregated from each other. Also busbars shall
be completely screened from any other compartment by removable bolted covers.
Furthermore, the busbar supports shall divide the busbar chamber into discrete sections.
All busbar contact surfaces shall be tinned.
All bracing and other insulating material shall be non-hydroscopic.
Droppers from the busbars to the terminals of fuses or isolators must be of adequate
section for the maximum rating of the isolator irrespective of the circuit rating. Colour
coding will be as for main busbars. All droppers shall be fully insulated.

15.9 LAMP TEST CIRCUITS

A lamp test circuit shall be provided for each board if specified.

15.10 ALARM CIRCUITS

Wiring to the numbered terminal strip shall be provided if indicated on the drawings or if
specified for remote alarm and indication functions.

15.11 EARTHING
All boards shall be fitted with earth bars.
Free-standing boards shall be fitted with a continuous full length earth busbar.
All sections of the board and all equipment on it shall be earthed.
Hinged doors having electrical equipment mounted on them shall be earthed to the board
by means of a flexible earth strap.

15.12 TERMINALS
Terminal assemblies shall consist of a metal mounting rail onto which terminal modules
are fixed.
For cables up to and including 10mm 2, clamp type terminals may be provided, but the
type where the clamp screws bear directly on the conductor will not be accepted.
For conductors exceeding 10mm 2, terminal modules suitable for crimping lugs or ferrules
shall be used.
Terminal modules shall have rigid insulating barriers between poles to provide an
adequate creepage path for use at 440V between adjacent poles for 380V application.
The terminals of the modules shall be large enough to accommodate the cable sizes
specified.
All terminals shall be clearly marked in accordance with the working drawings and wiring
diagrams and as approved.
Additional spare terminals shall also be provided as specified or indicated on the
drawings for the purpose of looping additional remote circuits, with a minimum of 20%.

15.13 LIGHTING ARRESTERS

Lighting arresters shall bear the SANS mark and shall be earthed directly onto the main
earth bar with a copper strapping.
 B3550 MA - 4-19

15.14 SITE WIRING

15.15 GENERAL
The wiring of the plant shall be carried out by the Domestic an Fire Water Contractor in
surface work in the plantrooms and concealed work in all finished spaces. Wiring shall
be done by means of solid drawn or lap-welded screwed tubing and PVC insulated
copper conductors, or in multicore PVC/SWA/PVC cable. The main runs of conduit or
cable shall preferably be carried out at high level (if possible in false ceiling spaces).
Distribution shall be vertically down to the required points. All electric conduit and conduit
fittings must be thoroughly inspected for defects before installation, and all sharp edges
and burrs removed. Bushes and locknuts are to be used where conduit enters switch
boxes.
The proposed location of tubing and cables shall be approved by the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer before commencement of work.
Conduit to be installed under plaster finish shall be installed in good time so as not to
delay the Building Contractor or cause finished plaster to be chased.
All electrical cables shall be fastened to cable racks or shall be laid in cable ducts.
Cables carried in racks shall as far as possible be laid parallel and shall be
neatlyinstalled. Descents shall be firmly secured with provision for the swinging of
flexible tubing or cables where attached to moving machines and electrical motors.
Sizes of conduit, conductors and cables shall be at least equal to those laid down in the
relevant tables of the Code of Practice.
Flexible conduit and cables shall be provided wherever it is necessary to avoid
transmission of vibration. No joints in cables or wires will be permitted in a conduit. The
ends of cables shall be properly made off. Terminal lugs shall be used wherever special
clamp-washers or sleeve terminals are not provided on equipment. Conductor strands
may not be cut away or reduced in size, and care must be taken to select switchgear,
etc., with terminals of adequate size for looping, etc., where necessary.
No open wiring will be permitted at any point in the system, with the exception of the
copper bus-bars in the switchgear boards. These shall be taped up with PVC tape with
the relevant phase colours.

15.16 WIRING IN CONDUIT

No joints shall be allowed and all looping must be done through approved connectors at
fitting points.
The live phase shall be connected at the switching point. All wiring in conduit shall
conform to the requirements of table 4 of SANS 10142-1 as amended. Not more than
one circuit shall be accommodated in one circuit unless special permission is obtained
from the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. Before any wires are drawn into the conduit, a
swab is to be drawn through to clear any water, dirt etc.

15.17 PVA INSULATED CABLES

LT cables with PVC insulation must conform to the requirements of SANS 1507 as
amended, and must be laid according to the requirements of paragraph 1.16 of this
Section B of this specification.

15.18 SOLID CONDUIT

All conduit shall be of heavy gauge steel, screwed and conform to SANS 1065-2 as
amended. No conduit shall be less than 20 mm in diameter.
All joints shall be screwed and all outlets fitted with rustproof iron boxes. Conduit must be
 B3550 MA - 4-20

either screwed and lock-nutted on both sides and bushed on the inside of the box or
board to which it is attached.
The whole conduit system shall be electrically and mechanically continuous over all joints
by means of screwed couplings, well bonded and efficiently earthed by means of earthing
terminals and earth continuity conductors. The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor must
keep in touch with the builder and install all conduit so as not to delay his work and to
ensure the closest co-operation. Every effort must be made to avoid running conduit in
"U"-form, but where this is unavoidable, provision should be made, if possible, to drain
the conduit.
All chasing of brickwork, etc., for conduit shall be carried out under this contract.

15.19 FUSES
Where circuits are scheduled to be fed through fuses, these shall be mounted directly on
the panel. All rewireable fuses shall be of the porcelain bridge type, of approved
manufacture, connected through bushed insulated holes in the panel. An I.C. fuseboard
unit may be used instead of separate fuses. Connections shall be made through the
back of the panel so that no surface wiring results. Tinned copper fuse wire shall be
fitted to suit the loading indicated in the schedules, where rewireable fuses are used, and
cartridge fuses shall be fitted with the appropriate cartridges.

15.20 EARTHING
The whole installation shall be efficiently earthed to the satisfaction of the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer, the Inspector of Factories, the Supply Authority, and strictly in
accordance with the Code of Practice for the Wiring of premises. Any points proposed as
earthing points by the Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall first be approved by the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer before connection.

15.21 BOXES
Where boxes are used in concrete or masonry, approved removable cover plates shall
be supplied. For 100 mm x 100 mm boxes, standard blank metal switch-type cover
plates may used, but for larger boxes, removable cover plates of metal or other approved
material must be supplied with bevelled edges and must be neatly painted.
Cover plates shall be large enough to overlap and cover any gaps between the draw box
and the masonry or concrete, and must be finished off to match the surroundings so as
not to mar the architectural appearance of the building.

15.22 CABLE TRAYS AND LADDERS

The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall supply and install all cable trays or ladders
as specified or as required by the cable routes including the necessary supports, clamps,
hangers, fixing materials, bends, angles, junctions, reducers, T-pieces, etc.
Metal cable trays shall be manufactured from perforated rolled steel. Only the following
metal cable tray types may be used:
Less than 250mm wide 1,6mm minimum thickness with 12mm minimum return.
250mm and Wider equivalent to trays supplied by “PERFORATION AND CONDIDURE”,
or other approved, manufactured from 2mm thick steel with folded over returns and a
minimum up stand of 50mm.
250mm and Wider 2,4mm minimum thickness with 76mm minimum return as alternative
to (b) above.
The return of trays shall not be perforated and the top of the return shall be smooth. The
same cable tray type shall be used in long parallel tray runs.
 B3550 MA - 4-21

Metal cable ladders shall consist of a 76mm high side rail of 2mm minimum thickness.
Cross pieces consisting of P3300 “SANKEYSTRUT”, or other approved, channel
sections shall be spaced at maximum intervals of 250mm. Where cables of 10mm 2 or
cross pieces shall be 125mm. Cables shall be clamped in position by means of purpose
made cable clamps that fit into the cross pieces. Cross pieces consisting of slotted metal
rails which accommodate plastic or metal cable binding bands, may be used in vertical
cable runs against walls, etc. where the prior approval of the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer has been obtained. These cross pieces are not acceptable in horizontal cable
runs.
Rigid unplasticised PVC trays are acceptable. Only the following tray types may be used:
Less than 50mm 3,0mm minimum wide and 40mm minimum return.
250mm and wider 4,0mm minimum thickness and 60mm minimum return.
Metal cable trays and ladders shall be finished as follows:
In coastal areas (for all applications): Hot-dipped galvanised to SANS 121 or epoxy
powder coating.
False ceiling voids: Electro-galvanised or epoxy powder coating.
Vertical building ducts : Hot-dipped galvanised to SANS 121 .
Plant Rooms, Substations, service tunnels or basements : Electro-galvanised or epoxy
powder coating.
Damp areas, exposed to weather : Hot-dipped galvanised to SANS 121 or epoxy powder
coating.
Undercover industrial applications : Hot-dipped galvanised to SANS 121 or epoxy powder
coating.
The abovementioned finishes shall apply unless specified to the contrary. Hot-dipped
galvanised or electro-galvanised trays and ladders shall be cold galvanised at all joints,
sections that have been cut and at places where the galvanising has been damaged.
Powder coated trays and ladders shall likewise be touched up at joints, cuts and
damaged portions using spray canisters recommended by the manufacturer of the trays
and ladders.
Trays shall be supported at the following maximum intervals:
1,6mm thick metal trays with 12mm return 1,22m maximum spacing
Metal trays with folded over return and
1,22m spacing
50mm up stand
2,4mm thick metal trays and 75mm return 1,5m spacing
Metal cable ladders 1,5m spacing
3,0mm thick PVC trays with 40mm return 1,0m max. spacing
4,0mm thick PVC trays with 60mm return 1,5m max. spacing

In addition, trays and ladders shall be supported at each bend, off-set and T-junction.
Joints shall be smooth without projections or rough edges that may damage the cables.
The Specialist Controls Contractor will be required to cover joints with rubber cement or
other hardening rubberised or plastic compounds if in the opinion of the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer, joints may damage cables. Joints shall as far as possible be
arranged to fall on supports. Where joints do not coincide with supports, joints shall in
the case of trays with single returns be made by means of wrap-around splices of the
same thickness as the tray ends shall butt tightly at the centre of the splice and the splice
shall be bolted to each cable tray by means of at least 8 round head bolts, nuts and
 B3550 MA - 4-22

washers. Splices shall have the same finish as the rest of the tray. Where joints which
do not coincide with supports occur in trays with folded over returns, tight fitting metal
guide pieces, at least 450mm long, shall be inserted in the folded returns to provide the
necessary support to the two cable tray ends. Splices as described above shall be
provided if trays sag.
Trays shall be bolted to supports by at least two round head bolts per support. Bolts shall
be securely tightened to avoid cables being damaged during installation.
The supports for cable trays and ladders shall in all cases be securely fixed to the
structure by means of heavy duty, expansion type anchor bolts. It is the responsibility of
the Specialist Controls Contractor to ensure that adequate fixing is provided since cable
trays and ladders that work loose shall be rectified at his expense.
Horizontal and vertical bends, T-junctions and cross connections, shall be supplied by the
Specialist Controls Contractor. The dimensions of these connections shall correspond to
the dimensions of the linear sections of which they are connected.
The radius of all bends shall be 1000mm minimum. The inside dimensions of all
horizontal angles or connections shall be large enough to ensure that the allowable
bending radius of the cables is not exceeded. Sharp angles shall have 45° cornices.
Cables shall be installed adjacent and parallel to teach other on the trays with spacings
as determined by the current ratings. Horizontal trays and ladders shall in general be
installed 450mm below slabs, ceilings, etc. to facilitate access during installation.
All metal trays and ladders shall be bonded to the earth bar of the switchboard to which
the cables are connected. Additional bare copper stranded conductors or copper tape
shall be bolted to the tray or ladder where the electrical continuity cannot be guaranteed.

16 SPEED DRIVES FOR PUMP AND FAN MOTORS

16.1 GENERAL
The controller shall be of the type suitable for controlling the speed of 3 phase, 380V-
525V induction motors.
The controller shall be capable of operating continuously at nominated full load rating
with expected variations of +/- 10% in the supply voltage and +/- 2% in the supply
frequency.
The controller shall be capable of operating continuous operation at full load in an
ambient temperature of 40ºC. Care shall be taken during installation to ensure that the
controller is protected from direct sunlight and weather.
Where the controllers are separately wall mounted the enclosure protection rating shall
comply to the following guidelines:
In clean areas where no dust and moisture are present the rating shall be minimum IP20.

16.2 IN AREAS WHERE MOISTURE OR HARSH ENVIRONMENTAL CONDITIONS ARE

PRESENT THE CONTROLLER SHALL BE PROTECTED TO IP54 RATING.
Controllers shall have metal enclosures to prevent the radiated radio frequency
interference noise (RFI) from affecting the operation of other equipment. The metal
enclosures must be earthed with a low impedance connection to the main earthing
system.
The controller shall be manufactured to quality assurance and manufacturing standards
according to ISO 9001.

16.3 PERFORMANCE
 B3550 MA - 4-23

The controllers shall be specifically designed for constant torque operation; but shall also
incorporate a choice of output waveforms designed to control quadratic loads to give the
controller flexibility over a wide application area. The tenderer shall state the kVA output
power of the controller in both constant and quadratic torque loads.
In constant torque mode the controller shall be capable of supplying starting torques of
up to 150%-160% of the motors rated torque.
In quadratic torque mode the output voltage from the controller shall be formed in
accordance with the quadratic load torque output of the centrifugal fan or pump. A
choice of programmable starting torques up to 110% shall be provided to accelerate the
motor to its pre-set speed.
The controller shall be of the type utilizing advanced digital PWM technology. Preference
shall be given to systems where the output waveform is sinusoidal at all frequencies,
such that the motor power is fully utilized at the motors rated speed, and no motor de-
rating is necessary.
Suppliers that can show a test of the motors temperature rise on controller operation,
where the motor is operated at full load and speed, shall be seen to be suitable proof.
The test shall be based on a class B temperature rise on class F winding insulation.
If derating is applicable the tenderer shall supply curves showing the necessary derating
of the motor, using class B temperature rise, should be given at rated speed and load to
ensure that no overheating occurs.
The controller shall automatically correct the output voltage during main’s variations of +/-
10% to prevent loss of torque and speed variations occurring during motor operation.
To prevent over-magnetization of the motor at low speeds and light loads the controller
shall incorporate automatic flux control of the motor. A single fixed voltage boost that
cuts out a predetermined frequency will not be considered as automatic control of the
flux.
The controller shall automatically adjust the output frequency and voltage to maintain a
stable motor speed of +/- 0.5% of the motor’s rated speed. The accuracy shall be
maintained over a speed and loading range of 10% to 100% without the use of a closed
feedback loop.
Where the controller is specified to control overhauling loads it shall be fitted with a
dynamic brake option. A separate external braking resistor shall be supplied according to
the duty cycle required.
For hoisting loads where there is danger that load can fall under dynamic braking control
due to failure of the controller, whatever the reason, the controller shall incorporate the
necessary inbuilt safety functions and relay output to ensure an overriding holding
mechanical brake is released. On starting the holding brake must only be released by
the relay in the controller when the motor is fully magnetized.
The controller shall incorporate automatic tuning and setting of the main motor
parameters. The tuning shall be based on measurements of the motors inductance and
resistance. The tuning must be done at standstill in order not to affect the application
before the controller is tuned.
The automatic tuning shall stop and register an alarm condition if the automatic tuning
detects an out of balance in the motor windings, or cannot set the correct parameters for
the motor.

16.4 RADIO FREQUENCY INTERFERENCE

Tenderers are reminded that the plant contains equipment sensitive to RFI interference
(such as PLC's or Computers). Full compliance to the standards is requested. The
 B3550 MA - 4-24

controller should be well protected and immune to electrical disturbance in order to

ensure high reliability
The controllers shall comply with the EMC immunity standards:
 EN 61000-4-2 (IEC 1000-4-2): Electrostatic discharges (ESD)
Simulation of electrostatic discharge from human beings.
 EN 61000-4-3 (IEC 1000-4-3): Incoming electromagnetic field radiation,
amplitude modulation.
Simulation of the effects of radar and radio communication equipment as well as
mobile communications equipment.
 EN 61000-4-4 (IEC 1000-4-4) Burst transients.
Simulation of transients brought about by switching with a contactor, relays or
similar devices.
 EN 61000-4-5 (IEC 1000-4-5) Surge transients.
Simulation of transients brought about e.g. by lightning that strikes near
installations.
 ENV 50140: Incoming electromagnetic field, pulse modulated.
Simulation of the impact from GSM telephones.
 ENV 50141: Cable-borne HF.
Simulation of the effect of radio transmission equipment connected to supply
cables.
 VDE 0160 class W2 test pulse: Mains transients.
Simulation of high-energy transients brought about by main fuse breakage,
switching of power factor correction capacitors, etc.
The controllers shall comply with the EMC emission standards:
 EN 55011 Class A1: Cable born from (150Khz-30Mhz). Radiated (30Mhz-1Ghz.)
The controller must comply to EN 55011 Class A with 150 m of
screened/armoured cable.
The controllers shall be fitted with metal enclosures (to form a Faraday Cage) to limit the
radiated RFI noise from the controller. The enclosures shall be earthed to the main earth
grid with a low impedance connection .

16.5 SEPARATE RFI FILTERS

Where RFI filters are supplied from a separate supply source, documentation showing
the test results of the RFI and controller combination and its compliance to EN55011
shall be supplied as evidence of conformity including the maximum length of cable.
The separate RFI filters shall be mounted in metal enclosures to the same protection
rating as the controller, and located as close to the mains connection terminals of the
controller as possible.
Ferrite cores mounted on the input cables will not be considered as RFI compliance .

16.6 HARMONICS AND POWER FACTOR

Tenderers are reminded that the plant contains a high portion of harmonic producing
loads. The information requested in this section of the specification is important for the
evaluation of the total plants harmonic distortion limits.
 B3550 MA - 4-25

Mains Harmonic currents generated by the controller must be limited by external mains
reactors or reactors in the d.c. bus of the controller. Preference shall be given to
controllers that include reactors in the d.c. bus circuit.
Controllers that do not include a reactor mounted in the d.c. bus shall be supplied with
external three phase reactors connected on the mains side of the controller. The
reactors shall be fitted to each phase and shall have a minimum impedance of 5%. The
reactors shall be mounted in steel enclosures to a rating equivalent to the controller.
When external three phase reactors are supplied Tenderers shall include the amount of
voltage drop that will occur over the reactors at full load, and advise how the controller
will respond to the lower voltage.
When both external input reactors for harmonic reduction and output reactors are fitted
the tenderer shall sate the amount of expected derating which will occur on the motor
when running at rated speed and load.
Tenderers shall include a spectrum of harmonic generating currents in the 1st-25th
harmonic range, and shall state both the cos 1 and the power factor of the controller at
100% load.
Calculation of the power factor must be based on the ratio of the fundamental current,
and its displacement from the voltage, to the total RMS current which includes all
harmonic currents up to and including the 25 th.
Cos 1 will not be accepted as power factor as it only applies to power factor in loads
which draw a sinusoidal current.
In order to eliminate any system resonance occurring within the motor’s operating
frequency range, the controller shall be provided with several bypass frequency
adjustments. The bandwidth shall be adjusted as a percentage of the recorded by-pass
frequencies. If high efficiency motors is used the controller must have a built in anti
resonance algorithm in order not to cause resonance in the system.
The controller shall be fitted with output motor reactance coils on drives exceeding 55 kW
c/t at 380V and 75kW v/t at 525V. The coils shall limit the rise time and prevent peak
voltages from occurring. The controller should follow the IEC 34 recommendation for rise
time and peak voltage. Preference shall be given to controllers that integrate the motor
reactance coils internally into the design of the unit or have a solution to reduced peak
voltage.
The controller shall be suitable for control of high inertia loads and be able to catch a
rotating motor under any operating condition without tripping. Whether through large
supply interruptions, or by the action of switching on and off the motor isolating switch
when the motor is running.
The function shall also ensure that a motor on a high inertia load already prerotating,
even in the reverse direction, can be switched onto, braked to zero speed by d.c. injection
braking incorporated in the controller, and then accelerated to the preset speed in the
correct direction.
The controller shall incorporate a PID regulator to enable closed loop control of the
process. The regulator shall operate in conjunction with the ramp adjustments to allow
smooth acceleration into regulation. Remote monitoring of the feed back signal via a 0/4
- 20mA signal from the controller is required.
To prevent condensation build up in the stator the controller shall incorporate a pre-heat
function. When the motor is stopped it shall receive a low d.c. voltage from the controller.
Controllers shall be capable of allowing cable runs of up to 300 metres cables. If the
controller cannot allow this cable length, the tenderer shall state the maximum cable
length allowed, and the motor coil reactance value intended to be used to increase the
 B3550 MA - 4-26

cable length. The tenderer shall state clearly the voltage drop and additional motor
derating that will occur when motor reactors are fitted.
The controller shall be suitably protected to allow for switching to take place on the output
via, a contactor or isolating switch without damage to the inverter transistors.

16.7 CONTROL AND MONITORING

All analogue and digital control inputs and outputs shall be galvanically isolated from
each other and from the mains supply and shall be capable of withstanding a test voltage
of 2.5 kV dc for 1 sec. For safety reasons, only controllers that have galvanic isolation as
an integral part of the controller will be accepted.
The controller shall respond to speed commands from 0-10 V dc, 2-10 V dc 1-5 V dc and
0/4-20 mA control signals, and their respective inverted signals.
For maximum noise immunity on the digital inputs the sink current shall be minimum 10
mA and 24 V for each input. The internal power supply for the supply to the digital inputs
shall have a minimum capacity of 200mA at 24V.
The controller shall have an alpha-numeric display and shall provide comprehensive
information on the controller and the motor’s condition. The following is considered as
minimum requirements:
 Reference % of control signal
 Frequency Hz
 Display of feedback signal
 Current A
 Torque %
 Power kW
 Energy kWh
 Output voltage V
 d.c. voltage V
 Motor thermal reserve %
 Inverter thermal reserve %
The tenderer shall state clearly which displays are available, in particular whether the
controller can display energy kWh and torque, and what alternative methods can be used
if the controller cannot display these parameters.
Two programmable analogue outputs shall be provided for monitoring. A choice of 0-20
mA and 4-20 mA shall be provided. The programmable options shall include as a
minimum Hz, Amps, and Torque.
Two programmable relays shall be provided for remote monitoring of the controller. The
programmable options shall include as a minimum ready, run, and alarm. The contacts
shall have a minimum rating of 250 V, 2A ac.
The run relay function shall initiate a run signal only when the frequency output from the
controller is greater than 0.5 Hz.
The controller shall incorporate the following totalisers:
 Hour run meter
 Kilowatt Hours
The controller shall display all faults in clear English text. The following is considered as
minimum requirements:
 Inverter fault
 Over voltage/Under voltage
 Over current
 Ground Fault
 B3550 MA - 4-27

 Over Temperature
 Overload
 Motor Trip
The tenderer shall state whether the controller can provide clear English text or if the
faults are distinguishable only through a code system.
The controller shall preferably be fitted with a RS485 serial port, and be supplied with
suitable software utilizing a windows environment to display all monitoring, fault, alarm
and status signals. The software shall allow parameter changes to be made to the
controllers settings by uploading the data from the controller, changing the parameters,
and then downloading the data to the controller again. Storage of each controllers
operating and set-up parameters shall be able to be stored on diskette.
 B3550 MA - 4-28

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 4.2 DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION - DOMESTIC AND FIRE

WATER INSTALLATION

1 GENERAL
This section of the specification forms part of, and is to be read in conjunction with all
other parts of this specification and the relevant drawings: i.e. Part 1, 2 and 4 of Part C as
well as Part A.
Where conditions in this tender are at variance with those in proceeding sections
then those below shall be taken as relevant and binding.
The tenderer is to note that this contract forms part of the main building contract.
The JBCC Series 2000 Principal Building Agreement (July 2007, Edition 5) shall be
applicable to this contract, a copy of which is available on the JBCC website,
(www.jbcc.co.za). Refer to the Master Procurement Document PART A.

2 DRAWINGS
A list drawings issued with this document is available in Part 4.4 of this document.

3 SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work covers the supply, delivery, installation, commissioning, testing,
handing over and one year maintenance of the following plants and equipment:
c. Domestic water distribution system, consisting of:
 Pipework and connection to main connection.
 Pipework and connection to new distribution network.
 Isolating and water balancing valves and fittings.
 Installation of point of use water heaters
 Associated electrical work.
d. A water based under floor heating system in the laboratories, consisting of:
 Heat pump and ancillary equipment.
 Circulating pump.
 Insulated piping system, with cladding where applicable.
 Pex-a piping installed in the screed of the flooring.
 Expansion tank.
 Isolating and water balancing valves.
 Connection to domestic water distribution networks.
 Associated electrical work.
e. Fire hose reel distribution system consisting of:
 Connection to cold water mains
 Supply and installation of fire hose reels.
 Supply and installation of fire hydrants.
 B3550 MA - 4-29

 Installation of arious hand held fire extinguishers

3.1 COMMISSIONING AND HANDING OVER
The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor is to liaise with the plumber on site to ensure that
all connection points to the reticulation network that are required is installed.

4 GENERAL ITEMS RELATING TO PIPEWORK

The drawings are generally diagrammatic and indicative of work to be done. The runs
and arrangements of piping shall be as indicated, subject to modifications as required to
suit conditions at the building, to avoid interference with work of other services and for
proper convenient and accessible location of all parts of the piping system.
Piping shall be installed as straight and direct as possible, neatly spaced and in general
forming right angles with, or parallel to walls or other piping.
Piping shall be installed so that there is a clearance of at least 25 mm between the
finished coverings of piping and adjoining structures. Piping shall be hung at or in the
ceilings from the construction above and as close as possible to the soffit of slabs,
beams etc. maintaining maximum head room at all times.
All piping shall be run so to avoid passing through ductwork, recessed light fixtures or
interference with electric light outlets.
Sleeves shall be provided by the Domestic an Fire Water Contractor where piping passes
through partitions, slabs, etc. Sleeves shall be flush with each side of the surface
penetrated. Insulation shall be continuous through sleeves.
All piping shall be reamed after cutting. Connections with valves necessary for complete
drainage of the piping system shall be provided at all low in the piping systems.
During construction all open ends of pipes shall be temporarily closed with sheet metal
caps to prevent debris from entering the system.
To facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement, unions (screwed or flanged as required)
shall be furnished for all apparatus requiring disconnection for repairs. Shut off valves
shall be installed where indicated and at the inlet and outlet of individual items of
equipment to permit removal, without interfering with the rest of the system.
Piping shall be arranged for maximum accessibility for maintenance and repair and
valves shall be located for easy access and operation.

5 DOMESTIC COLD WATER INSTALLATION

The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall connect to a point inside of the plantroom
as shown on the drawings.
The system will terminate in isolating valves as indicated on the drawings. The supply
and connection of these valves forms part of this contract.

5.1 PIPEWORK
The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall install all pipework including, brackets,
fittings and supports as indicated on the tender drawings. All piping shall be Copper as
per SANS 460-1985 – Class 2, connected with capillary joints. As far as is possible, all
pipes shall be installed above the suspended ceilings except for pipework to be chased
into walls. The pipework shall conform to the Standard Technical Specification.

5.2 UNIONS
To facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement, unions (screwed or flanged as
 B3550 MA - 4-30

required) shall be furnished for all apparatus requiring disconnection for repairs.
Shut off valves shall be installed where indicated and at the inlet and outlet of individual
items of equipment to permit removal, without interfering with the rest of the system.

5.3 FITTINGS
All fittings shall be installed as per the Standard Technical Specification (clause 12, Part
4.1).

5.4 SLEEVES
All piping through walls shall be sleeved as specified in the Standard Technical
Specification, (clause 4, Part 4.1).

5.5 WATER PIPE INSULATION

All water piping and pipe fittings must be insulated as specified in the Standard Technical
Specification, (clause 8, Part 4.1).

5.6 CLADDING
Sheet metal cladding shall be applied over all the water pipe insulation in plant rooms
and outside areas as per the Standard Technical Specification, (clause 9, Part 4.1).

5.7 CONNECTION OF FEED AND SUPPLY PIPES TO EXISTING BULK WATER AND
BUILDING DISTRIBUTION NETWORKS
The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall connect diameter 50mm feed and supply
pipes to the bulk water supply in the plant room This includes the copper to galvanised
mild steel connections that are required.

5.8 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

These shall be of the fully adjustable single stem industrial type with a maximum
reduction ratio of 4:1. The body and internal parts shall be made from non-corrosive
materials such as cast brass or stainless steel.
Each valve shall be equipped with a replaceable strainer cartridge.
The maximum expected working pressure is 400 kPa and the valves must reduce the
pressure to a constant 400 kPa.
The valve shall be installed in the make-up water supply pipe as indicated on the
drawings

5.9 POINT-OF-USE WATER HEATERS

5.9.1 BOILING WATER DISPENSER
The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall supply and install boiling water dispenser in
the positions indicated on the drawings. Boiling water dispensers shall be of the Kwikboil
type supplied by Messrs. Kwikot or other equal approved. The unit shall come complete
with electrical cord, 3-pin electrical plug and controls. It shall meet the following
specifications:

Nominal Storage Capacity (Litres) 5

Initial Draw-off (180ml cups) 60
First Hour Delivery (180ml cups) 175
Approximate Time for First Cup (min) 10
 B3550 MA - 4-31

Approximate Time to Heat Full Capacity (min) 37

Heating Element Input (kW) 2.0
Min. Supply Pressure (kPa) 20
Max. Supply Pressure (kPa) 1000

A 230 Volt, electrical plug point shall also be supplied and installed within 1m of each
water by the Electrical Contractor. Connection between this point to the water heater
forms part of this contract.

6 FIRE PROTECTION
The installation shall comply with the SANS 10400 as amended. The extinguishing
equipment will consist of the hose reels, fire hydrants, fire mains and hand held
extinguishers.

6.1 PIPING
All piping shall only be galvanized medium quality and be in accordance with SANS 62
and be galvanized inside and outside according to SANS 763. Screw threads on
galvanized water pipes shall be cut before galvanizing and no welding will be allowed on
galvanized pipe.
All piping 50 mm and smaller shall be screwed with malleable screwed fittings.
Water piping and fittings of a size 65mm or larger shall be welded or roll grooved
"Klambon" piping and fittings. The Klambon fittings shall be in accordance with SANS
815.
Pipe hangers, supports and brackets shall be installed at the following maximum
centres:
Pipe Bore Maximum distance between Supports
Up to 62mm 3m
63mm to 87mm 3.5m
88mm to 150mm 4.0m
151mm to 300mm 4.8m
Above 300mm 6.0m
All piping shall be assembled and fixed in accordance with the manufacturer's
prescriptions and specifications.
The piping shall be supported from concrete slabs and shall be secured with rawl bolts
with the following tensioning strength:
Up to 65mm dia. - 70 kg
Between 80 and 100mm - 140 kg
Between 125 and 150mm - 270 kg

6.2 HOSE REELS

Hose reels shall be installed in the positions as shown on the drawings and shall comply
with SANS 543. The hose reels shall also comply to SANS 0400, sub rule TT34.
The nozzles (7.5mm diameter) will be of the adjustable spray type. All hoses shall be 30m
in length and shall be clearly labeled as such.
 B3550 MA - 4-32

The hose itself will fully comply with SANS 543. It will consist of re-in forced rubber or re-
in forced plastic hose not less than 20mm internal diameter.
A pressure gauge will be fitted on the main supply line in the valve chamber. The tariff
shall allow full compensation for installing, securing and connecting the
equipment

6.3 FIRE HYDRANTS

The hydrant shall be installed in the positions as shown on the drawings. Fire hydrants
will comply with SANS 10400 sub rule TT35 and SANS 1128: Part 1.
The hose reels will have a 16mm internal diameter nozzle (SANS 1128: Part 2).

6.4 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

All fire extinguishers shall be installed in the positions as shown on the drawings shall be
of the DCP type or CO2 as indicated and shall comply with Table 10 of Rule TT37 of
SANS 10400 Specification.
A 4.5kg Wet Chemical type shall also be supplied and installed in the kitchen as shown
on the drawings.
The extinguishers supplied shall comply with SANS 810, SANS 889 and SANS 1151
and the installation shall comply with SANS 10105.
The extinguishers shall be mounted on a maranti wooden back board and must be
chamfered on all four sides and installed at a height of 1500mm above finished floor level
measured from the handle/trigger of the extinguisher, complying with Rule TT37 of
SANS 10400.
It must have a smooth finish and covered with water resistant varnish. The length of the
wall plate might differ according to the size of the extinguisher offered but must be in all
cases be about 80mm longer than the extinguisher.
The unit of measurement shall be number and the tariff shall include full compensation
for the fire extinguisher, the installation including brackets, boards, etc., as well as
identification and location notices.

6.5 FIRE BLANKETS

Fire blankets shall be manufactured of fibre glass membrane with dimensions not
exceeding 1000mm x 1000 mm. The blankets must be installed in a factory made bag
and fitted onto a sturdy brass hook installed 1.5m above floor level in the position
indicated.

6.6 SERVICE LABELS

Service labels, stating that the extinguishers have been serviced by qualified service
men, must be affixed to the apparatus. The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor who
service and supply the extinguishers must be:
a. A member of the "SOUTH AFRICAN FIRE PROTECITON ASSOCIATION
OF SOUTHERN AFRICA".
b. Must be in possession of a Diamond Mark issued by the SANS.
c. Competent Person Requirements: All service men must be registered at the
S.A.O.C.C (FIRE). Further shall no person who is not in possession of a valid
Identity Card as proof of competent and is in the employment of a SANS 1475
mark holding company that is of good standing may conduct work on a fire
extinguisher.
 B3550 MA - 4-33

7 UNDERFLOOR HEATING SYSTEM

7.1 UNDERFLOOR HEATING PIPES

a. The underfloor heating pipes shall consist of 20 x 2mm eval cross-linked polyethylene
(eval PE-X type a) pipes. As this is the most critical part of the contract, the following
points shall be strictly adhered to any deviations pointed out by the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer shall be rectified immediately at the cost of the Domestic an Fire
Water Contractor.
b. Laying of the pipes will run simultaneously with casting of the floor. Therefore, timeous
and good communication is required between the main and sub-contractor with regard to
programming. The sub-contractor shall submit a construction programme, in advance, to
the Consulting Mechanical and Structural Engineers detailing the laying process.
c. During casting of the floor 1,5 times the operating pressure shall be maintained in the
underfloor loop for the duration of the casting process.
d. Pipes shall be laid as single CONTINUOUS loops as indicated on the relevant drawings.
e. Pipes shall be tied, with 150mm cable ties to the reinforcement mesh, as supplied by the
main contractor, every 750mm and 300mm from bends.
f. Pipes shall be pitched at 300mm centres.
g. Minimum bending radius must be maintained at all times to the manufacturers
specification.
h. Pipe entry and exit points, from the cavity walls into the floor structure must be through
90° 25mm PVC sleeves on supply and return. Sleeves must extend at least 300mm
from bend to both sides.
i. If a pipe crosses an expansion joint it must run through a 25mm PVC sleeve of at least
300mm in length.
j. PE-X piping are sensitive to direct sunlight. Piping stored on site must be protected from
exposure to direct sunlight. Also, time between laying of pipe and casting of covering
screed must be kept to an absolute minimum. Therefore, programming must include for
casting in sections as individual loops are laid.
k. Special end plugs must be inserted inside individual loops when being laid to prevent dirt
from accumulating in pipes.
l. Tenderers must submit with their tenders complete and detailed specifications of the PE-
X pipes offered, as supplied by the manufacturers, and must ensure that the pipes
offered includes an oxygen diffusion barrier.
m. All PE-X risers (supply and return) running in cavity walls shall be insulated to suit with
insulation as specified by the suppliers.
n. The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor must obtain a PE-X toolset from the supplier for
working with PE-X piping.
o. Domestic an Fire Water Contractors must obtain accreditation as a recognised installer
from the supplier before commencing with the installation.

7.2 SUPPLY AND RETURN WATER CONNECTION TO PLANT ROOM PIPING

Supply and return water pipe loops shall run as indicated on the relevant drawings either
above the concrete roof slab or externally under the building eaves whichever is
applicable. Supply and return water piping shall be eval PE-X type a in sizes as indicated
on the relevant drawings. All PE-X piping shall be supported according to the suppliers
recommendations. The spacing of support shall also adhere to the suppliers
recommendations. All supply and return water PE-X piping shall be insulated with
 B3550 MA - 4-34

insulation to suit as specified by the supplier of the piping. The contractor shall connect
the PE-X piping to Copper class 2 piping in the Plantroom

7.3 PLANTROOM ASSOCIATED EQUIPMENT

All associated equipment, e.g. shut-off valves, strainers, balancing valves, etc. shall
adhere to the Standard Technical Specification. It is important to note that a set of shut-
off valves, a balancing valve and a strainer is required for each individual underfloor
heating loop and shall be located either above the concrete roof slab or outside the
building at high level under the eaves.
7.3.1 INDUSTRIAL HEAT PUMPS
An industrial heat pumps shall be of the Enerflow ERHP-SU26-MS type as specified in
the Standard Technical Specification, (clause 14, Part 4.1), or other equal approved
direct heating type with intrgral circulation pumpand shall have a nominal heating
capacity of 9,6 kW each.
7.3.2 INDUSTRIAL HOT WATER STORAGE TANK
No. of Units 1
Water Temp 40 °C
Nominal Capacity (Litres) 300 L Vertical
Electrical Heater NONE
Material Mild steel with glass flake epoxy internal coating
Test Pressure Rating 600 kPa
Working Pressure 400 kPa
Pipe Connections 22mm Hot water supply at top of tank
22mm Hot return 2/3 up from bottom of tank
22mm Hot water feed from heat pump at top of
tank
22mm Hot water feed to heat pump 1/3 up
from bottom of tank
22mm Cold water make-up at bottom of tank
Equipment per Vessel Pressure gauge
Thermometer
Thermostats and pockets as per Tender
Drawing
Safety valve – Piped to outside
25mm drain valve
15mm air relief valve
Tank stand 500mm high.

7.4 CIRCULATION PUMPS

Circulation pumps shall be of the " Grundfos UPS " commercial range, or other approved.
Tenderers are to take note that only a single phase power supply will be available in the
mechanical plantrooms and must choose circulation pumps accordingly. The duty and
head required shall be as indicated in the equipment schedules to follow.
No. of Units 1
Type “Grundfos ” or other equal approved inline pressure boosting pump
Duty 1 litres/s at 11.0m
Material All internal components to be non-corrosive brass or stainless steel
The pump must be able to handle hot water with a temperature of up to 60°C.
 B3550 MA - 4-35

A power supply must be brought from the control panel to an isolator adjacent and
connected to the pump, as part of this contract.
The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor is to note that the above pump duties are
suitable for tender purposes only and the final selections shall be confirmed during the
construction stage of the contract. In all instances the successful tender should calculate
the pressure drop through the equipment offered, and submit the duty selection to the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer before ordering.
The pump set shall start automatically by means of a pressure switch set at a pressure
5m.
The pump shall have the following features:
 Automatic zero-volume detection and deactivation.
 Built-in motor protection
 Non-self priming motors
 Protection class : IP 54
 Expansion tank, complete with isolating and drain valves
 Control panel with programmable Grundfos or other equal approved variable
speed drive and electronic display. The pump shall be programmed to restart
automatically after a power failure
The pump shall be installed on a 100mm high concrete plinth with lip channel frame on
anti-vibration mountings.

7.5 EXPANSION TANK

A bladder (membrane) type expansion vessel shall be installed in the positions as
indicated on the drawings.
The expansion vessel shall be of the Grundfos GT-HR type or other equal approved.
The expansion tank shall be suitable for heating purposes and potable water.
The tank shall be precharged with nitrogen as recommended by the manufacturer;.
Tank size: 8 Litres

7.6 AUTOMATIC AIR ELIMINATORS

The automatic air eliminators shall be of the Spirax Sarco AE30LVA type or other equal
approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. The body and shall be manufactured
from brass alloy which is dezincification resistant. The air eliminators shall be supplied
complete with check valve. The valves shall be installed where indicated on the drawings.

7.7 SAFETY VALVES

These shall be manufactured from cast brass with rustproof steel strip, fully adjustable,
and installed as indicated on the drawings. The valve shall be set during commissioning
and thereafter sealed and locked.

7.8 PLANTROOM WATER PIPING

All piping shall be Copper as per SANS 460-1985 – Class 2, connected with capillary
joints. As far as is possible, all pipes shall be installed above the suspended ceilings
except for pipework to be chased into walls. The pipework shall conform to the Standard
Technical Specification.

7.9 WATER PIPE INSULATION

All water piping and pipe fittings must be insulated as specified in the Standard Technical
 B3550 MA - 4-36

Specification, (clause 8, Part 4.1).

7.10 CLADDING
Sheet metal cladding shall be applied over all the water pipe insulation in plant rooms
and outside areas as specified in the Standard Technical Specification, (clause 9, Part
4.1). No cladding will be required over pipework above the suspended ceilings.

7.11 FITTINGS
Shall be installed as per the Standard Technical Specification, (clause 12, Part 4.1)..

7.12 ISOLATING VALVES

These shall be the full way ball cock type manufactured from brass and equipped with a
plastic coated mild steel lever handle with screwed connections to SANS 1056 Part 3 and
tested to 2000 kPa. These shall be installed in such a way as to isolate sanitary fittings
from the main supply pipes without stopping the circulation through the main lines.
Position of valves are as indicated on the schematic drawings.

7.13 UNIONS
To facilitate maintenance, repair or replacement, unions (screwed or flanged as
required) shall be furnished for all apparatus requiring disconnection for repairs.
Shut off valves shall be installed where indicated and at the inlet and outlet of individual
items of equipment to permit removal, without interfering with the rest of the system.

7.14 WATER TREATMENT

The system shall be filled with a mixture of water and chemicals. Fill the entire
underfloor hot water system with a mixture of water and Nalprep III chemicals obtainable
from Messrs Nalco Chemserve. Circulate the water for 36 hours with all control valves
fully open and all pumps in operation.
Drain the water from the system as much as practically possible.
Reload the system with water and add Nalcool 2000 to the system.
The ratio of chemicals to water shall be as follows:
Nalprep III : 3 kg/m3
Nalcool : 30 kg/m3
7.15 PRESSURE TESTS
A hydraulic test must be performed on all PE-X pipe loops before the screed is cast,
loops must be pressurised to 1,5 times operating pressure. This pressure must be
maintained for 1 hour without any decrease in pressure.

7.16 BALANCING OF SYSTEM

The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor will be required to balance each individual loop
during commissioning to ensure that the correct flow of hot water is obtained in a
particular loop to satisfy the heating requirement of that area. To this end the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer will furnish the Domestic an Fire Water Contractor before
commissioning commences with a balancing matrix that will indicate the required flow
rate and pressure drop in each loop. The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor will be
required to set the balancing valves accordingly to obtain the required flow rates.
Furthermore, the Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall submit, the indicated set point
on the balancing valve graph as supplied by the manufacturer of the valve to the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer for approval.
 B3550 MA - 4-37

7.17 ELECTRICAL CONTROL AND SWITCHGEAR PANEL

The Electrical control panel shall conform to the Standard Technical Specification
(clauses 15 and16, Part 4.1) and include all wiring and electrical equipment necessary for
the successful operation of this plant.
7.17.1 GENERAL
Supply and install an electrical control and switchgear panel in the position as indicated
on the drawings. The electrical panel shall accommodate the following equipment:
 Main isolator.
 Circuit breaker(s) and contactor(s) for the pump and pump controller, including
relays.
 Circuit breaker(s) and contactor(s) for the heat pump including relays.
 A circuitbreaker and contactor for the on/on switch of the system.
 Overload protection
 Earthing
 Wiring Diagram
The electrical panel shall be wall mounted a suitable position as indicated. The panel
must be manufactured from 2mm sheet metal with the necessary supports to install it
against the wall. All joints shall be welded. The panel shall be equipped with hinged
doors manufactured from sheet metal adequately supported and strengthened. All
switches and instrumentation must be secured on the top of the panel door. The panel
shall be weatherproof in terms of IP54 and shall be epoxy painted (orange colour).
7.17.2 ELECTRICAL CABLING
The supply, installation and connection of all electrical cabling between the electrical
panel and the installed equipment shall form part of this contract. All cabling shall be PVC
SWA PVC armoured cable neatly installed on cable racks. The cable racks and trays
shall be installed as part of this contract.
A single-phase 230 V bare ended power cable shall be supplied and installed by the
Electrical Contractor at the control and switchgear of panel each plant.
This contract shall cover:
 Termination of the cable end on the main isolator in the panel.
 Supply, install and connect power supplies between the panel and:
 The circulating pump,
 The heat pump, including internal wiring of controller as described below.
 The thermostats
 The on/off switch
 Controller(s).
 The main plant shall operate as follows:
Heat pumps
The heat pump will be set to temperature at 40°C ± 0,5°C and will maintain to hot water
vessel at that temperature The heat pump’s internal controller will be wired such that the
controller remains on regardless if the heat pump is in operation or not .ie. When the heat
pump is switched off, the heat pump’s internal controller will remain on such as to retain
is default setting for extended periods of time.
Water circulating pumps
The system will be automatically controlled by a PID type "Johnsons Control" or other
equal approved plant controller that will be able to exercise complete and stable control
over the system once it has been switched on.
There will be two surface mounted thermostats located in positions as indicated on the
 B3550 MA - 4-38

relevant drawing at 1500 mm A.F.F.L. The average of the two readings will be used as
the input signal for the room temperature.
The controller will take input signals from room type thermostats. The thermostat will be
installed as indicated on the relevant drawing at 1500 mm A.F.F.L. The reading will be
used as the input signal for the room temperature.
The circulation pump will be switched on and off by the controller depending on whether
the room type thermostat reading is calling for heating or not.
System control
The system on/off switch shall be installed next to the control thermostats indicated on
the relevant drawing at 1500 mm A.F.F.L. and shall form a part of this contract.
A schematic system layout and schematic wiring diagram for the control logic shall be
provided for approval by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer before the ordering /
manufacturing thereof. System control will only be installed and commissioned by
recognised Specialist Control Contractors. A CV of such a contractor will be required for
approval by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
7.17.3 COVERS FOR ROOM TYPE THERMOSTATS
The contractor will provide suitable covers for the room type thermostats. The covers will
be manufactured from 2mm mild steel and fixed to the walls with rawl-bolts. After fixing
the bolts will be spot-welded to ensure that they are tamper proof. Covers will be primed
and painted as per the Quality Specification. Covers must be drilled at top and bottom to
ensure adequate airflow over the thermostats. To this end input from the supplier of the
room-type thermostats must be obtained, prior to manufacturing of the covers, to
ascertain the required free area.

8 MANUALS AND LITERATURE

The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor is responsible for the provision of three (3) sets
of manuals to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. Each manual shall be
comprehensive and shall include full details of all the equipment installed with the relative
wiring diagrams, duct layout and commissioning data. The manuals shall be in terms of
(clause 14, Part 2).of the Standard Mechanical Specification

9 PAINTING AND TRUNKING

All painting necessary for the proper and neat completion of this installation forms part of
this contract as per clause 19 of Part 2. All mild steel used that is not hot dipped
galvanized shall be cleaned and primed with red oxide paint before being given two coats
of black enamel paint unless stated otherwise.
All exposed wiring and piping shall run in neat and clean trunking of appropriate size. The
trunking shall be neatly painted to colour match the wall/ ceiling/ roof to which it is
mounted.
Exposed ducting to be cleaned, free from dents, scratch and ink markings. All hangers
and supports shall be neatly installed and edge shall have smooth finishes.

10 VARIATIONS AND OMISSIONS

Tenderers shall list any deviations between their tender submitted and the specification.
If nothing is listed, this tender shall be regarded to meet the specification in all respects.
All deviations must be accompanied by a full set of technical literature.
 B3550 MA - 4-39

11 LABELLING
All labelling shall be as specified in the Standard Mechanical Specification, clause 19 of
Part 2.

12 ENGINEERING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDING OVER

The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall be responsible for the complete
engineering of the proposed installation, which shall amongst others include the
following:
Selection of components, taking into account prevailing site conditions, space availability,
etc.
Determining routes for wiring.
Any other related engineering matters.
The Domestic an Fire Water Contractor shall also be responsible for the final
commissioning of the systems, which shall include the adjustment of all control
components, to meet the requirements of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. Full
details of parameters will be provided during the execution of the contract.
Demonstration of the control and interlocking functions to the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer prior to handover, shall be the responsibility of the Domestic an Fire Water
Contractor.
Handover of the contract can only be accomplished after full completion.

13 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE

This contract shall include a 12 month guarantee on all plants and equipment, valid for 12
months from the date of practical completion.
This contract includes for regular maintenance of all plants and equipment for a 12
month period from the date of practical completion. This shall include cleaning and
servicing and a 3 monthly log book is to be completed and signed by the client, of all work
carried out.
 B3550 MA - 4-40

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 4.3 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT OFFERED - DOMESTIC AND FIRE

WATER INSTALLATION
NB: Details of all relevant data must be filled in by tenderer. Failure to do so will invalidate
the tender
Further details on material and equipment must be submitted by means of a covering
letter, brochures, specifications, etc.
All such brochures, etc. must be noted in a covering letter.

1 ISOLATING VALVES
Manufacturer
Supplier
Model Number(s)

2 SAFETY VALVES
Manufacturer
Supplier
Model Number(s)

3 VACUUM CONTROL VALVES

Manufacturer
Supplier
Model Number(s)

4 PRESSURE REDUCING VALVES

Manufacturer
Supplier
Model Number(s)

5 FITTINGS
Tees Elbows Reducers Strainers
Manufacturer
Supplier
 B3550 MA - 4-41

6 EXPANSION TANK
Manufacturer
Supplier
Working pressure (kPa)
Tested Pressure (kPa)
Storage volume (L)
Model Number(s)

7 HOT WATER STORAGE VESSEL

Manufacturer
Supplier
Type
Capacity
System pressure
Model No.

8 UNDER FLOOR HEATING HEAT PUMP

Manufacturer
Supplier
Model
Nominal Heating Capacity (kW)
Electrical power requirements

9 UNDER FLOOR HEATING CIRCULATION PUMP

Manufacturer
Supplier
Type
Duty (l/s @ Pa)
System pressure
Electrical power
requirements
Model No.

10 QUALIFICATION SCHEDULE/ VARIATIONS AND OMISSIONS

The Tenderer should record any deviations or qualifications he may wish to make to
the tender documents in this Returnable Schedule. Alternatively, a tender may state
such deviations and qualifications in a covering letter to his tender and reference such
letter in this schedule.
Page Clause or Proposal
Item
 B3550 MA - 4-42

11 DECLARATION
I herewith declare that all the equipment above shall be designed, manufactured and
delivered in accordance with the specification.
I further declare that equipment which does not meet the requirements of the
specification has been listed in a separate letter, which accompanies this tender and that
the way in which the equipment differs from the specified equipment, has been clearly
defined.
NAME OF FIRM:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
TENDERER’S SIGNATURE:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
NAME (in Block letters):
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
ADDRESS:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
TELEPHONE NUMBER:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
 B3550 MA - 4-43

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 4.4 LIST OF DRAWINGS - DOMESTIC AND FIRE WATER

INSTALLATION

DRAWING NUMBER DESCRIPTION

B 3550 MW /1 Upper Ground Floor: Domestic water installation

B 3550 MW /2 Lower Ground Floor: Domestic water installation

B 3550 MW /3 Upper Ground Floor: Underfloor Heating installation

B 3550 MB /1 Upper Ground Floor: Fire installation

B 3550 MB /2 Lower Ground Floor Fire installation

The tenderer is to note that the scale of 1:100 indicated on the drawings are for a A0
paper dimensions.
 B3550 MA - 4-44

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 4.5 BILLS OF QUANTITIES - DOMESTIC AND FIRE WATER

INSTALLATION

1 GENERAL NOTES
1. These bills of quantities contain pages numbered consecutively in each bill as indicated
in the Master Index. Before the tenderer submits his tender, he should check the
number of pages, and if any are found missing or duplicated or the figures or writing
indistinct, or the bills of quantities contain any obvious errors, he should apply to the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer at once and have same rectified, as no liability
whatsoever will be admitted by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer in respect of errors
in tender due to the foregoing.
2. The bills of quantities form part of and must be read in conjunction with the specifications
and drawings which contain the full description of the work to be done and material and
equipment to be used.
3. The priced bills as well as all the completed schedules and any other relevant
information must be submitted with the tender.
4. The total tender sum in the tender form shall constitute the contract price of the
successful tenderer. Tenderers are advised to check their item extensions and total
additions, as no claim for arithmetical errors will be considered.
5. No alteration, erasure or addition is to be made in the text of the bills of quantities.
Should any alteration, erasure of addition be made, it will not be recognised but the
original wording of the bills of quantities will be adhered to.
6. The priced bills of quantities of the successful tenderer will be checked and the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer reserves the right to call for reasonable adjustments to
any individual price and to rectify any discrepancy whilst the total tender price, as
submitted, remains unaltered.
The responsibility for the accuracy of the quantities written into the bills remains with the
party who prepared the bills. The tenderer shall be relieved of responsibility of measuring
quantities at the tender stage, and the tender sum submitted shall be in respect of the
quantities set out in the bills, although he will be required to make his assessment of
items such as fixings, etc. from details stated in the bills and shall include in the item
prices for such small installation materials as are required for the complete installation in
accordance with the specification.
8. The rates contained in this document shall apply irrespective of the final quantities of the
different classes and kinds of work actually executed.
9. The Contractor and the Employer or his Agent may agree that the total of any bill or bills,
including any variations by way of additions thereto or deductions therefrom, represents
a fair and accurate quantification of the items set out in the bills and the parties may
agree final payment on that basis. In the event of any dispute as to the quantities, then
the disputed item or items shall be adjusted where necessary.
 B3550 MA - 4-45

10. The quantities in these bills of quantities are not to be used for ordering purposes.
Quantities set out in this document are to be regarded as provisional only.

The work, when completed, shall be remeasured and the final contract sum calculated,
using the tendered tariffs and the finally measured quantities.
11. Variations in the scope and extent of the work included in the bills shall be allowed to
meet the Employer's requirements.
The rules governing the extent and valuation of variations shall be those provided for in
the conditions of contract.
12. Unless separate rates for the supply and for the installation of any item is specifically
called for, the supply and installation costs of any item shall be fully included in the unit
price.
The description of each item shall, unless otherwise stated herein, be held to include
making, conveying and delivering, unloading, storing, unpacking, hoisting, setting, fitting
and fixing in position, cutting and waste, patterns, models and templets, plant, temporary
works, return of packings, establishment charges, profit and all other obligations arising
out of the conditions of contract.
13. The quantities and rates included for dayworks shall form part of the tender price, but
tenderers shall note that this item must be regarded as indicative and will only be
payable to the Contractor if and when covered by a Variation Order.
14. Tenderers shall price the Preliminaries under any or all of three groups, viz:
(a) a fixed amount
(b) an amount varied in proportion to the final contract value as compared to the
tender price
(c) an amount varied in proportion to the final contract period as compared to the
originally specified contract period.
The allocation of prices to the three categories listed above must be realistic and the
Contractor may be required to justify the allocation of the prices. Attention is particularly
drawn to the right reserved in terms of Clause 6 above.
15. All provisional sums shall be expended as directed by the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer and any balance remaining shall be deducted from the amount of the contract
sum.
16. Provision is made on the final summary for the applicable Value Added Tax to be added.
In these bills, the word “supply” shall be deemed to include the acquiring of
equipment and materials from suppliers and workshops and the delivery, off-
loading and safe storage of the equipment on site.
18. In this bills the word “install” shall be deemed to include the unpacking, hoisting, placing
and fixing, suspending or building in an approved position, cutting, connection,
commissioning, testing and handing over of plant, equipment and materials.
19. Method of Measurement
19.1 Piping shall be measured in metres, stating the internal or external diameter in
accordance with accepted trade usage. The rate for piping shall include cutting, jointing
and running joints. The lengths of pipes shall be measured over/through all fittings, but
not over valves, pumps and inline instruments such as strainers, site glasses, etc.
Pipe fittings shall be measured “in number” as “extra over” piping. Pipe fittings such as
bushes, elbows, bends, junctions, etc. to pipes not exceeding 50mm diameter shall be
given in one item for each diameter of pipe. Pipe fittings to pipes exceeding 50mm
 B3550 MA - 4-46

diameter shall be given separately for each diameter of pipe and each type of fitting.
Unions, valves, flanges, etc. shall be given separately for all diameters of pipe. Purpose-
made fittings are to include for lining up of fittings. Welded joints, including joints to
fittings, shall be measured separately and shall allow for all cutting, preparation of ends
and welding.
The rate for flanges shall include for flange weld, flange screw, gasketing and bolts.
Pipe supports and brackets shall be measured separately in number on main piping
systems with diameter above 80mm only.
19.2 Pipe insulation shall be measured in metres stating the diameter of the pipe. Pipe fittings
shall be measured in number as “extra over” pipe insulation, all as described under 19.1.
piping above.
PART C: B 3550 MA 4 - 47 Bill No. 1

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

BILL NO. 1
PRELIMINARY AND GENERAL ITEMS

Allow for all preliminary and general items for this

project, but excluding items priced elsewhere in
these Bills (These amounts will be paid pro rata to
the rest of the amounts claimed by the contractor,
relative to the tender amount)

1. CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS
Tenderers to allow for compliance with all the
Item Sum
conditions of contract (Refer to main contract)

2. SUPPLEMENTARY PREAMBLES
Tenderers must study the drawings and the
Mechanical Specification (Part C of the main
contract) for full description of items before pricing
this bill. Of Particular mention is the following
parts:
Part 1 of part C: Tender Requirements and
Item Sum
condition of contract
Part 2 of part C: Standard Mechanical
Item Sum
Specification
Part 4.1 of part C: Domestic and Fire Water
Item Sum
Installation Standard Specification
Part 4.2 of part C: Domestic and Fire Water
Item Sum
Installation Detailed Specification
Part 4.3 of part C: Schedule of Equipment Offered Item Sum
Part 4.4 of part C: List of Drawings Item Sum
Part 4.5 of part C: Bills of Quantitites Item Sum

3. JOINT TRADES
Tenderers to allow for all costs which may be
required in order to co-ordinate and liaise with the
Item Sum
other Trade Contractors, especially with the
electrical contractor

4. SUPERVISOR
Tenderers to allow for a full time working
supervisor during the duration of the contract, who
shall have the delegated authority to receive Item Sum
instructions and make decisions regarding this
contract

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 4 - 49 Bill No. 2

Item Description Unit Qty Tariff Amount

BILL NO. 2
DOMESTIC WATER PIPING:

Supply, install, connect and commission the

following piping system and equipment in
the building. Piping shall be Copper class 2
1.
medium quality piping to SANS 763 and
amended (price to include for all couplings,
hilti MP-HI brackets and supports)

1.1 Copper Piping SABS approved class 2

Ø35mm m 110
Ø22mm m 60
Ø15mm m 25

1.2 Equal tees

Ø35mm No 15
Ø22mm No 5
Ø15mm No 5

1.3 Elbows
Ø35mm No 60
Ø22mm No 50
Ø15mm No 15

1.4 Reducers
Ø35 - Ø22mm No 40
Ø22 - Ø15mm No 15

1.5 Ball Type Isolating Valves

Ø35mm No 10
Ø22mm No 10
Ø15mm No 5

1.6 Strainer
Ø35mm No 1

1.7 Ø54mm UPVC to copper class 2 connection No 1

Canvas covered 'Snap on' mineral wool

1.8 Insulation c/w lagging, painting, coding,
labeling and indication arrows
Ø35mm m 110
Ø22mm m 60
Ø15mm m 25

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 4 - 50 Bill No. 2

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

Galvanised Cladding c/w band straps at

1.9
1500mm intervals
Ø85mm (pipe diameterexcl m 30
Ø72mm m 10
Ø65mm m 10

For the supply and delivery nd of 5 Litre

1.10 No 4
Kwikboils

For the complete installation of 5 Litre

Kwikboils, including all interconnecting
1.11 wiring and copper class 2 piping, No 4
connections unions and fittings and drain to
basin.

TOTAL FOR BILL NO. 2 (Carry over to Summary) R

PART C: B 3550 MA 4 - 51 Bill No. 3

Item Description Unit Qty Tariff Amount

BILL NO. 3
FIRE SERVICES:

1. For the complete supply, delivery and

installation of the galvanized fire service
system, cutting and making good hangers,
etc. valves, fittings, pipe joining and
painting, etc as specified on drawings.

1.1 Galvanized Piping

Ø110mm m 140
Ø75mm m 140
Ø25mm m 140

1.2 Equal tees

Ø100mm No 8
Ø75mm No 8
Ø25mm No 5

1.3 Elbows
Ø100mm No 30
Ø75mm No 70
Ø25mm No 50

1.4 Reducers
Ø100 - Ø75mm No 10
Ø75 - Ø25mm No 10

1.5 Everyway or other equal approved hose reel

complete with 30m hose, fire hose reel
chrome plated directional valve with No 10
indicator, union, shut-off nozzle and wall
bracket.

1.6 Fire hydrant No 5

1.7 Ø100mm UPVC to Galvanised Mild steel

No 1
connection

2 4,5 Kg Pressurised Dry Chemical portable

fire extinguisher, mounted on and including
meranti backboard, plugged and screwed No 17
to wall and finished with two coats
waterproof varnish.

3 9 Kg CO2 fire extinguisher, mounted on and

including meranti backboard, plugged and
No 2
screwed to wall and finished with two coats
waterproof varnish.
Amount carried forward R
PART C: B 3550 MA 4 - 52 Bill No. 3

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

4 4,5 Kg Pressurised Wet Chemical portable

fire extinguisher, mounted on and including
meranti backboard, plugged and screwed No 1
to wall and finished with two coats
waterproof varnish.

TOTAL FOR BILL NO. 3 (Carry over to Summary) R

PART C: B 3550 MA 4- 53 BILL NO. 4

Item Description Unit Qty Tariff Amount

BILL NO. 4
UNDERFLOOR HEATING

1. SUPPLY, INSTALL, CONNECT AND

COMMISSION THE FOLLOWING PIPING
SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT IN THE
BUILDING: PEX-A PIPING

1.1 Piping including fixing to rebar prior to

casting of concrete.

Ø22mm m 350

1.2 Equal Tees

Ø22mm No 2

1.3 Elbows

Ø22mm No 5

1.4 Connections

Ø22 No 5

1.5 Blow Torch Bends No 55

1.6 Isolating Valves No 4

1.7 Connection to Ø22 Copper No 2

2. SUPPLY, INSTALL, CONNECT AND

COMMISSION THE FOLLOWING PIPING
SYSTEM AND EQUIPMENT IN THE
BUILDING. HALF HARD COPPER CLASS 2
TUBING TO SANS 460/85 AS AMENDED
(PRICE TO INCLUDE FOR ALL
COUPLINGS, SOLDER, BRACKETS AND
SUPPORTS)

2.1 Strainer No 1

2.2 Temperature Gauge No 1

2.3 Isolating valves No 10

2.4 Pressure gauge No 2

2.5 Flexible connections No 2

2.6 8 litre Grundfos GT Expansion tank No 1

2.7 Automatic air vent No 1

2.8 Balancing valve No 1

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 4- 54 BILL NO. 4

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

2.9 Non return Valve No 2

2.10 UFH - Ciculating Pump - Grundfos UFS

No 1
C/W Connections and control wiring

2.11
Half Hard Copper Tubing To Sans 046/85
As Ammended Including All Couplings,
Hangers, Straps, Brackets And Solder

2.11.1 Piping
Ø22mm copper class 2 (insulated) m 35

2.11.2 Full radius elbows

Ø22mm No 15

2.11.3 Equal Tees

Ø22mm No 3

2.11.4 Unions
Ø22mm No 12

2.12 Check valve No 2

2.13 Connection to Heat pump Item 2

2.14
Supply and install canvas covered snap-on
fibreglass insulation over piping as
specified, all insulation to be clamped with
Aluminium Bands at 450mm Centres

2.14.1 Piping
Ø22mm copper class 2 (insulated) m 15

2.14.2 Full radius elbows

Ø22mm No 10

2.14.3 Equal Tees

Ø22mm No 3

2.15 Heat pump

2.15.1 For the supply and delivery of the

following heat pump:
Enerflow 9.6kW Heatpump No 1

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 4- 55 BILL NO. 4

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

2.15.2 For the complete installation and

connection of the following, including
brackets, bracing, control wiring and
electrical connections
Enerflow 9.6kW Heatpump No 1

2.16 Hot water vessel

2.16.1 For the supply and delivery of the

following:

Sheetmetal clad insulated 300 litre vertical

hotwater storage Vessel as per clause 7.3.2 of
No 1
the detailed technical specification including
all fittings, connections and acsesories

2.16.2 For the complete installation and

connection of the following, including
brackets, bracing, control wiring and
electrical connections

Sheetmetal clad insulated 300 litre vertical

hotwater storage Vessel as per clause 7.3.2 of
No 1
the detailed technical specification including
all fittings, connections and acsesories

2.17 All pipe connections to Hot water vessel

Item 1
complete with unions

2.18 For the water treatment of the plant as per

clause 7.4 of the detailed technical No 1
specification

2.19 For the supply and installation of failure

protection electrical control and
switchgear panel as specified in clause 7.7 No 1
of the Detailed Technical Sspecification
including all wiring:

2.20 For the supply and installation of room

thermostats including coverplates and all
No 2
interconecting wiring neccesary for the
proper operation of the system

TOTAL FOR BILL NO. 4 (Carry to Summary)

PART C: B 3550 MA 4 - 56 Summary
Item Description Amount

SUMMARY

Total brought forward:

Bill No. 1 : Preliminary Items

Bill No. 2 : Domestic Water Services

Bill No. 3 : Fire Services

Bill No. 4 : Underfloor Heating

Subtotal (To be carried to Mechanical Final Summary on Title

Page of PART C.)

NAME OF FIRM:

TENDERER'S SIGNATURE:

NAME (IN BLOCK LETTERS):

ADDRESS:

DATE:

TEL. NO.:

FAX. NO.:
 B3550 MA - 5-1

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 5 COMPRESSED AIR INSTALLATION

PART 5.1 STANDARD TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – COMPRESSED AIR

INSTALLATION

1 QUALIFIED CONTRACTORS
Only a suitably qualified and experienced Compressed Air Contractor shall be allowed to
be the contractor responsible for the supply and installation of the work described in this
document.
The Compressed Air Contractor shall have to submit proof of skills and knowledge of
Compressed Air installations by way of his previous experience record and references
from Employers of previous contracts.
The Compressed Air Contractor must fully comply with the conditions set out on page 7
of 10224, non- flammable medical gas pipeline systems.
The Compressed Air Contractor shall further submit full proof of membership with the
Southern Africa Compressed Gases Association, complete with registration number and
expiry date. A Certificate of Conformity for Gas Installations, as issued by them, shall be
included in the operating and maintenance manual. The installation shall not be deemed
as complete until this form has been issued.
The successful tenderer will be required to prove to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer
that he has qualified Compressed Air pipeline technicians on his establishment as well as
recognised test equipment for the successful completion of a safe working pipeline
installation.
The Compressed Air Contractor shall employ only skilled artisans and technicians
approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer who are competent in this type of work.
Technicians shall have served a recognised training course in medical gas pipeline
technology or shall have had least four years practical experience and training in medical
gas pipeline installations. The works shall be carried out in accordance with the
standards laid down by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
The contracting firm shall be recognised Compressed Air, LPG and vacuum installation
Compressed Air Contractor specialising in this field.
The Compressed Air Contractor is reminded that the tender drawings are
schematic and it remains the contractor’s responsibility to apply all the rules and
regulations of the applicable SANS Codes.

2 STANDARD SPECIFICATION
Unless otherwise specified in the supplementary specification, the following standard
specifications (including amendments) of the organizations indicated shall form part of
this specification.
 B3550 MA - 5-2

2.1 SPECIFICATIONS
SANS 10087-1 LPG Gas Installation
SANS 10260-1 Distribution of Oxygen, Nitrogen and Argon
SANS 10260-2 Hydrogen
SANS 1453 Copper Tubes for Medical Gas Systems
All requirements as stipulated by the LPG Safety Association of SA.

3 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS FOR COMPRESSED AIR INSTALLATIONS

3.1 PIPES AND FITTINGS

Pipe routes as shown on the drawings are approximate and final routes shall be
determined on site, with consideration to the structures and other services. Pipes must
be installed as close as possible to the structure and at a safe distance from other
services and electrical outlets and equipment.
No pipes through brick- or concrete walls will be allowed without the use of a sleeve.
These could either be built in by the builder or neatly drilled in by the Compressed Air
Contractor. Approval for the final pipe positions must be obtained from the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer before the work is commenced.
All compressed air piping and fittings shall be copper class 3 – Heavy wall pipes (half-
hard) to SANS 0460 as amended.
All tubing to be identified in accordance with SANS 1453 and the ends of the tubes shall
be protected with red caps to prevent the ingress of foreign matter during storage and
transportation.
Nominal pipe sizes are being used in the specification, on the drawings and in the Bill of
Quantities.
The exact pipe sizes are as follows:

Inside
Tubing Size Nominal Wall Diameter/ Maximum Working
Grade
O.D. (mm) Thickness (mm) Bore size Pressure (Mpa)
(mm)
15 1.20 12.6 8.80 Class 3
22 1.50 19 7.50 Class 3
28 1.50 25 5.89 Class 3
35 2.00 31 6.29 Class 6
42 2.00 38 5.24 Class 3
54 2.50 49 6.67 Class 3
67 2.50 62 5.34 Class 3
76 2.50 71 4.74 Class 3
108 3.20 101.6 4.27 Class 3

Pipe fittings must comply with the SANS 1067-2 : 2000. Capillary fittings must be used in
all instances except where compression fittings have to be used to remove items.
Pipe sleeves through walls, concrete beams, slabs etc. must be of the same material as
the pipe.
 B3550 MA - 5-3

Only the saddle type clamps made from stainless steel, bronze or copper will be allowed
to be used in the outside. Nylon clamps may be used in the hospital only after approval
by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.

Outside diam. of pipe Maximum distance of

supports
Up to 10 mm 1,0 m
From 12 mm – 15 mm 1,25 m
From 19 mm – 40 mm 2,0 m
Over 40 mm 2,50 m
No pipes shall be fixed to suspended ceilings. It will be fixed to the structure or be
supported by means of approved PVC or aluminium brackets.
Copper pipes must be isolated from steel supports by means of nylon PVC, or copper
strips.
Only manufactured capillary couplings must be used, Swaged couplings will not
be allowed.

3.2 MAKING OF JOINTS

Brazing shall be done with copper.
The joint should be heated quickly using an oxy-acetylene flame heat source. The
penetration of the alloy into the joint shall be approximately 15mm but at least 10mm.
Great care must be taken not to apply more heat than necessary to melt the alloy.
The Compressed Air Contractor shall be requested to have joints cut out and have them
analyzed by a metallurgic laboratory if the integrity of the joints made are in question.
This test will be performed at the cost of the Compressed Air Contractor.
If it is found that the material has been damaged by excessive heat, all joints will have to
be replaced at the expense of the Compressed Air Contractor.

3.3 CLEANING
All pipes and fittings must be kept clean during erection and sections of piping must be
cleaned by blasting with medical compressed air or nitrogen before closing up.
While busy with the erection all pipe ends must be kept closed with end caps till the
connections are going to be made.
After the installation has been completed, the entire system shall be cleaned by blasting
with medical compressed air or nitrogen.

3.4 LINE PRESSURES

The line operating pressures for the different gasses will be as follows:
Compressed Air : 700 kPa
During commissioning, all pressure controlling equipment shall be adjusted to ensure that
the above conditions are met.

3.5 ISOLATING VALVES

Shut-off valves for medical gas and compressed air shall be of the ball type. The interior
 B3550 MA - 5-4

of the valve shall be manufactured from stainless steel or brass with Teflon seats.

3.6 PRESSURE REGULATOR CABINETS

All pressure regulators installed outside the building shall be installed in isolating valve
cabinets.
The isolating valve cabinet shall be manufactured of sheet metal and neatly finished in
baked enamel.
The door shall be hinged and fitted with a push button latch and marked on the outside in
clear, legible letters, with the applicable gas label.

3.7 PAINT

3.8 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

All paints must carry the SANS mark and shall be of the non-toxic type for industrial use
and must be approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.

3.9 PIPELINES
Pipelines must be painted in accordance with SANS 101430-3 : 2003 to the following
colour:
Contents of Pipeline Basic Colour Single Band
Compressed Air Arctic Blue
Argon Light Stone Peacock Blue
Helium Light Stone Middle Brown
Hydrogen Light Stone Poppy Red
LPG Light Stone
Nitrogen Light Stone Light Grey
Oxygen White

The full length of pipes must be painted in the relevant colours. Identification stickers
must also be attached to the pipes at regular intervals, particularly at T-junctions.

3.10 COMMISSIONING AND TESTING

3.11 COMMISSIONING ENGINEERS

The Tenderer shall allow in his tender price for the services of approved and expert
Commissioning Engineers, as may be appropriate for the individual specialized sections
of his contract, as well as a competent Engineer in overall control of the installation.
Testing and commissioning shall be carried out by these Engineers.
Should undue problems be encountered at any time, the Compressed Air Contractor may
be requested by the Department to obtain the services of a representative of the
manufacturer of specified items of equipment, at no cost to the Department.

3.12 NOTICE OF TESTING AND COMMISSIONING

The Consulting Mechanical Engineer shall receive not less than two weeks advance
notice of any tests to be witnessed by the Department.

3.13 FAILURE OF WORKS, SITE OR COMMISSIONING TESTS

Should the Consulting Mechanical Engineer be notified to attend official tests as laid
down, and should the equipment fail the test for any reason whatsoever, such that the
Engineer is required to re-witness the test, the time, transport and disbursement by the
 B3550 MA - 5-5

Engineer in so doing will be for the Compressed Air Contractor’s account, which amount
may be deducted, at the option of the Engineer, from monies due to the Compressed Air
Contractor.

3.14 QUALITY TESTING OF EQUIPMENT

The Consulting Mechanical Engineer reserves the right to arrange for testing of any piece
of equipment at will, to check on compliance with the relevant specifications. Should the
particular piece of equipment pass the test, the cost of such testing will be borne by the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer. However, should it fail the test, the cost of the test,
rectification of the shortcomings, retesting and repetition of the same test on the
remaining like items will be for the Compressed Air Contractor’s account.

3.15 INSPECTION DURING MANUFACTURE

The Compressed Air Contractor will advise the Consulting Mechanical Engineer when the
items to be supplied are in the course of manufacture. The Consulting Mechanical
Engineer reserves the right to inspect any items during the course of manufacture, and
witness any performance tests that may be required thereon. The Contractor shall give
the Consulting Mechanical Engineer at least two weeks advance notice of works tests.

3.16 TESTING
The Compressed Air Contractor shall be responsible for carrying out all tests laid down in
the specific sections elsewhere in this document, in addition to those listed hereafter and
in the Detail Specification.
Testing and balancing shall not begin until the system has been completed and is in full
working order.
The plant shall be tested and operated to meet the performance figures and duties
specified.
All safety features and interlocks will be tested.
The Compressed Air Contractor will be responsible for all costs incurred in the testing,
including the supply, calibration and use of all instruments and tools, but not the supply of
water or power on site.
All instruments and test equipment used shall be provided by the Compressed Air
Contractor, and shall be accurately calibrated and maintained in good working order. All
test instruments used for tests to be witnessed by the Client's Representative shall be
provided with calibration certificates, which must be available to the Client’s
Representative.
Specific attention is drawn to the fact that calibration certificates will be required for the
following:
Watt meters, ammeters, voltmeters, frequency meters, pressure gauges, flow meters,
orifices plates, temperature gauges and dynamometers.
All instruments shall be of above standard grade, and test pressure gauges shall not be
less than 150mm in diameter. The maximum scale of the instrument shall not exceed 1,5
times the full test requirement.
It is essential that the Compressed Air Contractor inspects and tests all equipment before
requesting the Consulting Mechanical Engineer to inspect or witness acceptance tests
thereof.
All acceptance tests, whether in the manufacturer's works or on site, must be carried out
in the presence of the Client's Representative.
Should the Consulting Mechanical Engineer wish to verify the calibration of any
 B3550 MA - 5-6

instruments, the Compressed Air Contractor shall make the necessary arrangements for
the instrument to be re-calibrated by a recognized authority. Should the instrument prove
to be correctly calibrated, the cost of the re-calibration test will be borne by the Client.
Should the instrument prove to be in error, the cost of the tests will be borne by the
Compressed Air Contractor.
Two copies of the complete test reports shall be submitted to the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer, prior to the first delivery of the project reports shall cover all tests carried out on
individual sections, including such works tests as may have been conducted. All reports
shall be neatly typed.

3.17 SCOPE OF TESTS

All the commissioning and testing shall be executed in terms of the applicable SANS
Standard and the Compressed Air Contractor shall supply and connect all the testing
equipment, instrumentation and materials.
The Compressed Air Contractor shall allow for testing and commissioning of the
complete installation:
Cleaning of the pipelines by the Compressed Air Contractor.
b) Safety tests, i.e. pressure and gas continuity tests by the responsible persons
team specified in the addendum and duly appointed.
c) Test the operation of the change-over mechanism and manifolds.

Test the operation of the vacuum and nitrogen plants.

Test performance of the alarm warning systems.

3.18 PRESSURE TESTING

After fitting the medical gas outlets, a pressure of 1000 kPa shall be applied, using
medical compressed air. This pressure shall be maintained over 24 hours without
dropping pressure, using a recording pressure meter. All pipes can be inter-connected
during the test period.
Alternatively the pressure tests may be as follows as indicated in the supplementary
specifications:
pressure test of the pipeline system with base block of terminal unit. This test should last
over 24 hours at 1000 kPa and shall be recorded. Pressure drop is not allowed.
Pressure test of the complete system after final installation:
put all pressure gas pipes under operation pressure
switch pressure and vacuum sources off and close valves
mark positions of gauge needles
close all stop cocks
Check pressure gauges after 1 hour. Permissible drops in pressure lines 0,1 bar.

3.19 GAS CONTINUITY TEST BY TEAM OF RESPONSIBLE PERSONS

Probes connected to a pressure meter for each gas is to be provided by the Compressed
Air Contractor to carry out these tests.
All similar gas outlets shall be checked with each test. Only the one under pressure shall
indicate the pressure at the appropriate medical gas outlet. Gas banks not under test
during this test shall be disconnected. This test shall be done at the time of “taking over”
 B3550 MA - 5-7

under supervision and in the presence of the responsible persons. All isolating valves
shall be operated at the time of test to certify that they are correctly installed and that they
shut off completely.

3.20 TEST CERTIFICATES

The Compressed Air Contractor shall ensure that copies of all relevant test certificates,
inspection reports, materials analysis certificates and similar data. as may be required
under various sections of this specification, or by Government Licensing and Inspection
Authorities or Local Authorities, shall be provided before handing over the plant.
Acceptance of the plant will be delayed if such certificates are not available. In particular,
attention is drawn to pressure vessel and boiler construction and materials test
certificates.

3.21 OPERATING INSTRUCTION

Detailed, clearly printed instructions on how to operate the manifold and including any
drawings which may be necessary shall be provided by the Compressed Air Contractor.
These shall be mounted in glass fronted frames fixed to the wall above the manifold by
the Compressed Air Contractor.

4 PRESSURE REGULATORS

4.1 FINAL STAGE REDUCING REGULATORS

These regulators shall be a single stage pressure regulator type. The regulator shall
have a brass body and shall be specifically designed for gas applications.
These regulators shall be installed inside the laboratories for final pressure control.
The body shall be brass construction with stainless steel diaphragm and Teflon lining.
The regulator shall be complete with pressure gauges.

4.2 TWO-STAGE PRESSURE REDUCING REGULATORS

These regulators shall be fitted on single cylinders and shall be of the two-stage multi-
pressure adjustable type, complete with pressure gauges.
The regulator shall be of brass construction with Teflon lined stainless steel diaphragm.
The first stage shall be complete with 20 micron filter and the second stage with 40
micron integral filter.

4.3 HIGH PRESSURE REGULATOR

This regulator shall be suitable for use with manifolds where several gas cylinders are
used. The regulator shall be complete with pressure gauges, relief valves and outlet
shut-off valves. The unit shall be of brass construction with stainless steel poppet and 20
micron inlet filter.
The regulator shall be of the automatic change-over type, with multi-pressure adjustment.

4.4 INSTALLATION
All the above units shall be complete with wall mounting brackets and shall be securely
fixed to the walls.

5 ELECTRICAL SERVICES FOR INUSTRIAL GAS INSTALLATIONS

5.1 REQUIREMENTS
 B3550 MA - 5-8

The electrical equipment and installation shall conform fully to the requirements of SANS
10142.

5.2 SUPPLY
A three phase, 50 hertz electrical supply will be provided by others at the points shown on
the drawings. The supply will terminate in a bare ended cable. This tender shall include
for the supply points and all other cabling, conduits, cable racks, trays, switchgear,
panels, distribution boards, etc., necessary for the satisfactory operation of every part of
the installation as well as for the connection of the supply cable into this panel. Three-pin
socket outlets will be provided for 220 volt equipment where necessary.

5.3 CONTROL PANEL

A motor control and switchgear board shall be supplied and installed in each plantroom at
the position indicated.
Each board shall be fitted with the following:-
A main isolator.
A set of copper busbars of adequate size, if the peak current on the board exceeds 50
amperes per phase.
Individual motors shall be supplied through a circuit breaker and suitable D.O.L.,
automatic Star-Delta, or slip ring starter.
All other equipment shall be supplied through a circuit breaker.
In the case where the rupturing capacity of a circuit breaker is lower than the rupturing
capacity of the electric feed system at the specific point, the circuit breaker shall be
protected by H.R.C. fuses of adequate size.
All starters shall be equipped with auxiliary contacts, which shall be brought to an easily
accessible terminal block for the purpose of remote control (if specified). An ammeter
with suitable scale shall be fitted to each motor above 7,5 kW output on at least one
phase, and shall be installed in the panel next to the relevant switchgear.
Switchgear panels and boards shall be factory pre-wired so that the only "on site"
connections to be made will be the main connection, the supply to each motor, and the
control system connections to the terminal block.
Each item on the board, switches, instrument control, etc., shall be clearly labelled in
white print on black, hard plastic labels, which shall be neatly glued onto the back panel
of the Board.
All switchgear and distribution boards shall be of the metal clad surface type, with a
framework, which is electrically continuous and properly bonded to earth.
The boards shall be equipped with hinged steel doors adequately braced each with a
flush lock and two keys.
All boards shall be treated with two layers of rust inhibiting paint.
Switches, push-buttons, and indication lamps and gauges shall be so installed that they
remain fastened to the doors when doors are opened.
The layout of each board as well as the wiring diagrams and details of the switchgear
provided shall be approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer before any
manufacture is commenced.
All wiring in distribution boards shall be labelled to ease the later tracing of circuits, these
shall correspond to drawing labelling.
 B3550 MA - 5-9

5.4 WIRING
All boards which are to be mounted outdoors, shall be weather proof and guaranteed by
the manufacturers for such outdoor operation.
The wiring of the plant shall be carried out by the Compressed Air Contractor in surface
work in the plantrooms and concealed work in all finished spaces. Wiring shall be done
by means of solid drawn or lap-welded screwed tubing and PVC insulated copper
conductors, or in multicore PVC/SWA/PVC cable. The main runs of conduit or cable
shall preferably be carried out at high level (if possible in false ceiling spaces).
Distribution shall be vertically down to the required points. All electric conduit and conduit
fittings must be thoroughly inspected for defects before installation, and all sharp edges
and burrs removed. Bushes and locknuts are to be used where conduit enters switch
boxes.
The proposed location of tubing and cables shall be approved by the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer before commencement of work.
Conduit to be installed under plaster finish shall be installed in good time so as not to
delay the Building Contractor or cause finished plaster to be chased.
All electrical cables shall be fastened to cable racks or shall be laid in cable ducts.
Cables carried in racks shall as far as possible be laid parallel and shall be neatly
installed. Descents shall be firmly secured with provision for the swinging of flexible
tubing or cables where attached to moving machines and electrical motors.
Sizes of conduit, conductors and cables shall be at least equal to those laid down in the
relevant tables of the Code of Practice.
Flexible conduit and cables shall be provided wherever it is necessary to avoid
transmission of vibration. No joints in cables or wires will be permitted in a conduit. The
ends of cables shall be properly made off. Terminal lugs shall be used wherever special
clamp-washers or sleeve terminals are not provided on equipment. Conductor strands
may not be cut away or reduced in size, and care must be taken to select switchgear,
etc., with terminals of adequate size for looping, etc., where necessary.
No open wiring will be permitted at any point in the system, with the exception of the
copper bus-bars in the switchgear boards. These shall be taped up with PVC tape with
the relevant phase colours.

5.5 BOXES
Where boxes are used in concrete or masonry, approved removable cover plates shall
be supplied. For 100 mm x 100 mm boxes, standard blank metal switch-type cover
plates may used, but for larger boxes, removable cover plates of metal or other approved
material must be supplied with bevelled edges and must be neatly painted.
Cover plates shall be large enough to overlap and cover any gaps between the draw box
and the masonry or concrete, and must be finished off to match the surroundings so as
not to mar the architectural appearance of the building.

5.6 ELECTRIC MOTORS AND STARTERS

All electric motors, except slip-ring motors used in the entire contract shall be of the
totally enclosed type and shall comply with the requirements of BSS 5000 Part 99 and
BSS 5000 Part 2 as amended for continuously rated machines.
All electric motors supplied under this contract shall be of the continuously rated type,
with due rating allowance made for the prevailing atmospheric conditions and altitude. All
motors up to 1.9 kW output may be single phase suitable for operation on 220/230 volts,
50 hertz. Motors above 1.9 kW shall be 3 phase suitable for operation on 380/230 volts,
50 hz supply and shall be of the squirrel cage induction type (except where specified
 B3550 MA - 5-10

otherwise.)
In cases where the rotational inertia of driven equipment (fans, pumps, compressors,
etc.) is such that the run-up time to full speed is longer than 10 seconds, motors above 5
kW output shall be of the slip-ring type, with suitable starters and dust proof removable
covers over the slip-rings.
Motors up to 7,5 kW output may be started direct-on line. All other motors (apart from
those that are slip-ring) shall be supplied with automatic star-delta starters.
All motors shall be provided with starters acceptable to the supply authority. The starters
shall be fitted with all protective devices required to completely protect the motors
concerned, including the following:-
Isolator to isolate the motor and starter.
Adjustable overload trip on each pole, with time lags.
Under volt trips (for motors above 5.5 kW) are to be installed on starters other than
D.O.L.
Some of the motors may be required to be started by remote control. Starters for these
motors shall be suitable for such operation.
All electric motors and equipment installed outside of plantrooms shall be equipped with a
local lock-stop switch within two meters from the motor if the motor is started from the
machine room or remotely.
Electric motors shall be selected to have a capacity of 1,2 times the actual capacity
required by the electrically driven machine.

5.7 WIRING IN CONDUIT

No joints shall be allowed and all looping must be done through approved connectors at
fitting points.
The live phase shall be connected at the switching point. All wiring in conduit shall
conform to the requirements of table 4 of SANS 0142-1981 as amended. Not more than
one circuit shall be accommodated in one circuit unless special permission is obtained
from the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. Before any wires are drawn into the conduit, a
swab is to be drawn through to clear any water, dirt etc.

5.8 PVC INSULATED CABLES

LT cables with PVC insulation must conform to the requirements of SANS 1507 of 1990
as amended, and must be laid according to the requirements of paragraph 1.16 of this
Section B of this specification.

5.9 SOLID CONDUIT

All conduit shall be of heavy gauge steel, screwed and conform to SANS 10162 of 1987
as amended. No conduit shall be less than 20 mm in diameter.
All joints shall be screwed and all outlets fitted with rustproof iron boxes. Conduit must be
either screwed and lock-nutted on both sides and bushed on the inside of the box or
board to which it is attached.
The whole conduit system shall be electrically and mechanically continuous over all joints
by means of screwed couplings, well bonded and efficiently earthed by means of earthing
terminals and earth continuity conductors. The Compressed Air Contractor must keep in
touch with the builder and install all conduit so as not to delay his work and to ensure the
closest co-operation. Every effort must be made to avoid running conduit in "U"-form, but
where this is unavoidable, provision should be made, if possible, to drain the conduit.
 B3550 MA - 5-11

All chasing of brickwork, etc., for conduit shall be carried out under this contract.

5.10 MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS

All miniature circuit breakers of the single and double pole type shall be 250 volt grade,
and triple pole breakers shall be 600 volt grade. Circuit breakers shall be of the
Heinemann, F.W. or other equal approved make.
MCB's may be secured directly to the front panel in which case this panel shall be hinged
and wiring taped together to allow for easy movement of the panel. Preferably the MCB's
shall be mounted on a metal frame attached to the board casing, access being given to
the MCB's and connections by a removable or hinged panel, suitably slotted for toggles,
etc.

5.11 FUSES
Where circuits are scheduled to be fed through fuses, these shall be mounted directly on
the panel. All rewireable fuses shall be of the porcelain bridge type, of approved
manufacture, connected through bushed insulated holes in the panel. An I.C. fuseboard
unit may be used instead of separate fuses. Connections shall be made through the
back of the panel so that no surface wiring results. Tinned copper fuse wire shall be
fitted to suit the loading indicated in the schedules, where rewireable fuses are used, and
cartridge fuses shall be fitted with the appropriate cartridges.

5.12 CHASING OF CONCRETE COLUMNS, BEAMS AND SLABS

The Compressed Air Contractor must take particular care that all pipes, boxes etc., in
columns, beams or slabs are fitted before the concrete is cast. Where, however, through
unforeseen circumstances it becomes necessary to chase columns, beams, or slabs, the
permission of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer must first be obtained. Where this is
not done, the Compressed Air Contractor will be held responsible for any damage to the
structure which may result.

5.13 EARTHING
The whole installation shall be efficiently earthed to the satisfaction of the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer, the Inspector of Factories, the Supply Authority, and strictly in
accordance with the Code of Practice for the Wiring of premises. Any points proposed as
earthing points by the Compressed Air Contractor shall first be approved by the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer before connection.

5.14 FLEXIBLE CONNECTIONS

Flexible connections shall be of "Kopex" manufacture or approved type. All flexible
connections shall be properly earthed to ensure earth continuity.

6 MANUALS AND LITERATURE

At the stage of performance testing, the Compressed Air Contractor shall submit to the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer, three copies of maintenance and operating instructions
each containing the following:
A full set of electrical drawings of the final installation.
A full set of medical gas drawings of the final installation.
A full set of control drawings of the final installation.
The model number and make of all equipment installed together with the supplier's name
 B3550 MA - 5-12

and address as well as recommended filter change-out pressures.

Literature on all equipment installed including wiring diagrams, recommended spare parts
lists together with the model number etc., and the name and address of the supplier.
A list of all control components installed together with model numbers.
All workshop drawings of the plant as installed.
Routine maintenance procedure.
Trouble-shooting checklist.
All wiring diagrams. Additionally, a copy of the wiring diagram is to be framed and hung
in the plantroom.
Certificates/ forms of all testing and commissioning data as follows:
Medical gas pipeline carcass tests i.e leakage test, continuity tests (anti-confusion)
design flow, etc.
Certificates of completion, certificate of conformity for gas installations as issued by the
South Africa Compressed Gases Association.
Test certificates for all pressure vessels.
All wiring diagrams are to be correct in every respect and checked before being
submitted i.e. they are to be correct for the operation of the plant as specified and
installed.
All the above relevant information shall be properly filed and indexed in an appropriate
file.

7 APPROVAL OF EQUIPMENT AND PLANT

Prior to the ordering or purchasing of any items of equipment, the successful
Compressed Air Contractor shall submit samples to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer
for approval by himself as well as the client. This shall include specification sheets
detailing the make, manufacture, model number, capacities and duties.
The Compressed Air Contractor shall further be required to submit full workshop / design
and layout drawings of each gas system to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer for
approval.
All the above mentioned items are to be included in the tender price.
 B3550 MA - 5-13

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 5.2 DETAILED TECHNICAL SPECIFICATION – COMPRESSED AIR

INSTALLATION

1 GENERAL
This section of the specification forms part of, and is to be read in conjunction with all
other parts of this specification and the relevant drawings: i.e. Part 1, 2 and 5 of Part C as
well as Part A.
Where conditions in this tender are at variance with those in proceeding sections
then those below shall be taken as relevant and binding.
The tenderer is to note that this contract forms part of the main building contract.
The JBCC Series 2000 Principal Building Agreement (July 2007, Edition 5) shall be
applicable to this contract, a copy of which is available on the JBCC website,
(www.jbcc.co.za). Refer to the Master Procurement Document PART A.

2 DRAWINGS
The following drawing numbers form part of this specification:
3550 MG/01 : Golden Gate Dinosaur Centre, Compressed Air Installation.
A list drawings issued with this document is available in Part 5.4 of this document.

3 QUALIFIED CONTRACTORS
The successful tenderer will be required to prove to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer
that he has qualified Compressed Air pipeline technicians on his staff establishment as
well as recognised test equipment for the successful completion of a safe working
pipeline installation.
The Compressed Air Contractor shall employ only skilled artisans and technicians
approved by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer who are competent in this type of work.
Technicians shall have served a recognised training course in medical gas pipeline
technology or shall have had at least four years practical experience and training in
medical gas pipeline installations. The work shall be carried out in accordance with the
standards laid down by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer.
The contracting firm shall be a recognised Compressed Air, installation contractor
specialising in this field.
The Compressed Air Contractor is reminded that the tender drawings are schematic and
it remains the contractor's responsibility to apply all the rules and regulations of the
applicable SANS Codes.

4 SCOPE OF WORK
The scope of work shall be as follows:
 B3550 MA - 5-14

(a) One (1) air compressor.

(b) Compressed air reticulation piping in copper including all fittings and
appurtenances to suit.
(c) Commissioning and handover.

5 COMPRESSED AIR PLANT

5.1 COMPRESSOR
Air compressors shall be belt driven constructed from composite cast iron with oil
lubricated three cylinder air compressor pump. The air compressor shall be a single
stage compressor.
The air receiver shall be complaint with the Occupational Health and Safety Act (OSH Act
85 of 1993 as amended) for pressure vessels. The air receiver shall have a scratch and
corrosion resistant epoxy coat.
a. The unit shall be of the Airstream Puma range or other equal approved and shall
have the following features.
b. The air compressor shall be complete with a heavy duty electric motor.
c. The air compressor shall be supplied with all mandatory certification.
d. The air compressor shall further have the following minimum features:
e. Rubberised anti-vibration feet
f. Electromagnetic pressure switch
g. Pressure gauge
h. Large diameter flywheels
i. Efficient cooling fan with direct cooling over the pump heads and after cooler
pipe.
j. Manual condensate drain valve
k. Comprehensive instruction manual
l. 12 Month warranty
m. The following schedule indicates the minimum duty required from each
compressor:

Piston displacement 59 CFM

Free Air Delivery 46.7 CFM
Max Pressure 10 Bar
Motor Power 11.2kW
Receiver Capacity 500 litres
Electrical Supply 380/50/2 V/Hz/P
Outlet Connection ½ “ B.S.P
5.2 REFRIGERANT DRYER
The dryer shall be of the Airstream direct expansion refrigerant dryer type, model RSLF-
24-SSD other equal approved.
Air exiting the dryer shall be technically “dry” to a pressure dew point of 3°C (i.e. -
24°C atmospheric dew point).
Technical Specification:
Capacity : 2400 l/min at 7 bar working pressure and 38°C
Absorbed power : 0.47kW, 220V
Refrigerant : R134a
5.3 ELECTRICAL CONTROL AND SWITCHGEAR PANEL
 B3550 MA - 5-15

A 400V bare ended cable shall be provide by the Electrical Contractor in the position as
shown on the drawings. The Compressed Air Contractor shall install and elctrcal control
and switch gear panel complete with all interconnecting wiring from the cable and to a
starter panel. The Electrical control panel shall conform to the Standard Technical
Specification (clause 5, Part 5.1) and include all wiring and electrical equipment
necessary for the successful operation of this plant.
5.3.1 GENERAL
Supply and install an electrical control and switchgear panel in the position as indicated
on the drawings. The electrical panel shall accommodate the following equipment:
 Main isolator.
 Circuit breaker(s) and contactor(s) for the compressor, refrigerant dryer and
automatic drainage system including relays.
 Circuit breaker(s) and contactor(s) for the compressor, refrigerant dryer and
automatic drainage system including relays.heat pump including relays.
 A circuitbreaker and contactor for the on/off switch of the system.
 Starter panel with overload protection in laboratory- position to be finalised
 Earthing
 Wiring Diagram
The electrical panel shall be wall mounted a suitable position as indicated. The panel
must be manufactured from 2mm sheet metal with the necessary supports to install it
against the wall. All joints shall be welded. The panel shall be equipped with hinged
doors manufactured from sheet metal adequately supported and strengthened. All
switches and instrumentation must be secured on the top of the panel door. The panel
shall be weatherproof in terms of IP54 and shall be epoxy painted (orange colour).
5.3.2 ELECTRICAL CABLING
The supply, installation and connection of all electrical cabling between the electrical
panel and the installed equipment shall form part of this contract. All cabling shall be PVC
SWA PVC armoured cable neatly installed on cable racks. The cable racks and trays
shall be installed as part of this contract.
A 400V bare ended with earth and neutral power cable shall be supplied and installed by
the Electrical Contractor at the control and switchgear of panel each plant.
This contract shall cover:
 Termination of the cable end on the main isolator in the panel.
 Supply, install and connect power supplies between the panel and:
 The compressor,
 The refrigerant dryer.
 Automatic drain points
 The starter panel in the laboratory
 The main plant shall operate as follows:

5.4 CYCLONE WATER SEPARATOR

This shall be of the Airstream Model ASA 5 type other equal approved, condensing from
the compressed air by means of cyclonic action, at a rate of 2040 l/min.

5.5 PRE-FILTRATION / PARTICULATE SYSTEM

This shall be of the Airstream Model AF 050A-AE2 other equal approved particulate filter
type, as a pre-filter removing the bulk moisture and out from the compressed air,
removing particles down to 0.7 microns. The capacity shall be 2040 l/min.

5.6 INLINE FILTER REGULATORS (2 OFF)

 B3550 MA - 5-16

These shall be located at each of the outlets and shall be of the Airstream Model FR200-
2 other equal approved type.

5.7 MOISTURE TRAPS

Moisture traps shall be installed at each of the outlets, details of which are shown on the
drawing.

6 COMPRESSED AIR PIPING

All compressed air piping and fittings shall be copper Class 3 – Heavy wall pipes (half-
hard) to SANS 0460 as amended.
Piping shall be sleeved through walls.
Piping shall be fixed to the laboratory structure by means of rubber-lined holder bats. All
holder bats shall be placed at least 500mm away from a raduised elbow. Holder bats
shall not be over tightened to allow for a gliding action when expansion takes place.
Pipe supports shall be spaced as follows:
Pipe size (mm) Interval for vertical items (m) Interval for horizontal items
(m)
15 1.9 1.3
28 2.5 1.9
All fittings shall be capillary fittings manufactured from pure copper. The fittings shall
comply with SANS 01067-Part 2- as amended. Solders shall have 75%/25% tin and zinc
composition and only “universal” flux may be used. No resin core or acid core or solders
containing lead shall be used. The following equipment must be used at all time when
soldering of fittings and pipes take place:
a. Tube cutter (not hacksaw)
b. Calibration tool
c. Cleaning brushes
d. Blow pipe
e. Flux as specified
f. Solder as specified
g. Wet cloth

7 SERVICE POINTS

7.1 DUST COLLECTOR UNIT

No Service points shall be provided in/at the dust collector unit. The Compressed Air
Contractor shall be required to provide the piping at the dust collector unit as shown on
the drawings and the connection of these pipe points to the extraction arms shall be done
by the dust collector installer. It is to be noted that the number of pipes provided at
various extraction arms varies, as shown on the drawings.

8 COMPRESSED AIR RETICULATION DRAIN POINTS

The Compressed Air Contractor shall install all compressed air reticulation piping with a
fall of 1m in 100m in the direction of air flow. Drain points shall be installed at a distance
of 1 point for every 30meters of main run.
 B3550 MA - 5-17

Drainage points shall be provided by using equal tees and arranged to change the
direction of flow. Any branch leaving the main runs shall be taken of the top of the main
run.
Drains of the branch main shall be supplied and installed complete with a CA air trap,
strainer, fittings and pressure balance pipe.

9 BUILDER’S WORK
The Compressed Air Contractor shall make provision in his tender for builders' work
which shall include the following:
Drilling of holes for the purpose of pipe installation.
All holes through walls for pipes, cables etc. are to be sealed off.
Sleeves for each pipe through walls.

10 MANUALS AND LITERATURE

The Compressed Air Contractor is responsible for the provision of three (3) sets of
manuals to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. Each manual shall be comprehensive
and shall include full details of all the equipment installed with the relative wiring
diagrams, duct layout and commissioning data. The manuals shall be in terms of the
Standard Mechanical Specification (clause 14 Part 2.1).

11 PAINTING AND TRUNKING

All painting necessary for the proper and neat completion of this installation forms part of
this contract as per clause 19 of Part 2. All mild steel used that is not hot dipped
galvanized shall be cleaned and primed with red oxide paint before being given two coats
of black enamel paint unless stated otherwise.
All exposed wiring and piping shall run in neat and clean trunking of appropriate size. The
trunking shall be neatly painted to colour match the wall/ ceiling/ roof to which it is
mounted.
Exposed ducting to be cleaned, free from dents, scratch and ink markings. All hangers
and supports shall be neatly installed and edge shall have smooth finishes.

12 VARIATIONS AND OMISSIONS

Tenderers shall list any deviations between their tender submitted and the specification.
If nothing is listed, this tender shall be regarded to meet the specification in all respects.
All deviations must be accompanied by a full set of technical literature.

13 LABELLING
All labelling shall be as specified in the Standard Mechanical Specification, clause 19 of
Part 2.

14 ENGINEERING, COMMISSIONING AND HANDING OVER

The Compressed Air Contractor shall be responsible for the complete engineering of the
proposed installation, which shall amongst others include the following:
Selection of components, taking into account prevailing site conditions, space availability,
etc.
 B3550 MA - 5-18

Determining routes for wiring.

Any other related engineering matters.
The Compressed Air Contractor shall also be responsible for the final commissioning of
the systems, which shall include the adjustment of all control components, to meet the
requirements of the Consulting Mechanical Engineer. Full details of parameters will be
provided during the execution of the contract. Demonstration of the control and
interlocking functions to the Consulting Mechanical Engineer prior to handover, shall be
the responsibility of the Compressed Air Contractor.
Handover of the contract can only be accomplished after full completion.

15 GUARANTEE AND MAINTENANCE

This contract shall include a 12 month guarantee on all plants and equipment, valid for 12
months from the date of practical completion.
This contract includes for regular maintenance of all plants and equipment for a 12
month period from the date of practical completion. This shall include cleaning and
servicing and a 3 monthly log book is to be completed and signed by the client, of all work
 B3550 MA - 5-19

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 5.3 SCHEDULE OF EQUIPMENT OFFERED

NB: Details of all relevant data must be filled in by tenderer. Failure to do so will invalidate
the tender
Further details on material and equipment must be submitted by means of a covering
letter, brochures, specifications, etc.
All such brochures, etc. must be noted in a covering letter.

1 COMPRESSOR
Manufacturer
Supplier
Model No.
NB: Details of each individual unit to be submitted to the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer for approval prior to ordering thereof.

2 AIR DRYER
Manufacturer
Supplier
Model No.
NB: Details of each individual unit to be submitted to the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer for approval prior to ordering thereof.

3 MOISTURE TRAPS
Manufacturer
Supplier
Model No.

4 OIL TRAPS
Manufacturer
Supplier
Model No.
 B3550 MA - 5-20

5 FILTER REGULATORS
Manufacturer
Supplier
Model No.

6 CYCLONE WATER SEPARATOR

Manufacturer
Supplier
Model No.

Declaration
I herewith declare that all the equipment above shall be designed, manufactured and
delivered in accordance with the specification.
I further declare that equipment which does not meet the requirements of the
specification has been listed in a separate letter, which accompanies this tender and that
the way in which the equipment differs from the specified equipment, has been clearly
defined.
NAME OF FIRM:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
TENDERER’S SIGNATURE:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
NAME (in Block letters):
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
ADDRESS:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
TELEPHONE NUMBER:
………………………………………………………………………………………………………
 B3550 MA - 5-21

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 5.4 LIST OF DRAWINGS

DRAWING NUMBER DESCRIPTION

3550MG/01 Upper Ground: Compressed Air

The tenderer is to note that the scale of 1:100 indicated on the drawings are for a A0
paper dimensions.
 B3550 MA - 5-22

GOLDEN GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK

DINOSAUR CENTRE

PART C: MECHANICAL INSTALLATION

DIHLASE REFERENCE NO: B3550 MA

PART 5.5 BILLS OF QUANTITIES

1 GENERAL NOTES
1. These bills of quantities contain pages numbered consecutively in each bill as indicated
in the Master Index. Before the tenderer submits his tender, he should check the number
of pages, and if any are found missing or duplicated or the figures or writing indistinct, or
the bills of quantities contain any obvious errors, he should apply to the Consulting
Mechanical Engineer at once and have same rectified, as no liability whatsoever will be
admitted by the Consulting Mechanical Engineer in respect of errors in tender due to the
foregoing.
2. The bills of quantities form part of and must be read in conjunction with the specifications
and drawings which contain the full description of the work to be done and material and
equipment to be used.
3. The priced bills as well as all the completed schedules and any other relevant
information must be submitted with the tender.
4. The total tender sum in the tender form shall constitute the contract price of the
successful tenderer. Tenderers are advised to check their item extensions and total
additions, as no claim for arithmetical errors will be considered.
5. No alteration, erasure or addition is to be made in the text of the bills of quantities.
Should any alteration, erasure of addition be made, it will not be recognised but the
original wording of the bills of quantities will be adhered to.
6. The priced bills of quantities of the successful tenderer will be checked and the
Consulting Mechanical Engineer reserves the right to call for reasonable adjustments to
any individual price and to rectify any discrepancy whilst the total tender price, as
submitted, remains unaltered.
The responsibility for the accuracy of the quantities written into the bills remains with the
party who prepared the bills. The tenderer shall be relieved of responsibility of measuring
quantities at the tender stage, and the tender sum submitted shall be in respect of the
quantities set out in the bills, although he will be required to make his assessment of
items such as fixings, etc. from details stated in the bills and shall include in the item
prices for such small installation materials as are required for the complete installation in
accordance with the specification.
8. The rates contained in this document shall apply irrespective of the final quantities of the
different classes and kinds of work actually executed.
9. The Contractor and the Employer or his Agent may agree that the total of any bill or bills,
including any variations by way of additions thereto or deductions there from, represents
a fair and accurate quantification of the items set out in the bills and the parties may
agree final payment on that basis. In the event of any dispute as to the quantities, then
the disputed item or items shall be adjusted where necessary.
 B3550 MA - 5-23

10. The quantities in these bills of quantities are not to be used for ordering purposes.
Quantities set out in this document are to be regarded as provisional only.
The work, when completed, shall be remeasured and the final contract sum calculated,
using the tendered tariffs and the finally measured quantities.
11. Variations in the scope and extent of the work included in the bills shall be allowed to
meet the Employer's requirements.
The rules governing the extent and valuation of variations shall be those provided for in
the conditions of contract.
12. Unless separate rates for the supply and for the installation of any item is specifically
called for, the supply and installation costs of any item shall be fully included in the unit
price.
The description of each item shall, unless otherwise stated herein, be held to include
making, conveying and delivering, unloading, storing, unpacking, hoisting, setting, fitting
and fixing in position, cutting and waste, patterns, models and templets, plant, temporary
works, return of packings, establishment charges, profit and all other obligations arising
out of the conditions of contract.
13. The quantities and rates included for dayworks shall form part of the tender price, but
tenderers shall note that this item must be regarded as indicative and will only be payable
to the Contractor if and when covered by a Variation Order.
14. Tenderers shall price the Preliminaries under any or all of three groups, viz:
a. a fixed amount
b. an amount varied in proportion to the final contract value as compared to
the tender price
c. an amount varied in proportion to the final contract period as compared to
the originally specified contract period.
The allocation of prices to the three categories listed above must be realistic and the
Contractor may be required to justify the allocation of the prices. Attention is particularly
drawn to the right reserved in terms of Clause 6 above.
15. All provisional sums shall be expended as directed by the Consulting Mechanical
Engineer and any balance remaining shall be deducted from the amount of the contract
sum.
16. Provision is made on the final summary for the applicable Value Added Tax to be added.
In these bills, the word “supply” shall be deemed to include the acquiring of equipment
and materials from suppliers and workshops and the delivery, off-loading and safe
storage of the equipment on site.
18. In this bills the word “install” shall be deemed to include the unpacking, hoisting, placing
and fixing, suspending or building in an approved position, cutting, connection,
commissioning, testing and handing over of plant, equipment and materials.

2 METHOD OF MEASUREMENT
1 Pipework has been measured along centre lines and include for the length of any fittings.
Fittings to pipework have been measured as “extra over”. Accordingly, the rate allowed
for the fittings should include the additional labour and material over normal straight
sections to manufacture and erect such fittings. The size of the fitting shall always be the
maximum dimensions.
The rate for piping shall include all necessary jointing materials and shall allow for offcuts
and wastage.
 B3550 MA - 5-24

2 Piping shall be measured in metres, stating the internal or external diameter in

accordance with accepted trade usage. The rate for piping shall include cutting, jointing
and running joints. The lengths of pipes shall be measured over/through all fittings, but
not over valves, pumps and inline instruments such as strainers, site glasses, etc.
Pipe fittings shall be measured “in number” as “extra over” piping. Pipe fittings such as
elbows, bends, tees, etc. to pipes not exceeding 50mm diameter shall be given in one
item for each diameter of pipe. Purpose-made fittings are to include for lining up of
fittings. Welded joints, including joints to fittings, shall be measured separately and shall
allow for all cutting, preparation of ends and welding.
PART C: B 3550 MA 5 - 25

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

BILL NO. 1
PRELIMINARY AND GENERAL ITEMS

Allow for all preliminary and general items for

this project, but excluding items priced
elsewhere in these Bills (These amounts will
be paid pro rata to the rest of the amounts
claimed by the contractor, relative to the
tender amount)

1. CONTRACTUAL REQUIREMENTS
Tenderers to allow for compliance with all the
Item Sum
conditions of contract (Refer to main contract)

2. SUPPLEMENTARY PREAMBLES
Tenderers must study the drawings and the
Mechanical Specification (Part C of the main
contract) for full description of items before pricing
this bill. Of Particular mention is the following
parts:
Part 1 of part C: Tender Requirements and
Item Sum
condition of contract
Part 2 of part C: Standard Mechanical
Item Sum
Specification
Part 5.1 of part C: Industrial Gas Installation
Item Sum
Standard Specification
Part 5.2 of part C: Industrial Gas Installation
Item Sum
Detailed Specification
Part 5.3 of part C: Schedule of Equipment
Item Sum
Offered
Part 5.4 of part C: List of Drawings Item Sum
Part 5.5 of part C: Bills of Quantitites Item Sum

3. JOINT TRADES
Tenderers to allow for all costs which may be
required in order to co-ordinate and liaise with the
Item Sum
other Trade Contractors, especially with the
electrical contractor

4. SUPERVISOR
Tenderers to allow for a full time working
supervisor during the duration of the contract, who
shall have the delegated authority to receive Item Sum
instructions and make decisions regarding this
contract

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 5 - 27

Item Description Unit Qty Tariff Amount

BILL NO. 2
COMPRESSED AIR

Supply, delivery and installation of medical

grade copper pipes, inclusive of cutting,
jointing, clamping, brackets, soldering and
painting

1 COMPRESSED AIR

1.1 Supply and delivery to site of the following

plant and equipment in terms of Clause 5 of
the Detailed Technical Specification, including
all electrical items.

Compressor No 1
Refrigerant dryer No 1

1.2 For the installation, commissioning, testing

and handing over of the following including
electrical work.

Compressor No 1
Refrigerant dryer No 1

1.3 For the complete supply, delivery, installation,

testing, commissioning and handing over of
the following:

Cycole water seperator No 1

Pre-filter / particulate filter No 1
After-filter / coalescing filter No 1
Automatic drain unit No 1
In-line filter regulators No 2
Moisture Traps No 3
Oil Traps No 2
Pressure gauges with sockets etc. No 2

1.4 Piping

22mm dia. pipe m 40

15mm dia. pipe m 25

Amount carried forward R

PART C: B 3550 MA 5 - 28

Item Description Unit Qty Rate Amount

Amount brought forward R

1.5 Extra over for copper fittings

22mm dia. couplings No 15

15mm dia. couplings No 15

22mm dia. tee pieces No 6

15mm dia. tee pieces No 4

22mm dia. bends No 20

15mm dia. bends No 15

22mm dia. reducers No 6

15mm dia. reducers No 6

1.6 Isolating Valves

22mm dia. shut-off valves No 6

15mm dia. shut-off valves No 3

1.7 Quick release couplings

ø15 No 4

3. GENERAL

Shop drawings Sets 2

Operating and maintenance manuals Sets 3

4. TESTS

Pressure testing on all piped gasses Item

Gas continuity test on all gasses Item

5. COMMISSIONING AND HAND OVER Item

6. TRAINING Item

7. MAINTENANCE DURING GUARANTEE PERIOD

Month 12

8. CODING AND LABELLING Item

9 PAINTING Item

TOTAL FOR BILL NO. 2 (Carry to Summary) R

Contract number: SP-GG-0161

Part C3: Scope of Work

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
Page 88 of 185
 Contract number: SP-GG-0161

CONSTRUCTION OF DINOSAUR INTERPRETIVE CENTRE AND ASSOCIATED INFRASTRUCTURE, GOLDEN

GATE HIGHLANDS NATIONAL PARK
CONTRACT NO: SP-GG-0161

C3.1 Scope of Work

[Use for JBCC Series 2000 Principal Building Agreement (edition 5.0)]

1 DESCRIPTION OF THE WORKS

1.1 Employer’s objectives
To construct a world class Dinosaur Interpretive Center & Associated Infrastructure in Golden Gate Highlands
National Park.
1.2 Overview of the works
The works comprise Construction of Dinosaur Interpretive Center & Associated Infrastructure:
 Interpretive Center (offices & work space, reception, lecture hall, display area, kiosk/curio shop)
 Activity node – office, activity areas (children), group meeting area.
 Parking - paved parking area
 Look-out point
 Exhibition & display design installations
 Soft landscaping & children’s play area
 Bulk services
o Upgrade electrical supply – transformer & cable
o Sewer – connect to existing system
o Water – increase dam capacity and borehole supply
1.3 Extent of the works
As above
1.4 Location of the works
Glen Reenen Camp Site, Golden Gate Highlands National Park
1.5 Temporary works
Nil
2 DRAWINGS
2.1 See drawing List on CD

3 PROCUREMENT
3.1 Subcontracting
3.1.1 Scope of mandatory subcontractor work
Nil
3.1.2 Preferred subcontracting / suppliers
n/a
3.1.3 Subcontracting procedures
n/a
4 CONSTRUCTION
4.1 Applicable SANS 2001 standards for construction works
SANS 10142-1 of 2006
SABS 0400
SANS 1200
4.2 Applicable national and international standards
SANS

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
Page 89 of 185
 Contract number: SP-GG-0161

SABS
4.3 Certification by recognized bodies
All certification must be submitted to Technical Services of SANParks for approval
4.4 Agrément certificates
Alternative materials with Agrément Certificates must be submitted to Technical Services SANParks for approval
prior to work commencing
4.5 Plant materials and equipment supplied by the employer
Nil
4.6 Services and facilities provided by the employer
 Water: Option A as hereinafter defined
 Electricity: Option A as hereinafter defined
 Telecommunication services: All communication must be provided by contractor.
 Ablution facilities: No Ablution facilities available. Chemical toilets to be provided by contractor.
 Medical / first aid facilities: to be provided by contractor
 Fire protection services: to be provided by contractor for area of the works

4.7 Other facilities and services

All temporary facilities to be provided by contractor

5 MANAGEMENT OF THE WORKS

5.1 Applicable SANS 1921 standards
The following parts of SANS 1921 Construction works standards and associated specification data are
applicable to the works:
1) SANS 1921 – 1: General engineering and construction works
2) SANS 1921 – 5: Earthworks activities which are to be performed by hand
The abovementioned South African National Standards make several references to the Specification Data for
data, provisions and variations that make these standards applicable to this contract. The Specification Data
shall have precedence in the interpretation of any ambiguity or inconsistency between it and these standards.
Each item of Specification Data given below is cross-referenced to the clause in the standard to which it mainly
applies.
The associated Specification Data is as follows:

SANS 1921-1, General engineering and construction works

Clause Specification data

Essential data

4.1.7 There are no requirements for drawings, information and calculations for which
the contractor is responsible
4.2.1 The responsibility strategy assigned to the contractor for the works is A.
4.2.2 The structural engineer is SANParks Engineers.
4.3.1 The planning, programme and method statements are to comply with the following:

1. Immediately on award of the Contract and prior to commencement on site, the Contractor, in

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
Page 90 of 185
Contract number: SP-GG-0161

conjunction with the Principal Agent, shall agree the working Programme covering the first month
of the Construction Period. During the first month of the Construction Period the Contractor shall
prepare and draw up in conjunction with the Principal Agent the Programme for the balance of
the Works in accordance with the conditions stated bellow.

2. The Principal Agent shall have the right to modify such Programme to accommodate
changes necessary in his opinion for coordinating the project as a whole. Any cost implications
relating to such modification shall be dealt with in accordance with the provisions of the
Agreement.

3. This Programme shall be drawn up in accordance with the dates given herein for possession,
sectional completion and Practical Completion and shall be in sufficient and approved detail to
ensure control over the work.

4. Notwithstanding the fact that the Programme has been prepared in conjunction with the Principal
Agent, the Contractor shall be responsible at all times for maintaining the accuracy, validity and
reasonableness of the Programme, and the implementation thereof.

5. The Programme shall be compiled based on the Critical Path Method of programming and the
critical activities are to be clearly highlighted. It shall be compiled in such a way that logic is not
constrained by resource limitations unless specifically agreed otherwise by the Principal Agent.
The Programme will be processed on the Principal Agents system and the Contractor shall
provide all the co-operation necessary to achieve this.

6. Documentation will not be available in complete detail at the commencement stage. However
the Contractor, in conjunction with the Principal Agent, shall plan the Works on provisional
information, to an agreed level of detail relating to the level of detailed information available and
with sufficient scope to include future detail without disrupting the basic logic as initially agreed.
The quantities contained in this document are provisional and shall be utilized as a guide only for
the drawing up of the Programme. Where assumptions are made in regard to programming
aspects, such assumptions shall be agreed by the Contractor and the Principal Agent, and
suitably recorded in the Programme.
7. Should circumstances change to the extent where the Contractor is of the opinion that changes
to the Programme are required, then the Contractor shall make written request to the Principal
Agent for such changes, clearly identifying the reasons for requiring such change. The
Contractor and Principal Agent shall thereafter agree such changes, if any. Should the Principal
Agent be of the opinion that the Programme requires revisions, and notwithstanding the fact that
a request for such revision has not been received from the Contractor, the Principal Agent shall
be entitled to instruct the Contractor to revise the Programme accordingly, unless the Contractor
can submit reasonable justification for not doing so. Any acceleration and/or special measures
sanctioned by the Principal Agent together with associated effects shall be incorporated in a
revision to the Programme.
8. The Contractor and the Principal Agent shall, at regular intervals not exceeding one month,
agree the state of progress of the Works relative to the latest agreed revision of the Programme.
Such agreement shall include the recording of actual commencement and completion dates for
each activity and shall constitute the official record of the progress at such point in time.
9. In addition to and based on the Programme systems and format dictated above, the Contractor
shall devise Detailed Working Programmes. These shall be drawn up on a regular basis (at least
monthly), to the satisfaction of the Principal Agent. Such Working Programmes shall at all times
relate to the constraints of the current Programme.
10. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary contained herein the Principal Agent at all times
reserves the right to direct the order in which the various parts of the Contract are to be
executed. The Contractor shall give priority to any individual section or portion of the Works that,
in the opinion of the Principal Agent, requires to be expedited.
11. Should the Contractor and/or Principal Agent be of the opinion that such instruction warrants a
revision to the Programme, then the provisions of 7 above shall apply.
12. Should it appear, in the Principal Agent’s opinion, that work in any area is not being executed in
accordance with the requirements of the Programme, the Contractor shall provide additional
manpower and resources and shall work additional overtime and do everything else required to
bring the work back to Programme to the satisfaction of the Principal Agent.

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
Page 91 of 185
Contract number: SP-GG-0161

4.3.2 1. The Contractor is required to identify and provide the employer with material procurement
and construction lead in periods for the following aspects:
1.1 Building Information
1.1.1 Foundation Layouts (Setting Out)
1.1.2 Reinforcing Schedules
1.1.3 Concrete Layouts (including pile caps, ground beams, columns, beams, stairs, etc)
1.1.4 Concrete Details
1.1.5 Paint Specifications
1.1.6 Metal Work etc.

2. The Contractor is further required to identify and provide the employer with lead in periods
required for the appointment of anticipated sub-contractors for:
2.1 Sundry Fittings
2.2 Sundry Metalwork
2.3 Sundry Builder’s Work
4.3.3 The notice period for inspection is 14 days.
4.7.3 Blasting operations will not be required.
4.9.3 Specific requirements of the employer are described in the scope of work.
4.12.2 The contractor will provide representative samples of materials, workmanship and finishes as the
Principal Agent may require.
Upon request of Principal Agent
4.14.1 Contractor will not be allowed to set up accommodation on site. Contractor to provide own
accommodation and transport of workers outside of the park
4.14.3 The office accommodation, equipment, accommodation for site meetings and other facilities for use
by the employer and his agents are:
Nil
4.14.5 The Contractor is required to provide latrine and ablution facilities.
4.14.6 A Construction sign board and necessary H&S sign/notice boards are required. All signboards
need to be approved / accepted by the Employer prior to erection.
4.17.1 The requirements for the termination, diversion or maintenance of existing services are:
Nil
4.17.3 Services which are known will be pointed / are to be pointed out on site by the Employer.
4.17.4 The requirements for detection apparatus are:
No as-built drawings exist
4.18 The following standards and specifications shall be in addition to the provisions of 4.18:
1. The Occupational Health and Safety Act 85 of 1993 and its Construction Regulations 2014. Said act
and regulations are not attached.
2. Health and Safety Specifications for SANParks- Construction of Dinosaur Interpretive Center &
Associated Infrastructure Said Specification is attached as Annexure A of the Scope of Work.]
4.19 The following standards and specifications shall be in addition to the provisions of 4.19:
1. The Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for Construction Activities in SANParks Projects
Said specification is attached as Annexure B of the Scope of Works.
4.22 The works to be undertaken by nominated and selected subcontractors comprise:
Nil

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
Page 92 of 185
Contract number: SP-GG-0161

Variations

1 Replace 4.1.9 with the following:

All rights of publication of articles in the media, together with any advertising relating to, or in any
way connected with this project shall vest in the Employer. The Contractor together with his
Subcontractors shall not, without the written consent of the Employer, cause any statement or
advertisement to be printed, screened or aired by the media.
2 Replace 4.9.3 with the following:
Trees and shrubs shall not be removed, cut back or disturbed in any way without the consent of the
principal agent. Specific requirements of the employer are described in the Scope Of Works.
3 Replace the heading of 4.12 with the following:
“4.12 Materials, samples, fabrication drawings and overloading.”
4 Include the following after 4.1.2.5
“4.12.6 Overloading
The Contractor shall take all necessary steps to ensure that no damage occurs due to
overloading of any portion of the Works or temporary works. Any damage caused to the
Works by overloading shall be made good by the Contractor at his sole expense.”

Additional Clauses

1 Prime Cost Amounts

All prime cost items are for material and goods delivered to site. The contract documents shall
make provision for the contractor to separately price for overheads and profit and for taking delivery,
unloading, checking against invoices and/or delivery notes, getting in, unpacking, storing, hoisting
and fixing of such material and goods. The contractor shall check the quantity and condition of all
materials and goods on taking delivery as any material and goods subsequently found missing or
damaged shall be replaced at the contractor’s expense.
2 Cash flow predictions
The contractor shall provide all reasonable assistance to the principal agent in the preparation of
cash flow projections of claims for payment certificates. Cash flow predictions will be updated by
the Contractor on monthly basis and will be submitted to Employer together with its progress claims.
The projections shall be based on the programme. The cooperation of the contractor in terms of
this item shall not prejudice his right to receive payment in terms of the agreement.
3 Protection/isolation of existing /sectional occupied works
The contractor shall provide all reasonable temporary measures to protect/isolate the existing
and/or sections of the occupied works and remove such measures on completion.
4 Security of the works
The contractor shall take all appropriate measures for general security of the works.
5 Minimum requirements for construction equipment
Construction equipment must comply with all relevant legal requirements and must be adequate to
execute the works.
6 Deposits and fees
The contractor shall pay all deposits and fees and charges according to law, regulations or bylaws
of any local or other authorities that relate to hoardings, the use of pavements, street encroachment
or crossings, permission for the suspension of parking facilities and the like.
7 Water and electricity
The Employer does not warrant that any water supply or electricity supply that may exist is
adequate for the proper execution of the works. The responsibility strategies in terms of the
tabulation below that will apply to the contract are:

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
Page 93 of 185
 Contract number: SP-GG-0161

a) Water :A
b) Electricity :A
Service Option
A B C
Contractor Employer
responsibility responsibility
Water The Contractor is to The Contractor shall make, The Contractor shall make,
provide, and remove and and upon completion and upon completion
make good upon remove, all the necessary remove, all the necessary
completion, all the connections to the connections and water
necessary temporary Employer’s water supply at meters to the Employer’s
plumbing connections and designated points and water supply at designated
purchase water from the make use of water free of points and be responsible
local authority for the works charge for construction for costs associated with all
at his own cost. purposes only. water consumed.
Electricity The Contractor is to The Contractor is to The Contractor shall make,
provide, and remove and provide, and remove and and upon completion
make good upon make good upon remove, all the necessary
completion, all the completion, all the connections and meters to
necessary temporary necessary temporary the Employer’s electrical
electrical connections and electrical connections and supply and be responsible
installations and purchase installations and purchase for costs associated with all
electricity form the local electricity form the local electricity consumed.
authority / ESKOM for the authority / ESKOM for the
works at his own cost. works at his own cost.

5.2.2 Code of Conduct for working in the SANParks

The document Code of Conduct for working in a National Park is applicable to this contract, and is attached as
Annexure C.
5.3 Unauthorized Persons On Site
The Contractor shall at all times strictly exclude all unauthorized persons from the Works.
No workmen or laborers are to be allowed under any circumstances to sleep or deposit any kit on the premises.
Unless a designated enclosed and secure camp site for accommodating the Contractors employees has been
allocated and approved by the Park Officials.
Furthermore the Contractor shall take all measures necessary to ensure that no workmen are allowed into the
building at any time after Practical Completion without the specific permission of the Principal Agent.
5.4 Quality plans and control
Quality inspections will be held at regular intervals. The contractor must notify the Principal Agent of any closure
of works which must be inspected to confirm quality.
5.5 Accommodation of traffic on public roads occupied by the contractor
n/a
5.6 Other contractors on site
n/a

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
Page 94 of 185
 Contract number: SP-GG-0161

5.7 Testing, completion, commissioning and correction of defects

All testing and certification of the works will be done in accordance with the applicable governing regulations and
the procedures for the following will be clarified at the site meeting:
 Use of the works before completion has been certified;
 Handover / beneficial occupation;
 Pre-commissioning and commissioning of the works or part thereof, before and after completion;
 Certifying completion;
 Start-up; operation of the works; special arrangements associated with operating plant and machinery, etc.;
 Training and technology transfer;
 Take over;
 Operational maintenance (if any), after completion;
 Work which contractors may carry out after completion has been certified (in addition to correcting defects);
and
 Arranging access for correction of defects

5.7.1 Product warrantees, guarantees and maintenance instructions/manuals

The Contractor shall obtain and hand over to the Principal Agent on Practical Completion all relevant product
warrantees and guarantees, any operating and maintenance instruction manuals, data or instructions required
by the Principal Agent or provided by manufacturers, suppliers or Subcontractors.
The Contractor shall ensure that all warranties and guarantees received are fully ceded to the Employer on
Works Completion, failing which the release of Construction Guarantee/Retention will be withheld until this is
satisfactorily completed.
5.7.2 Security at completion
At completion, the Contractor shall leave the Works secure with all accesses locked. The Contractor shall
account for and hand over to the Principal Agent all keys, properly labeled with an itemized schedule to be
signed by the Principal Agent as receipt.
5.8 Recording of weather
A record of rain and all other inclement weather should be kept on site.
5.9 Format of communications
All site instructions should be in writing on the prescribed format and will not be an approved site instruction until
the Principal Agent has signed it.
All notifications of inspections and all requests for information should be in writing.
5.9.1 Site Instructions
Contract Instructions issued on Site are to be recorded by the Principal Agent in a Site Instruction Book which
will be issued by the Principal Agent and which shall be maintained on Site. Only Site Instructions issued in
such book will be affected by the contractor.
5.10 Management meetings
The schedule for the site meetings will be agreed upon at the site hand-over meeting.
5.10.1 Progress Meetings
The Principal agent and contractor shall hold meetings related to the progress of the works at regular intervals
and at such time as may be necessary. Subcontractors shall not be present at progress meetings unless
specifically requested by the contractor or principal agent. The principal agent shall record and distribute the
minutes of the meetings.
5.10.2 Technical meetings
At the instance of the principal agent or the contractor meetings shall be held to deal with technical and
subcontractor’s coordination matters.

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
Page 95 of 185
 Contract number: SP-GG-0161

5.11 Forms for contract administration

All contract administration procedures will be agreed upon at the site hand-over meeting.
5.12 Electronic payments
The contractor shall complete the Central Supplier Database to register on the National Treasury Database and
provide the information in order to enable SANParks to pay him or her electronically.
5.13 Daily records
Daily records must be kept of all workers employed on the site as per the attached Attendance Register –
Annexure D. The attendance register must be submitted to the project manager together with the monthly
certificates. The number of workers and person days should be calculated on these registers on a progressive
monthly basis.
5.14 Bonds and guarantees
All guarantees must be delivered to the SANParks Principal Agent.
5.15 Payment certificates
The Principal Agent shall inspect all work and certify work done on a monthly basis. No payment shall be made
for material on site. Material on site must be ceded to the employer and proof of payment to the supplier given to
the employer before any payment of such material on site will be made.
5.16 Permits
n/a
5.17 Proof of compliance with the law
SANParks could request the contractor for proof that all aspects of South African Law are complied with.
5.18 Insurance provided by the employer
n/a
ANNEXES

A Health and Safety Specifications for SANParks – Construction of Dinosaur Interpretive Center & Associated
Infrastructure

B Environmental Management Plan (EMP) for Construction Activities

C Code of Conduct for implementing a SANParks Project

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
Page 96 of 185
Contract number: SP-GG-0161

C3.2: Drawings

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
Page 97 of 185
Contract number: SP-GG-0161

List of Drawings

No Description Drawing No

Refer to Drawing Register attached

Contractor Witness for Employer Witness for

Contractor Employer
Page 98 of 185
GGHNP DINOSAUR INTERPRETATION CENTRE
SANPARKS
DRAWING REGISTER
TENDER ISSUE

DATE: 2016.10.06

DRAWING NUMBER DRAWING NAME SCALE SIZE 2016.06.29 2016.07.08 2016.07.12 2016.07.14 2016.07.18 2016.07.20 2016.07.21 2016.07.28 2016.08.02 2016.08.04 2016.08.24 2016.08.24 2016.08.31 2016.09.07 2016.09.12 2016.09.12 2016.09.19 2016.09.20 2016.09.21 2016.09.21 2016.09.21 2016.09.30 2016.10.05 2016.10.06

100 - PLANS + LAYOUTS

199_2016/INFRM/100 SITE PLAN 1:100 A1 REV A ● ● ● ● REV B ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV C ● ● ● ● REV D ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/101 ARRIVAL + PARKING 1:100 A1 ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ● ● ● REV C ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/103 LOWER GROUND FLOOR (OFFICES + KIOSK) 1:100 A1 ● ● ● ● REV A REV B ● REV C ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV D ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/104 LABS + PLANT ROOM 1:100 A1 REV A ● ● ● REV A ● ● REV B ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● SUPERSEDED ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/105 UPPER GROUND FLOOR (EXHIBITION) 1:100 A1 REV A REV A ● ● REV B REV C ● REV D ● ● REV E REV E ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV F ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/106 DETAIL LAYOUT EXIT LEVEL 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/107 ROOF PLAN 1:100 A1 ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/108 DETAIL LAYOUT PALEO LABS 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/109 CEILING LAYOUT - UPPERG ROUND 1:100 A1 ● ● REV A REV B ● ● ● REV C ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV D ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/110 CEILING PLAN - LOWER GROUND 1:100 A1 ● ● REV A REV B ● ● ● REV C ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV D ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/111 DETAIL PLAN LECTURE HALL 1:100 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/113 DETAIL LAYOUT SANPARKS OFFICES & ACTIVITY HUB 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/114 DETAIL LAYOUT RAMP PLANS 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/115 DETAIL LAYOUT RAMP SECTIONS 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/116 PLANT ROOM DETAIL LAYOUT 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/117 DUCT DETAIL LAYOUT 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A REV B ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV C ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/118 KIOSK DETAIL LAYOUT 1:50 A1 ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/119 FORECOURT DETAIL PLAN 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/120 FORECOURT DETAIL SECTIONS, ELEVATION, 3D 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/127 STRUCTURAL COORDINATION PLAN - UPPER GROUND FLOOR 1:100 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/128 STRUCTURAL COORDINATION PLAN - LOWER GROUND FLOOR 1:100 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/129 SITE PLAN - GREATER EXTENT 1:100 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/130 FLOOR FINISH DIAGRAM LAYOUT 1:100 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A REV B ● ●

200 - SECTIONS
199_2016/INFRM/200 GENERAL ARRANGMENT SECTION SHEET 1 1:50 A1 ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/201 GENERAL ARRANGMENT SECTION SHEET 2 1:50 A1 ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/202 GENERAL ARRANGMENT SECTION SHEET 3 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/203 ENTRANCE RAMP SECTIONS COORDINATION DRAWING 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ●

300 - ELEVATIONS
199_2016/INFRM/300 ELEVATIONS - NORTH, EAST + WEST 1:100 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●

400 - DETAILS
199_2016/INFRM/400 DETAIL BRICK SCREEN AT GENERATOR DETAIL 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/401 HANDRAIL TYPE 1 DETAIL - EXTERNAL APPLICATION 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/402 HANDRAIL TYPE 2 DETAIL - EXTERNAL APPLICATION 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/403 EXHIBITION WINDOW SCREEN DETAIL 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/404 DRYWALL DETAIL 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/405 RECEPTION DESK SHOPFITTING DETAIL - PLAN AND SECTIONS 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/406 RECEPTION DESK SHOPFITTING DETAIL - ELEVATIONS 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/407 KITCHEN SHOPFITTING DETAIL - PLAN AND SECTIONS AA & BB 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/408 KITCHEN SHOPFITTING DETAIL - SECTION CC AND ELEVATIONS 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/409 SKIRTING DETAILS 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/410 PRE-CAST STAIR TREAD DETAILS 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/411 BRICK WALL DETAIL AT DOOR TYPE J (PLANT DOOR) 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/412 MATWELL DETAIL @ RECEPTION 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/413 MATWELL DETAIL @ EXIT 1:50 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/414 DETAIL LAYOUT - BATHROOMS UPPER GROUND PLANS 1:20 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/415 DETAIL LAYOUT - BATHROOMS UPPER GROUND INTERNAL ELEVATIONS 1:20 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/415 DETAIL LAYOUT - BATHROOMS LOWER GROUND 1:20 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/416 CEILING DETAILS 1:10 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/440 COPING DETAILS 1:5 A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A

500 - SCHEDULES
199_2016/INFRM/500 DOOR SCHEDULE 1 ● A1 REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV C ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/501 DOOR SCHEDULE 2 ● A1 REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV C ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/502 SHOPFRONT SCHEDULE 1 ● A1 REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/503 SHOPFRONT SCHEDULE 2 ● A1 REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/504 WINDOW SCHEDULE 1 ● A1 REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/505 WINDOW SCHEDULE 2 ● A1 REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/506 DOOR SCHEDULE 3 ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV C ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/507 FINISHES SCHEDULE ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/508 IRONMONGERY SCHEDULE ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/509 LAB AND KICHENETTE SCHEDULE ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/510 SANITARY SCHEDULE ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV B ● ● ● REV C REV D ●
199_2016/INFRM/511 ELECTRICAL FIXTURES SCHEDULE ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/512 SIGNAGE SCHEDULE 1 ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/513 PROVISIONAL FURNITURE SCHEDULE ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/514 SHOPFRONT SCHEDULE 3 ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/515 SHOPFRONT SCHEDULE 4 ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/516 SHOPFRONT SCHEDULE 5 ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/517 SHOPFRONT SCHEDULE 6 ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/518 WINDOW SCHEDULE 3 ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●
199_2016/INFRM/519 NOTES 1 ● A1 ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● ● REV A ● ●

600 - REPORTS

RECIEPIENTS:
CLIENT: SANPARKS (A. VAN WYK/ C. JONKER) ● ● E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY
CIVIL ENGINEERS: ENDECON (H. BOTHA) ● ● E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY
STRUCTURAL ENGINEERS: ENDECON (C. ERASMUS) ● ● E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY
QUANTITY SURVEYOR: RUBIQUANT (J. PRETORIUS/ C. VAN DER NEST) ● ● E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY
MECHANICAL ENGINEER: DIHLASE (P. VAN ASWEGEN) ● ● E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY
ELECTRICAL ENGINEER: SMEC (J. VOSTER) ● ● E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY
FIRE ENGINEER: SEE MECHANICAL ENGINEER ● ● E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY
WET SERVICES: SEE MECHANICAL ENGINEER ● ● E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY
LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: OVP (J. VAN PAPENDORP/ J. VAN NIEKERK) ● ● E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY
ACOUSTIC ENGINEER: LINSPACE (I. LIN) ● ● E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY E-COPY

ABOVE DOCUMENTS UPLOADED ONTO SHARED DROPBOX FOLDER/FTP ● ● YES YES YES YES YES YES NO YES NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO NO YES YES YES

ISSUED FOR:

AP = For Approval; CS = Council Submission; CI = Construction Issue; FI = For Information; TI = Tender Issue ● ● FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI FI TI TI TI

SIGNED
 DRAWING REGISTER

Project GOLDEN GATE - DINOSAUR INTERPRETATION CENTRE

Mashabane Rose Associates Contract no. P-2536

Distribution For the attention of:
Date: 19 October 2016

Mashabane Rose Associates Sarah de Villiers Date Issued and no. copies
Rubiquant Caren van der Nest D 1 19 23 9 21 11 19
M 7 7 8 9 9 10 10
Y 16 16 16 16 16 16 16
A0 11 15 18 1 1 1 1
Drawing Size: A1 - - 1 1 1 1
PDF 11 15 18 1 1 1 1

Information x x x
Comment
Issued for:
Tender x x x x
Construction

Format (electronic - dxf, dwg or pdf, paper - p) dwg dwg pdf pdf pdf pdf pdf

Size
Drawing no. Description Revision
CIVIL

GENERAL
P/2536/C/G/2/001 GENERAL LAYOUT OF PROPOSED SERVICES A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/G/7/001 BULK EARTHWORKS A1 1 1
P/2536/C/G/7/002 BULK EARTHWORKS (PHASE 1) A1 0
P/2536/C/G/7/003 BULK EARTHWORKS (PHASE 2) A1 0
P/2536/C/G/7/004 BULK EARTHWORKS (PHASE 3 & 4) A1 0

ROADS
P/2536/C/R/1/001 GENERAL LAYOUT OF ROADS (SHEET 1 OF 3) A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/R/1/002 GENERAL LAYOUT OF ROADS (SHEET 2 OF 3) A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/R/1/003 GENERAL LAYOUT OF ROADS (SHEET 3 OF 3) A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/R/5/001 GENERAL ROADS DETAILS (SHEET 1 OF 2) A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/R/5/002 GENERAL ROADS DETAILS (SHEET 2 OF 2) A1 1 1
SEWER
P/2536/C/S/1/001 GENERAL LAYOUT OF SEWER SERVICES A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/S/2/001 SEWER LONGITUDINAL SECTIONS A1 0 0
P/2536/C/S/3/001 GENERAL SEWER DETAILS A1 0 1 1

STORMWATER
P/2536/C/SW/1/001 GENERAL LAYOUT OF STORMWATER SERVICES A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/SW/3/001 GENERAL STORMWATER DETAILS (SHEET 1 OF 5) A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/SW/3/002 GENERAL STORMWATER DETAILS (SHEET 2 OF 5) A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/SW/3/003 GENERAL STORMWATER DETAILS (SHEET 3 OF 5) A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/SW/3/004 GENERAL STORMWATER DETAILS (SHEET 4 OF 5) A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/SW/3/005 GENERAL STORMWATER DETAILS (SHEET 5 OF 5) A1 0 1 1

WATER
P/2536/C/W/1/001 GENERAL LAYOUT OF WATER SERVICES (SHEET 1 OF 2) A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/W/1/002 GENERAL LAYOUT OF WATER SERVICES (SHEET 2 OF 2) A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/W/3/001 GENERAL WATER DETAILS (SHEET 1 OF 2) A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/W/3/002 GENERAL WATER DETAILS (SHEET 2 OF 2) A1 0 1 1
A1 0 1

BUILDING
P/2536/C/B/11/001 GENERAL NOTES A1 A A 0 0 0
P/2536/C/B/18/001 NORTHERN PILE LAYOUT (SHEET 1 OF 4) A0 C 0 0 1
P/2536/C/B/18/002 WESTER PILE LAYOUT (SHEET 1 OF 2) A0 C 0 0 1
P/2536/C/B/18/003 SOUTHERN PILE LAYOUT (SHEET 1 OF 3) A0 C 0 0 1
P/2536/C/B/18/004 EASTERN PILE LAYOUT (SHEET 1 OF 4) A0 C 0 0 1
P/2536/C/B/18/005 NORTHERN GROUND BEAM LAYOUT (SHEET 1 OF 4) A0 B C 0 1 1
P/2536/C/B/18/006 WESTERN GROUND BEAM LAYOUT (SHEET 2 OF 4) A0 B C 0 1 1
P/2536/C/B/18/007 SOUTHERN GROUND BEAM LAYOUT (SHEET 3 OF 4) A0 B C 0 1 1
P/2536/C/B/18/008 EASTERN GROUND BEAM LAYOUT (SHEET 4 OF 4) A0 B C 0 1 1

STRUCTURE
P/2536/C/C/2/001 SURFACEBED LAYOUT: NORTHERN PART (SHEET 1 OF 4) A0 A B C 0 1 2 2
P/2536/C/C/2/002 SURFACEBED LAYOUT: WASTERN PART (SHEET 2 OF 4) A0 A B C 0 1 1
P/2536/C/C/2/003 SURFACEBED LAYOUT: SOUTHERN PART (SHEET 3 OF 4) A0 A B C 0 1 1
P/2536/C/C/2/004 SURFACEBED LAYOUT: EASTERN PART (SHEET 4 OF 4) A0 A B C 0 1 1
P/2536/C/C/2/005 LOWER SURFACEBED LAYOUT A0 A B C 0 1 2
P/2536/C/C/2/006 ROOF LAYOUT: NORTHERN PART (SHEET 1 OF 4) A0 A B C 0 1 2 2
P/2536/C/C/2/007 ROOF LAYOUT: WASTERN PART (SHEET 2 OF 4) A0 A B C 0 1 1
P/2536/C/C/2/008 ROOF LAYOUT: SOUTHERN PART (SHEET 3 OF 4) A0 A B C 0 1 1
P/2536/C/C/2/009 ROOF LAYOUT: EASTERN PART (SHEET 4 OF 4) A0 A B C 0 1 1
P/2536/C/C/2/010 FOOT BRIDGE LAYOUT A1 0 1 1
P/2536/C/C/3/001 BRICK FAÇADE A1 0 0
P/2536/C/C/4/001 SECTIONS A0 A B C 0 1 1

GENERAL
V16/161-01 LATERAL SUPPORT & ELEVATIONS A1 0
V16/161-02 LATERAL SUPPORT SECTIONS, DETAILS & NOTES A1 0

PLEASE CANCEL ALL PRINTS SUPERCEDED BY THIS ISSUE

Approved By: Issued By Received By:

Project Manager Signature:

Consultant Signature:
Signature:

Date: Date: Date:

PLEASE RETURN SIGNED COPY TO CONSULTANT

SHEET 1 OF 1
OvP associates
landscape architects + architects + environmental planners
141 Hatfield Street, Gardens, Cape Town 8001 tel: +27 21 462 1262 fax: +27 21 461 6162 e-mail: [email protected]

Project: GOLDEN GATE DINOSAUR INTERPRETATION CENTRE Page 1 of 1 2016/10/20

Discipline: Landscape Architecture
DRAWING REGISTER
Drawing # Description Rev Scale Status
100 SERIES MASTER PLAN
434-GG-OvP-001 LANDSCAPE MASTERPLAN 10 Information
100 SERIES PLANS

200 SERIES SECTIONS

434-GG-OvP-201 TYPICAL SECTIONS - PARKING AREAS 0 Information
434-GG-OvP-202 TYPICAL SECTIONS - ACCESS RAMP 0 Information
434-GG-OvP-203 TYPICAL SECTIONS - EXHIBITION AREA 0 Information
434-GG-OvP-204 TYPICAL SECTIONS - FIND SITE 0 Information
300 SERIES ELEVATIONS

400 SERIES DETAILS

434 - GG -OvP- 401 TYPICAL PAVING DETAILS 0 Information
434 - GG -OvP- 402 TYPICAL WALL DETAILS 0 Information
434 - GG -OvP- 403 HANDRAIL DETAILS 1 Information
434 - GG -OvP- 404 BOLLARD DETAILS 0 Information
434 - GG -OvP-
OvP 405 PLANTING LADDER DETAILS 0 Information
434 - GG -OvP- 406 PEDESTRIAN BRIDGE DETAILS 0 Information
434 - GG -OvP- 407 BICYCLE PARKING RACK DETAILS 0 Information
0
0
500 SERIES STREET FURNITURE

600 SERIES SIGNAGE

700 SERIES MISCELLANEOUS

800 SERIES SOFT LANDSCAPING

434 - GG -OvP- 801 SOFT LANDSCAPE PLAN 0 Information
434 - GG -OvP- 802 TYPICAL SOFT LANDSCAPE DETAILS 0 Information
434 - GG -OvP- 803 TREE PROTECTION + TOPSOIL STOCKPILING 0 Information
 HAND
CLIENT
DELIVERED
SMEC Consulting Engineers (Pty) Ltd HAND DELIVERED
230 Albertus Street POSTED
LA MONTAGNE 0184 COURIERED
Tel: (012) 481 3800 E-MAILED (PDF) X
ISSUE DATE 2016-09-30

DRAWING REGISTER / ISSUE SLIP

JOB NAME PQ 407 - Dinosaur Project Highlands National Park CLIENT SANParks
FOR INFORMATION ONLY FOR TENDER FOR CONSTRUCTION REVISION AS BUILT
SIZE SIZE SIZE REV. REV. REV. REV. REV. REV. REV. REV.
DRAWING NO DESCRIPTION QUANT SCALE
A2 A1 A0 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07
As
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION
PQ407-EE-T-SP-0001-01
indec

SITE PLAN
ated
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION As
PQ407-EE-T-AC-0001-01 LOWER GROUND FLOOR PLAN
indec

AIR CONDITIONING POWER INSTALLATION ated
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION As
PQ407-EE-T-AC-0002-01 UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN
indec

AIR CONDITIONING POWER INSTALLATION ated
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION As
PQ407-EE-T-CT-0001-01 LOWER GROUND FLOOR PLAN
indec

CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION ated
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION As
PQ407-EE-T-CT-0002-01 UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN
indec

CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION ated
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION
As
UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN
PQ407-EE-T-ELP-0002-01
indec

EARTHING AND LIGHTNING PROTECTION
ated
INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION
As
LOWER GROUND FLOOR PLAN
PQ407-EE-T-FD-0001-01
indec

FIRE DETECTION & ACCESS CONTROL
ated
INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION
As
UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN
PQ407-EE-T-FD-0002-01
indec

FIRE DETECTION & ACCESS CONTROL
ated
INSTALLATION
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION As
PQ407-EE-T-LL-0001-01 LOWER GROUND FLOOR PLAN
indec

LIGHTING INSTALLATION ated
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION As
PQ407-EE-T-LL-0002-01 UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN
indec

LIGHTING INSTALLATION ated
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION As
PQ407-EE-T-SPL-0001-01 LOWER GROUND FLOOR PLAN
indec

SMALL POWER INSTALLATION ated
ELECTRICAL RETICULATION As
PQ407-EE-T-SPL-0002-01 UPPER GROUND FLOOR PLAN
indec

SMALL POWER INSTALLATION ated
As
PQ407-EE-T-SLD-0001-01 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR MAIN DB AND KIOSK
indec

ated
As
PQ407-EE-T-SLD-0002-01 SINGLE LINE DIAGRAM FOR DB-1, DB-2 & DB-LG
indec

ated

ISSUED TO SIGNATURE DATE 2016-09-30